OM Rieter C70 v4

Universal Operating Manual
Card System C 70 V4
13.05.2016 ENG
Legal information
Maschinenfabrik Rieter AG
Klosterstrasse 20
8406 Winterthur
Switzerland
Document type: Universal Operating Manual

Product version: Card System C 70 V4
Target group: ● Plant managers
● Textile laboratory assistant
● Plant engineers
● Plant electricians
● Operating personnel
● Master technician
● Maintenance personnel
Language: ENG ‒ English
Original language: ENG
Material no.: 10997982
Publication status: 13.05.2016 / 17:00:11
Language version: Original Operating Manual
Tel.: Customer service: +41 52 208 71 71
Email: Customer service: service_sys@rieter.com
Internet: Rieter Management Ltd.: http://www.rieter.com
The copyright to this system manual and all accompanying documents, which are entrusted to the care of
the recipient, remains at all times with our company. These documents may not be copied, shared with third
parties or made publicly available without our written permission.
Part 1
General
Card System
C 70 V4
Universal Operating
Manual
Part 2
Operation
Part 3
Production
Part 4
Maintenance
Part 5
Additional documents
13.05.2016 ENG 10997982
Card System C 70 V4
General Part 1
13.05.2016 ENG
Legal information
Klosterstrasse 20
8406 Winterthur
Switzerland

● Plant engineers
Number of pages 58
Regarding the documentation
Card System Safety

C 70 V4
Universal Operating
Manual Product description
Part 1
General Technical data
Start-up
Decommissioning
Instruction of personnel
Tool directory
13.05.2016 ENG 10997982

Contents
Contents
1 Regarding the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 1
1.1 Organisation of the system manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 1
1.2 Presentation convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 1
1.2.1 Meaning of the symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 1
1.3 Identification of the operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2
2 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 3
2.1 Qualification of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 3
2.2 Availability of the system manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 3
2.3 Explanation of the warning notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 3
2.4 Technical status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 4
2.5 Occupational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 4
2.5.1 Safe work environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 4
2.5.1.1 Danger of slipping and stumbling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 4
2.5.2 Safe work with the main switch switched off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 4
2.5.3 Tasks with the main switch switched on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/5
2.5.4 Personal protective equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 6
2.5.4.1 Hearing protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/6
2.5.4.2 Safety shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 6
2.5.4.3 Cut-resistant gloves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/6
2.5.4.4 Chemical-resistant gloves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 6
2.5.4.5 Heat-resistant gloves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 6
2.5.4.6 Protective goggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 6
2.5.4.7 Work clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 7
2.5.5 Behaviour in an emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 7
2.6 Safety labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 8
2.7 Danger zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 9
2.7.1 Safety regulations for cards with start/stop remote control . . . . . . . . . 1 / 9
2.7.2 Behaviour on the delivery unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 10
2.7.3 Behaviour on the delivery unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 11
2.8 Safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 11
2.8.1 Door safeguard – card chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 11
2.8.2 Door safeguard – cylinder drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 12
2.8.3 Screwed-on covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 12
2.8.4 Operational controls with safety function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 14
2.8.4.1 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 14
2.8.4.2 Coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 15
2.8.5 Safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 15
1/I Card System C 70 V4

Contents
3 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 17
3.1 Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 17
3.1.1 Raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 17
3.1.2 Misuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 17
3.2 Designation of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 17
3.2.1 Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 17
3.3 Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 19
3.15 Components of the card system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 31
3.15.1 Drafting system in the coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 32
3.16 Function description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 33
3.17 Function description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 34
3.17.1 Drafting system in the coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 35
3.17.2 Drafting system cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 35
3.17.3 Drafting system load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 36
3.17.4 IGS-Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 37
3.17.4.1 Automatic sharpening of the cylinder clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 37
3.17.4.2 Mode of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 37
3.17.5 IGS-Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 39
3.17.5.1 Automatic sharpening of the card flat clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 39
4 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 40
4.1 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 40
4.1.1 Feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 40
4.1.2 Delivery unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 40
4.1.3 Implementation range of the sliver Autoleveller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 41
4.1.4 Quality data on the operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 41
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / II
Contents
4.2 Machine requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 41

4.2.1 Carding room conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 41
4.2.2 Compressed air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 41
4.2.2.1 Quality standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 42
4.2.2.2 compressed air supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 42
4.2.3 Exhaust air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 43
4.2.3.1 Air ratios for waste removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 43
4.2.3.2 Exhaust air for card chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 44
4.2.4 Electrical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 44
4.2.5 Floor structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 45
4.3 Dimensions, weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 45
4.3.1 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 45
4.3.2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 46
4.3.2.1 Footprint, determination of correct orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 46
4.3.2.2 Side view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 47
4.4 Declaration of noise emission in accordance with ISO 4871 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 47
4.4.1 Sound power level, A-weighted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 47
4.4.2 ISO 9902 measurement standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 48
5 Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 49
5.1 Initial commissioning after installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 49
5.2 Start-up with material after assortment change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 49
5.3 Start-up without material after maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 49
5.4 Recommissioning after temporary decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 49
6 Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 50
6.1 Temporary decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 50
6.2 Final decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 50
7 Instruction of personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 51
7.1 When does instruction of personnel take place? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 51
7.2 How does instruction of personnel take place? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 51
7.3 Safety and operation, for all target groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 51
7.4 Set up the machine for a specific application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 51
7.5 Starting up the machine with material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 52
7.6 Executing maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 52
8 Tool directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 53
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 58
1 / III Card System C 70 V4

Introduction
Introduction
The purpose of the information in this manual is to allow fault-free and correct operation of the
equipment and to ensure the safety of personnel operating and servicing it.
The manual contains important information on operating the machine safely, appropriately and eco-
nomically. Compliance with these instructions will help to avoid hazards, reduce repair costs and
downtimes, and increase the reliability and service life of the machine.
This manual must be given to persons who are assigned to operate and maintain the ma-
chine.
If the operating manual is not accessible to these persons at all times, this operating manual
cannot fulfil its purpose.
The manual must be read and followed by all persons assigned to work at the machine.
The operating manual corresponds to the technical design of the machine at the time of print. Ri-
eter reserves the right to make changes.
Enquiries concerning service information should be directed to the service centre responsible for
your region.
The manual is to be supplemented with information on existing national regulations concerning
accident prevention and environmental protection.
13.05.2016 ENG I
Introduction
II Card System C 70 V4
Organisation of the system manual
1 Regarding the documentation

1.1 Organisation of the system manual
The system manual consists of five parts.
The five parts are:

1. General
Safety, product description, staff training
2. Operation
Is to be used as a training document. Staff must acquire knowledge of the contents.
3. Production
Operation and use of the machine.
■ Setup, material-dependent settings
■ Operation with material
■ Malfunction and error correction
4. Servicing
■ Maintenance, preventive upkeep and maintenance of fittings
■ Corrective maintenance, repairs
■ Operation without material
5. Additional documents
Documents from suppliers, etc., to which reference is made in this system manual, can be filed
here.
1.2 Presentation convention
1.2.1 Meaning of the symbols
The following list describes the function of the symbols used in the document.
Hazard signs: Warnings are highlighted with this symbol.
Cross-reference: Further information on the topic can be found on the page specified.
Instruction: This is to be carried out as described.
Reaction: Describes the expected reaction of the system.
Unexpected reaction: Subsequent approach
Condition: Is satisfied
Lubricant description: Type and amount
Tool: Description of required work aid
13.05.2016 ENG 1/1

Regarding the documentation Universal Operating Manual
General
Target group: Indicates the group of people for whom the following information has been composed.
Tip: This makes it easier.
Note: It must be observed.
1.3 Identification of the operating manual
This operating manual can be uniquely identified via the material number and the editorial version.
These identification characteristics are specified in the legal notice.
1/2 Card System C 70 V4

Qualification of personnel
2 Safety
2.1 Qualification of personnel
Unqualified personnel cannot recognise risks and are therefore exposed to higher risks.
▶ Only technically qualified personnel must be assigned to perform tasks at the machine (de-
scribed in this operating manual).
▶ The owner must ensure that personnel comply with the locally valid directives and regulations
for safe and hazard-conscious work.
▶ The owner must specify and announce the responsibility for activities. Only give keys and pass-
words to assigned personnel.
2.2 Availability of the system manual
The operator must ensure that personnel have read and understood the system manual.
The operator must issue personnel assigned to the operation and maintenance of the machine with
copies of the system manual.
Personnel can only work safely and effectively if the system manual is accessible to them at all
times.
2.3 Explanation of the warning notices
Warning notices in this operating manual warn of possible, immediate dangers involved with hand-
ling the product.
● If a warning notice is at the beginning of a work instruction, the danger exists during the entire
task until the last instruction is concluded.
● If a warning notice immediately precedes an instruction, the danger exists until the instruction is
concluded.
DANGER
Death or severe injury Failure to comply with the instructions can result in death or severe
injury.
▶ Measures to protect against the hazard.
WARNING
Injury Failure to comply with the instructions can result in severe injuries.
CAUTION
Injury Failure to comply with the instructions can result in injury.
13.05.2016 ENG 1/3

Safety Universal Operating Manual
General
Caution
Material damage Failure to comply with the instructions can result in material damage.
▶ Protective measures against material damage.
2.4 Technical status
If the machine is operated while in a defective state, safety, proper functioning and availability will
be compromised.
▶ Operate the machine only while it is in a technically fault-free state.
▶ Comply with the maintenance schedule.
▶ Use only original spare parts (specified in the spare parts catalogue).
▶ If the operating behaviour of the machine changes, check the machine for faults.
▶ Rectify faults immediately.
▶ Do not make unauthorised modifications or changes to the machine.
2.5 Occupational safety
2.5.1 Safe work environment
2.5.1.1 Danger of slipping and stumbling
Slippery surfaces and tripping hazards can lead to serious accidents.

▶ Keep walkways, handles, steps, platforms and ladders, free of grease, oil and other contamina-
tion.
▶ Do not use the machine as a climbing aid or as a means of support. Only use the provided
steps.
▶ Wear shoes with non-slip soles.
2.5.2 Safe work with the main switch switched off
If the machine starts up unexpectedly, persons working at the machine can be seriously injured as
a result.
Consequently, before starting work, always:
▶ Switch off the machine with the STOP button and wait until all machine parts are at a
standstill.
▶ Place the main switch on "0" and lock it. Remove the key and keep it on your person.
The following tasks must only be executed when the machine is standing still and is safeguarded.
▶ All tasks in the chapter "Set-up" (☞ Part 3, Page31).
▶ All tasks in the chapter "Cleaning tasks" (☞ Part 4, Page11).
▶ All tasks in the chapter "Lubricating tasks" (☞ Part 4, Page30).
▶ All tasks in the chapter "Maintenance" (☞ Part 4, Page122).

Occupational safety
Even with the main switch switched off, parts of the machine can still be in motion.
This danger exists in the following situations:
● The main switch has been switched off before the machine has come to a standstill.
The energy stored in the flywheel mass continues to drive the machine.
● Parts of the machine are being moved by hand.
● Parts of the machine are being driven by external energy. An air flow for example.
DANGER
Injury due to moving machine parts, although the drive has stopped.
▶ Do not reach into the area around moving machine parts.
▶ Wait until the machine has come to a standstill.
2.5.3 Tasks with the main switch switched on
In some cases the following tasks must be executed with the main switch switched on because
individual machine parts must be operation.
Special caution is required for these tasks.
● Clothing maintenance
● Start-up without material
● Start-up with material
● Troubleshooting
WARNING
Injury due to moving machine parts.
▶ Special caution is required for tasks with the main switch switched on. Be aware of the
operating status at all times.
The machine is in operation, machine parts are in motion.
The machine is ready for operation, machine parts are at a standstill, however they can start up at any
time.
The machine is indeed switched off, however individual parts are still in motion due to momentum.
The machine is switched off via the main switch and safeguarded, and all machine parts are at a stand-
still.
13.05.2016 ENG 1/5

General
2.5.4 Personal protective equipment
2.5.4.1 Hearing protection
During operation, high levels of airborne noise are emitted at the machine, which can result in hear-
ing damage.
▶ Use ear protection in accordance with EN 352.
2.5.4.2 Safety shoes
At the machine, there is danger of foot injury due to falling objects.
▶ Wear safety shoes in accordance with EN ISO 20345 (category S3).
2.5.4.3 Cut-resistant gloves
There is a risk of injury to the hands when handling sharp edged objects.
▶ Wear cut-resistant gloves with flexible, puncture-proof latex coating in accordance with
EN 388:2003.
2.5.4.4 Chemical-resistant gloves
When handling substances (e.g.: Oils or coolant) hand injuries can occur.
▶ Wear chemical-resistant nitrile gloves in accordance with EN 374.
2.5.4.5 Heat-resistant gloves
Surfaces on the machine can become hot.
▶ Wear heat-resistant gloves in accordance with EN ISO 407.
2.5.4.6 Protective goggles
Particles flying about can cause irreparable eye injury.

For example: Eye injuries can occur when using compressed air for cleaning tasks, or when per-
forming grinding tasks.
▶ Wear protective goggles in accordance with EN ISO 166.

Occupational safety
2.5.4.7 Work clothing
Appropriate work clothing minimises the risk of accident.
● Do not wear loose clothing, such as scarves, ties, clothing with wide open sleeves, etc.
● Cover hair if it is long. Wear a cap or a hairnet at all times.
● Do not wear rings or wristwatches.
2.5.5 Behaviour in an emergency
If an accident has occurred

▶ Activate an emergency stop button.
Trigger alarm, obtain help

Secure accident site
Provide first aid
13.05.2016 ENG 1/7

General
2.6 Safety labels
2
3
1
4
+
0920 - 8086 10 min <60V
CHWIA_00003513_001_03
1 Warning sign – danger of accident

On the cover over the doffer area
Hazard point – delivery
Behaviour on the delivery unit (☞ Part 1, Page11)
Behaviour on the delivery unit (☞ Part 1, Page10)
Safety regulations for cards with start/stop remote control (☞ Part 1, Page9)
2 Prohibition sign - no admittance
Cover over card flats
3 Waning sign – secure the main switch
On the carding shaft wall
On the front and rear covers of the opening roller
On the cover of the cylinder, behind the electrical system cabinet
4 Warning sign - capacitor
On the frequency converters in the control cabinet
On the frequency converters in the card chute
5 Warning sign - electrical voltage
On the door of the control cabinet
On the distributor box in the card shaft
In the area of the power supply on the inside of the card chute
Safety labels indicate danger zones.

If safety labels cannot be perceived, risks will not be recognised. This will put personnel at risk.
▶ Replace safety labels that are not discernible.

▶ Do not remove or cover safety labels.

Danger zones
2.7 Danger zones
2.7.1 Safety regulations for cards with start/stop remote control
Option: Remote controlled Start/Stop
With machines without the option ‘Remote-controlled Start/Stop’, the production of the web cards
is started at the respective machine. As a result, the operator is protected by the safety devices on
the machine.
With machines with the option ‘Remote-controlled Start/Stop’, the production can be started from
a remote point. This results in a safety-relevant situation for the operator at the machine. Therefore,
all maintenance and cleaning work on the machines may only be carried out with the main switch
turned off and secured with a lock.
CHWIA_00004162_001_01
DANGER
Injury If the main switch is set to the “on” position, the machine can be started up.
13.05.2016 ENG 1/9

General
2.7.2 Behaviour on the delivery unit
Option: Coiler
2
1
2 2 2 2
CHWIA_00002139_001_02
Danger of injury due to fingers being drawn in when the cross apron delivery unit is flipped down
(1).
Do not reach into the running rollers (2).
Do not reach into the running disk rollers (3).
1 / 10 Card System C 70 V4
Safety devices
2.7.3 Behaviour on the delivery unit
Option: Non-woven tape
2 2 2 2
CHWIA_00002139_002_02
Danger of injury due to fingers being drawn onto the rollers(2).

Do not reach into the running rollers (2).
2.8 Safety devices
If protective devices are not effective, personnel are in danger.

Prior to operating the machine, ensure that all protective devices are functioning effectively.
2.8.1 Door safeguard – card chute
The door (1) is monitored by a safety limit switch.

The machine can only be operated when the
door (1) is closed.
CHWIA_00001239_001_02
▶ Do not operate the machine without functioning safety switches.
▶ Replace a defective safety switch, never bypass it.
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 11
General
2.8.2 Door safeguard – cylinder drive
1 2
7
3
4
5
CHWIA_00003512_001_02
The safety switch (1) locks the doors (4) and (5).
The safety switch (1) only releases the doors (4) and (5), when the cylinder is at a standstill.
The machine can only start when doors (4) and (5) are locked.
The door (3) is secured through the mechanical locking mechanism (7). This can only be unlocked
when the doors (4) and (5) are opened.
▶ Test the function of the door safeguard on a regular basis. (☞ Part 4, Page212)
▶ Do not operate the machine without functioning safety switches.
▶ Replace a defective safety switch, never bypass it.
2.8.3 Screwed-on covers
The covers cited are safety devices and thus are firmly screwed on.
Screwed-on covers may only be removed when the machine is at a complete standstill and the
main switch has been turned off and safeguarded with a padlock.
Do not remove the padlock on the main switch until all the safety devices have been re-installed.
Safety devices
Screwed-on covers
1 13 1
14
2 2
15
3 18 16
4
17
5
18
16 6 7 8 9 10 11 6 4 12
CHWIA_00003519_001_01
1 Cover – drive of the opening roller and 9 Cover – clearer roller drive
feed roller 10 Cover – access to doffer roller
2 Cover – drive disks of the opening roller 11 Cover – access to doffer area
and feed roller 12 Hood – card flat cleaning
3 Cover – drive of the drafting system 13 Cover – opening roller, rear of the card
rollers chute
4 Covers – doffer group 14 Cover – card flats cleaning
5 Side cover – licker-in group 15 Card chute wall
6 Covers – interior, cylinder 16 Covers on card flat unit
7 Cover – doffers 17 Cover – licker-in area
8 Cover – disk roller drive 18 Red covers on card flat deflectors
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 13
General
2.8.4 Operational controls with safety function
2.8.4.1 Card
2 1
CHWIA_00003492_002_01
1 Emergency stop button 1 Rotary switch – door safety device on

Triggering an emergency shut-down drive side (Option: Web production)
(☞ Part 2, Page22) Opening secured doors on the
Unlock emergency stop button right-hand side of the machine
(☞ Part 2, Page22) (☞ Part 2, Page29)
1 Operating unit (☞ Part 2, Page9)
2 Main valve of compressed air supply

Cut off the compressed air
supply and secure with padlock
(☞ Part 2, Page26)
Switch on the compressed air supply
3 Main switch
Main switch, function description
Switching on the main switch
4 Key switch - grind card flats 4 Key switch – grind doffer

Activating the card flat for grinding (Option: Prepared for compacting
(☞ Part 4, Page73) roller)
Switch to operating status – « Grind
doffer » (☞ Part 4, Page68)
Safety devices
2.8.4.2 Coiler
Option: Coiler SB
1 Emergency stop button

2 Key switch on SB module
2
Operating the coiler in test mode 0
I
CHWIA_00002902_001_01
2.8.5 Safety circuit
The safety circuit consists of sensors, control elements and actuators.

The safety circuit serves to protect people, environment and equipment.
The elements of the safety circuit are designated as such in the electrical system documentation.
The following elements are part of the safety circuit

● EMERGENCY STOP buttons
● Monitoring of the machine casing (safety limit switches on doors, hoods, etc.)
Locking mechanism of the machine casing (safety limit switches on doors, hoods, etc.)
● Safety relays
● Frequency converters with integrated functional safety
● Controllers with integrated functional safety
Frequency converters with integrated functional safety

Overview of possible safety functions
STO Safe Torque Off Torque safely switched off
SOS Safe Operating Stop Safer operating stop
SBC Safe Brake Control Safe brake activation
SS1 Safe Stop 1 Safe stop 1
SS2 Safe Stop 2 Safe stop 2
SSM Safe Speed Monitor Safe speed monitoring
SLS Safely-Limited Speed Safe limited speed
SDI Safe Direction Safe movement direction
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 15
General
Safe Torque Off (STO) in accordance with EN 60204-1

The STO function ensures that torque-generating
energy can no longer act on a motor. This pre-
vents an unexpected start-up of the motor. The
controller of the drive monitors this condition.
CHWIA_00004003_001_01
Safety instructions for maintenance

Drives with integrated functional safety have a limited service life.
Never open elements in the safety circuit. Do not make any changes.
Always replace defective safety elements with complete work units only! Assign trained specialists
to do this.
Safety elements must only be repaired by the manufacturer or by a certified organisation (RIETER
Repair Station).
The necessary measures are described in the chapter "Maintenance" in the operating manual. To
ensure the safety functions, these measures must always be implemented.
After replacing a safety element:

1. Execute the function test of the safety circuit.
2. Log the replacement and the function test in the electrical documentation of the respective ma-
chine in the protocol (PROTOCOL SAFETY-CIRCUIT-LOOP).
▶ Execute function test of the safety relay. (☞ Part 4, Page209)
Exclusion of liability
Unauthorised opening of and improper interventions on safety elements or devices with safety
functions, in deviation from the information in the operating manual (including, for example, swap-
ping out printed circuit boards (PCBs) between converters, removal of such boards, etc.) can result
in bodily injury or material damage.
Unauthorised opening of and improper interventions on safety elements or devices result in loss of
all warranty claims, negate the liability for ensuing consequences and result in loss of any claims
for compensation of damage.
Costs incurred due to unauthorised opening or for replacement of the device are the customer's
responsibility in full scope.
Note
Interventions on a safety-relevant device, that is not described in this operating manual, and
that are executed by an unauthorised person, have as consequence that the safety functions
of the device, and thus of the machine, no longer comply with the statutory regulations.
Unauthorised opening, changing or repair is prohibited and can be verified. The suppliers
know all data of the safety elements, such as serial numbers of the converters and the asso-
ciated serial numbers of the integrated elements.
Intended use
3 Product description
3.1 Intended use
The machine is designed for the manufacturing of carded web or sliver.

▶ The machine must only be used as intended.
▶ Operate the machine only in accordance with the instructions in this operating manual.
3.1.1 Raw materials
The machine must only be used for the processing of textile raw materials.
Raw materials intended for use

Cotton All sources
Man-made fibres Natural and synthetic polymers
Maximum staple length 65 mm
3.1.2 Misuse
Non-textile raw materials must not be processed.
3.2 Designation of the machine
3.2.1 Nameplate
Type plates
1 Machine type
2 Serial number Machinenfabrik Rieter
3 Year of manufacture
CH-8406 Winterthur
4 Supply pressure of the compressed air Type 1

supply A Serial No. 2
5 Power consumption Year 3
6 Mains frequency
7 Electrical voltage
xxx V xx Hz xx A x bar 4
5
6
7
Machinenfabrik Rieter
CH-8406 Winterthur
Type 1
B Serial No. 2
Year 3
CHWIA_00004139_001_01
▶ When ordering spare parts, transfer the information stated on the rating plate to the order
form.
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 17
Product description Universal Operating Manual
General
General arrangement, CE nameplate

Option: Coiler
The rating plate is on the door of the control cab-

inet.
A
B
CHWIA_00004138_001_01
General arrangement, CE nameplate

Option: Web production
The rating plate is on the door of the control cab-

inet.
CHWIA_00004138_002_01
Declaration of conformity
3.3 Declaration of conformity
Option: Coiler
CHWIA_00004401_001_01
The declaration of conformity declares that this product complies with the standards cited.
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 19
General
Option: Coiler
CHWIA_00004401_002_01
Option: Coiler
CHWIA_00004401_003_01
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 21
General
Option: Coiler
CHWIA_00004401_004_01
Option: Coiler CBA
CHWIA_00004401_005_01
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 23
General
Option: Coiler CBA
CHWIA_00004401_006_01
Option: Coiler CBA
CHWIA_00004401_007_01
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 25
General
CHWIA_00004401_008_01
CHWIA_00004401_009_01
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 27
General
CHWIA_00004401_010_01
CHWIA_00004401_011_01
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 29
General
CHWIA_00004401_012_01
Components of the card system
3.15 Components of the card system
7 8 9 10
6
3 4
11
5 12 18
16 / 17 15 14 13
CHWIA_00003491_001_01
1 Separating head 10 Integrated grinding device for card flats

2 Exhaust pipe (Option: IGS-Top)
3 Opening unit 11 Post-carding zone with carding ele-
4 Feed trough in card chute ments and mote knives
5 Material opening and feed measure- 12 Disc rollers with sliver scanning for card
ment for the Autoleveller autolevelling
6 Card flats cleaning unit and waste suc- 13 Cross apron
tion unit 14 Doffing device
7 Pre-carding zone with carding elements 15 Doffer
and mote knives 16 Hood profile in card lower section
8 Cylinder 17 Integrated grinding device for the cylin-
9 Card flats der clothing (Option: IGS-Classic)
Quantity 99 18 Coiler (Option: Coiler)
The black points mark suction points of
the central suction unit
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 31
General
3.15.1 Drafting system in the coiler
Option: Coiler SB
Drafting system components

1 Top back roller
1
2 Top middle roller
3 Top front roller 2
4 Back cylinder 8
5 Middle cylinder
6 Front cylinder 4 3
8 Pressure bar
5
6 SB-M 2 351d
CHWIA_00004011_001_01
The drafting system is a “3-over-3” drafting system.

The drafting system is suitable for a draft not exceeding 5.13 and the processing of fibres ranging
from short cotton noils to man-made fibres with an 80 mm staple length.
Function description
3.16 Function description
2 5
3 4
7
9 8 6
CHWIA_00003501_001_01
The card system opens the supplied material, parallelises the material fibres, separates out foreign
materials, and forms the produced web into a sliver.
● Via the AEROfeed system (material supply) the tufts get into the separating head (1).
● The tufts are separated in the opening unit (2) and are then tossed into the lower section of the
card chute.
● From the lower section of the card chute, the material is transported into the material opening
unit (3) of the card.
● Doffers fitted with clothing or needles guide the tufts over mote knives and carding elements for
cleaning and preliminary opening. The licker-in transfers the material to the cylinder. Depend-
ing on the machine version, the material is either processed by one licker-in or by three.
● The cylinder (4) is fitted with cylinder clothing with extremely fine teeth. The clothings of the
card flats(5) have fine hooks. The cylinder (4) and the card flat (5) run in opposite directions.
The pre-opened tufts are further separated and cleaned between the teeth of the cylinder and
the hooks of the card flats.
● The doffer (9) takes over the material from the cylinder.
● At the sliver card, the doffing device (8) takes over the web and transports it to cross apron (7),
where it is combined.
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 33
General
3.17 Function description
Option: Coiler
2 5
3 4
7
9 8 6
CHWIA_00003501_001_01
The card system opens the supplied material, parallelises the material fibres, separates out foreign
materials, and forms the produced web into a sliver.
● Via the AEROfeed system (material supply) the tufts get into the separating head (1).
● The tufts are separated in the opening unit (2) and are then tossed into the lower section of the
card chute.
● From the lower section of the card chute, the material is transported into the material opening
unit (3) of the card.
● Doffers fitted with clothing or needles guide the tufts over mote knives and carding elements for
cleaning and preliminary opening. The licker-in transfers the material to the cylinder. Depend-
ing on the machine version, the material is either processed by one licker-in or by three.
● The cylinder (4) is fitted with cylinder clothing with extremely fine teeth. The clothings of the
card flats(5) have fine hooks. The cylinder (4) and the card flat (5) run in opposite directions.
The pre-opened tufts are further separated and cleaned between the teeth of the cylinder and
the hooks of the card flats.
● The doffer (9) takes over the material from the cylinder. The doffer device (8) transports the
web to the cross apron (7), where it is combined.
● The disk rollers (6) pull the combined web through a sliver funnel.
● Downstream from the disk rollers (6) the final, formed fibre sliver is placed in cans via the
coiler.
3.17.1 Drafting system in the coiler
Option: Coiler SB
Draft zones
V Total draft
1
VV Break draft
HV Main draft
2
8
4
3
5
VV
HV
V
6
SB-M 2 352b
CHWIA_00004012_001_01
A defined force (320 N) presses the top rollers (1) (2) (3) mechanically onto the drafting system
cylinders (4) (5) (6). The fibres are consequently clamped between the respective pair of rollers.
Since the rotational speed increases in the direction of the material flow, from roller pair to roller
pair, the fibre masses are pulled apart, i.e. the fibres are drafted.
3.17.2 Drafting system cylinders
Option: Coiler SB
The special grooving of the drafting system cylin-

5 4
ders brings about the following effects:
● Low-noise operation
● Stabilisation of the drafting system
● Protection of the top roller cots
The feed cylinder (4) and the middle cylinder (5) 8 6

have diameters of 30 mm and groove lengths of
170 mm.
The front cylinder (6) has a diameter of 40 mm
and a groove length of 190 mm.
SB-M 2 361
The back cylinder ( 4) and middle cylinder (5) CHWIA_00004013_001_01
are driven by the controlled front speed of the

differential.
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 35
General
The main drive keeps the speed of the front cylin-

5 4
der (6) constant and guarantees that the produc-
tion can be calculated precisely.
The pressure rod (8) improves the guidance of
short fibres into the main draft zone.
8 6
SB-M 2 361
CHWIA_00004013_001_01
3.17.3 Drafting system load
Option: Coiler SB
Springs on the right-hand and left-hand weight-

ing elements (21) put the drafting system under 20
mechanical load. 15
15
The weighting arm (20) on the drafting system is
locked (15) pneumatically with catches.
21
CHWIA_00002903_001_01
To transport and draw the fibre material in the 1

drafting system, the drafting system must be sub-
jected to load. 2
In this process, the top rollers (1...3) are pressed
onto the drafting system cylinders (4...6) on each 3
4
side with 320 N.
On the drafting system top roller, the value of the 5
load is 160 N on each side.
These fixed values cannot be changed.
6 SB-L 381
CHWIA_00002752_001_01
3.17.4 IGS-Classic
Option: IGS-Classic
3.17.4.1 Automatic sharpening of the cylinder clothing
Correct grinding of the clothings, the «sharpening», is the basis for good carding.
The cylinder grinding device IGS-Classic (IGS = Integrated Grinding System) is used for periodic
sharpening of the tooth tips during the entire service life of the cylinder clothing.
IGS calculates the grinding schedule with optimal distribution of the defined grinding cycles (270
or 400 grinding cycles). At the beginning of the grinding schedule, the time between the cycles is
longer than it is at the end.
1
2
3 4
5 CHWIA_00001663_001_01
The aluminium profile (1) is the bearing component. The linear-guided grinding stone runs inside it
(4); the grinding stone is stabilised through spring force (5).
In park position (right-hand side of the machine) the flat belt (3) is pressed upward through clamp
profiles (2), so that neither dust nor fibre parts can get into the interior of the profile.
Replace the grinding stone (4), when the cylinder clothing is replaced.
3.17.4.2 Mode of operation
4 3 6 7 4 8
10 11 10 9 5
CHWIA_00001664_001_01
● The grinding stone (4) is located on the right-hand side of the machine (park position).
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 37
General
4 3 6 7 4 8
10 11 10 9 5
CHWIA_00001664_001_01
● At the beginning of the grinding cycle the clamp profiles are widened with compressed air so
that the flat belt becomes (3) free.
● The grinding stone (4) moves to the left-hand side of the machine in lowered position.
● On the left-hand side of the machine, the magnetic limit switch (10) activates the electromagnet
(9), which releases the (4) grinding stone.
● The springs (5) press the grinding stone (4) with very little force against the cylinder clothing
(6). At the same time, the direction of rotation of the motor (8) is changed.
● En route to the right-hand side of the machine, the grinding stone processes the cylinder cloth-
ing. At the end of the grinding cycle, the grinding stone is routed through the gate (11) under
the cylinder segment (7).
● If the grinding stone does not reach its original position within 20 seconds of starting, the cycle
will be interrupted. The grinding stone is lowered and moves back to the park position automat-
ically. A warning appears on the text display.
If the fault occurs at the next cycle, the cylinder grinding device, IGS-Classic, will be shut down.
A fault message appears on the text display.
3.17.5 IGS-Top
Option: IGS-Top
3.17.5.1 Automatic sharpening of the card flat clothing
1 2
3
4
5
6
7 CHWIA_00001929_001_01
So that the needles of the card flat clothings (8) are always sharp, the grinding brush (1) processes
the needles in calculated grinding cycles.
Thus a more uniform carding is achieved over the entire service life of the card flats (8).
● The controller starts the grinding cycle and the motor of the (2) grinding brush (1).
● Pneumatic cylinders push the spring-loaded shoes (6) upward. This lifts the card flats (8). The
slider for dust extraction opens at the same time.
● The bristles (7) of the grinding roller sharpen the needles of the card flats (8). The needles get
a sharp working edge.
● Each sharpened card flat is registered by the controller.
To do this a metal platelet (5) is mounted on a card flat clip (4) that is detected by the proximity
switch (3).
The following card flats are counted.
● The grinding brush (1) remains active only during one handling of the card flats (8).
Once the cycle is finished, the pneumatic cylinders are off-loaded, the suction unit is closed
and the motor of the grinding brush (2) is stopped.
● If there is a power outage during the grinding cycle, the controller will register the last
processed card flat.
After the power outage the grinding cycle will be continued at the right place. This ensures that
all card flats are sharpened equally often.
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 39
Technical data Universal Operating Manual
General
4 Technical data
4.1 Performance characteristics
4.1.1 Feed unit
Raw materials intended for use

Cotton All sources
Man-made fibres Natural and synthetic polymers
Maximum staple length 65 mm
Fibre length
Maximum fibre length 65.0 mm
Feeder weight
Feeder weight 600 – 900 g/m
4.1.2 Delivery unit
Possible sliver weights
Option: Coiler
Option: Coiler SB 3.0 – 7.0 ktex
Option: Coiler CBA

Disk roller, width: 9 mm 4.0 – 12.0 ktex
Shipping weight
Option: Non-woven fabric 5.7 – 40.0 g/m²
Option: Non-woven tape 8 – 56 g/m
Drafts in the card

Total draft range 25 – 225
Maximum production (depending on the raw material)

Option: Cylinder drive, capacity H
C 70 H ≥160 kg/h
Option: Cylinder drive, capacity M
C 70 M 120 – 160 kg/h
Option: Cylinder drive, capacity L
C 70 L ≤120.0 kg/h
Machine requirement
4.1.3 Implementation range of the sliver Autoleveller
● Cotton of any origin

● Chemical fibres and blends up to 65 mm fibre length.
4.1.4 Quality data on the operating unit
Automatic recording of the quality data

● Calculation of sliver weight deviation (A%)
● Calculation of CV% values
● Calculations for the spectrogram
● Calculations of the number of slubs
Sliver weight variation coefficient CV

Display and monitoring of the cutting length and reference length and the switch-off limits.
The cutting length and the reference length are determined by the user.
4.2 Machine requirement
4.2.1 Carding room conditions
Parameters Cotton Man-made fibres

Room temperature 24 – 28 ℃ 23 – 27 ℃
Relative humidity 48 – 54 % 48 – 56 %
Absolute humidity per kg of air 9 – 12 g 9 – 12 g
4.2.2 Compressed air
Air pressure of the supply line 7.0 – 8.0 bar
Compressed air consumption

Card 0.70 m³/h
Automatic disposal – doffer area 1.10 m³/h
Separate waste disposal system for licker-in 0.01 m³/h
Option: Coiler RSB
OR Coiler SB
Coiler 0.1 – 0.3 m³/h
Option: Coiler CBA
Coiler 0.1 m³/s
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 41
General
4.2.2.1 Quality standard
Required is Pneurop class 3/4/5
Air humidity of compressed air

Pressure dew point −20 ℃
Contamination of the compressed air

Contamination, quantitative ≤5 mg/m³
Contamination, qualitative; permissible particle size ≤5 nm
Oil content of the compressed air

Incoming air 1.0 mg/m³
4.2.2.2 compressed air supply
2
1
CHWIA_00003232_001_01
Length of the flexible connection hose (2) ≤4 m
● Lay out the compressed air supply line as a ring line.

● Execute the ring line of gas pipe, 1...2 inches in diameter.
● Equip the feed unit with a water separator.
Machine requirement
4.2.3 Exhaust air
4.2.3.1 Air ratios for waste removal
CBA SB RSB
CHWIA_00003182_001_01
Vacuum pressure of the suction unit

Underpressure 1,000 – 1,300 Pa
Air flow rate of the suction unit

Option: Coiler SB 1.45 m³/s
OR Coiler RSB
Option: Coiler CBA 1.3 m³/s
Separate waste accumulation – licker-in
Option (Retrofittable): Separate waste accumulation – licker-in

Air flow rate 0.5 m³/s
Underpressure ≥1,300 Pa
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 43
General
4.2.3.2 Exhaust air for card chute
CBA SB RSB
CHWIA_00003183_001_01
Exhaust-air flow rate for card chute

Exhaust-air flow rate 0.60 m³/s
Vacuum pressure and measuring point for exhaust air from card chute
Vacuum pressure −150 – −50 Pa
4.2.4 Electrical data
Mains connection
If the mains voltage is not within the specified range, install an up- 3x 400 V (+/- 10%)
stream transformer.
Installed electric power

Machine-specific power ratings and fuses See the diagram provided
Dimensions, weights
4.2.5 Floor structure
1 2 CHWIA_00003372_001_01
1 Floor coverings on a soft substrate, 2 Such intermediate layers in the area of

such as sand or asphalt are not permit- the foot plates should be replaced with
ted. concrete, in order to prevent lowering of
individual assemblies.
4.3 Dimensions, weights
4.3.1 Weights
Machine, complete (without sliver deposit) 4,000 kg

Card chute 1,200 kg
Licker-in
Option: Number of licker-ins 1 570 kg
Option: Number of licker-ins 3 675 kg
Machine assembly of the card flats 720 kg

Doffer 270 kg
Delivery assembly 850 kg
Coiler
Option: Coiler RSB 1,700 – 2,000 kg
Option: Coiler SB 700 – 1,100 kg
Option: Coiler CBA 400 – 800 kg
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 45
General
4.3.2 Dimensions
4.3.2.1 Footprint, determination of correct orientation
I O
1 L
CHWIA_00004390_001_01
I Inlet of material
O Outlet of material
L Left-hand side of machine
R Right-hand side of machine
1 Electrical and pneumatic supply line from below.
Diameter 100 mm
2 Exhaust air discharged downwards
Declaration of noise emission in accordance with ISO 4871
4.3.2.2 Side view
LW 140
< 600 kg > 600 kg
LW 120 685 180
685 180
150 150
LW 600
LW 500
8
3755
5 Ø 300 mm
Ø 300 mm
347
3655 (3455)
7
2930
2046
670 2310-
75
1500 2980
CHWIA_00003518_003_01
7 Height - card chute: 3655 mm 7 Height - card chute: 3755 mm

Line production up to 600 kg Line production over 600 kg
8 Licker-in waste downward
4.4 Declaration of noise emission in accordance with ISO 4871
4.4.1 Sound power level, A-weighted
Delivery Sound power level (reference pressure 1 pW) Sound pressure level (reference pressure 20
speed µPa)
100 m/min 93+3 dB 74+3 dB
250 m/min 96 dB
+3
77+3 dB
400 m/min 98+3 dB 79+3 dB
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 47
General
4.4.2 ISO 9902 measurement standard
● Measuring distance 1 m
● Level information in the form: Lm + K
● Lm = typical mean value
● K = 3 dB safety margin
Conditions of the sound measurement

● Without material
● Cylinder speed 800 RPM
● With central suction unit
● With card chute and compressor fan 2900 rpm
Initial commissioning after installation
5 Start-up
We distinguish between the following situations:
5.1 Initial commissioning after installation
Machines manufactured by "Rieter Textile Systems" must always be assembled and com-
missioned by Rieter personnel.
However, if the installation or initial commissioning of Rieter systems is executed by a third party,
MASCHINENFABRIK RIETER AG rejects all and any form of liability.
5.2 Start-up with material after assortment change
After the mechanical settings have been made, start-up with material follows. The objective is: To
establish operational readiness.
Commissioning with material is described in Part 3.
5.3 Start-up without material after maintenance tasks
After service tasks (maintenance, repair) are concluded, start-up without material follows.
The objective is: To establish operational readiness.
Start-up without material is described in Part 4.
5.4 Recommissioning after temporary decommissioning
The measures that were taken for decommissioning must be undone.

For recommissioning, the following check list must be used.
The objective is: To establish operational readiness.
☐ Check list – commissioning (☞ Part 4, Page246)
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 49
Decommissioning Universal Operating Manual
General
6 Decommissioning
6.1 Temporary decommissioning
Measures must be taken for safeguarding, corrosion protection and storage.

Use the following check list to de-commission the machine for a specific period of time.
The objective is: Safe storage during standstill.
☐ Check list – temporary decommissioning (☞ Part 4, Page246)
6.2 Final decommissioning
Disposal of the machine or parts thereof

Comply with local statutory regulations for final decommissioning.
● Re-usability
● Recycling
● Waste disposal
The operating materials of the machine must be properly disposed of.
● Oils
● Greases
● Batteries
Precisely comply with the country-specific regulations, particularly the safety instructions for dis-
posal of the operating materials.
When does instruction of personnel take place?
7 Instruction of personnel
7.1 When does instruction of personnel take place?
● After initial commissioning of the machine

● At transfer of the machine to the owner of the system
7.2 How does instruction of personnel take place?
● The installation manager RIETER commissioned by the company, who executes the initial
commissioning of the machine, instructs owner's personnel in the operation of the machine.
● New personnel are instructed by the owner of the system in the operation of the machine prior
to first assignment on the machine.
7.3 Safety and operation, for all target groups
Personnel
Operating personnel
Maintenance personnel
Plant engineers
Plant electricians
Textile laboratory assistant
Master technician
Plant managers
1. Go through the entire Safety chapter. (☞ Part 1, Page4)

2. The safety devices and danger zones must be discussed. (☞ Part 1, Page8)
3. Emergency shut-down must be executed on each emergency stop button. (☞ Part 2, Page22)
4. Explain all display elements and operating elements. (☞ Part 2, Page2) (Option: Coiler)
5. Use the operating elements in production operation. (☞ Part 2, Page12)
6. Explain and practice operator maintenance. (☞ Part 2, Page37)
7. Execute function test of the safety relay. (☞ Part 4, Page209)
8. Explain the e-DOC "Manuals and diagnostics". (☞ Part 2, Page161)
7.4 Set up the machine for a specific application
Personnel
Plant engineers
1. Use gearing layouts and adjustment sheets. (☞ Part 3, Page2)

2. Setting up the machine, adjusting change points and technology parts. (☞ Part 3, Page31)
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 51
Instruction of personnel Universal Operating Manual
General
7.5 Starting up the machine with material
Personnel
Plant engineers
Plant electricians
Master technician
1. Use an example to execute the entire configuration. (☞ Part 3, Page71)

2. Look up and rectify technological faults.
Using the card chute as the example:
▽ Card chutes consistently run empty (☞ Part 3, Page162)
3. Look up and rectify faults.
Using the example of a fault that is not displayed
▽ Drive of the opening roller in the card chute is overheated (☞ Part 3, Page179)
4. Look up and rectify faults.
Using the example of a displayed fault according to fault code
▽ 200 FatalError(), see logbook (☞ Part 3, Page199)
7.6 Executing maintenance tasks
Personnel
Maintenance personnel
Plant electricians
Master technician
1. Explain the planning of maintenance. Go through the maintenance procedures.

(☞ Part 4, Page2)
2. Go through all cleaning tasks. (☞ Part 4, Page11)
3. Go through all lubricating tasks. (☞ Part 4, Page30)
4. Go through all repair tasks. (☞ Part 4, Page122)
5. Execute start up after maintenance or repair. (☞ Part 4, Page195)
6. Explain clothing maintenance. (☞ Part 4, Page36)
8 Tool directory
Card gauge
Properties
● For general settings and checks.
CHWIA_00003588_001_01
Load spring for card flats

Properties
● Presses the slide shoes of the card flats onto the cylinder arch.
● Ideal quantity 2 units
CHWIA_00001900_001_01
Torque spanner
CHWIA_00000142_001_01
Card flats installation aid

Properties
● Auxiliary equipment for installing the card flats.
CHWIA_00001819_001_01
Handles
Properties
● Use for removing and installing the cover profile below the feed roller of the
licker-in.
CHWIA_00001334_001_01
Grease gun
Properties
● 1 stroke = 0.333 cm³
CHWIA_00000845_002_01
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 53
Tool directory Universal Operating Manual
General
Pull-off aid
Properties
● Pull-off aid for the shaft pins of the opening roller and the feed rollers
CHWIA_00001190_001_01
Brush
CHWIA_00003524_001_01
Adjustment gauge – grinding stone, IGS-Classic
CHWIA_00001668_001_01
Plastic foil
Properties
● Protection for the surrounding parts when removing the opening roller.
CHWIA_00001196_001_01
Guide rails
Properties
● Are required for removal and installation of the licker-in group.
CHWIA_00003249_001_01
Handles
Properties
licker-in.
CHWIA_00001519_001_01
Hand scraper
CHWIA_00003163_001_01
Lifting device, rollers and licker-in(s)
CHWIA_00001500_001_01
Hydraulic pump
Properties
● Is required for removal and installation of the licker-in and doffer group.
CHWIA_00003277_001_01
Clamping hub and extension tube
CHWIA_00003030_001_01
Compensating plates for measuring device

GRP-ORDER-INFO-TEXT o
91
● Nicht Bestandteil der Lieferung.

Beschaffungsempfehlung Firma
GRAF R 415 mm
CHWIA_00003176_001_01
Compensation device
Properties
● For grinding the card flats. C 70
C 70
CHWIA_00003155_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 55
Tool directory Universal Operating Manual
General
Gauge for calibrating the distance measuring device
CHWIA_00003288_001_01
Measuring device for card flats

GRP-ORDER-INFO-TEXT
● Nicht Bestandteil der Lieferung.
Beschaffungsempfehlung Firma
GRAF
CHWIA_00003178_001_01
Installation lift
Properties
● For mounting and dismounting the feed trough, the feed roller and opening
roller in the card chute.
CHWIA_00001202_001_01
Pedestal
Properties
● For installation and removal tasks on the card chute.
CHWIA_00001213_001_01
Cleaning brush
Properties
● For cleaning the guide tube in the revolving plate of the coiler.
CHWIA_00002486_001_01
Lateral supports
Properties
● For mounting and dismounting the opening roller in the card chute.
CHWIA_00001218_001_01
Support
Properties
● The removed licker-in unit is supported, if it rests on a flat base. This will not
damage the suction tubes.
CHWIA_00001520_001_01
Support
Properties
● For mounting and dismounting the feed trough in the card chute.
CHWIA_00001220_001_01
Support – doffer unit
CHWIA_00003118_001_01
Support
Field of application
● Removing card flats
CHWIA_00003523_001_01
Transport trolley
Properties
● For transporting the licker-in and the doffer group. A work platform can be pro-
duced using the additional support structures.
CHWIA_00003349_001_01
Nippers
Properties
● Special nippers to remove the retaining clips.
CHWIA_00001828_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 1 / 57
Index
Index
R
Raw materials
Textile raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Card System C 70 V4
Operation Part 2
13.05.2016 ENG
Legal information
Klosterstrasse 20
8406 Winterthur
Switzerland

● Plant engineers
Number of pages 172

Card System Display and operating elements

C 70 V4
Universal Operating
Manual Operation in production mode
Part 2
Operation Cleaning tasks
Operating unit, general
Data screens
Electronic documentation (e-DOC)
13.05.2016 ENG 10997982

Contents
Contents
1.1 Intended purpose of part 2 "Operation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 1
1.2 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 1
1.2.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 1
1.3 Initial situation for operation handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 1
2 Display and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/2

2.1 Description of the display and operating elements of the RSB module . . . . . . . . 2 / 2
2.2 Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 2
2.2.1 Signal lamp – can change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 2
2.2.2 Signal lamp for machine states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 3
2.2.3 Main screen of the operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 4
2.2.4 Main screen 2 of the operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 5
2.2.5 Main screen of the operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 5
2.2.6 Fault display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 6
2.3 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 7
2.3.1 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/7
2.3.2 Coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 8
2.3.3 Operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 9
2.3.4 Machine buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 10
2.3.5 Machine buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 10
2.3.6 Main switch, function description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 11
3 Operation in production mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 12

3.1 Switching the system on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 12
3.1.1 Starting the UNIcontrol feed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 12
3.1.2 Stopping the UNIcontrol feed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 13
3.2 Switching on the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 13
3.2.1 Checks to be carried out before switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 13
3.2.2 Bringing the machine to the starting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 13
3.2.3 Switching on the main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 15
3.2.4 Checks after switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 15
3.2.5 Switch on the compressed air supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 16
3.2.6 Starting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 17
3.2.7 Starting production (doffer at creep speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 17
3.2.8 Starting production (doffer at high speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 18
3.2.9 Enabling the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 19

Contents
3.3 Drawing in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 20
3.3.1 Pulling the sliver into the SB module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 20
3.4 Switching off the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 22
3.4.1 Triggering an emergency shut-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 22
3.4.1.1 Unlock emergency stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 22
3.4.2 Disabling the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 23
3.4.3 Stopping the doffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 23
3.4.4 Switching off the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 24
3.4.5 Emptying card chute and card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 24
3.4.6 Emptying the line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 24
3.4.7 Stop machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 25
3.4.8 Switch off the main switch and safeguard it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 25
3.4.9 Cut off the compressed air supply and secure with padlock . . . . . . . 2 / 26
3.5 Monitoring production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 27
3.5.1 Changeover shift manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 27
3.5.2 Changing the can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 27
3.5.3 Introduce batt into the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 28
3.5.4 Reversing the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 28
3.5.5 Clear out the suction channel of the flats cleaning unit . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 29
3.5.6 Opening secured doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 29
3.5.6.1 Opening secured doors on the right-hand side of the machine . . . . . 2 / 29
3.5.6.2 Opening secured covers in the event of a power failure . . . . . . . . . 2 / 31
3.5.7 Rectifying faults in the material flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 32
3.5.7.1 After some runtime, the card sliver does not run smoothly . . . . . . . . 2 / 32
3.5.7.2 Removing clogging on the sliver funnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 33
3.5.7.3 Swivel out the calendar rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 34
3.5.7.4 Removing the top rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 34
3.5.7.5 After change, can is knocked over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 35
3.5.7.6 Card sliver wrapped around can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 35
3.5.7.7 Can is jammed in the changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 35
4 Cleaning tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 37
4.1 Cleaning tasks every 4-8 h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 37
4.1.1 Cleaning the delivery unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 37
4.1.2 Cleaning the delivery rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 37
4.1.3 Cleaning the stripping blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 38
4.1.4 Removing blockages from around the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 39
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / II
Contents
4.2 Cleaning tasks as needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 40

4.2.1 Removing material deposited in the card chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 40
4.2.2 Cleaning the web bridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 40
4.2.3 Cleaning the top rollers and the top delivery roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 41
4.2.4 Cleaning the clearer lips of the drafting-system cylinder . . . . . . . . . 2 / 43
5 Operating unit, general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 44

5.1 Procedure for changing the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 44
5.2 Procedure for setting the brightness of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 44
5.3 Clearing faults and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 44
5.4 Navigation menu system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 45
5.4.1 Displaying the main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 45
5.4.2 Structure of menus and data screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 46
5.4.3 Displaying individual data screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 46
5.4.4 Going directly from the overview screen to a data screen . . . . . . . . 2 / 47
5.4.5 Accessing any data screen via a single button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 47
5.4.6 Displaying the most-recently accessed data screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 47
5.4.7 Moving from one screen to another of the same type . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 48
5.4.8 Scrolling through lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 48
5.5 Changing values in data screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 49
5.6 Password authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 49
5.6.1 Entering passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 49
5.6.2 Procedure for cancelling password authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 50
5.6.3 Change password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 50
6 Data screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 52
6.1 List of data screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 52
6.2 Data screens – advanced operation ............................ 2 / 138
7 Electronic documentation (e-DOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 161

7.1 Finding information concerning the content the e-DOC "Manuals and
Diagnostics" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 161
7.2 Opening e-DOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 161
7.3 Specifying a language, accepting license agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 162
7.4 Select machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 162
7.5 Opening the “Settings” menu and entering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 163
7.6 Entering ordering address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 164
7.7 Entering recipient’s address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 164
7.8 Opening the e-DOC overview screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 165
7.9 Opening the spare parts catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 165
7.10 Navigating through the spare parts catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 166

Contents
7.11 Navigating through lower-level sub-assemblies in the spare parts

catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 166
7.12 Selecting spare parts for sub-assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 167
7.13 Filling out the order form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 167
7.14 Saving the shopping basket information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 168
7.15 Viewing a sample order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 169
7.16 Switching from the spare parts catalogue to the operating manual . . . . . . . . . 2 / 169
7.17 Navigating in the operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 170
7.18 Searching for handling instructions in the operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 170
7.19 Opening the operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 170
7.20 Navigating in the operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 171
7.21 Opening the troubleshooting information page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 171
7.22 Entering the fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 171
7.23 Rectifying errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 172
7.24 Filling and saving the shopping basket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 172
7.25 Closing the e-DOC program ................................. 2 / 172
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 / 173
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / IV
Contents
2/V
Intended purpose of part 2 "Operation"

1.1 Intended purpose of part 2 "Operation"
Training document for learning about operation.
1.2 Contents
1.2.1 Operation
Monitor the machine during production and keep it running. Prevent malfunctions through operator
maintenance. Rectify malfunctions in the flow of materials.
From the content

● Display and control elements
● Operation during production process
● Cleaning tasks during production process
● General information about operator interface panel
● Listing of the data screens
● Usage of the electronic documentation (e-DOC)
Target group
● Plant engineers
1.3 Initial situation for operation handling instructions
The machine must be repaired: Ready for operation

The machine must be adapted to the material: Ready for production
All doors and covers must be closed.
The emergency stop button is unlocked.
The main switch is on.
The message "Ready to start" is displayed.
13.05.2016 ENG 2/1

Display and operating elements Universal Operating Manual
Operation
2 Display and operating elements

2.1 Description of the display and operating elements of the RSB module
Option: Coiler RSB
The display and operating elements are described in the operating manual of the RSB module.
2.2 Display elements
Option: Coiler CBA
1 Signal lamp - machine status display

2 Signal lamp – can changer
3 Main screen of the operating unit (Op- 1
tion: Coiler) (☞ Part 2, Page4) 2
Main screen 2 of the operating unit (Op-
tion: Coiler) (☞ Part 2, Page5)
3
Main screen of the operating unit (Op-
tion: Web production) (☞ Part 2, Page5)
CHWIA_00003482_001_02
2.2.1 Signal lamp – can change
Option: Coiler
The signal lamp (2) indicates the need for can

change. 2
CHWIA_00002456_001_02
Status Meaning
Flashing ● Can change pending.
● Can change is being executed.

Display elements
2.2.2 Signal lamp for machine states
The signal lamp (1) indicates the following ma-

chine states.
1
CHWIA_00002565_001_02
Status Meaning
Not illuminated Conditions
✓ The switch is in the position for operation
● The machine is in production
● Test mode is active
Option: IGS-Top
● IGS-Top test: The grinding pressure is correct.

Conditions
✓ Operating status – grind card flats
● The cylinder, doffer or card flats are ground.
● The machine has no operating voltage. The ma-
chine cannot be started.
Illuminated Conditions
✓ The switch is in the position for operation
● After the system test is executed, the machine
is ready for production
● A fault has occurred.
● Comply with the text in the text display and the
main screen.
Option: IGS-Top
● IGS-Top test: The momentary grinding pressure is

high or too high
Flashing ● An empty can is not in the can changer
● The dowsing switch is not activated at can insert
● Function only with the appropriate entry in the asso-
ciated data screen
Option: IGS-Top
● IGS-Top test: The momentary grinding pressure is

low or too low
13.05.2016 ENG 2/3

Operation
2.2.3 Main screen of the operating unit
Option: Coiler
Note
One or several messages (malfunctions, warnings, events) are displayed on the display unit
in the form of text and diagrams. If there are several messages simultaneously, these can be
displayed individually.
6.2 7.2
2 3 4
1 5 6.1 7.1 8 9
10
11
12
20 73 Pa
13
14
15
19 16
18
17
CHWIA_00002221_001_02
1 Screen number 10 Sliver weight

2 Speed of opening roller 11 Production per hour
3 Speed of the card flats 12 Delivery per minute (delivery speed)
4 Cylinder speed 13 Weight deviation for card sliver.
5 Display for the selected shift 14 CV value of card sliver
6.1 Network connection OK 15 Meters remaining until can change
6.2 No network connection 16 Time remaining until can change
7.1 The secured doors are locked 17 Fault display (☞ Part 2, Page6)
7.2 The secured doors are unlocked 18 Licker-in speed
8 Maintenance warning 19 Weight of the incoming lap
9 Production value group 20 Air pressure in the shaft

Display elements
2.2.4 Main screen 2 of the operating unit
Option: Coiler
1 2 3 4
6
12
7
8
11 9
10
CHWIA_00004378_001_01
1 Screen number
2 Display of the selected shift
3 Secured doors are locked
4 Production value group
5 Pre-selectable efficiency
11.3 « Production efficiency/MTBA » (☞ Part 2, Page63)
6 Production per hour
7 Weight deviation for card sliver.
8 CV value of card sliver
9 Time remaining until can change
10 Operating status
11 Length remaining in metres until can change
12 Graphic representation of the current can filling
2.2.5 Main screen of the operating unit
Note
One or several messages (malfunctions, warnings, events) are displayed on the display unit
in the form of text and diagrams. If there are several messages simultaneously, these can be
displayed individually.
13.05.2016 ENG 2/5

Operation
6.2 7.2
2 3 4
1 5 6.1 7.1 8 9
10
11
12
20 73 Pa
19
18
17
CHWIA_00002221_002_01
1 Screen number 8 Maintenance warning

2 Speed of opening roller 9 Production value group
3 Speed of the card flats 10 Web weight
4 Cylinder speed 11 Production per hour
5 Display for the selected shift 12 Delivery per minute (delivery speed)
6.1 Network connection OK 17 Fault display (☞ Part 2, Page6)
6.2 No network connection 18 Licker-in speed
7.1 The secured doors are locked 19 Weight of the incoming lap
7.2 The secured doors are unlocked 20 Air pressure in the shaft
2.2.6 Fault display
1 Text display
2 Fault code number 6
3 Location of the cause
4 Sequence and number of queued mes- 1
sages
5 Help text with information concerning 2
cause and rectification
6 Graphic presentation of the cause 3
5
CHWIA_00002223_001_02

Operating elements
2.3 Operating elements
2.3.1 Card
6
5
2
1
CHWIA_00003492_001_04

Triggering an emergency shut-down (☞ Part 2, Page22)
Unlock emergency stop button (☞ Part 2, Page22)
1 Rotary switch – door safety device on drive side (Option: Web production)
Opening secured doors on the right-hand side of the machine (☞ Part 2, Page29)
1 Key – light intensity of the sliver sensor (Option: Non-woven fabric)
Setting the sliver monitoring at the delivery (☞ Part 4, Page240)
2 Main valve of compressed air supply

Cut off the compressed air supply and secure with padlock (☞ Part 2, Page26)
Switch on the compressed air supply (☞ Part 2, Page16)
3 Main switch
Main switch, function description (☞ Part 2, Page11)
Switching on the main switch (☞ Part 2, Page15)
4 Activate the button – turn back feed roller of the card

Reversing the feed roller (☞ Part 2, Page28)
5 Key switch - grind card flats

Activating the card flat for grinding (☞ Part 4, Page73)
5 Key switch – grind doffer (Option: Prepared for compacting roller)
Switch to operating status – « Grind doffer » (☞ Part 4, Page68)
6 Turn back feed roller in the card chute

Removing blockages from around the feed roller (☞ Part 2, Page39)
7 Operating unit (☞ Part 2, Page9)

Machine buttons (Option: Coiler) (☞ Part 2, Page10)
13.05.2016 ENG 2/7

Operation
6
5
2
1
CHWIA_00003492_001_04
7 Machine buttons (Option: Web production) (☞ Part 2, Page10)
2.3.2 Coiler
Option: Coiler SB

Triggering an emergency shut-down
(☞ Part 2, Page22) 2 3 4
Unlock emergency stop button
2 Key switch on SB module
Operating the coiler in test mode
(☞ Part 4, Page244) 1
3 Push-button to test settings and functions
4 Rotary switch – drafting system load
CHWIA_00002900_002_01

Operating elements
2.3.3 Operating unit
1 Status LED power supply

Status LED automatic mode 1
Status LED warning
Status LED fault
Status LED request service personnel
2 Machine buttons (Option: Coiler) 7

Machine buttons (Option: Web produc-
tion) (☞ Part 2, Page10)
3
3 Program buttons
6
4 Navigation buttons
2 5
5 Numeric buttons 4
6 « Language selection button »

CHWIA_00003896_002_01
Procedure for changing the language
« Main screen key »
7 Display
Data screens
tion: Coiler) (☞ Part 2, Page4)
tion: Web production) (☞ Part 2, Page6)
13.05.2016 ENG 2/9

Operation
2.3.4 Machine buttons
Option: Coiler
1 « STOP key »
2 « START key »
Starting the machine (☞ Part 2, Page17)
3 « Key for emptying the chute and
card »
4 « Key for emptying the line »
5 « Key for switching off the feed
roller »
6 « Key for activating can change »
Changing the can (☞ Part 2, Page27)
7 « STOP key for doffer »
8 « START key for production »
Starting production (doffer at high speed)
Starting production (doffer at creep
speed) (☞ Part 2, Page17)
CHWIA_00003984_001_01
2.3.5 Machine buttons
1 « STOP key »
2 « START key »
Starting the machine (☞ Part 2, Page17)
3 « Key for emptying the chute and
card »
4 « Key for emptying the line »
5 « Key for switching off the feed
roller »
6 « Key for remote control opera-
tion » (Interface to the higher-level
control of the web cards or . sliver cards.)
Disabling the remote control
Enabling the remote control
7 « STOP key for doffer »
8 « START key for production » CHWIA_00003984_002_01
Starting production (doffer at high speed)

Starting production (doffer at creep
speed) (☞ Part 2, Page17)
Operating elements
2.3.6 Main switch, function description
Use the main switch to switch the operating

voltage of the machine on or off.
Prior to adjustment, repair or maintenance tasks,
lock the main switch of each participating person
with that person's own padlock
DANGER
Injury due to moving machine parts, al- CHWIA_00003911_001_01
though the drive has stopped.

▶ Do not reach into the area around
moving machine parts.
▶ Wait until the machine has come to a
standstill.
▶ Place the main switch on "0" and lock

it. Remove the key and keep it on your
person.
Caution
Machine damage through switching off the main switch during operation
▶ Stop the machine with the STOP button.
▶ Switch off machine via the main switch only when the machine has come to a standstill.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 11
Operation in production mode Universal Operating Manual
Operation
3 Operation in production mode

These activities must be practised by all persons who work on the machine.
3.1 Switching the system on and off
3.1.1 Starting the UNIcontrol feed system
1. The card line is ready for production.

2. The cards of the appropriate line are started; the doffers remain switched off.
20 21 22 14
2
1
10 11 12 13
CHWIA_00002270_001_01
1. Select the card line (1) on the UNIcontrol user interface and start the material flow (material
feed) (2).
◁ This procedure is described in detail in the operating manual for the UNIcontrol unit.
2. Put the line cards into operation, starting with the last card (14) of the respective line.
(Sequence 14,13,12,11,10).
◁ Even if all the cards in a line are not required, the last cards of this line must still be placed
in service and kept in operation.
◁ If the system is started incorrectly, then blockages in the material transport pipes may oc-
cur as a result.
Switching on the machine
3.1.2 Stopping the UNIcontrol feed system
20 21 22 14
10 11 12 13
CHWIA_00002271_001_01
1. First stop the doffers, one after the other, starting with the first card (10) of the respective line
(sequence 10,11,12,13,14).
◁ The doffers stop.
◁ Feed system continues to run.
2. Do not switch off the material flow until after all doffers have stopped, (material feed on the feed
system).
Note
This procedure is described in detail in the operating manual for the UNIcontrol unit.
3.2 Switching on the machine
3.2.1 Checks to be carried out before switching on
No people are in or on the machine.

The protective equipment of the machine is all active.
All tools and aids have been removed from the machine.
3.2.2 Bringing the machine to the starting position
Setting the mode for production operation

1. In data screen 80.1 the operating mode « Automatic mode » is selected.
◁ Mode for production operation
2. Turn key switch, grind card flat, to position I.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 13
Operation
● Production operation
3. Turn key switch « grind doffer » to position I.
● Production operation
Closing the doors on the right-hand side of the machine

4. Close the door (3).
◁ The doors (4) and (5) are still open.
5. Close the doors (4) and (5).
◁ The door (3) is mechanically locked
through the locking mechanism (7).
6. Close the door (6).
7. Unlock the emergency stop button.
3
4
5
6
CHWIA_00002178_001_02
Bringing the coiler into starting position

Option: Coiler CBA
CHWIA_00002509_001_01
▶ Close the calendar rollers.

▶ Close the hood.
Switching the coiler to production mode

Option: Coiler SB
▶ Turn key switch, SB module, to position

«0».
◁ Production mode
▶ Remove the key.
0
2 I
CHWIA_00002918_001_01
8. Slide in an empty can.

9. Unlock all emergency stop buttons.
3.2.3 Switching on the main switch
▶ Place the main switch on "1".

◁ The switch is in the position for operation
CHWIA_00003912_001_01
3.2.4 Checks after switching on
1. Determine whether the power supply is switched on.

◁ Status LED power supply is illuminated
▽ Otherwise: Inform the plant electrician.
2. Activate the « Main screen key ».
◁ The main screen is displayed.
3. Change over to the desired language.
◁ The system changes to the next active language.
▽ If the desired language does not appear, it must be configured in data screen 40.3.
4. Determine whether a fault is queued.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 15
Operation
● Status LED fault is illuminated

▶ Clear faults or warnings. (☞ Part 2, Page44)
● Status LED fault is not illuminated

▶ After these steps have been executed the machine is ready to start.
◁ The message « Ready to start » is displayed.
3.2.5 Switch on the compressed air supply
1. Swing out the control cabinet.

◁ The pneumatic main valve is accessible.
CHWIA_00002317_002_01
2. Move the slider (1) downwards.

◁ Compressed air supply is on.
CHWIA_00004392_001_01
3.2.6 Starting the machine
▶ « START key » activate.

◁ The LED on « START key » flashes
while the cylinder and licker-in are being
brought up to speed.
◁ The cylinder motor starts.
Cylinder ramp-up time
Option: Cylinder drive ≤150 s
with belt pulley CHWIA_00002241_001_01
Option: Cylinder drive with frequency

converter
Cylinder speed: 500 rpm ≤45 s
converter
◁ At a cylinder rotational speed of ≤200
rpm, the licker-in motor starts.
◁ The LED on« START key » is illumin-
ated, work speed has been reached.
▽ The machine does not start.
▶ Notify the supervisor.
▶ Check whether "Automatic mode" is
set in the data screen 80.1.
▽ Power failure during the start phase.
▶ When grid power is restored, the
cylinder can be restarted where it
was before standstill.
3.2.7 Starting production (doffer at creep speed)
1. Carry out this step if the conditions are met.

Conditions
✓ The message « Chute ready for filling » is displayed.
▶ « START key for production » activ-
ate once.
◁ LED on the « START key for pro-
duction » flashes, the card chute
is being filled.
CHWIA_00002236_001_01

Conditions
✓ The message « Production ready » is displayed.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 17
Operation

ate once.
duction » flashes; Production at
creep speed
◁ Start the clearer roller and the doffer.
CHWIA_00002236_001_01
Guiding the sliver into the coiler

Option: Coiler
▶ Draw in the card sliver and guide it up to the coiler.

◁ Light barrier on the coiler detects the card sliver.
▽ If a fault occurs whilst drawing the sliver into the coiler, the card continues to produce
at creep speed. If the time taken to correct the fault exceeds 3 minutes, the doffer
stops.
3. « START key for production » activate a second time.

◁ Fast speed: LED on the « START key for production » is illuminated; Production at
high speed
◁ Status LED automatic mode is illuminated
Option: Coiler
◁ If the machine is producing at creep speed with a drawn-in sliver, it switches off after
the time duration set in the data screen. Production at creep speed has to be restar-
ted.
3.2.8 Starting production (doffer at high speed)
Conditions
✓ The machine is operating at creep speed, the card sliver has been drawn in up to the coiler.

Conditions
✓ Automatic ramp-up in fast speed is configured.
ate.
◁ Fast speed: LED on the « START
key for production » is illumin-
ated; Acceleration to high speed for
production
▽ Remains at creep speed, if a sliver is
not detected between the disk rollers.
CHWIA_00002236_001_01
Hint
Subsequent pressing of the
START button causes toggle
between fast speed and creep
speed.

Conditions
✓ No automatic ramp-up in fast speed.
ate and hold.
production
◁ The doffer will only continue to run
at the programmed delivery speed,
if the light scanner on the coiler has CHWIA_00002236_001_01
been covered for approx. 3 seconds.

Configuring automatic ramp-up

1. In data screen 41.1, in the line « Automatic acceleration: » switch on the function.
Automatic ramp-up:
● « ON »
● « OFF »
◁ Automatic ramp-up: After activating the « START key for production », the doffer
switches automatically from creep speed to fast speed operation, as soon as the light
sensor on the coiler is covered for at least 3 seconds.
3.2.9 Enabling the remote control
▶ « Key for remote control operation »

activate.
◁ The LED lights up. Remote control for 2
the cards is active.
Option: Remote control, production speed
◁ The doffer can be sped up from
1
crawl speed or the production
stopped via the higher-level control CHWIA_00004163_002_01
unit of the web system.
◁ The doffer can be started and sped
up from crawl speed, or the produc-
tion stopped, via the higher-level
control unit of the web system.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 19
Operation
3.3 Drawing in
3.3.1 Pulling the sliver into the SB module
Option: Coiler SB
Open the top section of the drafting system

1. Open the hood (1).
◁ The drafting system is automatically re-
1
lieved.
2. Swing the extraction unit (4) forward.
◁ The top section of the drafting system (3) 2
can be swung to the front.
3. Remove material residues from the drafting 3
system.
CHWIA_00002919_001_01
Check top rollers

4. Check whether the top rollers are correctly
inserted.
3
The strap (2) is hooked in on both sides.
The top rollers (3) turn freely.
In this case the top rollers are correctly inser- 2
ted.
2
CHWIA_00002917_001_01
Closing the top section of the drafting system

5. Close the weighting arm.
6. Close the hood.
Drawing in
Introduce the card sliver into the SB module

Conditions
✓ Production mode
3 4
1
CHWIA_00002916_001_01
7. Place the rotary switch of the drafting system on «0».

◁ Position «0»: The switch is in the position for operation
◁ The top section of the drafting system is automatically loaded when the card is put into
slow speed operation.
8. « START key for production » activate once.
◁ LED on the « START key for production » flashes; Production at creep speed
◁ The coiler runs synchronously with the card.
9. Introduce the tip of the card sliver (3) into the sliver guide (4) of the module.
◁ The tip of the card sliver is seized by the drafting system rollers without being turned over.
▽ If a malfunction occurs during automatic feed, the card will remain in slow speed. The mal-
function must be resolved in less than 3 minutes, otherwise the card delivery will also shut
off.
10. « START key for production » activate

and hold.
◁ Fast speed: LED on the « START key
for production » is illuminated; Accel-
eration to high speed for production
◁ The card accelerates to production
speed.
11. If the card sliver covers the light barrier for at CHWIA_00002236_001_01
least 3 seconds: Release the START button
– production
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 21
Operation
3.4 Switching off the machine
3.4.1 Triggering an emergency shut-down
▶ Press the emergency stop button with the

palm of your hand.
CHWIA_00000057_001_01
◁ Actuated: The machine is put into a safe

state as quickly as possible. The ma-
chine cannot be started as long as the
emergency stop button is actuated.
CHWIA_00003664_001_01
◁ The door locking mechanism on the
right-hand side of machine is unlocked.
3.4.1.1 Unlock emergency stop button
▶ Turn the emergency stop button clockwise.
CHWIA_00000058_001_01
◁ Unlocked: Operating status
CHWIA_00003663_001_01
Switching off the machine
3.4.2 Disabling the remote control
▶ « Key for remote control operation »

activate again.
◁ The LED remains unlit. Remote control 2
for the cards is inactive.
◁ The signals from the higher-level control
unit of the web system are not evaluated. 1
◁ The card is autonomously controlled.
CHWIA_00004163_002_01
◁ The doffer can be sped up from

crawl speed or the production
stopped via the higher-level control
unit of the web system.
◁ The doffer can be started and sped
up from crawl speed, or the produc-
tion stopped, via the higher-level
control unit of the web system.
3.4.3 Stopping the doffers
1. Activate the button two times.

◁ Doffer switches off immediately.
2. Press the button.
Switch-off limit, delivery speed 20 – 400 m/min
● Default 400 m/min
◁ The feed roller switches off in
accordance with the programming in data
screen 41.32. The doffer continues to run CHWIA_00002237_001_01
until a sliver breakage occurs. The sliver

monitor registers the sliver breakage and
slowly switches the doffer off.

Conditions
✓ The message « Chute filling underway » is displayed.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 23
Operation
▶ Press the button.

◁ The filling of the lower part of the
card chute is interrupted.
◁ The opening roll in the card chute is
switched off.
CHWIA_00002237_001_01
3.4.4 Switching off the feed roller
▶ Press the button.

◁ No new material is fed to the card.
◁ The machine empties.
CHWIA_00002243_001_01
3.4.5 Emptying card chute and card
▶ « Key for emptying the chute and

card » activate.
◁ The feed roller in the card chute stops.
◁ No further material is supplied to the feed
chute.
◁ The card continues to produce until the
sliver breaks.
CHWIA_00002242_001_01
3.4.6 Emptying the line
▶ « Key for emptying the line » activate.

◁ If the upstream feed machine or the UN-
Imix are set to «emptying» mode, the
card continues to produce until a sliver
breakage occurs.
◁ The AEROfeed line empties.
Note
This operating state is not suitable for CHWIA_00002238_001_01
normal machine operation. The mon-

itoring units for filling the card chute,
the batt thickness in the feed, and
the sliver weight in the delivery are no
longer active.
Switching off the machine
3.4.7 Stop machine
1. « STOP key » activate.

Brake time for the cylinder
Option: Cylinder drive with belt pulley

500 rpm ≤180 s
900 rpm ≥210 s
Option: Cylinder drive with frequency converter
500 rpm ≤105 s CHWIA_00002240_001_01
930 rpm ≥190 s

◁ The feed roller stops immediately.
◁ The doffer continues to run until a sliver
breakage occurs. The sliver monitor re-
gisters the sliver breakage and slowly
switches the doffer off.
◁ The drives of cylinder and licker-in are
stopped.
◁ The machine can be started up again,
even if the stop procedure has not been
completed.
Caution
Machine damage through switching off
the main switch during operation
▶ Stop the machine with the STOP but-
ton.
▶ Switch off machine via the main switch
only when the machine has come to a
standstill.
2. Only switch off the main switch at standstill.
3.4.8 Switch off the main switch and safeguard it
▶ Only switch main switch at standstill.
▶ Place the main switch on "0" and secure it

with a padlock. Remove the key and keep it
on your person.
◁ Switched off and secured: Unauthorised
persons cannot switch on the machine.
CHWIA_00003907_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 25
Operation
3.4.9 Cut off the compressed air supply and secure with padlock
Cut off the compressed air supply

1. Move the slider (1) upwards.
◁ Compressed air supply is cut off.
1
CHWIA_00004391_001_01
Secure main valve with a padlock

2. Secure the slider in upper position with a
padlock (2) .
◁ Compressed air supply is cut off and
2
secured.
CHWIA_00004391_002_01
Monitoring production
3.5 Monitoring production
3.5.1 Changeover shift manually
▶ Entry of password for password level 2:
1. Select data screen 50.1.

2. In the line « Shift switchover: » determine
the type of shift changeover.
Type of shift changeover « Key »
◁ The shift can be manually switched.
3. In the line « Current shift: », select the de-
sired shift with the + / - key.
Current shift:
● Shift 1
● Shift 2
● Shift ...
DS-50-01_001
● Shift 8
◁ The current shift is selected.
◁ The selected current shift is displayed on
the main screen.
3.5.2 Changing the can
Option: Coiler
▶ « Key for activating can change » ac-

tivate.
◁ Flashing light is active for 4 seconds be-
fore the can change occurs.
◁ The can is changed.
◁ The length counter is reset to the pro-
grammed length.
▽ Frequent faults when changing cans
CHWIA_00002239_001_01
▶ Set the speed for manual can
change. (☞ Part 3, Page80)
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 27
Operation
3.5.3 Introduce batt into the feed roller
1. Switch on the machine (1) and the doffer (2).

2. Guide batt (3) out of the AEROfeed card
shaft up to approx. 10 cm in front of the feed
roller (5).
3. Switch off the doffer. 1 2
CAUTION
Finger injury due to the pulling-in feed
roller
▶ Carefully slide the batt between the
rotating feed roller and feed trough.
4. Thin the batt (3) by hand and form it into a

wedge shape. 4
5. Restart the doffer (2).
3
◁ The batt formed into a wedge shape (3)
is now pulled in through the feed roller 5
CHWIA_00001335_001_01
(5).
3.5.4 Reversing the feed roller
▶ The delivery unit of the card must be at standstill.
▶ Press push-button (1).

◁ The feed roller (2) turns backwards. The 1
fed-in batt will be pushed back out.
CHWIA_00001371_001_01
3.5.5 Clear out the suction channel of the flats cleaning unit
DANGER
▶ Open the flap (1) and clear out the material.
CHWIA_00001857_001_01
3.5.6 Opening secured doors
3.5.6.1 Opening secured doors on the right-hand side of the machine
Option: Autonomous controller
▶ Carry out this step if the conditions are met.

Conditions
✓ The main switch must have been switched on for at least 60 seconds.
▶ The cylinder must be at a standstill.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 29
Operation
▶ Press the emergency stop button.

◁ The door (4) and (5) is
unlocked.
▽ If the EMERGENCY STOP but-
ton is activated during the self-
test, the doors remain locked.
CHWIA_00000057_001_01
Option: External steuerung

OR Remote control, production speed
OR Remote controlled Start/Stop
▶ Carry out this step if the conditions are met.

Conditions
✓ The main switch must have been switched on for at least 60 seconds.
▶ The cylinder must be at a standstill.
▶ Turn the rotary switch for the door
unlock mechanism to the right.
◁ The door (4) and (5) is
unlocked.
◁ If the card is working in the
composite, with the "remote
control" function the EMER-
GENCY STOP button brings
the entire system to a standstill. CHWIA_00004377_001_01
With the rotary switch the doors

can be opened without activ-
ating the EMERGENCY STOP
button.
Opening doors
1. Open the door (4) and (5).
◁ The locking mechanism (7) unlocks the
door (3).
2. Open the door (3).
3. Open the door (6) with a triangular key.
3
4
5
6
CHWIA_00002178_001_02
3.5.6.2 Opening secured covers in the event of a power failure
CAUTION
Injury Due to rotating cylinder a power failure
▶ Wait until the cylinder has come to a standstill, run down time, approx. 20 minutes.
DANGER
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 31
Operation
9
1
10
STOP
11
4 3
CHWIA_00002177_001_01
1. Wait until the cylinder has come to a standstill.

2. Observe the journal pin of the cylinder through the opening in the cover on the left-hand side of
the machine.
Journal pin rotates

▶ Continue to wait and repeat observation.
Journal pin is at a standstill

▶ Unscrew the screw (11) approx. 6 turns (approx. 3 mm).
▶ Using a socket spanner, carefully turn the hexagonal screw (10) in an anti-clockwise direc-
tion up to the limit stop.
◁ The door lock (9) is unlocked.
▶ Then first open the right-hand door half (4).
3. When the door (4) is open, turn the hexagon (10) in the clockwise direction.
◁ The door lock (9) is reset again.
3.5.7 Rectifying faults in the material flow
3.5.7.1 After some runtime, the card sliver does not run smoothly
After several hours or days of production operation, the sliver starts to show slubs.
No. Possible cause Determination Remedy

1 Web bridge Contaminated ▶ Clean the web bridge.
Keeps getting contaminated ▶ For material that tends to
layer and if there is contam-
ination the web bridge must
be cleaned on a regular
basis. Schedule the clean-
ing interval.
3.5.7.2 Removing clogging on the sliver funnel
Option: Coiler
CHWIA_00002137_001_01
1. Swing down the sliver funnel (2) by approx. 80 degrees and take it out.
CAUTION
Hand injuries due to the pulling-in disk rollers
▶ Caution when the delivery funnel is swung down and the doffer is running.
▶ Stop the doffer.
Caution
Material damage due to damaged surface on the sliver funnel
▶ Do not use a hard object such as a steel spike or similar item.
2. Turn the sliver (3) together and pull it downward and out.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 33
Operation
3.5.7.3 Swivel out the calendar rolls
Option: Coiler CBA
1. Pull lever (1) out.

2. Swing out the support with the calendar roller 1
(2).
2
CHWIA_00002620_001_01
3.5.7.4 Removing the top rollers
Option: Coiler SB
1. Off-load drafting system.
Immediate:
▶ Place the rotary switch of the drafting system on «I».
◁ Rotary switch – drafting system load, position «I»: The drafting system is off-loaded.
Automatic:
≈ 30 s
▶ Wait until delay time elapses.
2. Hold the extracted top roller (3).

3. Push the respective straps (2) to the exterior
and remove the top roller (3). 3
Note
Handle the top roller (3) with care and
deposit it so that it is protected against 2
any damage.
2
4. Place the rotary switch of the drafting system
on «0». 1
◁ Position «0»: The switch is in the position
for operation
CHWIA_00002917_001_01
3.5.7.5 After change, can is knocked over
Option: Coiler CBA

OR Coiler SB

1 Rollers on cans do not turn freely ✓ ▶ Clean rollers, repair if ne-
cessary.
✗ Continue with: 2
2 Can is ejected too quickly ✓ ▶ Throttle the speed
of the can carriage.
▽ Movement that is too fast
results in higher wear on the
drive belt.
✗
3.5.7.6 Card sliver wrapped around can
Option: Coiler CBA

OR Coiler SB
After can change the sliver is pulled off by the tossed-out can and wrapped around the can in the
coiler.

1 Incorrect sliver separation pro- ✓ ▶ Set the time of sliver separ-
cedure. ation. (Option: Coiler CBA)
✗
3.5.7.7 Can is jammed in the changer
Option: Coiler CBA

OR Coiler SB

1 Spinning can Dimensions not suitable ▶ Place the main switch on
"0".
◁ Pneumatic system is
depressurised.
▶ Remove the can.
▶ Do not use the can any
more.
Can is deformed ▶ Repair can.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 35
Operation

drive belt.
✗
Cleaning tasks every 4-8 h
4 Cleaning tasks
The following tasks are executed by operating personnel during shift operation.
4.1 Cleaning tasks every 4-8 h
4.1.1 Cleaning the delivery unit
CAUTION
Hand injuries due to moving machine parts in the delivery unit
STOP
CHWIA_00001949_001_01
▶ Use the cleaning aids shown on the screen to clean the delivery unit.
4.1.2 Cleaning the delivery rollers
CAUTION
▶ For cotton that contains honeydew, or chem-

ical fibres with high avivage content, clean
STOP
the delivery rollers with a cloth moistened
with water.
CHWIA_00002020_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 37
Cleaning tasks Universal Operating Manual
Operation
4.1.3 Cleaning the stripping blades
CAUTION
3
4
6
CHWIA_00004060_001_01
1. Swing out cover (1) and cross apron (2).

◁ The stripping blades (4) and (6) are accessible.
2. Swing the lever (3) upward.
3. Clean the stripping blade (4) with a cloth.
4. Swing the lever (5) downward.
5. Clean the stripping blade (6) with a cloth.
Cleaning tasks every 4-8 h
4.1.4 Removing blockages from around the feed roller
1. Switch off the feed unit. (☞ Part 2, Page13)

2. Stop the machine. (☞ Part 2, Page25) 2 1
CAUTION
Injury due to the pulling-in feed roller
▶ Do not reach into the area around the
feed roller. 3
3. Open the window (2) and clear out the mater-

ial above the feed roller.
4. Press and hold the blue push-button (1) for a
few seconds.
◁ The cylinder is switched off.
◁ The feed roller (3) turns backwards.
◁ The jammed material will be conveyed CHWIA_00001240_001_01
out of the feed roller (3).
Note
If the blue push-button (1) is pressed
too long, it may damage the seals on
the feed roller (3).
5. Remove the material and then repeat the

procedure until there is no more material
between the feed roller and the feed trough.
▶ Start the machine. (☞ Part 2, Page17)
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 39
Operation
4.2 Cleaning tasks as needed
4.2.1 Removing material deposited in the card chute
▶ Remove cover (1) and clean the channel (2).

1
CHWIA_00001192_001_02
4.2.2 Cleaning the web bridge.

person.
CHWIA_00004033_001_02
Cleaning tasks as needed
1 3
4
CHWIA_00002017_001_02
1. Unplug the compressed-air hose (2).

◁ Web bridge is better accessible
2. Push the belt (1) to the side.
◁ Web bridge is better accessible
3. Hook a suitable hook (4) into the bore of the web bridge (3).
4. With the hook (4) pull out the web bridge (3).
5. Moisten a cloth with water and use it to clean the web bridge (3).
6. Slide the web bridge (3) into the stop again.
7. Re-insert the compressed air hose (2).
4.2.3 Cleaning the top rollers and the top delivery roller
Option: Coiler SB
Removing the top rollers and the top delivery roller

1. Hold the top roller (3) on the weighting arm 20
(20).
2. Take hold of the holder (4) for the top roller
(3) with two fingers. 1
3. Pull away the holder (4) until the top roller (3) 3 4
is released so that it can also be taken out of
9
the other holder (9).
4. Set down the top roller (3). 2
Note 3
Handle the top rollers with care and
store them so that they are protected 7
CHWIA_00002742_001_01
against damage.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 41
Operation
5. Proceed in precisely the same manner to 20

remove the other top rollers (1), (2), and (7).
1
3 4
9
2
7
CHWIA_00002742_001_01
6. Clean all top rollers (10) and the top delivery

roller (11) at regular intervals.
10
11
CHWIA_00002737_001_01
Installing the top rollers and the top delivery roller

7. Take hold of the holder (4) at the weighting 20
arm (20) with two fingers and pull it away.
8. Fit the top roller (3) into the other holder (9).
1
9. Position the top roller (3) at the pulled away
holder (4) and have it snap in place. 3 4
10. Proceed in the same manner to install the 9
other top rollers (1), (2), (7).
2
7
CHWIA_00002742_001_01
Cleaning tasks as needed
4.2.4 Cleaning the clearer lips of the drafting-system cylinder
Option: Coiler SB
1. Remove the clearer lips of the bottom draft system roller.

2. Remove the clearer lips for the drafting system cylinders. (☞ Part 4, Page178)
▶ Periodically clean the clearer lip (3) and the 4

two clearer lips located behind it. 1
2
1
2 3
3 5
CHWIA_00002753_001_01
1. Fit the clearer lips in the drafting-system cylinder.

2. Install clearer lips for drafting-system cylinders. (☞ Part 4, Page180)
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 43
Operating unit, general Universal Operating Manual
Operation
5 Operating unit, general

This chapter provides basic information for handling the operating unit. Persons who have been
assigned to configure the machine require this information.
5.1 Procedure for changing the language
▶ Activate the « Language selection button ».

◁ The system changes to the next active language.
▽ The desired language does not appear.
▶ Activate the required languages. (☞ Part 4, Page203)
5.2 Procedure for setting the brightness of the display
1. Press the "MAIN SCREEN" key (7) and the

"BRIGHTNESS PLUS" key (3) simultan-
eously.
◁ The screen becomes brighter.
2. Press the "MAIN SCREEN" key (7) and the
"BRIGHTNESS MINUS" key (4) simultan-
eously.
◁ The screen becomes darker.
CHWIA_00003892_001_01
5.3 Clearing faults and warnings

◁ In the event of a fault, the fault message
is shown in the main screen.
2. Activate the help key (?).
◁ Help text with information concerning
cause and rectification is displayed.
3. Rectify the fault.
◁ The "ACKNOWLEDGE key" (1) only ap-
pears if the displayed fault is no longer
present.
▽ If the fault cannot be rectified. CHWIA_00003878_001_01
▶ Inform the supervisor.

4. Press the “ACKNOWLEDGE” button (1).
◁ The fault is reset, i.e. it is no longer dis-
played on the screen.
5. In the field (7), determine whether additional
faults are still queued.
◁ Use the button (6) to display the next
fault.
Navigation menu system
◁ Use the button (5) to display the previous

fault.
6. Acknowledge all faults and warnings.
◁ Status LED fault is not illuminated
◁ The machine is ready for operation.
5.4 Navigation menu system
5.4.1 Displaying the main screen
Note
Regardless of which screen is currently being displayed on the display unit, the main screen
(standard overview screen or fault display) can be brought up by pressing a single button.
▶ Press the MAIN SCREEN button (1) once.

◁ If a fault is displayed, the standard over-
view screen appears all the while the
MAIN SCREEN button (1) is pressed.
CHWIA_00003890_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 45
Operation
5.4.2 Structure of menus and data screens
CHWIA_00000031_001_01
The screen indicates which keys can be used to select the screens on the display unit.
There are 3 different screen levels:
1. Main screen
Either an overview screen or a message indicating a fault is displayed. There may be several
overview screens, or several faults which are simultaneously present.
2. Menu overview
Data displays are grouped in menus. The menus can be selected from the menu overview.
3. Data screen
In data screens, actual values can be displayed, settings altered or test functions activated.
5.4.3 Displaying individual data screens
1. Activate the "MENU OVERVIEW" button (3).

◁ The menu overview is displayed.
CHWIA_00003871_001_01
Navigation menu system
2. Press the CURSOR FORWARD button (2)

or the CURSOR BACK button (1) repeatedly,
until the desired menu is highlighted.
3. Press the "SCREEN scroll forward" button (6)
or the "SCREEN scroll back button until the
desired data screen is displayed.
CHWIA_00003872_001_01
5.4.4 Going directly from the overview screen to a data screen
Note
In the basic screen you can use the "DIRECT button forward" (1 program button) can be
used to select a data screen that is required continually. Data screen 40.2 can be used to
configure such a data screen where direct access is required. The data screen number indic-
ates which screen will be brought up.
▶ In the basic screen, press the "DIRECT but-

ton forward" (1)
◁ The data screen configured in data
screen 40.2 is displayed immediately,
i.e. it is not necessary to navigate to the
screen via the menu.
CHWIA_00003873_001_01
◁ (For the example shown, the direct ac-
cess is for data screen 30.1.)
5.4.5 Accessing any data screen via a single button
▶ Press the NEXT DATA SCREEN button(4) or

the PREVIOUS DATA SCREEN button (3).
◁ Each time the button is pressed, the next
or previous data screen or menu is dis-
played.
CHWIA_00003887_001_01
5.4.6 Displaying the most-recently accessed data screen
Note
By pressing the DIRECT BACK button of the overview screen, the previous data screen (i.e.
the one most recently displayed) can be brought up again. (For the example shown, this is
data screen 50.2.)
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 47
Operation
▶ Press the DIRECT BACK button (2).

◁ The most-recently displayed data screen
is displayed once more. (For the example
shown, this is data screen 50.2.)
CHWIA_00003888_001_01
5.4.7 Moving from one screen to another of the same type
Note
Scrolling from one overview screen to another, if there are several of them. Displaying the
next fault, if there are several faults pending at the same time.
▶ Press the “PREVIOUS SCREEN” button (5)

or the “NEXT SCREEN” button (6).
◁ The next screens are selected.
CHWIA_00003889_001_01
5.4.8 Scrolling through lists
Note
Lists may be so large that they cannot be displayed in full on a single screen at the display
unit. For this reason, the following program buttons are available at the data screen.
1. Press the CURSOR FORWARD button (2) or

the CURSOR BACK button(1).
◁ The line immediately above or below the
currently highlighted one is then high-
lighted instead.
2. Press the TOP OF LIST button (3). CHWIA_00003891_001_01
◁ A jump to the start of the list

subsequently occurs.
3. Press the BOTTOM OF LIST button (4).
◁ A jump to the end of the list subsequently
occurs.
Changing values in data screens
5.5 Changing values in data screens
▶ Enter the password.
1. Use the "CURSOR FORWARD" button (2) or

the "CURSOR BACK" button (1) to move the
cursor into the desired line (7).
2. Use the “PLUS” button (4), “MINUS” button
(3) or the numerical keyboard to change the
value.
3. If the value has been entered incorrectly,
press the "DELETE" button (5).
◁ The initial value will be displayed again.
◁ The DELETE button only appears for
new values that need to be confirmed.
4. Use the "APPLY" button (6) to confirm the CHWIA_00003893_001_01
entry.
◁ The new setting is subsequently saved.
◁ For values, that require confirmation if
changed, the "APPLY" button appears
bottom right.
5.6 Password authorisation
5.6.1 Entering passwords

2. Activate the « Password button ».
◁ The password entry screen is displayed.
09-0_000a56
3. Determine the authorisation level.
Password authorisation
Authorisation Factory password
Level 1 Read No password
Level 2 Configuration, maintenance, tests 1001
Level – master Changing passwords 1423
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 49
Operation
Note
The description of the data screens shows which type of authorisation is required for an
intended action.
4. Enter the appropriate 4-digit password using the program keys 1-5.
Hint
Use the "C" button to delete previously entered numbers.
5. After entering the password, press one of the

buttons "<<", "<", ">", ">>"
or "MAIN SCREEN" button.
◁ A crossed-out key symbol (4) is indicated
on the main screen.
◁ Message« Password accepted »
CHWIA_00003869_001_01
▽ Message« Password error »
▶ Enter the correct password again.
5.6.2 Procedure for cancelling password authorisation

CHWIA_00003881_001_01
2. Activate the "CANCEL PASSWORD button"

(4).
◁ The key symbol for the program key is no
longer crossed out, i.e. password author-
isation has been cancelled.
CHWIA_00003882_001_01
5.6.3 Change password
1. Enter the master password.

◁ The screen for changing the password is
displayed.
CHWIA_00003883_001_01
Password authorisation
2. Use the ">" button to select the desired au-

thorisation level.
Authorisation
Password: Level 1 Read
Password: Level 2 Configuration,
maintenance, tests
Password: Level – master Changing pass-
words
3. For each password-changing process, enter

the new code twice and use the NEXT
SCREEN button to display the next password
level.
09-1_000a56
◁ Message« Password changed »
Hint
Valid numbers for the password are 0 -
4
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 51
Data screens Universal Operating Manual
Operation
6 Data screens
6.1 List of data screens
ID-No. Description Page

Menu « 10 Production set values » 2 / Page56
10.1 « Production set values » 2 / Page56
10.2 Option: Coiler 2 / Page59
« Production sort sliver set values »

10.2 Option: Web production 2 / Page59
« Production sort sliver set values »

« Production setpoints options »

10.30 « Production set values extended » 2 / Page139
Menu « 11 Production actual values » 2 / Page61
11.1 « Production actual values, material » 2 / Page61
11.2 « Production act.values work elements » 2 / Page62
11.3 « Production efficiency/MTBA » 2 / Page63
11.4 « Act. prod. values, suct. vacuum » 2 / Page64
11.5 « Prodn.actual values batt graphic » 2 / Page64
11.31 « Prod. act. val. reg. sliver/deliv. » 2 / Page139
11.32 « Prod. act. val. reg. Sga (batt) » 2 / Page140
11.33 « Prod. act. values reg. chute/sag » 2 / Page141
11.34 « Prod.act.values work elements ext. » 2 / Page141
Menu « 12 Production shift data » 2 / Page65
12.1 « Production current shift » 2 / Page65
12.2 « Production last shifts » 2 / Page66
12.3 « Events shifts » 2 / Page67
12.4 « Production total shifts » 2 / Page68
12.5 « Events total shifts » 2 / Page68
12.6 « Delete shifts » 2 / Page69
Menu « 20 Quality data actual values, card » 2 / Page69
« Q-Data actual values card A% »

« Q-data act. values card CV%..CV100 »

« Q-data act. values card spectrogram »

« Quality, actual values, card, slubs »

20.30 « Q-date actual values card feed CV » 2 / Page142
20.31 « Q-data, act. val., card feed spec. » 2 / Page143
List of data screens

Menu Option: Coiler RSB, RQM Rieter Quality Monitor 2 / Page72
« 21 Quality data actual values, coiler »

21.1 Option: Coiler RSB, RQM Rieter Quality Monitor 2 / Page72
« Q-data actual values RQM A% »

« Q-data actual values RQM CV%..CV5 »

« Q-data act. values RQM spectrogram »

« Q-data act. values coiler RSB »

Menu « 22 Quality data set values, card » 2 / Page74
« Q-data set values card A% »

« Q-data set values card CV% »

« Q-data set values CV% corrc. »

« Q-data set values card spectrogr. »

« Qual., target values, card, slubs »

Menu Option: Coiler RSB, RQM Rieter Quality Monitor 2 / Page81
« 23 Quality data set values, coiler »

« Q-data set values RQM A% »

« Q-data set values RQM CV% »

« Q-data set values RQM CV% corrc. »

« Q-data set values RQM spectrogr »

Menu « 30 Information general » 2 / Page86
30.1 « Information machine » 2 / Page86
30.2 « Information freq. converter » 2 / Page87
30.30 « Information converter ext. » 2 / Page144
30.31 « Information CAN slaves » 2 / Page145
30.32 « Info overview digital inputs » 2 / Page145
30.33 « Info overview digital outputs » 2 / Page146
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 53
Operation

Menu « 31 Information logs, statistics » 2 / Page88
31.1 « Info events occurred » 2 / Page88
31.2 « Info current malfunctions » 2 / Page89
31.3 « Info current warnings » 2 / Page89
31.4 « Info current maintenance warnings » 2 / Page90
31.5 « Info events maintenance » 2 / Page90
31.6 « Info delete lists » 2 / Page90
31.30 « Info exception list » 2 / Page146
31.31 « Info statistic events » 2 / Page146
31.32 « Info Exception Statistik D95K » 2 / Page147
Menu « 40 Settings, general » 2 / Page91
40.1 « Settings date/time » 2 / Page91
40.2 « Settings units/operation » 2 / Page92
40.3 « Settings languages » 2 / Page93
Menu « 41 Settings, machine » 2 / Page93
« Settings card delivery »

41.1 Option: Web production 2 / Page95
« Settings card delivery »

41.2 « Settings feed/cylinder » 2 / Page97
41.3 « Settings IGS » 2 / Page98
41.4 « Settings, chute » 2 / Page99
41.30 « Settings extended 1 » 2 / Page147
Menu « 42 Settings, coiler » 2 / Page100
42.1 Option: Coiler RSB 2 / Page100
« Settings RSB »
« Settings RSB levelling intensity »

« Settings coiler I »
OR Coiler SB
« Settings coiler II »
42.30 Option: Coiler SB 2 / Page151
OR Coiler RSB
« Settings coiler extended »

« Settings RSB extended »

Menu « Machine configuration » 2 / Page106

43.1 « Machine configuration » 2 / Page106
43.2 « Configuration options » 2 / Page108
43.30 « Reset configuration » 2 / Page154
Menu « 50 Configuration, shifts » 2 / Page110
50.1 « Configuration shift selection » 2 / Page110
50.2 « Configuration shifts shift schedule » 2 / Page110
Menu « 60 Production value groups » 2 / Page111
60.1 « Value group management » 2 / Page111
60.2 « Value groups preview machine » 2 / Page112
60.3 « Value groups preview quality » 2 / Page113
60.4 « Value groups, preview, feed » 2 / Page114
60.30 « Value groups preview extended I » 2 / Page154
60.31 Option: Coiler CBA 2 / Page156
OR Coiler SB
« Value groups preview extended II »

« Value groups preview extend. III »

60.33 « Value groups preview extend. IV » 2 / Page158
« Value groups preview extended V »

Menu « 70 Maintenance clothings » 2 / Page114
70.1 « Maintenance clothings machine I » 2 / Page114
70.2 « Maintenance clothings machine II » 2 / Page115
70.3 « Maintenance clothings IGS » 2 / Page115
Menu « 71 Maintenance lubrication » 2 / Page116
OR Coiler SB
« Maintenance lubrication coiler »

Menu « 80 Operating mode/Tests » 2 / Page117
80.1 « Operating mode switchover » 2 / Page117
Menu « 81 Grind/put on » 2 / Page117
81.1 « Grind cylinder clothing » 2 / Page118
81.2 « Grind doffer clothing » 2 / Page119
81.3 « Servicing, flats, clothing » 2 / Page120
Menu « 82 Test inputs/outputs and covers » 2 / Page121
82.1 « Test digital inputs » 2 / Page121
82.2 « Test analog inputs » 2 / Page122
82.3 « Test digital outputs » 2 / Page123
82.4 « Test, door saf. devices + watchdog » 2 / Page124
Menu « 83 Test drives » 2 / Page125
83.1 « Test feed roll chute » 2 / Page125
83.2 « Test opening roll chute » 2 / Page126
83.3 « Test fan chute » 2 / Page126
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 55
Operation

83.4 « Test licker-in » 2 / Page126
83.5 « Test cylinder » 2 / Page127
83.6 « Test, flats drive » 2 / Page128
83.7 « Test, clearer roller, flats » 2 / Page129
83.8 « Test cleaner brush » 2 / Page129
83.9 « Test feed roll card » 2 / Page130
83.10 « Test doffer card » 2 / Page130
83.11 « Test delivery card » 2 / Page130
« Test main motor coiler »

83.13 Option: Prepared for compacting roller 2 / Page132
« Test compression rollers »

Menu « 84 Test/Programming devices » 2 / Page133
84.1 « Test control unit » 2 / Page133
84.2 « Test converter » 2 / Page133
Menu « 85 Test optional devices » 2 / Page135
85.1 Option: IGS-Classic 2 / Page135
« Test IGS-classic »
85.2 Option: IGS-Top 2 / Page136
« Test IGS-top »
85.7 Option (Retrofittable): Automatic licker-in knife adjustment 2 / Page137
« Test mote knife licker-in »
Menu « 10 Production set values »

Group of data screens for entry of the most important production values:
The number in the frame top right on the data screens displays the current production values
group. The current production values group can be selected in menu 60.
10.1 « Production set values »

Option: Coiler CBA
The following values are configured in this data

screen.
C7xCBAData101_D
Option: Coiler SB

screen.
C7xSBData101_D
Option: Coiler RSB

screen.
DS-10-01_ALV-DRS_001

screen.
C7xVKData101_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 57
Operation
Option: Coiler
« Sliver weight: » Adjusting the sliver weight (☞ Part 3, Page71)

Configuring the disk roller (☞ Part 4, Page198)
« Web weight: » Set the web weight (☞ Part 3, Page72)

OR Remote control, production speed
« Production: and Delivery: »

Because the machine is connected to a higher-level system, the delivery speed is specified cent-
rally. The production is calculated.
Production and delivery are displayed.
« Production: » Enter production (☞ Part 3, Page72)
« Delivery: » Enter production (☞ Part 3, Page72)
Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
« Nw1: » Example for calculating the theoretical V draft (total draft)

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
« Nw2: » Example for calculating the theoretical V draft (total draft)

Option: Coiler
« Can filling: » Entering the can fill quantity (☞ Part 3, Page73)
« Flats speed: » Entering the flat speed (☞ Part 3, Page87)
« Cylinder rpm : » Change the speed of the cylinder (☞ Part 3, Page73)
10.2 « Production sort sliver set values »

Option: Coiler
Conditions
✓ Password level 2
In this data screen, the scanner in the delivery

of the card is adjusted according to the weighed
sliver weight.
C7xCBAData102_D
« Sorted sliver weight: » Correct sliver weight (☞ Part 3, Page98)
« Correction factor, card: » Correct sliver weight (☞ Part 3, Page98)
10.2 « Production sort sliver set values »

Conditions
In this data screen, the web weight can be cor-

rected if required.
In addition, the external correction is displayed.
C7xVKData102_D

OR Remote controlled Start/Stop
« Extl.web weight correction: » Correct the web weight (☞ Part 3, Page99)
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 59
Operation
10.3 « Production setpoints options »

Option: Coiler
Conditions
Option: Licker-in drive with frequency converter
This data screen is used to set values that affect

options.
C7xCBAData103_D
Option: Licker-in drive with belt pulley
This data screen is used to set values that affect

options.
C7xCBANData103_D
« Blowroom production too low »

If the preceding process transmits the signal "minimum production underranged", the cards auto-
matically lower the production.
It is recommended to switch on this function.
Likewise the "lowered" production capacity can be defined.
« Licker-in speed: » Change licker-in speed (☞ Part 3, Page74)
Option (Retrofittable): Automatic licker-in knife adjustment
« Ejection dist. licker-in: » Mote knife adjustment (motor-driven) (☞ Part 3, Page114)
Menu « 11 Production actual values »

Group of data screens for display of actual values:
11.1 « Production actual values, material »

Option: Coiler
In this data screen the production values are dis-

played.
C7xSBData111_D
In this data screen the production values are dis-

played.
C7xVKData111_D
Option: Coiler
« Batt feed (calc.): »

Weight of the lap feed (calculated)
Lap feed = sliver weight x total draft + weight of waste
These values are determined over the last 30 seconds.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 61
Operation
« Batt feed (calc.): »

Weight of the lap feed (calculated)
Batting feed weight = web weight x total draft + waste weight
These values are determined over the last 30 seconds.
« Modulation scanner: » Checking the limit of the control range of the measuring
device (☞ Part 3, Page112)
11.2 « Production act.values work elements »

Option: Coiler
In this data screen the actual values of the set

parameters are displayed.
Values cannot be changed.
C7xCBAData112_D
In this data screen the actual values of the set

parameters are displayed.
Values cannot be changed.
C7xVKData112_D
« Cylinder rpm: »
« Flats speed: »
« Licker-in rpm: »
Actual speed of that licker-in, at the cylinder.
Option (Retrofittable): Automatic licker-in knife adjustment
« Ejection distance licker-in: »
« Suction device, vacuum: »
« Chute pressure: »
« Opening roll rpm chute: »
11.3 « Production efficiency/MTBA »

In this data screen the values concerning running
behaviour are displayed.
No values can be changed here.
C7xCBAData113_D
« Machine efficiency: »
The machine efficiency again reflects the machine availability during these hours. The time in which
the machine was not used without a queued fault is not included in the calculation.
In data screen 40.2 you can configure the efficiency that should be displayed here.
Efficiency type selection:

● « Production »
The production efficiency indicates the ratio of the actual production of the machine to the
theoretically-possible production. The time in which the machine was switched off is included in
the calculation.
● « Machine »
The machine efficiency reflects the machine availability during these hours. The time in which
« Machine efficiency: » Adjusting the efficiency calculation and display

13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 63
Operation
« MTBA: »
The calculation occurs on a rolling basis over 7 days. During this time, the normal runtime is con-
tinuously compared with the number of faults that occurred, and evaluated.
Before an event the machine had produced for at least 50 seconds with normal production. At slow
speed, or at runtimes shorter than 50 seconds after fault rectification, a standstill is not taken into
account.
If, during this time period, many interruptions caused by the machine are recorded in a single day,
these stops will be included in the calculation after the sixth day. Only thereafter are they dropped
from the calculation.
11.4 « Act. prod. values, suct. vacuum »

In this data screen the gradient of the vacuum of
the waste extraction of the card is displayed.
The lower straight line shows the switch-off point.
C7xCBAData114_D
« Time base for the diagram »

The time base (24 h / 8 h / 30 min) can be changed without any loss of data resulting from the
changeover.
The pressure gradient diagram is displayed in the selected time base.
11.5 « Prodn.actual values batt graphic »

Conditions
✓ In data screen 40.2, in the line « Operation: », display mode « Extended » is selected.
This data screen shows the gradient of the batt

weight measured in real time by the scanner in
the infeed on the feed trough.
A uniform batt weight is an important prerequisite
for a high quality card sliver. Consequently this
diagram is a reliable source for optimising the
system.
This diagram shows the quality of the entire pre-
ceding process at a glance. Thus it provides im-
portant information concerning events or errors in
the blowroom.
C7xCBAData115_D

changeover.
The "Batt weight gradient" diagram is displayed in the selected time base.
Menu « 12 Production shift data »

Group of data screens for display of actual shift data:
12.1 « Production current shift »

Option: Coiler
In this data screen the shift counters of the selec-

ted shift are displayed.
C7xCBAData121_D
In this data screen the shift counters of the selec-

ted shift are displayed.
C7xVKData121_D
« Current shift: »
The shift data of the current shift is continuously added up and saved.
If another layer is selected, the data for the previous layer remains in abeyance until the same layer
is again selected.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 65
Operation
In data screen 40.2 you can configure the efficiency that should be displayed here.

theoretically-possible production. The time in which the machine was switched off is included in
the calculation.
● « Machine »
The machine efficiency reflects the machine availability during these hours. The time in which
« Machine efficiency: » Adjusting the efficiency calculation and display

« Normal production time: »

Displays the time during which the system effectively produced in this shift.
Option: Coiler
« Sliver produced: »
« Web fleece produced: »
« Number of standstills: »
Option: Coiler
« Number of can changes: »
12.2 « Production last shifts »

In this data screen production and efficiency per
shift are displayed.
Overview of the production and the efficiency of
the completed shifts and the currently active shift.
C7xCBAData122_D
« Production »
First line: Data of the shift that is currently being worked.
Second line: Data for the shift that was worked before the current shift.
12.3 « Events shifts »

Option: Coiler

Events are faults that have caused an interrup-
tion of production.
C7xCBAData123_D

Events are faults that have caused an interrup-
tion of production.
C7xVKData123_D
« Shift number: »
Display of the number of faults that caused an interruption in production.
The events are sorted according to frequency, and are displayed for each shift.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 67
Operation
12.4 « Production total shifts »

Option: Coiler
In this data screen, deleted sums (from the cur-

rent shift counter) are displayed.
C7xCBAData124_D
In this data screen, deleted sums (from the cur-

rent shift counter) are displayed.
C7xVKData124_D
« Production »
Summation counter of the production of a pre-defined shift since a given deletion date.
12.5 « Events total shifts »

In this data screen deleted events (from the ac-
tual shift counter) are displayed.
The entire set of faults since the last delete date
that caused an interruption in production, are
displayed for each shift.
C7xCBAData125_D
« Shift number: »
Select the shift number for which the data should be displayed.
12.6 « Delete shifts »

Conditions
Is this data screen, each individual shift, or all

configured shifts can be deleted at the same
time.
C7xCBAData126_D
« Delete shift(s): » Delete shift (☞ Part 3, Page161)
Menu « 20 Quality data actual values, card »

Group of data screens for display of the quality data:
20.1 « Q-Data actual values card A% »

Option: Coiler
In this data screen the difference between the

actual value and the setpoint of the sliver weight
is displayed.
C7xCBAData201_D

changeover.
A diagram is shown with the selected time base.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 69
Operation
« A% »
Calculation after the measured length entered in data screen 22.1.
« A% 100 »
Calculation after 100 m of measured length
(Actual value sliver - setpoint sliver) x 100 / divided by setpoint sliver.
A sliver that is too light results in a negative A%100 value.
20.2 « Q-data act. values card CV%..CV100 »

Option: Coiler
In this data screen the actual quality values for

CV% and CV1...100 are displayed.
C7xCBAData202_D

changeover.
« CV%-CV100 »
Selectable cut length, for which a figure is displayed.
« CV values »
Current weight variations of the card sliver (in %) over the programmable reference length (in
metres) .
Enter the reference length in data screen 22.2.
20.3 « Q-data act. values card spectrogram »

Option: Coiler
In this data screen, the range of wavelengths

in the spectrogram from 0.02 m...100 m is dis-
played.
Wavelengths measured in yards must be conver-
ted accordingly (0.914 x ...m).
By pressing the button « ? » the causes are lis-
ted. The causes of the errors that are displayed
in the spectrogram.
C7xCBAData203_D
« Peak in spectrogram »
Press the « ? » button? to show, in an additional display, those machine parts which could cause
the errors.
For example, the machine part "doffer" is displayed, which was determined to be the first possible
cause of the periodic oscillation.
20.4 « Quality, actual values, card, slubs »

Option: Coiler
In this data screen the number of slubs in the

produced sliver are displayed.
At low sliver weight, higher deflections will be
displayed, which however are not faults in the
sliver because they are caused naturally.
At low sliver weight select a higher class >±20%.
C7xCBAData204_D

changeover.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 71
Operation
« Range +15% - +45% »

Selectable class, for which a figure is displayed.
« Number of slubs »
Display of the current number of slubs per kilometre in the card sliver produced.
Menu « 21 Quality data actual values, coiler »

Option: Coiler RSB, RQM Rieter Quality Monitor
Group of data screens for entry of the quality data on the RQM quality monitor:
21.1 « Q-data actual values RQM A% »

Conditions
This data screen appears only in the RSB mod-

ule with an activated RQM.
A diagram can be displayed for various hours.
The time base can be changed so that switching
can be carried out without any loss of data.
C7xRSBData211_D

changeover.
21.2 « Q-data actual values RQM CV%..CV5 »

Conditions

RQM display of the actual quality values CV%
and CV1...5
A diagram can be displayed for various hours.
The time base can be changed so that switching
can be carried out without any loss of data.
C7xRSBData212_D

changeover.
« CV% CV1...CV5 »
Selectable length of cut for determining the weight variation.
21.3 « Q-data act. values RQM spectrogram »

Conditions

C7xRSBData213_D
« Spectrogram »
Actual spectrogram of the RQM
The wave length ranges in the spectrogram from 0.020 m to 10 m are displayed with the aid of
columns.
The spectrogram errors can be determined by the distribution and the height of the columns.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 73
Operation
21.4 « Q-data act. values coiler RSB »

Conditions

Deviation of the incoming card sliver in relation to
the harmonized scanning roller clearance 0%
C7xRSBData214_D
« Tolerance feeler rolls A%: »

The value is calculated rolling (running) over 100 m of sliver...
Menu « 22 Quality data set values, card »

Production value groups:
Option: No RQM Rieter Quality Monitor, Coiler
Integrated card sliver monitor (Configuration in menu 22)

The signal is measured on the disc rollers on the delivery of the card.
Option (Retrofittable): RQM Rieter Quality Monitor, Coiler RSB
Quality monitor RQM (Configuration in menu 23)

The signal for RQM is measured on the calendar rollers on the RSB module.
22.1 « Q-data set values card A% »

Option: Coiler
Conditions
In this data screen, you specify when the integ-

rated card sliver monitor trips.
C7xCBAData221_D
This data screen is for display only. Value for the

quality monitor is not effective.
C7xRSBData221_D
« Measured length: » Setting the shut-down limit A% of the card sliver monitor
Option: No RQM Rieter Quality Monitor
« Monitoring: » Setting the shut-down limit A% of the card sliver monitor

« Shut-off limit: » Setting the shut-down limit A% of the card sliver monitor
« Length up to malfunction: » Setting the shut-down limit A% of the card sliver monitor
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 75
Operation
22.2 « Q-data set values card CV% »

Option: Coiler
Conditions

C7xCBAData222_D

C7xRSBData222_D
« Reference length: » Setting the shut-down limit for CV of the card sliver mon-
itor (☞ Part 3, Page153)
« Monitoring: »
The monitoring can be switched on or off.
« Cutting length monitored: » Setting the shut-down limit for CV of the card sliver mon-
« Shut-off limit: » Setting the shut-down limit for CV of the card sliver mon-
« Length up to malfunction: » Setting the shut-down limit for CV of the card sliver mon-
22.3 « Q-data set values CV% corrc. »

Option: Coiler
Conditions
The CV% value is determined on the disc roller

on the delivery of the card.
In this data screen, the CV% value determined by
the card can be compared with the value meas-
ured in the laboratory.
C7xCBAData223_D

C7xRSBData223_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 77
Operation
« CV% correct. factor: »

If the software is changed, then this value can be re-entered.
« CV% correct. start run: » Starting material withdrawal (☞ Part 3, Page154)
« CV%, measured at card: »

The CV% value of the card sliver (300 m) produced is displayed.
« CV% lab. value: »

Enter the value determined in the laboratory and confirm the entry.
« Can change: »
Length to be produced until the can change (provided that the CV% correction procedure has been
started).
22.4 « Q-data set values card spectrogr. »

Option: Coiler
Conditions

C7xCBAData224_D

C7xRSBData224_D
« Interval length: » Adjusting the shut-off limit – card sliver monitor, spectro-
gram (☞ Part 3, Page155)
« Monitoring: »
« Shut-off limit: » Adjusting the shut-off limit – card sliver monitor, spectro-
« Length up to malfunction: » Adjusting the shut-off limit – card sliver monitor, spectro-
22.5 « Qual., target values, card, slubs »

Option: Coiler
Conditions
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 79
Operation

C7xCBAData225_D

C7xRSBData225_D
« Reference length: » Adjusting the shut-off limit – card sliver monitor, slubs
« Monitoring: »
« Class monitored: »
The selected class is monitored.
« Shut-off limit: » Adjusting the shut-off limit – card sliver monitor, slubs
« Length up to malfunction: » Adjusting the shut-off limit – card sliver monitor, slubs
Menu « 23 Quality data set values, coiler »

Group of data screens for configuration of the RQM quality monitor:

23.1 « Q-data set values RQM A% »

Conditions
In this data screen the RQM is calibrated and

configured.
C7xRSBData231_D
« Auto. adapt. sliver RQM: »

Yes: Automatic adjustment must be activated while the machine is running. The momentary clear-
ance of the scanning rollers (capstan wheels) is measured over a specific length and the reference
value for the A% monitoring is saved (scanning roller clearance 0%) The LED display (+/- 5%) is
automatically brought 0% into the range by over this measured clearance. The exiting sliver and
the display by the green LED (0% range) are again harmonized with each other.
The matching must be done only when it has been ensured that the actual sliver weight is in the
greatest possible agreement with the desired sliver weight.
This matching is required only when: Assortment change, target value correction of the sliver
weight, change of the delivery rate, change of the sliver guiding parts (sliver funnel, card web
nozzle, spring force)
« Feeler roll clearance at 0%: »

In the case of an EPROM change the value previously read off can be re-entered.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 81
Operation
« Measured length: »
Input of the measured length that is required for the calculation of the percent sliver weight devi-
ation A% of the exiting sliver at the module.
Length
Range 25 – 100 m
● Requirement ≈ 100 m
Tendency: Longer Fewer stops
Tendency: Shorter More stops
« Monitoring: »
Status of the monitor:

● « OFF »
● « ON »
« Shut-off limit: »
If the defined A% shutoff limit value is continually exceeded for the set length in metres (distance to
malfunction), the card production is switched off.
Tolerance (A%)
Range 0.5 – 10 %
● Requirement ≈5%
Tendency: Relatively high Fewer stops
Tendency: Relatively low More stops
« Length up to malfunction: »
Enter the length of the card sliver to be produced; if the shutoff limit A% for the given length is con-
tinually exceeded, the card production is switched off.
Delay
Range 0 – 1,000 m
● Requirement 0m
23.2 « Q-data set values RQM CV% »

Conditions
In this data screen set when the quality monitor

trips.
C7xRSBData232_D
« Reference length: »
Sliver length over which the CV% values are calculated.
Length
Range 400 m
« Monitoring: »
Determination of the sliver weight variation shutoff limit CV% for the coiler.
If the defined CV% shutoff limit value is continually exceeded for the set length in metres (distance
until malfunction), the card production is switched off.
Tolerance (CV%)
Range 0.5 – 10 %
● Requirement ≈5%
Tendency: Relatively large Fewer stops
Tendency: Relatively small More stops
Enter the length of the card sliver to be produced; if the shutoff limit CV% for the given length is
continually exceeded, the card production is switched off.
Delay
Range 0 – 1,000 m
● Requirement 0m
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 83
Operation
23.3 « Q-data set values RQM CV% corrc. »

Conditions
In this data screen the CV% value determined

by the RQM can be compared with the value
measured in the laboratory.
The CV% is determined on the delivery discs in
the RSB module.
C7xRSBData233_D
« CV% correct. factor: »

Computed correction factor.
If the software is changed, then this value can be re-entered.
« CV% correct. start run: »

Yes: After activation, a can change occurs automatically. 300 m sliver is placed in the empty can
and then the can is automatically changed.
Test the produced sliver in the laboratory.
Selection:
● « Yes »
« CV% correct. start run: » Starting material withdrawal (☞ Part 3, Page154)
« CV% averaged by RQM: »

The CV% value of the produced card sliver (300 m) is displayed.
« CV% lab. value: »

Enter the value determined in the laboratory and confirm.
Using the value determined by the RQM and in the laboratory, the program calculates a new cor-
rection factor. This factor is stored in the computer and displayed. All CV% values determined by
the RQM are now corrected by application of this factor, so that the RQM value and the laboratory
value are identical.
« Can change: »
Lengths to be produced prior to change of can, provided that the CV% correction process has been
started.
23.4 « Q-data set values RQM spectrogr »

Conditions
In this data screen set when the quality monitor

trips.
C7xRSBData234_D
« Interval length: »
Entry of the meters to be produced between two spectrogram captures.
Length
Range 1,600 – 10,000 m
● Default 1,600 m
« Monitoring: »
The production of the card is stopped when specific amplitudes are higher than the pre-set factors.
Example: Set factor 2.0. Successive measured amplitudes are in the 100 area.
Now if an amplitude from this area is on 200 (factor 2x100) the production of the card stops.
Tolerance
Range 1.4 – 5 %
● Default ≈2%
If the defined shutoff limit is continuously exceeded during the defined number of meters, card pro-
duction is switched off.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 85
Operation
Delay
Range 0 – 1,000 m
● Default 1,000 m
Menu « 30 Information general »

Group of data screens for display of general information:
30.1 « Information machine »

In this data screen information concerning the
software release of the various modules is dis-
played.
C7xCBAData301_D
« Software release panel: »

Information concerning the software release.
« Software release A20: »

Information concerning the software release.
« Network address: »
The network address for the respective machine is displayed if the machines are connected to the
higher-level SPIDERweb system.
Configuration in data screen 43.2
« Software release RSB/D95: »

The CPU temperature is displayed.
Conditions
« Card max deliv. 400 m/min WA6/7 62.5/51 »

The maximum possible delivery is displayed.
30.2 « Information freq. converter »

Option: Coiler

played.
C7xCBAData302_D

played.
C7xVKData302_D
Option: Prepared for compacting roller

played.
C7xVKSData302_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 87
Operation
« Freq.converter »
Frequency converter of the selected machine part.
« Vers »
Software version of the selected frequency converter. Can change for the following versions (cur-
rently 6100).
« Vers CAN »
Software version of the CAN adapter for the selected frequency converter. Can change for the fol-
lowing versions (currently 3102).
Menu « 31 Information logs, statistics »

Group of data screens for display of statistics settings:
31.1 « Info events occurred »

In this data screen the most recent 400 events
are displayed in chronological order with date
and time of occurrence and duration until rectific-
ation (h:min:sec).
C7xCBAData311_D
« Two types of entries »

Events: Faults, messages, warnings, maintenance warnings, etc.
Operator interventions: Operating activities, setpoint changes, operating mode changes, informa-
tion on tonnes produced with one set of clothing, etc.
« Deleting the entries »

Entries no longer required are deleted in data screen 31.6.
31.2 « Info current malfunctions »

In this screen a maximum of 20 momentarily
queued faults can be displayed chronologically
with code, message text (summary), date/time of
occurrence.
C7xCBAData312_D
« Info current malfunctions »

A maximum of 20 currently queued faults can be displayed chronologically with code, message text
(summary), date/time of occurrence.
31.3 « Info current warnings »

In this data screen, the currently queued warn-
ings are displayed.
C7xCBAData313_D
« 655 »
The warnings are displayed here chronologically with code, message text (brief summary) and
entry date/time.

13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 89
Operation
31.4 « Info current maintenance warnings »

In this screen a maximum of 20 currently queued
maintenance warnings are displayed chrono-
logically with code, message text (summary),
date/time of occurrence.
C7xCBAData314_D

31.5 « Info events maintenance »

The last 1200 events that have occurred, such
as faults, warnings, maintenance warnings, mes-
sages, entries in data screen 70.1, etc. are dis-
played in chronological order with code, message
text (summary), date/time of occurrence and dur-
ation (h:min:sec).
C7xCBAData315_D
« Info events maintenance »
« Two types of entries »

Events: Faults, messages, warnings, maintenance warnings, etc.
Operator interventions: Operating activities, setpoint changes, operating mode changes, informa-
tion on tonnes produced with one set of clothing, etc.
31.6 « Info delete lists »

Conditions
In this data screen the logs in data screens 31.1,

31.3 and 31.4 can be deleted individually.
C7xCBAData316_D
Menu « 40 Settings, general »

Group of data screens for entry of the general setup values:
40.1 « Settings date/time »

Conditions
In this data screen general data must be entered.
C7xCBAData401_D
« Time in: » Setting the season (☞ Part 4, Page200)
« Time: » Setting the time system (☞ Part 4, Page200)
« Date: » Setting the date (☞ Part 4, Page200)
« Year of construction: »
The machine's year of manufacture is displayed.
« Serial number: »
The serial number of the machine is displayed.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 91
Operation
« Operating hours: »
The operating hours are displayed (added up since the machine was commissioned).
« Time basis efficiency: » Adjusting the efficiency calculation and display

40.2 « Settings units/operation »

Conditions
Option: Coiler
In this data screen units can be configured.
C7xCBAData402_D
In this data screen units can be configured.
C7xVKData402_D
« Unit of measure: » Entering units (☞ Part 4, Page201)

Entering units (☞ Part 4, Page201)
Option: Coiler
« Unit sliver weight: » Entering units (☞ Part 4, Page201)
« Web weight, unit: » Entering units (☞ Part 4, Page201)
« Basic screen: » Configuring the display (☞ Part 4, Page201)
« Data page selection: » Configuring the display (☞ Part 4, Page201)
« Efficiency selection: » Adjusting the efficiency calculation and display

« Operation: » Setting the display mode for electronic support

Setting the display mode for production operation
40.3 « Settings languages »

Conditions
In this data screen the required languages are

activated.
C7xCBAData403_D
« French: » Activating required languages (☞ Part 4, Page203)
« French: to Indonese: »
Menu « 41 Settings, machine »

Group of data screens for entry of the machine-specific setup values:
41.1 « Settings card delivery »

Option: Coiler
Conditions
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 93
Operation
Option: Coiler CBA
In this data screen settings are made for delivery

of the card.
C7xCBAData411_D
Option: Coiler SB

of the card.
C7xSBData411_D
Option: Coiler RSB

of the card.
C7xRSBData411_D
« Levelling sliver weight: » Switching on/switching off the Autoleveller – sliver weight
« Automatic acceleration: » Configuring automatic ramp-up (☞ Part 2, Page19)
« Delivery draft » Determine draft (☞ Part 3, Page118)

Determine draft (☞ Part 3, Page119)
Setting the draft for doffer roller / delivery rollers
Conditions
« Adaptation sliver weight » Adjusting the sliver weight in creep speed

Conditions
« Card at creep speed: » Adjusting the sliver weight in creep speed

« Reset to setup draft: » Resetting the delay of the Autoleveller (☞ Part 3, Page75)
41.1 « Settings card delivery »

Conditions
Option: Non-woven fabric

OR Non-woven tape
In this data screen, settings are made for delivery

of the web card.
C7xVKData411_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 95
Operation
In this data screen, settings are made for delivery

of the web card.
C7xVKSData411_D
« Speed creep speed: »

Setting of an individual machine (without higher-level control)
Speed
Without higher-level controller 8 – 15 m/min
« Speed creep speed: » Configuring the card delivery (☞ Part 3, Page75)
« Nomi. value, ext. delivery: »

Depending on the selection, delivery will be specified externally or from the card controller.
Default – delivery:
● Off
Specification for the delivery (delivery speed) can be set in the appropriate data screen
● On
Prescribed value for the delivery (delivery speed) must be entered externally. The value can no
longer be entered in the respective data screen for the card.
« Nomi. value, ext. delivery: » Configuring the card delivery (☞ Part 3, Page75)
« Maximum delivery, external: »

If the web weight is changed, then the card production will also change.
Units of measure for the web weight: Data screen 40.2
Maximum speed
Option: Non-woven fabric 50 – 270 m/min
OR Non-woven tape
Option: Prepared for compacting roller 50 – 140 m/min
« Maximum delivery, external: » Configuring the card delivery (☞ Part 3, Page75)
« Delivery draft: »
The draft between the take-off roller and the delivery rollers can be adjusted to the raw material.
min. - max.: 1.00 - 1.50
« Draft, compr.rol.2, del.rol.: »

The draft between the second compacting roller and the delivery roller can be adjusted to the raw
material.
min. - max.: 1.00 - 1.50
« Draft, doffer, compression rol.1: »

The draft between the doffer and the first compacting roller can be adjusted to the raw material.
min. - max.: 0.55 - 0.63
« Adaptation, web weight Card at Adjust the correct web weight in crawl-speed mode
creep speed: » (☞ Part 3, Page116)
« Reset to setup draft: » Resetting the delay of the Autoleveller (☞ Part 3, Page75)
41.2 « Settings feed/cylinder »

Conditions
In this data screen settings can be made in the

feed and cylinder areas.
C7xCBAData412_D
« Autolevelling batt: » Switching on/switching off the batt Autoleveller

« Feed safety device threshold: » Setting the switch-off point of the feed protection
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 97
Operation
« Threshold re.max.batt weight: »

Displays the calculated switch-off factor in the proportion of the total measurement distance of the
feed measuring device.
« Spring tens. angle feed trough: » Entering the load of the feed trough (☞ Part 3, Page113)
« Monitoring cylinder rpm: » Configuring the speed monitor for the cylinder
« Shut-off speed cylinder: »

This is where the switch-off point is displayed in rpm.
« Shut-off thres. f. suc.pres.: » Setting the switch point (☞ Part 4, Page241)
« Cylinder after power failure: » Adjusting the behaviour if the power supply is interrupted
« Stop flats after cleaning: »

When using an additional external cleaning device, "No" must be set so that the card flats are not
stopped. Because otherwise the card flat that came to a standstill under the external cleaning
device, would be damaged.
41.3 « Settings IGS »

Conditions
In this data screen, experiential values are set

concerning maintenance of the cylinder clothing.
C7xCBAData413_D
« IGS-classic (Cylinder) »
« Lifetime of clothing: » Changing the service life of the cylinder clothing
« End of service life: » Check wear of IGS grind stone (☞ Part 4, Page88)
Changing the service life of the cylinder clothing
Changing the service life of the card flat clothing
« Grinding budget: » Changing the service life of the cylinder clothing
« IGS-top (Flats) »
« Lifetime of clothing: » Changing the service life of the card flat clothing
« End of service life: » Changing the service life of the card flat clothing
« Grinding time/life: » Changing the service life of the card flat clothing
41.4 « Settings, chute »

In this data screen, the monitoring or control unit
of the chute filling is configured. So that a uniform
batt weight can be achieved, the condition and
density of the material used must be configured.
C7xCBAData414_D
« Re-adjust targ. press. chute: »

Switch on this function in production mode. This function can be switched off for tests.
« Chute, batt weight: » Setting the batt weight (☞ Part 3, Page110)
« Mass density of material: » Setting the batt weight (☞ Part 3, Page110)
« Type of raw material: » Setting the batt weight (☞ Part 3, Page110)
« Adjust pressure, chute: » Checking the batt weight (☞ Part 3, Page111)
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 99
Operation
« Correction factor, pressure: »

This internally determined value is displayed so that it can be re-entered after a software update.
« Target pressure, chute: »

The value determined internally will be displayed.
Menu « 42 Settings, coiler »

Group of data screens for entry of the setup values of the coiler:
42.1 « Settings RSB »

Option: Coiler RSB
Conditions
In this data screen parameters can be assigned

for the Autoleveller
An extensive description can be found in the RSB
module operating instructions.
C7xRSBData421_D
« Autolevel. draft system: »

The Autoleveller can be switched on or off.
« Autom. adapt sliver weight: »

The current clearance of the feeler rolls is measured over a certain sliver length and is stored as
nominal spacing. (Scanning roller clearance 0% - error = scanning roller clearance at 0% deviation.
The servomotor stops).
The continuously derived mean that deviates from the original nominal spacing (0% error) is stored
as the new nominal spacing during an adjustment. As a result, the display for the Autoleveller is
back within the green LED range.
Switch off the Autoleveller during automatic adjustment.
When the machine is in normal production, wait until the actual value of the sliver weight of the card
(data screen 11.1, value in the display, right) has reached the setpoint (data screen 10.1).
This adjustment is normally necessary only if there is a change in the assortment or a large change
in nominal value of the sliver weight.

The spacing of the scan rollers (1.40 to 2.60 mm) must be within the possible setting range of the
adaptation. Possibly Repeat the adjustment or use the appropriate scanning rollers for the card
sliver. See operating manual for the RSB module.
« Sorted sliver weight: »

The module Autoleveller must be switched on during the test delivery run.
On inputting the measured sliver weight, the Autoleveller is corrected to the extent that
subsequently the nominal weight is again produced. Repeat the procedure if the actual weight does
not equal the nominal weight.
Commissioning (Autoleveller RSB not yet adjusted): In this data screen during commissioning, the
sliver is harmonized after the drafting system.
« Feeler roll clearance 0%: »

The scanning roller clearance can be altered using the PLUS or MINUS buttons. However, this
option should only be used in the event of a software update.
Before making a software change, the values displayed must be noted so that, after the update
they can be input again for each machine and production value group.
« Levelling action point: »

The levelling action point of the module depends on the delivery speed of the card.
When a change is made to the nominal delivery speed of the card, the levelling action point is also
altered. It has to be determined again.
« Adaptation sliver weight to slow speed: »

Adjustment at slow speed. The measuring error between the speed at can change and the normal
delivery speed is corrected. The setting depends on the material properties, the feed speed and the
loading on the scanning rollers.
First select and input a standard setting. Finally, determine the sliver weight and alter it correspond-
ingly in the data screen.
Guidelines for the settings: Carded cotton: 50 - 80% cotton / man-made fibre: 30 - 65% man-made
fibre: 0 - 20
Determine the sliver weight (5 x 10 m):
1. Extraction: At the normal delivery speed of the module.

2. Extraction: At the delivery speed during can change. The set delivery speed during the can
change (data screen 42.3) must be entered for the removal in data screen 10.1.
Calculation: Sliver eight at can change x 100 divided by sliver weight at delivery speed with 100
subtracted.
Based on the sliver weight determined, carry out the adjustment over the percentile. A difference of
1% between the two sliver weights corresponds approximately to a change of 20% of the adjusted
weight in the data screen.
Change value: Sliver weight at can change heavier = increase value.
Sliver weight at can change lighter = reduce value.
The adjustment can be set in steps of 5%
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 101

Operation
42.2 « Settings RSB levelling intensity »

Option: Coiler RSB
Conditions
The regulating intensity can be set in this data

screen. The levelling intensity is a reinforcement
parameter that controls the degree of levelling
regarding compensation for nips and slubs by the
levelling drive system.
C7xRSBData422_D
« Levelling intensity: »
The levelling intensity corrects levelling errors of under-levelling or over-levelling. To do this, how-
ever, the basics must be worked out in a sliver test. The detailed description of this test is provided
in the RSB module operating manual.
● Over-levelling -> reduce intensity

● Under-levelling = increase intensity
Example:
● Sliver -15%: A% = - 0.600% = under-levelling

● Sliver -15%: A% = - 0.600% = under-levelling
If A% for sliver -15% deviates significantly from sliver +15%, then the average of the two values
must be formed for the change in the leveller intensity.
Average value of the two results: 0.400%
Change: Increase leveller intensity by 0.400%.
Percentage value 0 – 100 %
« Calibrate levelling intensity: »

The calibration of the levelling intensity can be switched on or off.
« Sliver weight card: »

For carrying out the sliver test for setting the control intensity in the data screen, the sliver weight of
the card can be changed by up to a maximum of +20% or -20%.
The sliver weight must not exceed its limit value. (Error message)
The delivery speed of the card is not affected by this activity.

« Sliver length disk rolls and feeler roll RSB: »

The card sliver must be positioned between the two elements in such a manner that the displayed
value is 2150 (display in data screen 82.2).
Then measure the drawn sliver length and enter it in the data screen.
42.3 « Settings coiler I »

Option: Coiler
Conditions
Option: Coiler CBA
This data screen can be used to make settings in

the delivery section.
C7xCBAData423_D
Option: Coiler SB

C7xSBData423_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 103

Operation
Option: Coiler RSB

C7xRSBData423_D
« Empty can warning: » Warning – set empty can (☞ Part 3, Page80)
« Deliv. can change, card: » Correction of displayed CV% values based on laboratory
values (☞ Part 3, Page154)
Setting the delivery speed for manual can change
« Can filling correction: » Correcting the can fill quantity (☞ Part 3, Page135)
« Blow-in time: » Adjusting the air injector of the coiler (☞ Part 3, Page128)
« Max. time, funnel to top: » Adjusting the lift sliver funnel monitor (☞ Part 3, Page126)
« Sliver cutting length: » Wrong clamping duration (☞ Part 3, Page127)
« Man. can change, lower speed: » Setting the speed for manual can change
42.4 « Settings coiler II »

Option: Coiler RSB
OR Coiler SB
Conditions

Option: Coiler RSB
The central lubrication system of the RSB module

can be configured in this data screen.
C7xRSBData424_D
Option: Coiler SB
The central lubrication system of the RSB module

can be configured in this data screen.
C7xSBData424_D
« Lubrication interval Drafting system: »

Lubrication must be done after the pre-set time has run down.
The machine is blocked if no lubrication is carried out after the pre-set production hours are ex-
ceeded.
The machine is only unblocked upon re-lubrication.
See data screen 71.1
If the interval time remaining is still less than 168 hours, the red LED (service) lights up.
An entry is made in data screen 31.4.
Central lubrication: All lubrication points are supplied with lubricant together.
Interval 200 – 2,000 h
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 105

Operation
« Number of pulses: »
If lubrication is performed with the entered number of lubrication pulses, lubrication is guaranteed
within the given lubrication interval.
Execute lubrication, see data screen 71.1
Number 4 – 10
● Default 5
Menu « Machine configuration »

Group of data screens for entry of the setup values:
43.1 « Machine configuration »

Conditions
✓ In data screen 80.1 the operating mode « Change configuration » is selected.
Option: Coiler CBA
The machine must always be configured in this

data screen.
C7xCBAData431_D
Option: Coiler SB

data screen.
C7xSBData431_D

Option: Coiler RSB

data screen.
C7xRSBData431_D

data screen.
C7xVKData431_D
« Card type: » Configure machine type (☞ Part 4, Page196)
« Licker-in » Configuring the number of licker-ins (☞ Part 4, Page197)
« Cylinder drive: » Configuring the type of cylinder drive (☞ Part 4, Page197)
« Cylinder motor: »
This is where the motor power is displayed. This depends on the card type.
« Flat type: » Configuring the type of card flat (☞ Part 4, Page197)
« Flats drive: » Configuring the version of flat drive (☞ Part 4, Page197)
« U11/U12 interc.activ.: » Configuring the converter composite (☞ Part 4, Page197)
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 107

Operation
Option: Coiler
« Coiler: » Configuring the type of coiler (☞ Part 4, Page198)
« Disk rolls: » Adjusting the sliver weight (☞ Part 3, Page71)

Configuring the disk roller (☞ Part 4, Page198)
43.2 « Configuration options »

Conditions
✓ In data screen 80.1 the operating mode « Change configuration » is selected.
Option: Coiler CBA

data screen.
C7xCBAData432_D
Option: Coiler SB

data screen.
C7xSBData432_D

Option: Coiler RSB

data screen.
C7xRSBData432_D

data screen.
C7xVKData432_D
« Network: » Option – configure network (☞ Part 4, Page199)
« IGS-classic (cylinder): » Option – configure IGS-Classic (☞ Part 4, Page199)
« IGS-top (flats): » Option – configure IGS-Top (☞ Part 4, Page199)
« Rieter Quality Monitor (RQM): » Configure Option Rieter quality monitor

« Uster Sliverguard: » Configure Option Rieter quality monitor

13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 109

Operation
« Licker-in/Vane transposition: » Configure option – knife adjustment (☞ Part 4, Page199)
« Drive: » Option – configure drive licker-in (☞ Part 4, Page200)
Menu « 50 Configuration, shifts »

Group of data screens for entry of the shift data:
50.1 « Configuration shift selection »

Conditions
In this data screen the key shift planning data can

be determined.
DS-50-01_001
« Shift switchover: » Setting the number of shifts (☞ Part 3, Page159)

Setting the type of shift changeover (☞ Part 3, Page159)
Programming the shift schedule (☞ Part 3, Page160)
Changeover shift manually (☞ Part 2, Page27)
Option (Retrofittable): SPIDERweb
« Number of shifts: » Setting the number of shifts (☞ Part 3, Page159)
« Current shift: » Changeover shift manually (☞ Part 2, Page27)
« Partial shift report: » Determining the procedure for how the shift will be con-
cluded (☞ Part 3, Page160)
50.2 « Configuration shifts shift schedule »

Conditions

In this data screen, the shift schedule for a week

is entered.
We suggest creating (programming) a daily
schedule and then copying it into the other days
of the week.
Any deviations can be input individually. Changes
in the values are only possible on the left side.
C7xCBAData502_D
« First line » Duplicating a day shift schedule (☞ Part 3, Page160)
« Second line left » Programming the shift day schedule (☞ Part 3, Page160)
« Lines 1-8 left » Programming the shift day schedule (☞ Part 3, Page160)
Menu « 60 Production value groups »

Group of data screens for entry of production value groups:
60.1 « Value group management »

Conditions
In this data screen production values can be

stored in groups for specific applications.
For example, an application can be a specific
assortment.
C7xCBAData601_D
« Framed number upper right »

Displays the current production values group.
The current production values can be changed in the menus 22, 41, 42.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 111

Operation
« Group: » Selecting the production value group (☞ Part 3, Page157)
« Function: » Selecting the production value group (☞ Part 3, Page157)

Loading existing production values into a new group
Naming the value group (☞ Part 3, Page157)
60.2 « Value groups preview machine »

Option: Coiler CBA
In this data screen the values of two groups can

be compared.
C7xCBAData602_D
Option: Coiler SB

be compared.
C7xSBData602_D

Option: Coiler RSB

be compared.
C7xRSBData602_D

be compared.
C7xVKData602_D
« Group: » Comparing values of two groups in the preview

60.3 « Value groups preview quality »

be compared.
C7xCBAData603_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 113

Operation

60.4 « Value groups, preview, feed »

be compared.
C7xCBAData604_D

Menu « 70 Maintenance clothings »

Group of data screens for configuration of clothing maintenance:
70.1 « Maintenance clothings machine I »

Conditions
In this data screen, multiple production quantity

counters are displayed.
This data screen shows which maintenance task
has been executed.
After executing such a maintenance task, here
the appropriate counter must be set to zero
manually.
C7xCBAData701_D
« IGS-cylinder grinding: »
For the IGS grinding process, the counter will be reset automatically.
« Cylinder reclothing: » Resetting the counter after grinding (☞ Part 4, Page66)

« Flats grinding: » Resetting the counter after grinding (☞ Part 4, Page77)
70.2 « Maintenance clothings machine II »

Conditions
In this data screen, multiple production quantity

counters are displayed.
Each counter is assigned for a specific task.
If such a task has been executed, then here the
appropriate counter must be set to zero manu-
ally.
This data screen shows when which mainten-
ance task has been executed.
C7xCBAData702_D
« Doffer grinding: » Resetting the counter after grinding (☞ Part 4, Page68)
« Doffer clothing: » Changing doffer clothing (☞ Part 4, Page67)

Resetting the counter after activating (☞ Part 4, Page68)
70.3 « Maintenance clothings IGS »

In this data screen the actions of IGS are logged.
This is where the current actual values are dis-
played.
C7xCBAData703_D
« Inspecti.of grindstone: » Installing the grinding stone (☞ Part 4, Page89)

Check wear of IGS grind stone (☞ Part 4, Page88)
« Grinding force: » Reducing grinding pressure (☞ Part 4, Page104)

Increasing the grinding pressure (☞ Part 4, Page104)
Check current consumption (with grinding brush contact
on the card flats clothing) (☞ Part 4, Page102)
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 115

Operation
Menu « 71 Maintenance lubrication »

Group of data screens for configuration of lubrication:
71.1 « Maintenance lubrication coiler »

Option: Coiler RSB
OR Coiler SB
Conditions
Option: Coiler SB
The lubrication system for the coiler can be con-

figured in this data screen.
A detailed description can be found in the operat-
ing manual for the module.
C7xSBData711_D
Option: Coiler RSB
The lubrication system for the coiler can be con-

figured in this data screen.
A detailed description can be found in the operat-
ing manual for the module.
C7xRSBData711_D
« Lubrication, drafting system: »

This is where the post-lubrication process can be executed.

« Lubrication, top rollers: »

This is where the post-lubrication process can be executed.
« Drafting system: »
Time remaining to the next lubrication interval.
« Top rollers: »
Time remaining to the next lubrication interval.
Menu « 80 Operating mode/Tests »

Group of data screens for selection of operating mode, as well as tests:
80.1 « Operating mode switchover »

Conditions
In this data screen the operating mode must be

selected.
C7xCBAData801_D
« Operating mode: »
The right operating mode must be selected depending on the situation.
Operating mode
Operating mode: « Automatic mode » Mode for production operation
Operating mode: « Test mode » Test functions in the menus 82 - 85 can be
executed
Operating mode: « Change configuration » Data screen 43.1 and 43.2 can be changed
Operating mode: « Service mode » Operating mode for grinding and pulling on
the clothing in menu 81.
Menu « 81 Grind/put on »
In this menu, parameters are set for grinding the clothing elements of the cylinder, the doffers and
the card flats.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 117

Operation
Group of data screens for execution of clothing maintenance:
81.1 « Grind cylinder clothing »

Conditions
✓ In data screen 80.1 the operating mode « Service mode » is selected.
Option: Coiler, Cylinder drive with frequency converter
This data screen is for grinding the cylinder cloth-

ing.
C7xCBAData811_D
Option: Coiler, Cylinder drive with belt pulley

ing.
C7xCBANData811_D


ing.
C7xVKData811_D
« Functioning of cyl.: » Scratching out the clothing (☞ Part 4, Page64)
« Carry out servicing: » Scratching out the clothing (☞ Part 4, Page64)
« Cylinder rpm actual: »

The current cylinder rpm is shown.
81.2 « Grind doffer clothing »

Conditions
This data screen is for grinding the doffer cloth-

ing.
C7xCBAData812_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 119

Operation
« Doffer rpm actual: »

The current doffer rpm is displayed.
81.3 « Servicing, flats, clothing »

Conditions
This data screen is for grinding the clothing of the

card flats.
C7xCBAData813_D
« Carry out servicing: »

The following activities can be selected here.
Action:
● « Flat grinding »
● « Flat measurement »
● « Flat reversal »
● « No »
« Carry out servicing: » Activate the card flats drive for grinding
Activating measurement mode for the positioning of the
card flats (☞ Part 3, Page88)
Driving card flats in reverse (☞ Part 3, Page95)
« Target speed for flats: » Setting the lowest speed for grinding (☞ Part 4, Page74)
« Flats speed act. value: »

Display of the entered card flats speed.
« Monitoring flats speed B2 »

Switch status of the proximity switches for monitoring the card flats.

« Monitoring flats position B8 »

Switch status of the proximity switches for monitoring the card flats.
If the differences of the signals of the two proximity switches vary excessively, the drive of the card
flats switches off.
Menu « 82 Test inputs/outputs and covers »

The inputs are divided into groups. First select the appropriate group, and then select the input to
be tested. The status of the selected input is switched to the beacon. This enables one person to
test an input (e.g. by covering the proximity switch).
Group of data screens for testing of inputs / outputs:
82.1 « Test digital inputs »

Conditions
✓ In data screen 80.1 the operating mode « Test mode » is selected.
Option: Coiler CBA
In this data screen the status of selected control-

ler inputs can be displayed.
An example is presented below that shows how
the controller inputs are organised in groups.
The listing is not complete.
C7xCBAData821_2_D
Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
In this data screen the status of selected control-

ler inputs can be displayed.
the controller inputs are organised in groups.
C7xSBData821_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 121

Operation
« Execute tests: »
This is where the test can be activated.
These digital inputs can be tested.
Selection:
● « Yes »
● « No »
« Group: General »
« MPS chute drives Q42,Q43 »
« MPS chute drives Q41 »
« MPS c.feed roll/clean.brush Q10,Q14 »
« . . . »
« Group: Safety »
« Emergency stop button card S8 »
« Emergency stop relay K21.4 »
« Key switch flats service S6 »
« . . . »
82.2 « Test analog inputs »

Conditions
Option: Coiler CBA

OR Coiler SB
In this data screen the states of the analog inputs

are displayed.
C7xCBAData822_D

Option: Coiler RSB
In this data screen the states of the analog inputs

are displayed.
C7xRSBData822_D
« Chute,pressure measuring B23: » Adjust the pressure monitoring signal.

« Feed scanner card B5: » Adjusting the measuring device in the feed
« Delivery scanner card B6: » Calibrating the measuring device in the delivery
Checking the measuring device of the Autoleveller in the
delivery unit (☞ Part 4, Page237)
Calibrating the measuring device in the delivery
Check setting (☞ Part 4, Page170)
« Suction dev.,press.meas. B12: » Setting the switch point (☞ Part 4, Page241)
« Current grinding drive M55: » Reducing grinding pressure (☞ Part 4, Page104)

Increasing the grinding pressure (☞ Part 4, Page104)
Check current consumption (with grinding brush contact
on the card flats clothing) (☞ Part 4, Page102)
82.3 « Test digital outputs »

Conditions
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 123

Operation
In this data screen the individual analog outputs

can be tested.
Switch off all safety switches for the control sys-
tem, except «Q15». The test cannot be carried
out otherwise.
the outputs are organised in groups.
C7xCBAData823_6_D
« Execute tests: »
This is where the test can be activated.
The digital outputs can be tested.
Selection:
● « Yes »
● « No »
« Group: Coiler 1 »
« Flashing beacon on H2 »
« Changer forwards Y5 B10 »
« Changer forwards Y10 B10 »
« . . . »
« Group: Chute »
« FC feed roll chute enable K41 »
« Chute opening roll K42.1 »
« Chute opening roll K42.3 »
« . . . »
82.4 « Test, door saf. devices + watchdog »

Conditions

In this data screen the states of the door safe-

guards are displayed.
C7xCBAData824_D
« Execute tests: » Testing safety relay "Watchdog" (☞ Part 4, Page210)
« Unlock door S18 » Checking the safety switch electrically

« Door safeguard card S18 »
« Door monitoring relay card K22 »
Menu « 83 Test drives »

If the START key on the operating unit is activated, the selected drive starts. The test function can
be stopped with the STOP key. The target and actual speed and other data are displayed.
Group of data screens for testing the drives:
83.1 « Test feed roll chute »

Conditions
In this data screen drives can be tested.

The information concerning the drive are used for
diagnosis.
C7xCBAData831_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 125

Operation
83.2 « Test opening roll chute »

Conditions
C7xCBAData832_D
« Opening roll actual rpm: »

The effective rpm is displayed.
« Prox. sw. PPV min: » Checking the adjustment of the proximity switch
83.3 « Test fan chute »

Conditions
C7xCBAData833_D
83.4 « Test licker-in »

Conditions

C7xCBAData834_D
C7xCBANData834_D
« Licker-in actual rpm: »
« Prox. sw. PPV min: » Check setting (☞ Part 4, Page228)
83.5 « Test cylinder »

Conditions
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 127

Operation
C7xCBAData835_D
« Prox. sw. PPV min: » Checking the adjustment of the proximity switch
83.6 « Test, flats drive »

Conditions
C7xCBAData836_D
« Target speed for flats: » Activating the card flats drive (☞ Part 4, Page231)
« Flats speed act. value: »
« Alignment of flats, B8: » Checking parallel run (☞ Part 4, Page233)
« Monitoring flats speed B2 »
« Monitoring flats position B8 »

83.7 « Test, clearer roller, flats »

Conditions
C7xCBAData837_D
83.8 « Test cleaner brush »

Conditions
C7xCBAData838_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 129

Operation
83.9 « Test feed roll card »

C7xCBAData839_D
83.10 « Test doffer card »

Conditions
C7xCBAData8310_D
« Doffer actual rpm: »
83.11 « Test delivery card »

Conditions

C7xCBAData8311_D
83.12 « Test main motor coiler »

Option: Coiler
Conditions
Option: Coiler CBA
This data screen can be used to test drive units.
C7xCBAData8312_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 131

Operation
Option: Coiler SB
C7xSBData8312_D
Option: Coiler RSB
C7xRSBData8312_D
83.13 « Test compression rollers »

Conditions

C7xVKSData8313_D
« Run drive tests: »
Menu « 84 Test/Programming devices »

Tests can be executed in this menu.
Group of data screens for testing and programming of devices:
84.1 « Test control unit »

Conditions
This data screen allows testing of buttons and

LEDs.
C7xCBAData841_D
84.2 « Test converter »

Conditions
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 133

Operation
Option: Coiler CBA
In this data screen, the frequency converters can

be individually energised for test purposes.
C7xCBAData842_D
Option: Coiler SB

C7xSBData842_D
Option: Coiler RSB

C7xRSBData842_D


C7xSBData432_D
« Execute tests: » Testing the frequency converter (☞ Part 4, Page210)

Testing frequency converter connection U11-U12
Menu « 85 Test optional devices »

Tests can be executed in this menu.
Group of data screens for testing optional devices:
85.1 « Test IGS-classic »

Option: IGS-Classic
Conditions
In this data screen all functions of IGS-classic

can be tested.
C7xCBAData851_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 135

Operation
« Execute test: » IGS-Classic – executing a function test

« Function: » IGS-Classic – executing a function test

« IGS-classic cyl. right B52 »
« IGS-classic cyl. left B51 »
« Stone in grinding position S53 »
« Grind stone position: » Testing functions (☞ Part 4, Page99)
85.2 « Test IGS-top »

Option: IGS-Top
Conditions
In this data screen all functions of IGS-top can be

tested.
C7xCBAData852_D
« Function: » Measuring current (☞ Part 4, Page102)
« Act. flats no.: »

Display of the current number of ground card flats.
« Flats speed: »
Display of the effective speed of the card flats.
« Targ.current,grinding drive: »
Calculated current consumption of drive motor when the grinding pressure has been set correctly

« Actual curr.,grinding drive: »

Momentary current consumption of the drive motor of the grinding brush (grinding pressure).
« Last check, grinding force: »

Log (results) of the most recent grinding pressure test, calculated for the previous 10 card flats.
85.7 « Test mote knife licker-in »

Option: Automatic licker-in knife adjustment
Conditions
In this data screen all functions of the "automatic

knife adjustment element on the licker-in" can be
tested.
C7xCBAData857_D
« Function: »
The piston rod moves to the selected position.
Function:
● « Approach min. position »
● « Approach max. position »
● « Approach ref. position »
● « Approach setpoint pos. »
● « Ejection distance setpoint: »
« Function: » Move to reference positions (☞ Part 4, Page241)

Moving to target position (☞ Part 4, Page242)
Checking the adjustment (☞ Part 4, Page243)
« Ejection distance actual: »

The current position of the mote knife is displayed.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 137

Operation
« Lifting cylinder ref. pos.: »

The value of the last set reference position is displayed. The value relates to the piston rod of the
lift cylinder. If no value is displayed, a valid reference position has not been stored. This position
will be determined at the next start of the card.
« Scanner licker-in vane M29: »

A/D converter value for the position transducer, for adjusting the mote knife.
6.2 Data screens – advanced operation
This display only appears, if the advanced operation is activated in data screen 40.2.

10.30 « Production set values extended » 2 / Page139
11.31 « Prod. act. val. reg. sliver/deliv. » 2 / Page139
11.32 « Prod. act. val. reg. Sga (batt) » 2 / Page140
11.33 « Prod. act. values reg. chute/sag » 2 / Page141
11.34 « Prod.act.values work elements ext. » 2 / Page141
20.30 « Q-date actual values card feed CV » 2 / Page142
20.31 « Q-data, act. val., card feed spec. » 2 / Page143
30.30 « Information converter ext. » 2 / Page144
30.31 « Information CAN slaves » 2 / Page145
30.32 « Info overview digital inputs » 2 / Page145
30.33 « Info overview digital outputs » 2 / Page146
31.30 « Info exception list » 2 / Page146
31.31 « Info statistic events » 2 / Page146
31.32 « Info Exception Statistik D95K » 2 / Page147
42.30 Option: Coiler SB 2 / Page151
OR Coiler RSB
« Settings coiler extended »

« Settings RSB extended »

43.30 « Reset configuration » 2 / Page154
60.30 « Value groups preview extended I » 2 / Page154
60.31 Option: Coiler CBA 2 / Page156
OR Coiler SB
« Value groups preview extended II »

« Value groups preview extend. III »

60.33 « Value groups preview extend. IV » 2 / Page158

Data screens – advanced operation

« Value groups preview extended V »
10.30 « Production set values extended »

Conditions
This data screen does not contain shift-related

production data.
C7xCBAData1030_D
« List of production data »

Is used for software diagnostics.
11.31 « Prod. act. val. reg. sliver/deliv. »

Conditions
This data screen does not contain shift-related

production data.
Is used for software diagnostics. All parameters
that are not listed are internal control parameters.
C7xCBAData1131_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 139

Operation
« Sliver card »
« BndAD »
A/D converter value for the scanner in the delivery (disk rollers)
« Band (sliver) »
Unfiltered card sliver weight in ktex
« Active »
Levelling of the card sliver weight switched on (disk rollers).
● Off = switched off
● On = switched on
« ExVAD »
A/D converter value. Specification – delivery speed, external. (Web card)
« ExKAD »
A/D converter value. Specification – corrections, web weight, external. (Web card)
« Delivery card »
« Active »
Levelling of the delivery speed
« Nabn »
Doffer rpm
« Vausl »
Delivery speed disk roller unfiltered.
« VerBa »
Drafting between the disk rollers and calender rollers of the coiler CBA.
« VerAS »
Drafting between doffer and disk rollers
« VerAB »
Drafting between the doffer and calender rolls of the coiler.
11.32 « Prod. act. val. reg. Sga (batt) »

Conditions
This data screen displays shift-related production

data.
C7xCBAData1132_D

« Batt, card »
« Active »
Short-term feature
« WatAD: »
A/D converter value for the position transducer in the feed.
« Batt »
Current batt weight standardized.
« WatMt »
Average batt weight standardized. (Over the last 15 minutes)
« WatFk »
Shut-off threshold of the foreign object monitor standardized.
11.33 « Prod. act. values reg. chute/sag »

Conditions
This data screen displays shift-related production

data.
C7xCBAData1133_D
« List of production data »

Is used for software diagnostics.
11.34 « Prod.act.values work elements ext. »

Conditions
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 141

Operation
This data screen shows shift-related production

data, such as efficiency and production.
C7xCBAData1134_D
« Flat »
« ActNo. »
Number of card flats counted since the reference card flat
« GschlDekl »
Number of card flats processed since the start of the IGS-Top grinding cycle
« Target current »
IGS-Top grinding brush drive
« Actual current »
IGS-Top grinding brush drive
« StromAD »
AD converter value, actual current for IGS-Top grinding drive.
« Licker-in »
« VrzTroVrsr »
Mathematical draft calculation between the actual speeds of licker-in and cylinder.
« MeasPos: »
Current position of the mote knife
« MesPosAD »
A/D converter value for the position of the piston rod
« MesPosRef »
Reference position of the piston rod
« VrsrNO »
Speed of licker-in
20.30 « Q-date actual values card feed CV »

Conditions

This data screen shows a graphic presentation in

accordance with the entered parameters.
C7xCBAData2030_D

changeover.
« Sorting length: »
The cut length of the fed-in batt is determined using the two left keys.
Example of the calculation CV 100:
100 divided by the total drafting = meters of the incoming batt
« Values on the last line: »

Coefficients of variation of the incoming batt.
20.31 « Q-data, act. val., card feed spec. »

Conditions
In this data screen the actual values of the quality

data are displayed.
The range of wavelengths in the spectrogram
from 0.01 m...10 m is displayed.
Wavelengths measured in yards must be conver-
ted accordingly. (0..914 x ...m)
C7xCBAData2031_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 143

Operation
« Values »
The level of amplitude is max. 255.
With the aid of this value you can determine the wavelength in which the highest amplitudes are
located. (Peaks)
« Values on the last line: »

Coefficients of variation of the incoming batt.
30.30 « Information converter ext. »

Conditions

frequency converter is displayed.
C7xCBAData3030_D

frequency converter is displayed.
C7xCBANData3030_D
« Freq.converter »
Frequency converter of the selected machine part.
Ret: Protocol repetitions on the CAN bus
T: Temperature (in degrees Celsius) of the frequency converter heat sinks
f: Target frequency (in Hz) of the frequency converters

I: Output current (ampere) – frequency converter
30.31 « Information CAN slaves »

Conditions
In this data screen details of the CAN nodes are

displayed.
C7xCBAData3031_D
« CAN slave »
Overview of the information concerning modules that are attached on the CAN bus.
30.32 « Info overview digital inputs »

Conditions
In this data screen the inputs can be observed

during production operation.
C7xCBAData3032_D
« Module: »
Using the «+» or «-» key, select the IO module, for which the states of the individual inputs should
be displayed.
For each input the status «0» = low (no voltage present) or «1» = high (voltage present) is dis-
played.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 145

Operation
30.33 « Info overview digital outputs »

Conditions
In this data screen, the outputs can be observed

during production operation.
C7xCBAData3033_D
« Module: »
Using the «+» or «-» key, select the IO module, for which the states of the individual outputs should
be displayed.
For each output the status «0» = low (no voltage present) or «1» = high (voltage present) is dis-
played.
31.30 « Info exception list »

Conditions
In this data screen exception errors in the soft-

ware sequences are listed.
C7xCBAData3130_D
« List »
31.31 « Info statistic events »

Conditions

In this data screen, the events that have

occurred, sorted by type and frequency, are
displayed.
C7xCBAData3131_D
« Event »
d: Fault
m: Maintenance warning
w. Warning
31.32 « Info Exception Statistik D95K »

Conditions
The information related to the device D95K are

displayed in this data screen .
C7xCBAData3132_D
« List »
List of exception error counters of the D95K module
41.30 « Settings extended 1 »

Conditions
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 147

Operation
Option: Coiler
In this data screen basic settings are made for

keeping the machine clean.
C7xCBAData4130_D

C7xVKData4130_D
Option: Coiler

The delivery of the card runs with the prescribed speed.
Delivery speed, slow 15 m/min**)

**) Guide value
« Web weight, threading: »

Prescribed web weight during drawing-in of the web.

Option: Coiler
« Sliver weight piece-up: »

Prescribed sliver weight when drawing in the sliver if there is still no sliver between the disk rollers.
Sliver weight default when drawing in

Option: Coiler CBA

« Sliver weight piece-up: » Specifying sliver weight during pull-in (☞ Part 3, Page79)
« Compensation fibre tuft: »

When drawing in the card silver, the speed of the feed roller is increased by the selected percent-
age factor, depending on length of the downtime, during 0 - 1.5 seconds.
Select the setting so that the web is not disturbed by the clearer roller when starting production.
Compensation – fibre fringe 100 – 550 %
« Ends down monitor at »

« Piecing-up after: »
When drawing in the sliver with drawn-in batt in the feed, the sliver monitor is not active in creep
speed during the specified time period.
Thread-in after 1 – 300 s
● Default 200 s
« Piecing-up no feed after: »
When drawing in the sliver, but with no lap in the feed, sliver monitoring is not active at creep speed
during the preselected time period.
Thread-in after 1 – 250 s
« Normal production after: »
If there is a sliver break after a completed draw-in procedure, sliver monitoring switches off the dof-
fer after the specified metres.
Switch-off delay – sliver breakage 3m
« Max. time production in »

Option: Coiler
« Creep speed: »
If there is a sliver break after a completed draw-in procedure, sliver monitoring switches off the dof-
fer after the specified metres.
Creep speed timeout 1 – 10 min
● Default 3
« Creep speed: » Setting the switch off delay for doffer slow speed to max-
imum (☞ Part 4, Page203)
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 149

Operation
Option: Coiler RSB
« Material flow fast after: »

If the light scanner is covered during the specified time period, the module is ready for normal pro-
duction.
Delay – automatic acceleration, doffer 2s
Option: Coiler CBA
« Material flow fast after: »

If the light scanner is covered during the specified time period, the doffer switches automatically to
high speed. However, the automatic ramp-up must be activated. (Data screen 41.1.)
Delay – automatic acceleration, doffer 2s

Conditions

Only change the default values, if other causes
for possible contamination are eliminated.
C7xCBAData4131_D

Conditions

In this data screen basic set-up values of the

machine are set.
C7xCBAData4132_D
« Chute monitoring, emptying: » Setting the switch-off delay of the chute monitor
« Delivery at feed roll stop: » Stopping the doffers (☞ Part 2, Page23)
« Max. delivery when threading »

This is where the speed at start-up can be set.
This is the speed that will be taken when starting production until the light sensor of the coiler is
covered.
Max. delivery when threading 15 – 80 m/min

● Default 50 m/min
« Monit.of flat-waste chamber: »

This switch is setted fix to status "OFF".
« IGS grinding cycle, man.: »

With the password level master, a manual grinding cycle can be executed.
Function:
● « No function »
● « IGS-classic »
● « IGS-top »
« Test functions: »
For test purposes only.
42.30 « Settings coiler extended »

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
Conditions
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 151

Operation
Option: Coiler SB
This data screen can be used to enter basic

setup values for the coiler.
C7xSBData4230_D
Option: Coiler RSB
This data screen can be used to enter basic

setup values for the coiler.
C7xRSBData4230_D
42.31 « Settings RSB extended »

Option: Coiler RSB
Conditions

In this data screen basic setup values of the RSB

module are entered.
C7xRSBData4231_D
« Monitoring levelling zone: »

« Warning: »
A warning appears in the overview screen if the measurement range of the scanning rollers (+ / -
25% error) exceeds the pre-set time.
« Malfunction: »
The machine is switched off after the pre-set time if the measurement range of the scanning rollers
(+ / - 25% error) is exceeded.
« Aut. calcul. correct. card: »

Resetting the correction ratio of the card. When the card is producing and the RBS module is con-
trolling with normal production, the control deviation of the RBS module is checked after approx.
every 7 minutes. If the deviation is greater than 5%, the correction ratio of the card is automatically
reset. A resetting of the correction ratio of the card is also carried out after a sliver weight correction
at the RSB module. (Data screen 10.1.)
« No. trials: »
Number of correction attempts
« No. written: »
Number of completed corrections
« Act. level. act. pt: »

The current levelling action point of the module depends on the actual delivery speed of the card.
« Set: »
After a change is made in the nominal delivery speed of the card, the levelling action point is also
changed. It will have to be predetermined. (Data screen 42.1)
The nominal levelling action point must be determined by experiment. Once the ideal action point
has been established, the CV% values and spectrograms are to be added in. (Values according to
testing device)
The levelling action point can be adjusted in 3 mm steps within its setting range.
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 153

Operation
Range 708 – 864
« Feeler roll clearance B90: »

The scanning roller distance is displayed here.
43.30 « Reset configuration »

Conditions
Option: Coiler
This data screen is for test purposes, as well

as for resetting all production values and set-up
values to their default values.
C7xCBAData4330_D
This data screen is for test purposes, as well

as for resetting all production values and set-up
values to their default values.
C7xVKData4330_D
60.30 « Value groups preview extended I »

Conditions

Option: Coiler CBA
This data screen provides an overview of produc-

tion value groups.
C7xCBAData6030_D
Option: Coiler SB

tion value groups.
C7xSBData6030_D
Option: Coiler RSB

tion value groups.
C7xRSBData6030_D
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 155

Operation

tion value groups.
C7xVKData6030_D
« Autolevelling sliver: »
« Autolevelling batt: »
« Automatic acceleration: »
« Feed security device: »

« Spring tens. angle feed: »

« Delivery draft min: »

« Delivery draft max: »

« Monitoring cyl. speed: »

« Slvr wght adpt crwl spd: »

60.31 « Value groups preview extended II »

Option: Coiler CBA
OR Coiler SB
Conditions


tion value groups.
C7xCBAData6031_D
« Delivery can change: »

« Length, empty can warng: »

« Can filling correc: »

« Blow-in time sliv. chan: »

« Man. change lower speed: »

60.32 « Value groups preview extend. III »

Option: Coiler RSB
Conditions
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 157

Operation

tion value groups.
C7xRSBData6032_D
« Feeler roll clear. 0%: »

« Level. action point A0: »

« Adapt.sliv.w.slow speed: »
Determine adjustment
« Levelling intensity: »
Determine levelling intensity
60.33 « Value groups preview extend. IV »

Conditions
This data screen provides an overview of inform-

ation concerning production value groups.
C7xCBAData6033_D

Option: RQM Rieter Quality Monitor
This data screen provides an overview of inform-

ation concerning production value groups.
C7xRSBData6033_D
« Measured length A% card: »

« Length malfct. A% card: »

« Ref. length CV card: »

« Length malfct. CV card: »

« Cut length monitored: »

« Interval spec. card: »

« Lngth malfct. spec card: »

« Ref. length, slubs: »

« Length errors, slubs: »

60.34 « Value groups preview extended V »

Conditions
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 159

Operation

tion value groups.
C7xRSBData6034_D
« Measured length A% RQM: »

Determine measured length
« Length malfct A% RQM: »

Determine length
« Feeler roll clear. RQM: »

Determine scanning roller clearance
« Reference length CV RQM: »

Determine reference length
« Length malfct. CV RQM: »

Determine length
« CV% corr. coeff. RQM: »

Determine correction ratio
« Interval spec. RQM: »

Determine interval
« Lngth malfct. spec. RQM: »

Determine length

Finding information concerning the content the e-DOC "Manuals…
7 Electronic documentation (e-DOC)

7.1 Finding information concerning the content the e-DOC "Manuals and Dia-
gnostics"
CHWIA_00000306_001a74
The e-DOC program contains the following technical documents concerning the machine:
Interactive documentation readable on the screen

● Operating manual
● Error analysis
● Spare parts catalogue
● Spare parts purchase order
PDF files, can be printed out

● Operating manual
● Spare parts catalogue
● Electrical system documentation
● Marketing information
● Rieter customer training
● Forms
The following activities can be selected:

1. Ordering spare parts
2. Removing and installing spare parts
3. Rectifying faults
4. Searching for technical terms
7.2 Opening e-DOC
CHWIA_00000307_001a73
▶ Select the appropriate drive (2) and open e-DOC (1).
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 161

Electronic documentation (e-DOC) Universal Operating Manual
Operation
CHWIA_00000307_001a73
Note
Windows is necessary as the local operating system so that the lines are properly dis-
played.
7.3 Specifying a language, accepting license agreement
CHWIA_00000308_001a77
1. Select the language for the e-DOC program (1).

2. Read and accept the licence agreement (2).
7.4 Select machine
CHWIA_00000309_001a74
▶ Select the machine type (1) and the machine number (2).

Opening the “Settings” menu and entering data
7.5 Opening the “Settings” menu and entering data
CHWIA_00000310_001a83
1. Select the languages for dialogue and content, the spare parts catalogue and the operating
manual (1).
2. Select a limit for the number of search results (2).
3. Make modifications to the output display format (3).
4. Enter customer data for orders (4).
5. Match machine data (5).
6. Install the ISOView program (6).
7. Click on OK to confirm the settings (7).
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 163

Operation
7.6 Entering ordering address
CHWIA_00000311_001a76
1. Enter ordering address (1) and billing address (2).

2. Click on OK to confirm the data (3).
7.7 Entering recipient’s address
CHWIA_00000312_001a76
1. Enter the recipient’s address, the supplier number and further order-related details (1).
2. Click on OK to confirm the data (2).

Opening the e-DOC overview screen
7.8 Opening the e-DOC overview screen
CHWIA_00000313_001a79
1. Open the "Help" menu, if required, to bring up a description of the current page (1).
2. Select a technical document (2): Operating manual, troubleshooting information, spare parts
catalogue, spare parts ordering information.
3. Select a technical document in PDF format (3): Operating manual, spare parts catalogue and
electrical system documentation.
4. Select information (4) on: Marketing, training, and forms.
7.9 Opening the spare parts catalogue
CHWIA_00000314_001a73
▶ Click on the appropriate button to open the spare parts catalogue (1).
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 165

Operation
7.10 Navigating through the spare parts catalogue
CHWIA_00000315_001a77
▶ Navigate via full-text search (1), or through text (2) or images (3). To this end, open the selec-
ted sub-assembly by double-clicking as appropriate.
7.11 Navigating through lower-level sub-assemblies in the spare parts catalogue
CHWIA_00000316_001a77
▶ Navigate through the images (1). To this end, double-click the image.

Selecting spare parts for sub-assemblies
7.12 Selecting spare parts for sub-assemblies
CHWIA_00000317_001a77
1. Mark the reference numbers of spare parts (2) or select the spare parts from the table (3).
2. Open the shopping basket (1).
7.13 Filling out the order form
CHWIA_00000318_001a80
1. A separate order form has to be filled out for each spare part.
◁ The order form appears after the shopping basket is opened.
◁ The data for the selected spare part is automatically added to the order form by the system
(1).
2. Enter the required quantity for the spare parts (2).
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 167

Operation
CHWIA_00000318_001a80
3. Check the details on the order form and click on OK to confirm the order (3).
◁ After confirming the order, the spare part is "placed" in the shopping basket.
7.14 Saving the shopping basket information
CHWIA_00000319_001a74
1. Check the shopping basket contents (2).

2. Copy the shopping basket information to the clipboard (1).
3. Save the shopping basket information via the "Save as ..." function (3) or the "Save" function
(4).

Viewing a sample order
7.15 Viewing a sample order
CHWIA_00000320_001a77
▶ Check the data shown on the order form (1).
7.16 Switching from the spare parts catalogue to the operating manual
CHWIA_00000321_001a75
▶ Click on the appropriate button to switch from the spare parts catalogue to the operating
manual (1).
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 169

Operation
7.17 Navigating in the operating manual
CHWIA_00000322_001a76
1. Use the structure of the chapters to navigate through the operating manual (1).
2. In the Assemblies chapter, search according to handling instructions, e.g. for installation of
spare parts (2).
3. Switch to the spare parts catalogue (3).
7.18 Searching for handling instructions in the operating manual
CHWIA_00000323_001a76
1. For example, "Setting" in the operating manual and then carry them out (2).
2. Go back one page (1).
7.19 Opening the operating manual
CHWIA_00000324_001a73
▶ Click on the appropriate button to open the operating manual (1).

Navigating in the operating manual
7.20 Navigating in the operating manual
CHWIA_00000325_001a77
▶ Navigate via full-text search (1), chapters (2), text (3) or images (4).
7.21 Opening the troubleshooting information page
CHWIA_00000326_001a73
▶ Click on the appropriate button to open the troubleshooting information page (1).
7.22 Entering the fault code
CHWIA_00000327_001a74
1. Enter the fault code or select from the list (1).

2. Select suggestion (2).
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 171

Operation
7.23 Rectifying errors
CHWIA_00000328_001a74
▶ Read and then carry out the work instructions (1).
7.24 Filling and saving the shopping basket
CHWIA_00000330_001a73
1. Enter the information for spare parts in the order form (1). Enter the data manually.
2. Save the shopping basket information (2).
7.25 Closing the e-DOC program
CHWIA_00000331_001a73
▶ Click on the appropriate button to close the e-DOC program (1).

Index
Index
B
Button: Turn back feed roller in card chute
Overview – operating elements . . . . . . . 7
E
Emergency stop
Trigger an emergency shut-down . . . . . 22
Unlock emergency stop button . . . . . . . 22
K
Key-operated switch
M
Main switch
Menu
Data screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
O
Operating unit
P
Password
Change password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Entering passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Master password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
13.05.2016 ENG 2 / 173

Index

Card System C 70 V4
Production Part 3
13.05.2016 ENG
Legal information
Klosterstrasse 20
8406 Winterthur
Switzerland

● Plant engineers
Number of pages 282

Card System Diagrams / Tables / Formulae

C 70 V4
Universal Operating
Manual Setting sheets
Part 3
Production Setup
Start-up with material
Technology
Rectifying faults
13.05.2016 ENG 10997982

Contents
Contents
1.1 Intended purpose of part 3 "Production" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 1
1.2 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 1
1.2.1 Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 1
1.3 Initial situation for production handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 1
2 Diagrams / Tables / Formulae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 2

2.1 Gearing layout – chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 2
2.2 Gearing layout – licker-in and cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 3
2.3 Gearing layout – licker-in and cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 5
2.4 Gear layout – doffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 7
2.5 Gear layout – coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 11
2.6 Gear layout – coiler, SB module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 14
2.7 Formulae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 16
2.7.1 Formula for MTBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 16
2.7.2 Formula for machine efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 16
2.7.3 Formula for production efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 17
3 Setting sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 18
3.1 Cotton up to 120 kg production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 18
3.2 Cotton over 120 kg production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 20
3.3 Blends or swing over 120 kg production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 22
3.4 Blends or swing over 120 kg production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 24
3.5 Man-made fibres up to 120 kg production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 26
3.6 Man-made fibres over 120 kg production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 27
3.7 Bleached cotton up to 220 kg production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 29
3.7.1 Licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 29
3.7.2 Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 30
4 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 31
4.1 Switching off the main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 31
4.2 Determining adjustment values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 31
4.3 Card drive units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 32
4.3.1 Adjusting the speed of the opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 32
4.3.2 Adjusting the licker-in speed with belt pulley WE4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 32
4.3.3 Adjusting the licker-in speed with belt pulley WE4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 34

Contents
4.3.4 Change the speed of the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 37

4.3.4.1 Tensioning, de-tensioning the cylinder belt with deflection
pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 38
4.3.4.2 Adjusting the cylinder belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 39
4.4 Drive units for drafting system of coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 41
4.4.1 Adjusting the draft system draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 41
4.4.1.1 Remove NW1 and NW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 42
4.4.1.2 Install NW1 and NW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 43
4.4.1.3 Removing the W3 change gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 45
4.4.1.4 Installing the W3 change gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 46
4.4.1.5 Remove change gear W4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 47
4.4.1.6 Installing the W4 change gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 47
4.5 Feed trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 48
4.5.1 Setting the nipping distance «B» from the feed trough to the feed
roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 48
4.5.2 Adjusting the feed trough parallel to the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 49
4.6 Licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 50
4.6.1 Insert the guide plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 50
4.7 Cylinder casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 51
4.7.1 Instructions concerning the adjustment distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 51
4.7.2 Adjusting the cylinder covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 52
4.7.3 Stabilization of the cylinder covers in the centre of the machine . . . . 3 / 52
4.7.4 Setting the carding profiles relative to the cylinder clothing
(man-made fibres) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 53
4.7.5 Adjusting the carding profile in the vicinity of the doffer (man-made
fibres) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 54
4.7.6 Adjusting the carding profiles relative to the cylinder clothing
(pre-carding zone, cotton). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 56
4.7.7 Adjusting the mote knife, (pre-carding zone and post-carding zone,
cotton) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 57
4.7.8 Adjust the discharge distance in the area of the mote knife
(pre-carding zone and post-carding zone, cotton) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 59
4.7.9 Tongue, sealing strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 60
4.7.10 Adjusting the position of the tongue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 61
4.7.11 Adjusting the distance from tongue to cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 62
4.8 Take-off unit, delivery section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 63
4.8.1 Adjusting the doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 63
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / II
Contents
4.9 Drafting system of the coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 64

4.9.1 Setting the main draft distance HVD (shift the bottom middle
roller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 64
4.9.2 Adjust break draft distance VVD (displace the back roller) . . . . . . . . 3 / 67
4.9.3 Adjusting the top rollers for middle and back bottom rollers. . . . . . . . 3 / 68
5 Start-up with material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 71

5.1 Establishing readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 71
5.2 Setting production values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 71
5.2.1 Target values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 71
5.2.1.1 Adjusting the sliver weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 71
5.2.1.2 Set the web weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 72
5.2.1.3 Enter production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 72
5.2.1.4 Entering the can fill quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 73
5.2.1.5 Change the speed of the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 73
5.2.1.6 Change licker-in speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 74
5.2.2 Setup values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 74
5.2.2.1 Configuring the card delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 74
5.2.2.2 Configuring the card delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 75
5.2.2.3 Configuring feed and cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 77
5.2.2.4 Configuring the IGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 78
5.2.2.5 Specifying sliver weight during pull-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 79
5.2.2.6 Configuring the coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 80
5.3 Card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 81
5.3.1 Explanation of the adjustment values of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 81
5.3.2 Determining the carding gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 82
5.3.2.1 100% CO / CO% > MMF% / fine rotor yarns, coarse and fine
ring-spun yarns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 83
5.3.2.2 100% CO / CO% > MMF% / coarse rotor yarns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 84
5.3.2.3 Combed or carded cotton / fine yarns (card flats default) . . . . . . . . . 3 / 85
5.3.2.4 Combed cotton / extremely fine yarns (card flats EF) . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 86
5.3.2.5 100% MMF / MMF% > CO% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 87
5.3.3 Entering the flat speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 87
5.3.4 Measurement for card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 87
5.3.4.1 Drive the card flats for the adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 88
5.3.4.2 Measuring the carding gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 89
5.3.5 Adjustment mechanism of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 90
5.3.5.1 Rough adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 90
5.3.5.2 Fine adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 91
5.3.6 Procedure for adjusting the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 91

Contents
5.3.7 Determining the reference card flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 94

5.3.8 Adjusting the deflection elements of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 94
5.3.9 Driving card flats in reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 95
5.4 Drawing in material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 95
5.4.1 Setting the mode for production operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 95
5.4.2 Starting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 95
5.4.3 Starting production (doffer at creep speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 96
5.4.4 Starting production (doffer at high speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 97
5.4.5 Optimising the running behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 98
5.4.5.1 Correct sliver weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 98
5.4.5.2 Correct the web weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 99
5.5 Aerofeed (material feed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 100
5.5.1 Adjusting the air ratios in a card line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 100
5.5.2 Production setting for the feed machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 101
5.5.3 Acceleration sliders and isolation sliders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 101
5.5.4 Adjusting the air separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 103
5.5.5 Adjusting the fill height in the feed chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 104
5.5.6 Installing and adjusting the deflector plate on the first card
shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 105
5.5.7 Adjusting the vacuum for the exhaust air (open transfer) . . . . . . . . 3 / 107
5.6 Card chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 107
5.6.1 Air ratios of card chute and card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 107
5.6.2 Adjust the vacuum pressure for the card suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 108
5.6.3 Adjust the batt weight through the position of the card chute
wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 109
5.6.4 Setting the batt weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 110
5.6.5 Checking the batt weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 111
5.7 Feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 111
5.7.1 Adjusting the feed plate between the card chute and the
licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 111
5.7.2 Adjusting the load of the feed trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 112
5.7.3 Adjusting the mote knife, discharge opening (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 113
5.7.4 Adjusting the suction openings on the licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 115
5.8 Delivery section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 115
5.8.1 Adjusting the sliver weight in creep speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 115
5.8.2 Adjust the correct web weight in crawl-speed mode . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 116
5.8.3 Setting the draft for doffer roller / delivery rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 118
5.8.4 Setting the suction force at the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 121
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / IV
Contents
5.9 CBA coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 121

5.9.1 Adjusting the light sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 122
5.9.2 Adjust sliver tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 123
5.9.2.1 Tensioning toothed belt for change «H» . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 123
5.9.3 Tensioning the V-belt of the coiler drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 124
5.9.4 Setting the time of sliver separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 125
5.9.5 Adjusting sliver cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 126
5.9.6 Adjusting the air injector of the coiler .................... 3 / 128
5.10 SB coiler module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 129
5.10.1 Adjusting the clamping device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 129
5.10.2 Setting machine shutdown due to lap formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 129
5.10.3 Tensioning the V-belt of the coiler drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 130
5.11 Can changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 131
5.11.1 Adjusting the winding distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 131
5.11.1.1 Tensioning the V-belt of the can plate drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 132
5.11.2 Changing the distance of the material filling to the spinning
can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 133
5.11.3 Throttling the speed of the can carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 135
5.11.4 Correcting the can fill quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 135
5.11.5 Adjusting the positioning lever for the can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 136
5.11.6 Damping the positioning levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 137
5.11.7 Adjusting the magnetic switch for the can trolley drive . . . . . . . . . 3 / 138
5.12 RSB module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 140
5.12.1 Entering the values on the data screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 140
5.12.2 Determining the sliver length between disk rollers and scanning
rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 140
5.12.3 Loading/offloading scanning rollers ..................... 3 / 141
5.12.4 Change in the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 141
5.12.5 Checking the mechanical settings on the RSB module . . . . . . . . . 3 / 142
5.12.6 Executing a function test of the RSB module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 142
5.12.7 Correcting the sliver weight on the RSB .................. 3 / 144
5.12.7.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 144
5.12.7.2 Correct sliver weight: Calibrate the RSB - module . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 145
5.12.7.3 Minimal change and periodic control of the sliver weight . . . . . . . . 3 / 145
5.12.7.4 Subsequent adaptations after a calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 145
3/V Card System C 70 V4

Contents
5.12.8 Correcting the sliver weight on the RSB module with RQM . . . . . . 3 / 146
5.12.8.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 146
5.12.8.2 Correct sliver weight: Calibrate the RSB - module . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 147
5.12.8.3 Minimal change and periodic control of the sliver weight . . . . . . . . 3 / 147
5.12.8.4 Subsequent adaptations after a calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 148
5.12.9 Adjusting the sliver sag monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 148
5.13 Setting up production mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 151
5.13.1 Quality monitoring ................................ 3 / 151
5.13.1.1 Integrated card sliver monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 151
5.13.1.2 Quality monitor RQM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 151
5.13.1.3 Setting the shut-down limit A% of the card sliver monitor ....... 3 / 152
5.13.1.4 Setting the shut-down limit for CV of the card sliver monitor . . . . . . 3 / 153
5.13.1.5 Correction of displayed CV% values based on laboratory
values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 154
5.13.1.6 Adjusting the shut-off limit – card sliver monitor, spectrogram .... 3 / 155
5.13.1.7 Adjusting the shut-off limit – card sliver monitor, slubs . . . . . . . . . 3 / 156
5.13.2 Production value groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 157
5.13.2.1 Selecting the production value group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 157
5.13.2.2 Naming the value group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 157
5.13.2.3 Loading existing production values into a new group . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 157
5.13.2.4 Comparing values of two groups in the preview ............. 3 / 158
5.13.2.5 Changing production values in value groups ............... 3 / 159
5.13.3 Shift schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 159
5.13.3.1 Determining the shift planning properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 159
5.13.3.2 Programming the shift schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 160
5.13.3.3 Delete shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 161
6 Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 162
6.1 At the feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 162
6.1.1 Card chutes consistently run empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 162
6.1.2 Card chute, poor filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 162
6.2 At the delivery unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 163
6.2.1 The sliver cannot be drawn in (too light, too heavy) . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 163
6.2.2 Sliver breakage on the card occurs too frequently . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 163
6.2.3 Card sliver runs on the floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 164
6.2.4 Card sliver does not run smoothly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 164
6.2.5 No web on the delivery unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 165
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / VI
Contents
6.3 At the coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 166

6.3.1 Coiler ratio too close / too far . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 166
6.3.2 After change, can is knocked over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 166
6.3.3 Diameter of the sliver column too large/too small . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 166
6.3.4 Card sliver wrapped around can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 166
6.4 Quality of card sliver ...................................... 3 / 167
6.4.1 Excessive contamination in the card sliver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 167
6.4.2 Too many neps in the card sliver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 168
6.4.3 Fibres shortening through the card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 169
6.4.4 Thin points and slubs in the card sliver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 169
6.4.5 High dimensional fluctuations (CVm%, U%) in the card sliver .... 3 / 171
6.5 Quality of web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 172
6.5.1 Excessive contamination in the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 172
6.5.2 Too many neps in the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 173
6.5.3 Fibres shortening through the card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 174
6.5.4 Thin points and slubs in the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 175
6.5.5 High dimensional fluctuations (CVm%, U%) in the web . . . . . . . . . 3 / 177
6.6 Productivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 178
6.6.1 Insufficient production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 178
6.6.2 Excessive waste, good fibres in the waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 178
7 Rectifying faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 179

7.1 Non-displayed faults ...................................... 3 / 179
7.1.1 At the feed ..................................... 3 / 179
7.1.1.1 Drive of the opening roller in the card chute is overheated . . . . . . . 3 / 179
7.1.2 In the vicinity of the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 179
7.1.2.1 IGS grinding stone does not move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 179
7.1.2.2 Excessive contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 180
7.1.2.3 Doors cannot be opened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 180
7.1.3 At the operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 180
7.1.3.1 Master password unknown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 180
7.1.4 In the control cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 180
7.1.4.1 Frequency converter, no response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 180
7.2 Fault code list, operating unit. ................................ 3 / 181
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 285
A Material .............................................. 3 / 285
A.1 Work material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 285
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 / 286
3 / VII Card System C 70 V4

Intended purpose of part 3 "Production"

1.1 Intended purpose of part 3 "Production"
Instructions for the production phase.
1.2 Contents
1.2.1 Production
This part contains all information necessary for the production process: Setup, configuration, start-
up, and error correction.
From the content

● Diagrams, tables, formulas and adjustment sheets: Is used for looking up the adjustment val-
ues.
● Set up the machine: Tasks that must be executed before start-up.
● Start-up with material: Settings that can only be made during operation with material.
● Malfunction and error correction: This section lists the possible causes and solutions for every
error code notification.
Target group
● Plant engineers
1.3 Initial situation for production handling instructions
The machine must be repaired: Ready for operation

The main switch is in off position.
The emergency stop button must be activated.
All doors and covers must be open.
13.05.2016 ENG 3/1

Diagrams / Tables / Formulae Universal Operating Manual
Production
2 Diagrams / Tables / Formulae

2.1 Gearing layout – chute
Gearing layout
WS 1 M42 M41 Z16
Ø 172 1 Z34
WS 2 Ø 292 2
40 Ø 156 3
40 Ø 156 4
Z 55 40
55 VE1
WE 1 I=160 M10
Ø 100 5
56
6
CHWIA_00003270_002_02
1 Feed roller
2 Opening roller
3 Delivery roll fixed
4 Delivery roller, spring-loaded
5 Feed roller
6 Gearing layout – licker-in and cylinder
Gearing layout (Option: Number of licker-ins 1) (☞ Part 3, Page3)
Gearing layout (Option: Number of licker-ins 3) (☞ Part 3, Page5)
Revolutions per minute of the opening roller ‘2’ change gear ‘WS 1’ ‘WS 2’
Opening roll speeds Number of Number of teeth (WS 2) Belt length
teeth (WS 1) Current fre- Current fre- Current fre- Current fre-
quency 50 Hz quency 60 Hz quency 50 Hz quency 60 Hz
850 rpm 29 52 62 1,392 mm 1,424 mm
1,150 rpm 40 52 62 1,424 mm 1,440 mm
Adjust the draft ‘VE1’ between the card chute and the feed roller.
Draft (VE1) Number of teeth (WE1) Number of teeth (Z)
1.57 22 55
1.50 23 55
1.44 (Guide value) 24 55
1.38 25 55
1.33 26 55
1.28 27 55
1.24 28 55

Gearing layout – licker-in and cylinder
2.2 Gearing layout – licker-in and cylinder
Option: Number of licker-ins 1
M13 WE4
Ø 100 5
Ø 253 8
WE4-1
9 M57
VET 10 M56
M50
Ø 814 11
WT-1
12 M1 WT
CHWIA00001153_002_01
5 Feed roller 10 Stripping roller

8 Licker-in 11 Cylinder
9 Clearer roller 12 Card flats
Draft ‘VET’ licker-in – cylinder

Speed of the Cylinder speed
licker-in 600 rpm 650 rpm 700 rpm 750 rpm 800 rpm 850 rpm 900 rpm
1,038 rpm 1.86 2.01 2.17 2.32 2.48 2.63 2.79
1,153 rpm 1.86 1.82 1.96 2.09 2.23 2.37 2.51
1,384 rpm 1.39 1.51 1.63 1.74 1.86 1.98 2.09
1,615 rpm 1.2 ✗ 1.29 1.39 1.49 1.59 1.69 1.79
1,845 rpm 1.05 ✗ 1.13 ✗ 1.22 1.31 1.40 1.48 1.57
2,076 rpm 0.93 ✗ 1.01 ✗ 1.08 ✗ 1.16 ✗ 1.24 1.32 1.39
Explanation
Attribute: ✗ Not recommended
Speed - cylinder ‘WT’

Cylinder speed ⌀ Belt pulley – ⌀ Belt pulley – cylinder (WT-1) Belt length (WT-1)
motor (WT) Current fre- Current fre- Current fre- Current fre-
600 rpm 85 mm 417 mm 500 mm 2,956 mm 3,127 mm
650 rpm 92.5 mm 417 mm 500 mm 2,956 mm 3,127 mm
700 rpm 100 mm 417 mm 500 mm 2,956 mm 3,127 mm
750 rpm 107 mm 417 mm 500 mm 3,010 mm 3,178 mm
800 rpm 114 mm 417 mm 500 mm 3,010 mm 3,178 mm
13.05.2016 ENG 3/3

Production
M13 WE4
Ø 100 5
Ø 253 8
WE4-1
9 M57
VET 10 M56
M50
Ø 814 11
WT-1
12 M1 WT
CHWIA00001153_002_01
850 rpm 121 mm 417 mm 500 mm 3,010 mm 3,178 mm
900 rpm 128 mm 417 mm 500 mm 3,010 mm 3,178 mm
Speed – licker-in ‘WE4-1’

Speed of the ⌀ Belt pulley – ⌀ Belt pulley – licker-in (WE4-1) Belt length
licker-in motor (WE4) Current fre- Current fre- Current fre- Current fre-
1,038 rpm 90 mm 124 mm 150 mm 1,550 mm 1,590 mm
1,153 rpm 100 mm 124 mm 150 mm 1,550 mm 1,590 mm
1,384 rpm 120 mm 124 mm 150 mm 1,590 mm 1,640 mm
1,615 rpm 140 mm 124 mm 150 mm 1,640 mm 1,695 mm
1,845 rpm 160 mm 124 mm 150 mm 1,695 mm 1,695 mm
2,076 rpm 180 mm 124 mm 150 mm 1,710 mm 1,760 mm

Gearing layout – licker-in and cylinder
2.3 Gearing layout – licker-in and cylinder
M13 WE4
Ø 100
5
Ø 180 6 WE4-1
Ø 180 7 WE4-2
Ø 253 8 WE4-3
9 M57
VET 10 M56
M50
Ø 814 11
WT-1
12 M1 WT
CHWIA00001174_002_01
5 Feed roller 9 Clearer roller

6 Licker-in 1 10 Stripping roller
7 Licker-in 2 11 Cylinder
8 Licker-in 3 12 Card flats
Draft ‘VET’ licker-in – cylinder

Speed of the Cylinder speed
licker-in 600 rpm 650 rpm 700 rpm 750 rpm 800 rpm 850 rpm 900 rpm
1,154 rpm 1.67 1.81 1.95 2.09 2.23 2.37 2.51
1,384 rpm 1.39 1.51 1.63 1.74 1.86 1.98 2.09
1,614 rpm 1.20 ✗ 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.59 1.69 1.79
1,845 rpm 1.05 ✗ 1.13 ✗ 1.22 1.31 1.40 1.48 1.57
2,075 rpm 0.93 ✗ 1.01 ✗ 1.09 ✗ 1.16 ✗ 1.24 1.32 1.40
2,306 rpm 0.84 ✗ 0.91 ✗ 0.98 ✗ 1.05 ✗ 1.12 ✗ 1.19 ✗ 1.26
Explanation
Attribute: ✗ Not recommended
Speed - cylinder ‘WT’

600 rpm 85 mm 417 mm 500 mm 2,956 mm 3,127 mm
650 rpm 92.5 mm 417 mm 500 mm 2,956 mm 3,127 mm
700 rpm 100 mm 417 mm 500 mm 2,956 mm 3,127 mm
13.05.2016 ENG 3/5

Production
M13 WE4
Ø 100
5
Ø 180 6 WE4-1
Ø 180 7 WE4-2
Ø 253 8 WE4-3
9 M57
VET 10 M56
M50
Ø 814 11
WT-1
12 M1 WT
CHWIA00001174_002_01
750 rpm 107 mm 417 mm 500 mm 3,010 mm 3,178 mm
800 rpm 114 mm 417 mm 500 mm 3,010 mm 3,178 mm
850 rpm 121 mm 417 mm 500 mm 3,010 mm 3,178 mm
900 rpm 128 mm 417 mm 500 mm 3,010 mm 3,178 mm
Speed – licker-in ‘WE4-3’

Speed of the licker- ⌀ Belt pul- ⌀ Belt pulley – licker-in Belt length
in ley – motor (WE4-1)
(WE4) Current fre- Current fre- Current fre- Current frequency 60
quency 50 Hz quency 60 Hz quency 50 Hz Hz
1,154 rpm 100 mm 124 mm 150 mm 2,155 mm 2,245 mm
1,384 rpm 120 mm 124 mm 150 mm 2,155 mm 2,245 mm
1,614 rpm 140 mm 124 mm 150 mm 2,230 mm 2,320 mm
1,845 rpm 160 mm 124 mm 150 mm 2,230 mm 2,320 mm
2,075 rpm 180 mm 124 mm 150 mm 2,290 mm 2,380 mm
2,306 rpm 200 mm 124 mm 150 mm 2,290 mm 2,380 mm

Gear layout – doffers
2.4 Gear layout – doffers
Gearing layout
Option: Coiler
Ø 420
Ø 680 13
14-2 14
VA2
14-1 Ø 100
WA 2
M14 Ø 117 15
Z 27 Ø 80 16 Z 42 VA3
Z 27 Ø 80 17
WA8
Z 24 Ø 160
Ø 55.5 18
Ø 43.3 Z 22
Z 22 Ø 72 Ø 131 VA8
Z 22 Ø 72
WA 6 19 M11 WA 7
M12
CHWIA00001153_003_02
13 Doffer 17 Delivery rollers

14 Brush roll, delivery 18 Cross apron (web collection)
15 Doffer roller 19 Disk rollers
16 Delivery rollers
Gearing layout
Ø 420
Ø 680 13
14-2 VA2
14
14-1 Ø 100
WA 2
M14 Ø 117 15
Z 27 16 Z 42 VA3
Ø 80
Z 27 Ø 80 17
Z 24 Ø 160
Z 22
Ø 131
WA 6 M12 M11 WA 7
CHWIA00001153_005_01
13 Doffer 14 Brush roll, delivery
13.05.2016 ENG 3/7

Production
Ø 420
Ø 680 13
14-2 VA2
14
14-1 Ø 100
WA 2
M14 Ø 117 15
Z 27 16 Z 42 VA3
Ø 80
Z 27 Ø 80 17
Z 24 Ø 160
Z 22
Ø 131
WA 6 M12 M11 WA 7
CHWIA00001153_005_01
15 Doffer roller 17 Delivery rollers

16 Delivery rollers
Gearing layout
Ø 420
Ø 680 13
VA2
WA 2
Ø 117 15
Z 42
Z 22
Ø 131
M11 WA 7
CHWIA00001153_006_01
13 Doffer 15 Doffer roller

Gear layout – doffers
Gearing layout
Ø 420
Ø 680 13
14-2 VA2
14
14-1 Ø 100
WA 2
M14 Ø 117 15
Z 27 16 Z 42 VA3
Ø 80
Z 27 Ø 80 17
Z 24 Ø 160
Ø 55.5 18
Ø 43.3 Z 22
Ø 131
WA 6 M12 M11 WA 7
CHWIA00001153_004_01
13 Doffer 16 Delivery rollers

14 Brush roll, delivery 17 Delivery rollers
15 Doffer roller 18 Cross apron (web collection)
Draft ‘VA2’ between doffer and doffer roller

Draft (VA2)
1.08 1.12
66.9 mm 64.5 mm
Draft ‘VA3’ between doffer roller and delivery roller

Is set in data screen 41.1.
« min: » « eff: » « max: »

1.15 – 1.4 Draft at set speed 1.4 – 2.4
Note Note
Draft in creep speed Draft at maximum speed
Draft ‘VA8’ between cross apron and disk roller

Option: Coiler
Draft (VA8) Number of teeth (WA 8)

1.05 24
1.10 25
13.05.2016 ENG 3/9

Production
⌀ wheel 14-1
Option: Coiler
OR Non-woven tape
OR Non-woven fabric
Option: Current frequency 50 Hz 80 mm
⌀ wheel 14-2
Option: Coiler
OR Non-woven tape
OR Non-woven fabric
⌀ change gear (WA 6)
Option: Coiler
OR Non-woven tape
OR Non-woven fabric
Option: Cylinder drive, capacity M 62.5 mm
OR Cylinder drive, capacity H
Option: Cylinder drive, capacity L 50.4 mm
⌀ change gear (WA 7)

Option: Cylinder drive, capacity M 51 mm
OR Cylinder drive, capacity H
Option: Cylinder drive, capacity L 41 mm
Gear layout – coiler
2.5 Gear layout – coiler
Option: Coiler CBA
Gearing layout
60
60
H
V
L: Z 142
M / H: Z 118
O.K
H X
CHWIA_00002624_001_02
V Tension upstream of sliver take-off X Distance between windings

H Change gear E Can diameter
C Feed roller
Tension ‘V’ between card and coiler

Tension upstream of sliver take- Change gear (H)
off (V) Cylinder drive
Cylinder drive, capa- Cylinder drive, capa- Cylinder drive, capa-
city L city M city H
1.00 29 — —
1.04 30 31 31
Factory setting
1.07 31 32 32
1.10 32 33 33
1.13 33 34 34
1.16 — 35 35
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 11
Production
Distance between windings ‘X’ change gear ‘C’

Distance Material ⌀ belt pulley (C)
between Can diameter in the delivery unit
windings
(X) 600 mm can dia- 750 mm can dia- 800 mm can dia- 1000 mm can
meter in the de- meter in the de- meter in the de- diameter in the
livery unit livery unit livery unit delivery unit
22 mm Cotton 117 mm -/- -/- -/-
24 mm Cotton -/- 117 mm 117 mm 91 mm
32 mm Chemical fibres 167 mm -/- -/- -/-
and blends
36 mm Chemical fibres -/- 167 mm -/- -/-
and blends
40 mm Chemical fibres -/- -/- 167 mm 175 mm
and blends
Gear layout – coiler, SB module
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 13
Production
2.6 Gear layout – coiler, SB module
Option: Coiler SB
Getriebeplan
GEARING LAYOUT PIANO RUOTISMI PLAN PREVODU
PLAN D'ENGRENAGE ESQUEMA DE ENGRENAGEM
PLANO DE ENGRANAJE
SB-Modul 2
SCHUTZVERMERK NACH DIN 34 BEACHTEN / COPYRIGHT RESERVED
gezeichnet von Datum geaendert von Datum Zeichnungsnummer / Aenderungszustand Blatt-Nummer Blatt-Anzahl Sprache
1M. Wagner 09. 06. 06 B. Hoefer 07. 07. 08 078 / 03 2 -
CHWIA_00002599_001_02
The gearing plan is displayed in the machine and in the operating manual. If these diagrams differ,
the one inside the machine applies.
Gear layout – coiler, SB module
Drafts
CHWIA_00002600_001_01
VE Back roller tension VV Break draft

VA Front roll tension DK Can diameter
V Total draft VD Coiler tension
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 15
Production
2.7 Formulae
2.7.1 Formula for MTBA
(Mean Time Between Assist) means: the aver-

age length of time between successive acts of
intervention by the operator. These MTBA data
values enable the running properties of a ma-
chine or that of an entire system to be concretely CHWIA_00003927_001_01
expressed in terms of numbers. The higher the

MTBA value, the longer the average production
duration between successive acts of intervention
by the operator.
Total duration for material production in produc-
tion mode.
When a machine is started in automatic mode, it
enters production mode. As soon as the machine
stops (STOP button, fault), it exits production
mode.
Time during production mode, when no material
is produced.
Waiting on account of machine (e.g. can change,
run-up), waiting on account of pre-processing or
finishing (e.g. material supply)
A Production duration in production mode

B Unproductive time in production mode
S Number of stoppages due to internal faults
2.7.2 Formula for machine efficiency
The machine efficiency reflects the machine

availability. The time in which the machine was
not used without a queued fault is not included in
the calculation.
MN Machine efficiency
B Unproductive time in production mode
CHWIA_00003925_001_01
D Malfunction time
Formulae
2.7.3 Formula for production efficiency
Simplified formula for machines with constant

rates of delivery.
The production efficiency indicates the ratio
of the actual production of a machine to the CHWIA_00003926_001_01
theoretically-possible production (summation of
the target productions) of a machine. It depends
on the process. All influences are taken into
account.
Total duration for material production in produc-
tion mode.
When a machine is started in automatic mode, it
enters production mode. As soon as the machine
stops (STOP button, malfunction), it exits produc-
tion mode.
The total time required to collect the data.
Time "main switch on" plus downtime (machine
off)
PN Production efficiency
T Total time
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 17
Setting sheets Universal Operating Manual
Production
3 Setting sheets
3.1 Cotton up to 120 kg production
CHWIA_00000857_001_01
16 B Nipping gap between feed (☞ Part 3, Page19)

trough and feed roller (16 B)
17 C Discharge opening – licker-in (17 (☞ Part 3, Page19)
C)
43, 45, 59, 60 Discharge opening – pre-carding (☞ Part 3, Page19)
zone / post-carding zone) (43,
45, 59, 60)
50...54 Measuring points for card flats. Set the measuring points in accordance with
the raw material.
81 Distance – cylinder doffer (ma- (☞ Part 3, Page19)
chine warm) (81)
Cotton up to 120 kg production
Nipping gap between feed trough and feed roller (16 B)

Cotton (CO) AND Extra-long staple 35.50 - 45.50 mm 24.0 – 27.0 mm
Cotton (CO) AND Long staple 30.00 - 35.40 mm 22.0 – 25.0 mm
Cotton (CO) AND Medium staple 26.00 - 29.90 mm 19.0 – 23.0 mm
Cotton (CO) AND Short staple 22.80 - 25.90 mm 17.0 – 20.0 mm
Discharge opening – licker-in (17 C)

Minimum gap: Minimal extraction ≥40.0 mm
Standard setting: All materials 50.0 mm
Maximum gap: Maximum extraction ≤70.0 mm
Discharge opening – pre-carding zone / post-carding zone) (43, 45, 59, 60)
Greatest extraction Strip no. 0
More extraction Strip no. 2
Standard setting Strip no. 5
Lower extraction Strip no. 8
Distance – cylinder doffer (machine warm) (81)

Production per hour: > 70 0.15 mm
Production per hour: 70 - 105 0.175 mm
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 19
Production
3.2 Cotton over 120 kg production
CHWIA_00000855_001_01

C)
43, 45, 60 Discharge opening – pre-carding (☞ Part 3, Page19)
45, 59, 60)
the raw material.
chine warm) (81)
Cotton over 120 kg production

Cotton (CO) AND Extra-long staple 35.50 - 45.50 mm 24.0 – 27.0 mm
Cotton (CO) AND Long staple 30.00 - 35.40 mm 22.0 – 25.0 mm
Cotton (CO) AND Medium staple 26.00 - 29.90 mm 19.0 – 23.0 mm
Cotton (CO) AND Short staple 22.80 - 25.90 mm 17.0 – 20.0 mm


13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 21
Production
3.3 Blends or swing over 120 kg production
CHWIA_00001159_001_01

C)
43, 45, 60 Discharge opening – pre-carding (☞ Part 3, Page23)
45, 59, 60)
the raw material.
chine warm) (81)
Blends or swing over 120 kg production

Blend CO / MMF AND Staple length - 65.00 mm 17.0 – 27.0 mm


13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 23
Production
3.4 Blends or swing over 120 kg production
CHWIA_00000871_001_01

C)
43, 45, 59, 60 Discharge opening – pre-carding (☞ Part 3, Page25)
45, 59, 60)
the raw material.
chine warm) (81)
Blends or swing over 120 kg production

Blend CO / MMF AND Staple length - 65.00 mm 17.0 – 27.0 mm


13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 25
Production
3.5 Man-made fibres up to 120 kg production
72 -1.50 73 -2.00
71 0.60
70 0.80 52 x.xx
51 x.xx 53 x.xx
54 x.xx
50 x.xx
55 1.30
47 1.30 56 1.20
46 1.00
48 0.40 0.55 82 0.225 83 0.10 84 2.60
59 0.40 0.55
44 0.50 0.65 60 0.40 0.55
61 1.00 1.30 85 0.15
42 0.60 0.75
27 3.00 86 3.00
411.00
28 0.10
66 2.50 63 2.50 81 x.xxx
16 «B» 64 1.50
25 0.30
17 «C»
87 0.50
65 2..25 mm
88 0.15
18 0.90 29 0.60
19 0.50 30 0.60 03.2012 BTH
CHWIA_00000860_001_02

C)
the raw material.
chine warm) (81)

Chemical fibres (MMF) AND Staple length 35.00 - 65.00 mm ≤27.0 mm
Man-made fibres over 120 kg production


3.6 Man-made fibres over 120 kg production
72 -1.50 73 -2.00
71 0.60
70 0.80 52 x.xx
51 x.xx 53 x.xx
54 x.xx
50 x.xx
55 1.30
47 1.30 56 1.20
46 1.00
48 0.45 0.60 82 0.225 83 0.10 84 2.60
59 0.45 0.60
44 0.55 0.70 60 0.45 0.60
61 1.00 1.30 85 0.15
42 0.65 0.80
27 3.00 86 3.00
41 1.00
28 0.10
66 2.50 63 2.50 81 x.xxx
16 «B» 64 1.50
25 0.30
17 «C»
87 0.50
65 2..25 mm
88 0.15
18 0.90 29 0.60
19 0.50 30 0.60 03.2012 BTH
CHWIA_00001156_001_02

13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 27
Production
72 -1.50 73 -2.00
71 0.60
70 0.80 52 x.xx
51 x.xx 53 x.xx
54 x.xx
50 x.xx
55 1.30
47 1.30 56 1.20
46 1.00
48 0.45 0.60 82 0.225 83 0.10 84 2.60
59 0.45 0.60
44 0.55 0.70 60 0.45 0.60
61 1.00 1.30 85 0.15
42 0.65 0.80
27 3.00 86 3.00
41 1.00
28 0.10
66 2.50 63 2.50 81 x.xxx
16 «B» 64 1.50
25 0.30
17 «C»
87 0.50
65 2..25 mm
88 0.15
18 0.90 29 0.60
19 0.50 30 0.60 03.2012 BTH
CHWIA_00001156_001_02

C)
the raw material.
chine warm) (81)

Chemical fibres (MMF) AND Staple length 35.00 - 65.00 mm ≤27.0 mm


Bleached cotton up to 220 kg production

3.7 Bleached cotton up to 220 kg production
3.7.1 Licker-in
CHWIA_00004220_001_02
Factory settings for bleached cotton.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 29
Production
3.7.2 Cylinder
CHWIA_00004219_001_02
Pre- and post-carding zone are fitted with dummy elements.
Switching off the main switch
4 Setup
The following material-dependent settings must be made so that the machine produces according
to the required quantity and quality with the fed material.
4.1 Switching off the main switch
The following set-up tasks must only be executed when the machine is standing still and is safe-
guarded.
DANGER
4.2 Determining adjustment values
1. Determine the characteristics of the material that must be processed.

2. Specify the production of the feed machine.
3. Select the appropriate adjustment sheet based on the material configuration and the material.
Cotton up to 120 kg production (Option: Cylinder drive, capacity L) (☞ Part 3, Page18)
Cotton over 120 kg production (Option: Cylinder drive, capacity H) (☞ Part 3, Page20)
Blends or swing over 120 kg production (Option: Cylinder drive, capacity L)
Blends or swing over 120 kg production (Option: Cylinder drive, capacity H)
Man-made fibres up to 120 kg production (Option: Cylinder drive, capacity L)
Man-made fibres over 120 kg production (Option: Cylinder drive, capacity H)
◁ The adjustment values on the adjustment sheet serve as a template for the adjustment.
4. Determine the carding gap. (☞ Part 3, Page82)
Subsequent adjustment tasks

5. Set the nipping distance «B» from the feed trough to the feed roller. (☞ Part 3, Page48)
6. Comply with the instructions concerning hollow cylinder casings. (☞ Part 3, Page51)
7. Adjust cylinder covers, carding elements, mote knives and tongue. (☞ Part 3, Page52)
8. Adjust the doffer. (☞ Part 3, Page63)
9. Adjust the mote knife, discharge opening (C). (☞ Part 3, Page113)
10. Procedure for adjusting the card flats. (☞ Part 3, Page91)
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 31
Setup Universal Operating Manual
Production
4.3 Card drive units
4.3.1 Adjusting the speed of the opening roller
1. Due to the material, see the table for information on belt pulley. (☞ Part 3, Page2)
2. Install the belt pulley (1).

3. Do not change the belt pulley (3). Screw (4)
1
must have been tightened with the prescribed
torque.
Connection
Torque – bearing journal, 130 N⋅m 2
opening roller
CHWIA_00001323_001_01
4. Displace the electric motor and, in so doing,

tighten the toothed belt . L
Deflection – toothed belts (d)
Deflection (d) as a % of the 1.50 %
distance between axes (L) d
Example: Deflection (d) at Approx. 10 mm
approx. 1.5% of the distance F
between axes (L=640 mm)
Force (F) Must be adapted to
the belt thickness
CHWIA_00003420_001_01
4.3.2 Adjusting the licker-in speed with belt pulley WE4
Option: Licker-in drive with belt pulley, Number of licker-ins 1
1. Due to the material see the table for information on the belt pulley and belt length.
(☞ Part 3, Page3)
Card drive units
Licker-in speed according to material

Cotton / rotor yarn 1,615 – 2,076 rpm
Cotton ring-spun yarn carded 1,384 – 1,845 rpm
Cotton ring-spun yarn combed 1,038 – 1,615 rpm
Swing / Blends 1,153 – 1,615 rpm
Man-made fibres 1,153 – 1,384 rpm
2. Loosen the screws (4).

2 1
3. Loosen the screws (2) of the belt tensioner
(1).
◁ The belt is slackened.
4. After changing belt pulley (3) tighten the belt
with the belt tensioner (1).
5. Only tighten the screws (4) after tensioning.
Connection
Torque 51 N⋅m
4 3
CHWIA_00000907_001_01
Tightening the belt

Mark licker-in belt
6. On the new, un-tensioned belt (1) mark the
distance (X). 1 1
Dimension «X» belt 200.0 mm
de-tensioned
7. In the case of a used belt (1) look for the X

original mark (X). CHWIA_00001507_001_01
Note
The belts become slightly longer
through use. However they must
always be tensioned, only to the
original dimension (X).
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 33
Production
2 1 1
4
X
3
CHWIA_00000909_001_01
8. Slightly loosen screws (3) of belt tensioner (2).
9. Apply a 22 mm open-jaw spanner on the belt tensioner and tighten belt (4) with belt tensioner
(2).
Note
Do not tighten belt (4) in one work step. The licker-in must be turned at least 3 times
during the tensioning procedure. This distributes the tension evenly over the belt.
10. Measure the tension of belt (4) between markings (1).

Dimension X with belt taut.
Dimension “X” with belt taut; measure between the markings 200 mm + 1.6% tension = 203.20 mm
4.3.3 Adjusting the licker-in speed with belt pulley WE4
Option: Licker-in drive with belt pulley, Number of licker-ins 3
1. Due to the material, see the table for information on the belt pulley and belt length.
(☞ Part 3, Page5)
Card drive units

1 2
3. Loosen the screws (2) of the belt tensioner
(1).
◁ The belt is slackened.
4. After changing belt pulley (3) tighten the belt
with the belt tensioner (1).
5. Only tighten the screws (4) after tensioning.
Connection
Torque 51 N⋅m
4 3
CHWIA_00001505_001_01
Tightening the belt

Mark licker-in belt
6. On the new, un-tensioned belt (1) mark the
distance (X). 1 1
de-tensioned
7. In the case of a used belt (1) look for the X

original mark (X). CHWIA_00001507_001_01
Note
always be tensioned, only to the
2
1 1
X
3
CHWIA_00001508_001_02
8. Slightly loosen screws (3) of belt tensioner (2).
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 35
Production
9. Apply a 22 mm open-jaw spanner on the belt tensioner and tighten belt (4) with belt tensioner
(2).
Note
Do not tighten belt (4) in one work step. The licker-in must be turned at least 3 times
during the tensioning procedure. This distributes the tension evenly over the belt.
10. Measure the tension of belt (4) between markings (1).

Dimension “X” with belt taut; measure between the markings 200 mm + 1.6% tension = 203.20 mm
Card drive units
4.3.4 Change the speed of the cylinder
950
900
850 A
800 B
Rpm / min
750 C
700
CEF D
650
600
550
500
kg/h 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 225
CHWIA_00001691_001_02
A Short staple 22.80 - 25.90 mm

Cotton (CO)
Rotor yarn
B Medium staple 26.00 - 29.90 mm
Cotton (CO)
Ring-spun yarn
C Long staple 30.00 - 35.40 mm
Cotton (CO)
Ring-spun yarn
CEF Extra-long staple 35.50 - 45.50 mm
Cotton (CO)
Combed ring-spun yarn
D Chemical fibres (MMF)
Polyester (PES)
Viscose (CV)
1. Due to the material, see the table for information on belt pulleys. (☞ Part 3, Page3)
(Option: Number of licker-ins 1)
2. Due to the material, see the table for information on belt pulleys. (☞ Part 3, Page5)
(Option: Number of licker-ins 3)
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 37
Production
Setting the cylinder speed with belt pulley WT

4. Use the deflection pulley (3) to slacken the
belt (4). 4
5. Tension de-tension the cylinder belt with de-
flection pulley. (☞ Part 3, Page38)
6. Replace the belt pulley (1) and tighten the
screws (2).
Connection
Torque 25 N⋅m
7. After changing the belt pulley (1) tighten the

belt (4) according to the guidelines.
8. Adjust the cylinder belt tension.
3 2 1
CHWIA_00000925_001_01
9. For machines with frequency converter drive set the cylinder speed in the data screen.
4.3.4.1 Tensioning, de-tensioning the cylinder belt with deflection pulley
Off-load
1. Press the deflection pulley (1) downward with
a fork spanner. The belt is de-tensioned.
2
1
3
1
CHWIA_00001628_001_01
Loading (without changing the belt pulley)

2. Place the belt on correctly and push the deflection pulley (1) upward to the stop with a form
spanner (2).
Loading (after a belt pulley change)

3. Correctly tension the belt after changing the belt pulley. Position the drive motor accordingly.
Card drive units
4. Place the belt on correctly and push the deflection pulley (1) upward to the stop with a form
spanner (2).
Securing the deflection pulley

5. Secure the deflection pulley (1) with the screw (3) when the deflection pulley (2) is in the loaded
position.
4.3.4.2 Adjusting the cylinder belt tension
Marking the cylinder belt

1. Mark the new, un-tensioned belt with two
lines (1) at the distance (X). 1 1
de-tensioned
2. In the case of a used belt look for the original X

mark. CHWIA_00001507_001_01
Note
always be tensioned only to the
3
4
2
+%
-%
1 2 3
CHWIA_00000928_001_01
3. The deflection pulley (1) is in the un-tensioned position. (☞ Part 3, Page38)

4. Loosen screws (3) slightly.
◁ Through the deadweight of the motor (2) the belt (4) is slightly pre-tensioned.
5. Tighten the screws (3) firmly.
6. Use the deflection pulley (1) to tension the belt.
7. Turn the cylinder at least three turns.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 39
Production
3
4
2
+%
-%
1 2 3
CHWIA_00000928_001_01
◁ This distributes the tension evenly over the belt.

8. Measure the distance between the markings on the belt (4).
Belt tensioned dimension «X»
Option: Cylinder drive, capacity L 508.0 mm
OR Cylinder drive, capacity M Note
Belt thickness 2 mm
Option: Cylinder drive, capacity H 506.5 mm
Note
Belt thickness 2.5 mm
If the distance X is too large

▶ Correct the position of the motor (4) direction (-%).
If the distance X is too small

▶ Correct the position of the motor (4) direction (+%).
Drive units for drafting system of coiler
4.4 Drive units for drafting system of coiler
4.4.1 Adjusting the draft system draft
Option: Coiler SB
Calculating draft V (total draft)

Note
The V draft (total draft) determines the sliver weight at the delivery end.
Whenever the sliver weight at the delivery end is altered, for example, the V draft (total draft)
must be re-determined.
To this end, the theoretical V draft (total draft) must first be calculated, based on the cus-
tomer specifications.
Example for calculating the theoretical V draft

(total draft)
1. Calculate the draft and then see the table for 12.0 (ktex)
the change gears. (☞ Part 3, Page14) V= = 2.4
5.0 (ktex)
Sliver weight at the feed end 12 ktex
Sliver weight at the delivery 5 ktex CHWIA_00002629_001_01
end
Note
If the sliver weights are specified in
another unit, then these should first be
converted to ktex.
2. The change gears required for the desired draft V (total draft) are specified in the table.
Note
The V draft (total draft) determines the sliver weight at the delivery end and is set with
change gears Nw1 and Nw2.
3. Remove change gears NW1 and NW2. (☞ Part 3, Page42)

4. Install change gears NW1 and NW2. (☞ Part 3, Page43)
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 41
Production
4.4.1.1 Remove NW1 and NW2
Option: Coiler SB
Removing the toothed belt at the Nw1 / Nw2 change gears

1. Slacken the toothed belt (17): to do this,
loosen the two clamping screws (15). Use
the tensioning element (14) to turn the ten-
sion pulley (16) to the appropriate position. Nw2
2. Remove the toothed belt (17).
Nw1
17
14
15
16
SB-L 303b
CHWIA_00002632_001_01
Removing the Nw1 change gear

3. Loosen the clamping sleeve screw (12) on
the Nw1 change gear until the clamping
mechanism has loosened, and the Nw1
change gear can be easily removed.
Note
It is recommended to use a ring span- 17
ner, in order to protect the screw head.
14
4. If the clamping sleeve screw (12) cannot be
loosened easily, use an auxiliary tool, such 16
as an AF6 Allen wrench, to counter the force.
To achieve this, insert the Allen wrench into 12
the main shaft hole, which is designed for 15
such a task.
5. Slacken the toothed belt (17): to do this,
loosen the two clamping screws (15). Use Nw1 SB-M 2 303
the tensioning element (14) to turn the ten- CHWIA_00002636_001_01
sion pulley (16) to the appropriate position.

7. Remove the Nw1 change gear.
Removing the Nw2 change gear

8. Loosen the clamping sleeve screw (13) on
the Nw2 change gear until the clamping
mechanism has loosened, and the Nw2
change gear can be easily removed. Nw2
Note
It is recommended to use a ring span- 13
ner, in order to protect the screw head. 17
9. If the clamping sleeve screw (13) cannot
be loosened easily, use an auxiliary tool, 14
such as an AF6 Allen wrench, to counter the 15
force. To achieve this, insert the Allen wrench 16
into the intermediate shaft hole, which is de-
signed for such a task.
10. Slacken the toothed belt (17): to do this, SB-L 303a
loosen the two clamping screws (15). Use

the tensioning element (14) to turn the ten- CHWIA_00002630_001_01
sion pulley (16) to the appropriate position.

12. Remove the Nw2 change gear.
4.4.1.2 Install NW1 and NW2
Option: Coiler SB
Installing the Nw1 change gear

1. Attach the new Nw1 change gear.
2. Tighten the clamping sleeve screw (12) on
the Nw1 change gear, using a torque of 50
Nm.
Note
The tightening torque of 50 Nm can 17
be achieved by using the screwdriver
14
provided for this task plus a normal
amount of force.
16
3. Fit the toothed belt (17) centrally on the
toothed-belt gears and the tension pulley. 12
4. Tighten the toothed belt (17): to do this, use 15

sion pulley (16) to the position providing op-
timal belt tension. Nw1 SB-M 2 303
CHWIA_00002636_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 43
Production
Note
For certain combinations of Nw1 /
Nw2 change gears and belt lengths
(see gearing plan), the tensioning ele-
ment (16) must be applied and the
screws (15) displaced by one hole, in
17
order that the toothed belt (17) can be
tightened. 14
16
12
15
Nw1 SB-M 2 303

CHWIA_00002636_001_01
Installing the Nw2 change gear

5. Attach the new Nw2 change gear.
6. Tighten the clamping sleeve screw (13) on
the Nw2 change gear, using a torque of 50
Nw2
Nm.
Note 13
The tightening torque of 50 Nm can
be achieved by using the screwdriver 17
provided for this task plus a normal
amount of force.
14
15
7. Attach the toothed belt (17).
8. Tighten the toothed belt (17): to do this, use 16
SB-L 303a
timal belt tension.
Note CHWIA_00002630_001_01
For certain combinations of Nw1 /

Nw2 change gears and belt lengths
(see gearing plan), the tensioning ele-
ment (16) must be applied and the
screws (15) displaced by one hole, in
order that the toothed belt (17) can be
tightened.
Fitting the toothed belt at the Nw1 / Nw2 change gears

9. Place the toothed belt (17) so that it is
centred on the toothed belt wheels and
tension pulley.
Nw2
10. Tighten the toothed belt (17): to do this, use
timal belt tension. Nw1
17
11. Re-tighten the two clamp screws (15).
14
15
16
SB-L 303b
CHWIA_00002632_001_01
4.4.1.3 Removing the W3 change gear
Option: Coiler SB
Note
The W3 change gear affects the speed of the delivery rollers. Thus the VA draft (delivery ten-
sion) is adjusted with the W3 change gear. The W3 change gear is specified with the appro-
priate tables.
1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the toothed belt of the Nw1 / Nw2 change gears at the Nw1 location.
3. Remove the toothed belt of change gears Nw1 / Nw2. (☞ Part 3, Page42)
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 45
Production
12
10
W3 11
W3
9
23
CHWIA_00002725_001_01
1. Loosen the screw (9) on the change gear.

2. If the screw (9) cannot be loosened easily, use an auxiliary tool, such as an Allen wrench, to
counter the force. To achieve this, insert the Allen wrench into the calendar shaft hole (23),
which is designed for such a task.
3. Unscrew the two screws (10) and with the tensioning element (12) de-tension the toothed belt
(11).
4. Take off the toothed belt (11) and remove the change gear (W3). The tensioning elements in
the change gear must not fall out!
4.4.1.4 Installing the W3 change gear
1. Fit on the change gear (W3).

2. Screw on the screw (9).
4. With the tensioning element (12) de-tension 12
the toothed belt (11). 10
5. Tighten the two screws (10).
6. Tighten the screw (9) firmly.
11
W3
CHWIA_00002920_001_01
7. Refit the toothed belt of the Nw1 / Nw2 change gears. (☞ Part 3, Page45)
4.4.1.5 Remove change gear W4
Option: Coiler SB
Note
The speed of the middle cylinder and, therefore, the VV break draft are affected by the setup
concerning the W4 change gear. The W4 change gear is determined from the appropriate 2
tables in Part 3 (or, in some cases with the gearing layout).
▶ Open the hood.
W4 5 W4
7
22 6
8
7
CHWIA_00002726_001_01
1. Loosen the screw (6) on the change gear.

2. If the screw (6) cannot be loosened easily, use an auxiliary tool, such as an Allen wrench, to
counter the force. To achieve this, insert the Allen wrench into the calendar shaft bore (22),
intended for this purpose.
3. Unscrew the two screws (7) and with the tensioning element (5) de-tension the toothed belt (8).
4. Take off the toothed belt (8) and remove the change gear (W4). The tensioning elements in the
change gear must not fall out!
4.4.1.6 Installing the W4 change gear
Option: Coiler SB
1. Fit on the change gear (W4).

2. Screw in the screw of the change gear (W4)
5
W4
and tighten with a tightening torque of 50 Nm.
7
9 8
CHWIA_00002719_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 47
Production

5 7
4. Tighten the toothed belt (8): to do this, use
the tensioning element (9) to turn the tension
pulley (5) to the position providing optimal
belt tension.
5. Tighten the two clamping screws (7).
W4 8
7
CHWIA_00002717_001_01
4.5 Feed trough
4.5.1 Setting the nipping distance «B» from the feed trough to the feed roller
10
8
9
«B
30
25
» 20
15
3 «B»: 3
«B»:
2 2
4 4a
1 1
5 5a
6 6a
7 7
CHWIA_00001388_001_01
1. Do not unscrew the scale screws.

Note
The scale for adjustment of nipping distance «B» was set to the correct position and
fastened at the factory.
If the two marks are positioned exactly opposite each other, the nipping distance will be
13 mm.
2. Adapt the nipping distance «B» between the feed trough (3) and the feed roller (7) to match the
staple length.
Feed trough
Decrease nipping distance «B».

3. Loosen screws (1) on the left-hand and right-hand sides of the machine and then tighten again
slightly.
4. On the left-hand side of the machine, loosen nuts (5a) and (6a).
5. On the right-hand side of the machine, loosen nut (5).
6. Using nut (6), set the distance (B) on scale (8).
Increase nipping distance «B».

7. Loosen screws (1) on the left-hand and right-hand sides of the machine and then tighten again
slightly.
8. On the left-hand side of the machine, loosen nuts (5a) and (6a).
9. On the right-hand side of the machine, loosen nut (6).
10. Using nut (5), set the distance (B) on scale (8).
4.5.2 Adjusting the feed trough parallel to the feed roller
▶ Adjust the pre-tension of the torsion rods. (☞ Part 4, Page50)
10
8
9
«B
30
25
» 20
15
3 «B»: 3
«B»:
2 2
4 4a
1 1
5 5a
6 6a
7 7
CHWIA_00001388_001_01
1. Execute the following work steps on both sides: (☞ Part 3, Page113)

2. Check the set distance over the entire width.
Distance feed roller to feed trough 0.10 – 0.15 mm
3. On the left-hand side of the machine, unscrew screw (4a).

◁ It must no longer contact lever (2).
4. On both sides unscrew the screws (1) and then slightly tighten them.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 49
Production
5. On the right-hand side of the machine, adjust the distance between feed trough (4) and feed
roller (3) at the closest point with screw (7).
6. With nuts (5a) and (6a), adjust feed trough (3) to the same distance as on the right-hand side of
the machine.
7. Tighten screws (1) on both sides.

8. Finally tighten screw (4a) up to lever (2) and lock.
9. Bolt (4a) on the left-hand side of the machine is not an adjustment screw. It serves only as a
stop.
10. Check the adjustment once again.
4.6 Licker-in
4.6.1 Insert the guide plate
Note
Regarding the processing of regenerated (prepared) fibres, the waste discharged by the first
mote knife may be too high. If this is the case, replace the mote knife with the supplied guide
plate.
1. Remove the licker-in unit.

2. Remove the licker-in unit.
3. Set the discharge outlet (ejection distance)
for a minimum amount of waste.
4. Adjust the mote knife, discharge opening (C).
CHWIA_00001502_001_01
Cylinder casing
4.7 Cylinder casing
4.7.1 Instructions concerning the adjustment distances
xx 0.40 0.65 xx 0.40 0.65 xx 0.40 0.65
A)
0.40 0.65 0.40
1
B) 0.50 0.65 0.50
1
C) 0.40 0.55 0.40
1
CHWIA_00001694_001_01
The elements around the cylinder have concave forms due to prior factory-processing.
Consequently, measured to the cylinder, the distance on the appropriate element is always greater
in the centre of the cylinder. In the adjustment guidelines the first dimension refers to the edge, the
second dimension refers to the centre of the cylinder.
▶ Measure and adjust the distances in the centre and on the edge.
Priority 1 Dimension in the centre is maintained
Priority 2 Dimension at the edge is also maintained
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 51
Production
4.7.2 Adjusting the cylinder covers
Setting measurement points for pre-carding zone, all raw materials

1. At the narrowest locations, set the adjust-
ment points according to the dimensions spe- 46
cified in the setting guidelines.
Note
Check the setting over the entire ma-
chine width.
2. Comply with the instructions.

(☞ Part 3, Page51) 1
3. Tighten adjustment nuts (1) and (2) against 2
each other. 1
4. Increase distance: Loosen nut (1) and tighten
nut (2).
2
5. Reduce the distance: Loosen nut (2) and
tighten nut (1).
41
CHWIA_00001686_001_01
6. Check the adjustment points in the centre of the machine. (☞ Part 3, Page52)
4.7.3 Stabilization of the cylinder covers in the centre of the machine
2
46 3
56 2
CHWIA_00001693_001_02
The adjustment points (46) and (56) in the centre of the machine have an additional stabilising ele-
ment.
Cylinder casing
These adjustment points in the centre of the machine should be set the same as specified on the
adjustment sheet.
▶ The adjustment points can only be accessed when the card flat unit is removed.
▶ Set the cylinder covers. (☞ Part 3, Page52)
Increasing the distance to the cylinder

▶ Loosen the screw (3) and use the stud screws (2) to increase the distance. Then slightly tighten
the screw (3) again.
Reducing the distance to the cylinder

▶ Unscrew the stud screws (2) slightly and reduce the distance with the screw (3). Then slightly
tighten the stud screws (2) again.
4.7.4 Setting the carding profiles relative to the cylinder clothing (man-made
fibres)
Note
The adjustment segments (4) are used to adjust the cylinder covers (1). A change in the
factory settings for the cylinder covers (1) relative to the cylinder clothing also results in a
change in the factory-set distances of the carding profiles (3). The distance between the
carding profiles (3) and the cylinder clothing must now be adjusted using spacers (2).
Increase the distance to the cylinder clothing. (Change factory settings)
7 3
+/- 4
6
5
3
3
+/- 1
CHWIA_00001705_001_01

2. Remove the shims (2) and determine their total thickness.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 53
Production
7 3
+/- 4
6
5
3
3
+/- 1
CHWIA_00001705_001_01
3. The grooves (6) give information about the thickness of the shims (2).
Notches for determining the thickness of the shims
Long notch in the shim 0.10 mm
4. Make up the required thickness of the shims (2).

5. Slide the spacers (2) between the substrate and firmly tighten the screws (5).
4.7.5 Adjusting the carding profile in the vicinity of the doffer (man-made fibres)
Note
The adjustment segments (4) are used to adjust the cylinder covers (1). A change in the ad-
justment for the cylinder covers (1) relative to the cylinder clothing also results in a change
in the set distance of the carding element (4). The distance between the carding element (4)
and the cylinder clothing (6) is adjusted using spacers (3).
1. The adjusting segments must be adjusted.

2. Adjusting the cylinder covers. (☞ Part 3, Page52)
Cylinder casing
2
3
6 +/-
+/-
7 8
60
1
6 5
4
CHWIA_00001698_001_01
1. Remove the carding profile (7).

2. Measure the distance between the cylinder clothing (6) and the carding element (4). The vari-
ation between these two elements can be compensated by adding or removing the supplied
spacers (3) until the desired dimension is achieved.
3. Remove the support (4).
6. The grooves (2) give information about the thickness of the shims (2).
Notches for determining the thickness of the shims
7. Make up the desired thickness of the shims (3) and install again.
8. Install the support (4).
9. The carding element (8) must be the same distance from the cylinder clothing (6) on both
sides.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 55
Production
4.7.6 Adjusting the carding profiles relative to the cylinder clothing (pre-carding
zone, cotton).
1. With the adjustment segments (4) adjust the

cylinder covers (1).
Note 1
A change in the factory settings for the
cylinder covers (1) relative to the cylin-
der clothing also results in a change in 4
the factory-set distances of the carding
profiles (3).
3
2. Adjust the distance between the carding
profiles (3) and the cylinder clothing using
spacers (2).
Note
The discharge distance (X) is changed
through different strips (2). 1
The distance (X) must be adapted to CHWIA_00001692_003_01
the material.
Increase the distance to the cylinder clothing. (Change factory settings)

4. Remove the shims (2) and determine their +/-
total thickness. The grooves (6) give informa- 5 6
tion about the thickness of the shims (2). 6
Notches for determining the thickness of the
shims
Note 7
2
The grooves (6) give information about
the thickness of the shims (2).
5. Make up the required thickness of the shims 3 5 +/-

(2). CHWIA_00001692_002_01
6. Slide the spacers (2) between the substrate

and firmly tighten the screws (5).
Cylinder casing
4.7.7 Adjusting the mote knife, (pre-carding zone and post-carding zone, cotton)

Increase the distance to the cylinder clothing (change works setting, pre-carding zone)
1. The adjusting segments must be adjusted. (☞ Part 3, Page52)
Note
The adjustment segments (4) are used to adjust the cylinder covers (1). A change in the
factory settings for the cylinder covers (1) relative to the cylinder clothing (7) also results
in a change in the factory-set distances of the mote knives (5). The distance between the
mote knives (5) and the cylinder clothing (7) is adjusted using spacers (2).
2
1
9
11 10 +/-
5 6
4
+/-
7 1
CHWIA_00001684_001_01
2. Comply with the instructions for fastening the cylinder covers. (☞ Part 4, Page139)
3. Remove the carding element (6).
4. Carefully measure the distance between the cylinder clothing (7) and the mote knife (5).
◁ The adjustment is faulty, if the distance gauge is pressed between the cylinder clothing (7)
and mote knife (5).
5. Remove the screws (3) and the support (11).
Note
The grooves (9) give information about the thickness of the shims (2).
7. Adjust the distance by adding or removing the supplied shims (2).

8. Measure the distance between the mote knife (5) and the cylinder clothing (7) again. The dis-
tance must be the same for the left- and right-hand sides of the machine.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 57
Production
2
1
9
11 10 +/-
5 6
4
+/-
7 1
CHWIA_00001684_001_01
◁ Check the adjustment after tightening screws (3).

9. Re-install the carding element (6).
Adjusting the mote knife in the post-carding zone
«C»
«B» 2
«A» 3
CHWIA_00001696_001_01
10. When adjusting the mote knife, it is recommended to first remove the card flats unit.
11. Remove the card flat unit. (☞ Part 4, Page147)
Cylinder casing

14. The adjustment procedure is the same as for the mote knife (5) in the pre-carding zone.
Hint
First adjustment: Adjust the mote knife in the knife support (A).
Note
Use the shims (2).
15. Increase the distance to the cylinder clothing (change works setting, pre-carding zone).
4.7.8 Adjust the discharge distance in the area of the mote knife (pre-carding zone
and post-carding zone, cotton)
1. Adjust the carding profiles relative to the cylinder clothing (pre-carding zone, cotton).
2. Adjust the mote knife, (pre-carding zone and post-carding zone, cotton). (☞ Part 3, Page57)
Changing the discharge distance (pre- and post-carding zones)

1. The strips are marked with numbers.
2. Pull out strip (2) and insert the strip with the appropriate number into the groove.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 59
Production
«X» + / -
1
8 5 2 0
CHWIA_00001690_001_01
3. The discharge distance (X) must be adapted to the material.

Note
The discharge distance (2) is changed through different discharge strips (X).
4.7.9 Tongue, sealing strip
▶ Coat the screws (4) with a few drops of non-

hardening “Loctite 243” and tighten firmly
with the prescribed torque.
Bolt tightening torque
Torque 1.20 N⋅m
Hint 4
The seal strip (3) typically remains
fitted to the tongue. Only a damaged 3
seal strip must be removed from the
tongue.
CHWIA_00001535_001_01
Cylinder casing
4.7.10 Adjusting the position of the tongue
1 4
1
6
5
7
2...25 mm
CHWIA_00001536_001_01
▶ Move the tongue until the markings (5) on the tongue (1) are positioned on both sides at the
selected location on the scale (4).
Note
In addition to the distance from tongue to cylinder, the distance between tongue and the
fibre transfer point at doffer is also important. This fibre transfer point can be influenced
by moving the tongue. (range: approx. 2 ... 25 mm)
Optimal setting for the tongue. The opening between tongue and cylinder cover or the
IGS-Classic respectively, is closed off with a seal strip.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 61
Production
4.7.11 Adjusting the distance from tongue to cylinder
7 6 5 4 2
X
X
3
CHWIA_00001540_001_01
1. Increase distance: Loosen screw (6) and screw in the screw (7).
2. Reduce the distance: Loosen screw (7) and screw in the screw (6).
3. Only tighten screws (6) and (7) slightly against each other.
4. If required, adapt the position of the tongue to the doffer. (☞ Part 3, Page61)
Note
For problems with the fibre transfer point at the doffer, the tongue / doffer position has to
be taken into account in addition to the tongue / cylinder distance.
When the cylinder cover is installed and the doffer adjusted, the distance from tongue
to cylinder clothing can only be measured via the measurement between the control ec-
centric and the cylinder shield. If the control eccentric is adjusted correctly, this measure-
ment corresponds to the distance between tongue and cylinder.
Do not adjust the control eccentric.
Take-off unit, delivery section
4.8 Take-off unit, delivery section
4.8.1 Adjusting the doffer
mm
0.350
0.300
0.250
0.225
0.200
0.175
0.150
30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 195 210 225 kg/h
01.2006 Hi
CHWIA_00001993_001_01
1 On the warm machine 2 On the cold machine
1. Remove the cover over the doffer and a carding profile on the cylinder.
2. A simple check can be carried out on both sides at (1).
Distance – cylinder doffer (machine cold) (81)

13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 63
Production
Increase the distance between the cylinder and the doffer (+)
4
1
CHWIA_00002014_001_01
3. Loosen nuts (3) and turn nuts (4) anticlockwise.

◁ The doffer displaces itself downwards.
4. Firmly tighten the nut (3) and check the adjustment once again.
5. Change the adjustment on both sides and over the entire width.
Reduce the distance between the cylinder and the doffer (-)
6. Loosen nuts (3) and turn nuts (4) in the clockwise direction.
◁ The doffer is displaced upwards.
Note
The changes must always be carried out on both sides.
7. Once nut (3) has been tightened the setting must be checked again.
Note
The check must be carried out over the full width of the doffer.
4.9 Drafting system of the coiler
4.9.1 Setting the main draft distance HVD (shift the bottom middle roller)
Option: Coiler SB
Note
The main draft distance, HVD, is altered by displacing the middle cylinder.
It is essential to avoid any fibre damage (broken fibres) as a result of drafting-system dis-
tances being too short! Always check the drafting system distances by performing trials in-
volving final spinning down to the yarn.
Drafting system of the coiler
Note
1. HVD = 35 mm is the narrowest possible main draft distance, with bottom roller bearings that
are completely pushed together.
Main draft distance (HVD)
Setting range 35....60 mm
Distance gauge selection

2. Determine the main draft distance according
to the fibre length and the value from the
table.
3. Determine the required distance between the
bottom roller bearings, (X), and select the
distance gauge (11) accordingly.
Distance between the bearings of the bottom
rollers
X
Dimension X Main draft distance
(HVD) - 35 mm
4. Example: Fibre length 29 mm carded cotton

(in accordance with table).
11
5. HVD (29 mm + 10 mm in accordance with
table) = 39 mm.
6. Dimension (X) (39 mm - 35 mm) = 4 mm
distance gauge. CHWIA_00002670_001_01
Setting the HVD

7. Open the drive hood.
8. Loosen the two clamp screws (7). Use the
5
W4
tensioning element (9) to turn the tension
pulley (5) to the appropriate position.
◁ The toothed belt (8) of the change gear
(W4) is de-tensioned.
7
9 8
CHWIA_00002719_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 65
Production
9. Loosen the two screws (25) of the bottom

roller bearings on both sides.
Hint
The cylinder distance, HVD, and the
distance gauge required for it, are
known.
10. Displace the cylinder bearings simultan-

eously.
25 CHWIA_00002865_001_01
11. Insert the selected distance gauge (11) and

align the bottom roller bearings parallel.
Note
The distance gauge must be centrally
placed between the two lateral faces of
the cylinder bearings. Always set both
sides (left and right) simultaneously!
X
12. Tighten the two screws (25) on both sides.
11
CHWIA_00002670_001_01
13. With the tension pulley (9) and the tension

element (5), tension the toothed belt (8). 5
W4
14. With the tension pulley (9) and the tension
element (5), tension the toothed belt (8) of
the change gear (W4).
15. Tighten the two clamping screws (7). 7
9 8
CHWIA_00002719_001_01
1. After shifting the middle cylinder, the position of the feed cylinder must also be readjusted.
2. Adjust break draft distance VVD (shift the back cylinder). (☞ Part 3, Page67)
3. After changing the main draft distance HVD, the top rollers for the middle cylinder and for the
back cylinder must be re-adjusted.
4. Adjust the top rollers for middle and back bottom rollers. (☞ Part 3, Page68)
4.9.2 Adjust break draft distance VVD (displace the back roller)
Option: Coiler SB
Note
The break draft distance, VVD, is altered by displacing the feed cylinder.
The break draft distance, VVD, depends on the draft resistance and the height of the break
draft.
The break draft distance, VVD, must be adjusted so that the web in this area can be pressed
down 1 ... 2 mm using a measuring gauge. It is essential to avoid any fibre damage (broken
fibres) as a result of drafting-system distances being too short! Always check the drafting
system distances by performing trials involving final spinning down to the yarn.
Note
1. VVD = 35 mm is the tightest possible break draft distance, with cylinder bearings pushed to-
gether
Break draft distance (VVD)
High break draft Short break draft distance VVD
Low break draft Width break draft distance (VVD)
Setting range 35.0 – 88.0 mm
Distance gauge selection

2. For the material to be processed, determine
the fibre length and determine the break draft
distance using the value from the table. (Part
3).
3. Determine the required distance between the
Y
bottom roller bearings, dimension (Y), and

select the distance gauge (10) accordingly.
Distance between the bearings of the bottom
rollers
Measurement «Y» Break draft dis-
tance (VVD) - 35
mm 10
4. Example: Fibre length 29 mm carded cotton
(in accordance with table).
5. VVD (29 mm + 15 mm according to the table)
= 44 mm.
CHWIA_00002672_001_01
6. Dimension (Y) (44 mm - 35 mm) = 9 mm

distance gauge.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 67
Production
Setting the VVD

7. Slacken the toothed belt for the bottom roller
(toothed-belt gears Z34 / Z51).
Hint
The cylinder distance, VVD, and the 26
distance gauge required for it, are
known.
8. Loosen both screws (26) of the bottom roller

bearing on both sides.
9. Simultaneously slide the bottom roller bear-
ings.
CHWIA_00002704_001_01
10. Insert the selected distance gauge (10) and

align the bottom roller bearings parallel.
Note
The distance gauge must be centrally
Y
placed between the two lateral faces of

the cylinder bearings. Always set both
sides (left and right) simultaneously!
11. Tighten both screws (26) of the bottom roller

bearing on both sides.
12. Tension the toothed belt for the back bottom
10
roller (for toothed belts Z 34 / Z 51).
CHWIA_00002672_001_01
13. After changing the break draft distance VVD, the top rollers must be readjusted.
4.9.3 Adjusting the top rollers for middle and back bottom rollers.
Option: Coiler SB
Note
After changing the drafting system distances, the top rollers for the middle cylinders and for
the back cylinders must also be readjusted.
The top rollers for the middle cylinders and the back cylinders are adjusted by displacing the
loading elements on both sides. The top roller for the delivery cylinder cannot be adjusted.
Distances
1. X: Distance between the bottom roller bearings for back bottom roller and for middle bottom
roller for a specific main draft distance HVD.
2. Y. Distance between the bottom roller bearings for back bottom roller and for middle bottom
roller for a specific main draft distance HVD.
Closest distance between the load elements

3. For HVD = 35 mm is X = 0 mm.
◁ Distance between the load elements = 3
5
mm.
4. For VVD = 35 mm is Y = 0 mm.
3
◁ Distance between the load elements = 5
mm.
Y=
VV
0
D
=3
5
X=
HD
V=
0
35
CHWIA_00002777_001_01
Example: Determine the clearance between the loading elements with HVD = 39 mm
5. (For HVD = 35 mm is X = 0 mm).
6. (For HVD = 39 mm is X = 4 mm).
14
7. Clearance between the loading elements:
Via bottom rollers in the X + 3 mm
middle and in the delivery unit
7
◁ Distance (4 mm + 3 mm = 7 mm).
Y=
9
VV
D=
44
HD
X=
V=
4
39
CHWIA_00002778_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 69
Production
Example: Determine the clearance between the loading elements with VVD = 44 mm
8. (For VVD = 35 mm is Y = 0 mm).
9. (For VVD = 39 mm is Y = 9 mm).
14
10. Clearance between the loading elements:
Via bottom rollers in the Y + 5 mm
middle and in the feed unit
7
◁ Distance (9 mm + 5 mm = 14 mm).
Y=
9
VV
D=
44
HD
X=
V=
4
39
CHWIA_00002778_001_01
Displace loading element

11. Open the drafting system hood and fold away
the loading arm from the drafting system.
12. On both sides loosen the screws (6) on the
load element (12) of the top roller (1) for the 2
back cylinder.
13. Displace both load elements (12) with the top
roller and fasten hand tight. 1
14. Check the clearance with the selected test 12
gauge and repeat the adjustment if neces-
sary. 6
15. If the top roller (2) for the middle cylinder
must also be readjusted, proceed in precisely CHWIA_00002740_001_01
the same manner.

16. Fold the loading arm toward the drafting sys-
tem and load the drafting system.
17. Again unscrew the screws (6) on the load
elements (12) one half turn.
◁ This optimises the pressure distribution.
Establishing readiness
5 Start-up with material

5.1 Establishing readiness
Conditions
✓ The machine must be ready for operation.
OR:
✓ After maintenance tasks, start-up without material was executed.
OR:
✓ At material change, the material-dependent mechanical settings in the "Set-up" chapter were
made.
Switching on the main switch

▶ Place the main switch on "1".
CHWIA_00003912_001_01
5.2 Setting production values
5.2.1 Target values
5.2.1.1 Adjusting the sliver weight
Option: Coiler CBA
1. Entry of password for password level 2:

3. In line « Sliver weight: » the target sliver
weight should be entered.
Option: Coiler
C7xCBAData101_D
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 71
Start-up with material Universal Operating Manual
Production
▶ Check and correct the sliver weight. (Option: Coiler) (☞ Part 3, Page98)
5.2.1.2 Set the web weight

3. In line « Web weight: » enter the target web
weight.
Shipping weight
Option: Non-woven fabric 5.7 – 40.0 g/m²
Option: Non-woven tape 8 – 56 g/m
C7xVKData101_D
▶ Check and correct the web weight. (☞ Part 3, Page99)
5.2.1.3 Enter production
▶ Enter either the production quantity or the delivery speed.

◁ The two parameters interact.
The production quantity is given.

▶ In data screen 10.1, in line « Production: and Delivery: » enter the quantity.
Maximum production (depending on the raw material)
C 70 H ≥160 kg/h
Option: Cylinder drive, capacity M
C 70 M 120 – 160 kg/h
C 70 L ≤120.0 kg/h
◁ Production is matched to the desired quality.
◁ The delivery speed will be calculated
The delivery speed is given.

▶ In data screen 10.1, in line « Delivery: » enter the speed.
Delivery speed 1 – 200 m/min
◁ The speed is matched to the desired quality.
◁ The production quantity will be calculated
Setting production values
▶ Set the delivery speed for manual can change. (☞ Part 3, Page80)
5.2.1.4 Entering the can fill quantity
Option: Coiler
1. Enter the can fill quantity either as weight or as sliver length.

◁ The two parameters interact.
The weight is given.

▶ In data screen 10.1, in line « Can filling: » enter the quantity.
Can fill quantity ≤80 kg
◁ The quantity is matched to the volume of the can.
◁ The sliver length will be calculated.
The sliver length is given.

▶ In data screen 10.1, in line « Can filling: » enter the sliver length.
Can fill quantity ≤9,999 m
◁ The sliver length is matched to the volume of the can.
◁ The weight will be calculated.
2. After changing the can fill quantity, the following parameters must also be checked.
1. The warning – set empty can. (☞ Part 3, Page80)

2. Correct the can fill quantity. (Option: Coiler CBA OR Coiler SB) (☞ Part 3, Page135)
5.2.1.5 Change the speed of the cylinder
▶ In data screen 10.1, in line « Cylinder rpm : » enter the speed.

Cylinder speed depending on material and application
Carded cotton (Ne 15-30, Nm 25-50) 790 – 930 rpm
Cotton, rotor, fine number range 775 – 845 rpm
Loose stock blends – cotton / man-made fibres 775 – 845 rpm
Combed cotton (Ne ~ 24, Nm ~ 40) / carded cotton, fine num- 670 – 810 rpm
ber range
Polyester / polyester (swing) 600 – 740 rpm
Viscose / Viscose (swing) 600 – 740 rpm
◁ The speed is matched to the material.
▶ Change the speed of the cylinder. (☞ Part 3, Page37)
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 73
Production
5.2.1.6 Change licker-in speed

▶ In data screen 10.3, in line « Licker-in speed: » enter the speed.
▶ Adjust the licker-in speed with belt pulley WE4. (Option: Number of licker-ins 1)
▶ Adjust the licker-in speed with belt pulley WE4. (Option: Number of licker-ins 3)
5.2.2 Setup values
5.2.2.1 Configuring the card delivery
Option: Coiler

C7xCBAData411_D
Switching on/switching off the Autoleveller – sliver weight

3. In data screen 41.1, in line « Levelling sliver weight: » switch on the autoleveling system.
Autoleveller sliver weight:
● « ON »
● « OFF »

Automatic ramp-up:
● « ON »
● « OFF »

Option: Coiler
OR Non-woven fabric
OR Non-woven tape

▶ In data screen 41.1, in line « Delivery draft » set the drafts.
Output draft (VA3)
Draft: « min: » 1.15 – 1.4
Note
Draft in creep speed
Draft: « max: » 1.4 – 2.4
Note
Draft at maximum speed
Draft: « eff: » Draft at set speed
◁ Drafting is adapted to the raw material
Resetting the delay of the Autoleveller

5. In data screen 41.1, in the line « Reset to setup draft: » activate the function.
Resetting the delay of the Autoleveller:
● « No »
● « Yes »
◁ Drafting of the autoleveling system is reset to the specified value
5.2.2.2 Configuring the card delivery
1. Adjusting the speed in creep speed.

Speed
Without higher-level controller 8 – 15 m/min
2. Set the default delivery.

Default – delivery:
● Off
Specification for the delivery (delivery
speed) can be set in the appropriate data
screen
● On
Prescribed value for the delivery (delivery
speed) must be entered externally. The C7xVKData411_D
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 75
Production
value can no longer be entered in the

respective data screen for the card.
3. Set the delivery.
Maximum speed
Option: Non-woven fabric 50 – 270 m/min

OR Non-woven tape
Option: Prepared for 50 – 140 m/min

compacting roller
C7xVKData411_D

Option: Coiler
OR Non-woven fabric
OR Non-woven tape

Output draft (VA3)
Draft: « min: » 1.15 – 1.4
Note
Draft: « max: » 1.4 – 2.4
Note
Adjusting the draft of the compacting rollers

▶ Adjust the draft between the second

compacting roller and the delivery roller.
▶ Adjust the draft between the doffer and
the first compacting roller.
C7xVKSData411_D
5.2.2.3 Configuring feed and cylinder
C7xCBAData412_D
Switching on/switching off the batt Autoleveller

2. In data screen 41.2, in line « Autolevelling batt: » switch on the autoleveling system.
Autoleveller – batt short-term addition « ON »
◁ The short-term feature in the card feed is switched on. The frequency converter changes
the speed of the feed roller motor based on the signals received from the feed measuring
device.
3. In data screen 41.2, in line « Autolevelling batt: » switch off the autoleveling system.
Autoleveller – batt short-term addition « OFF »
◁ The short-term feature in the card feed is switched off. The speed of the feed roller motor is
constant.
Setting the switch-off point of the feed protection

4. In data screen 41.2, in the line « Feed safety device threshold: » enter the desired switch-off
point.
Feed protection switch-off point – feed roller 110 – 250 %
● Cotton 120 %
● Polyester / blends 130 %
◁ Feed roller switches off if there is a foreign object in the batt feed.
5. Enter the load of the feed trough. (☞ Part 3, Page113)
Configuring the speed monitor for the cylinder

6. In data screen 41.1, in the line « Monitoring cylinder rpm: » set the tolerance.
Tolerance – monitoring cylinder rotational speed 0.8 – 10 %
● Guide value 1%
◁ If the cylinder rpm falls below the set percentage rpm, the drive switches off and the cylin-
der is braked.
Adjusting the behaviour if the power supply is interrupted

7. In data screen 41.2, in line « Cylinder after power failure: » set the desired process.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 77
Production
Behaviour after interruption of the power supply

Behaviour:: « Automatic braking » Cylinder is braked automatically
Behaviour:: « Brake/start manually » Cylinder can be manually braked – or re-
accelerated
◁ Behaviour after a power outage is set.
Setting the switch-off delay of the chute monitor

8. In data screen 41.32, in line « Chute monitoring, emptying: » enter the behaviour.
Chute monitoring
Switch-off delay: « Normal » Normal switch-off delay
Switch-off delay: « Short » Short switch-off delay (-10%)
Switch-off delay: « Long » Long switch-off delay (+10%)
5.2.2.4 Configuring the IGS
C7xCBAData413_D
Changing the service life of the cylinder clothing

2. In data screen 41.3, in the group « IGS-classic (Cylinder) » , in the line « Lifetime of cloth-
ing: » set the experiential value.
Service life – cylinder clothing 100 – 4,000 t
3. Decide, witch behaviour of the IGS system you like to configure.
● Stop grinding
Grinding will be stopped, after the grinding budget is reached.
▶ Go to line « End of service life: » , set behavior status.
Behavior after end of live time « Stop grinding »
● Contin. grinding
Grinding will continue, until the double of cycles of the origin budget is reached. But max.
400 cycles.
▶ Go to line « End of service life: » , set behavior status.
Behavior after end of live time « Contin. grinding »
4. Read in data screen 41.3, in the line « Grinding budget: » the newly calculated number of
grinding cycles.
Grinding budget, number of cycles
≤750 t 270
≥750 t 400
◁ In the line « Grinding budget: » the newly calculated number of cycles is displayed as a
result of the configured material and service live of clothing.
Changing the service life of the card flat clothing

5. In data screen 41.3, in the group « IGS-top (Flats) » , in the line « Lifetime of clothing: » set
the experiential value.
Service life – card flats clothing 100 – 4,000 t
6. Go to line « End of service life: » , set behavior status.

◁ Grinding will be stopped, after the grinding budget is reached.
7. In data screen 41.3, line « Grinding time/life: » set the experiential value.
Grinding interval matched to service life 2 – 8 min
● Guide value 5 min
5.2.2.5 Specifying sliver weight during pull-in
Option: Coiler

2. In the line « Sliver weight piece-up: » specify the sliver weight.
3. Select the sliver weight so that the sliver is easily pulled in with the injector function.
Sliver weight default when drawing in
Option: Coiler CBA

◁ When drawing in, if there is still no sliver between the disk rollers, « Sliver weight piece-
up: » applies.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 79
Production
5.2.2.6 Configuring the coiler
Option: Coiler
C7xCBAData423_D
Warning – set empty can

3. In the line « Empty can warning: » enter the sliver length.
Time point – warning, empty can
Waning early 10% of the can fill quantity
Warning late 80% of the can fill quantity
◁ When reaching the set sliver length, the signal light flashes until a reserve empty can is
pushed in.
Setting the delivery speed for manual can change

4. In data screen 42.3, in line « Deliv. can change, card: » specify the delivery speed.
Delivery speed during can change
Maximum Same as in production operation
If there are faults Reduce the speed
◁ Delivery speed at can change is set.
5. Observe the can changing procedure.
If faults occur frequently when changing a can.

▶ Reduce speed.
Setting the speed for manual can change

6. In the line « Man. can change, lower speed: » set the function.
Prior to can change, the delivery speed must be lowered the same way it is for an automatic
can change.
▶ Switch on the function.
Card flats
The can should be changed at full delivery speed. The possibility of sliver breakage is accep-
ted.
▶ Switch off the function.
The following tasks during commissioning

7. Correct the can fill quantity. (Option: Coiler CBA OR Coiler SB) (☞ Part 3, Page135)
8. Adjust the lift sliver funnel monitor. (☞ Part 3, Page126)
9. Set the clamping duration. (☞ Part 3, Page127)
10. Adjust the air injector of the coiler. (Option: Coiler CBA) (☞ Part 3, Page128)
5.3 Card flats
5.3.1 Explanation of the adjustment values of the card flats
Sample diagram
0.275 51 50
Y1
0.250 X 52
0.225 Y 53
X1
Carding gap mm
0.200
1 0.175 54
0.150
0.125
0.100
Cylinder 775 805 815 825 835 845
2 rpm 785 795
Production
3 kg/h 85 95 105 115 125 135 5
Flat speed 0.22 0.23 0.24 0.25 0.28 0.30 Low 6
4 m/min 0.30 0.32 0.34 0.36 0.38 0.40 High CHWIA_00001892_001_02
1 Carding gap 4 Card flat speed

2 Cylinder speed 5 Low
3 Production per hour 6 High
The following parameters are the determining factors for the carding gap adjustment:
● Cylinder speed (rpm)

● Production (kg/h)
Which parameter is authoritative?
Rule
The parameter that results in a larger card gap is always authoritative.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 81
Production
Example X
The cylinder speed X is high but the production X1 is low.
▶ In this situation the card flats must be adjusted for the high cylinder speed (X).
Example Y
The cylinder speed Y is low but the production Y1 is high.
▶ In this situation the card flats must be adjusted for the high production (Y1).
5.3.2 Determining the carding gap
1. Select the suitable diagram.

100% CO / CO% > MMF% / fine rotor yarns, coarse and fine ring-spun yarns
100% CO / CO% > MMF% / coarse rotor yarns (☞ Part 3, Page84)
Combed or carded cotton / fine yarns (card flats default) (☞ Part 3, Page85)
Combed cotton / extremely fine yarns (card flats EF) (☞ Part 3, Page86)
100% MMF / MMF% > CO% (☞ Part 3, Page87)
2. Read out the settings for the five measuring points from the diagram.
3. There must be differentiation as to whether the flat clothings are mounted are not.
The card flats are not new, are already run-in.

▶ Then the definitive settings can be made in accordance with the diagrams.
▶ The definitive settings should be optimised through trials, to achieve the optimal balance
between productivity and quality.
New card flat clothings have been mounted.

▶ The carding gap must be further adjusted during the run-in phase.
Enlarged carding gap during the run-in phase of new card flat clothings
Duration of the run-in phase: 15 – 20 t 0.05 – 0.10 mm
Note
During the run-in phase the same quality cannot be achieved that is achieved with
the definitive setting.
▶ After the run-in phase the card flats are levelled.
▶ Level card flats on the machine. (☞ Part 4, Page76)
▶ The card flats cannot be definitively adjusted until after levelling.
4. Note the determined adjustment values on the adjustment sheet.
◁ The card flat settings are determined.
Card flats
5.3.2.1 100% CO / CO% > MMF% / fine rotor yarns, coarse and fine ring-spun
yarns
0.275 51 50
0.250 52
0.225 53
Carding gap mm
0.200
0.175 54
0.150
0.125
0.100
Cylinder 775 805 815 825 835 845
rpm 785 795
Production
kg/h 85 95 105 115 125 135
Flat speed Low 0.22 0.23 0.24 0.25 0.28 0.30
m/min High 0.30 0.32 0.34 0.36 0.38 0.40 CHWIA_00001893_001_02
100% CO = 100% cotton

CO% > MMF% = blends in which the cotton content is greater than the man-made fibre content
50-54 Larger carding gap during the run-in phase of new card flat 0.05 – 0.10 mm
clothings
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 83
Production
5.3.2.2 100% CO / CO% > MMF% / coarse rotor yarns
0.450 51 50
0.400 52
0.350
53
Carding gap mm
0.300
0.250 54
0.200
0.150
0.100
Cylinder
rpm 790 810 830 850 870 890 910 930
Production
kg/h 125 155 185 215
Flat speed Low 0.20 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.30
m/min High 0.28 0.30 0.32 0.34 0.36 0.38 CHWIA_00001894_001_02
100% CO = 100% cotton

CO% > MMF% = blends in which the cotton content is greater than the man-made fibre content
clothings
Card flats
5.3.2.3 Combed or carded cotton / fine yarns (card flats default)
0.250 C 70
0.225
0.200 1 2
51 50
Carding gap mm
0.175
52
0.150 53
0.125 54
0.100
0.075
Cylinder 670 770 790 810
rpm 690 710 730 750
Production
kg/h 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Flat speed Low 0.23 0.25 0.27 0.29 0.31 0.33 0.33
m/min High 0.30 0.32 0.34 0.36 0.38 0.40 0.40CHWIA_00001895_001_02
clothings
1 Scope of application Long staple
2 Scope of application Medium staple
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 85
Production
5.3.2.4 Combed cotton / extremely fine yarns (card flats EF)
0.250 1 2
0.225 51 50
52
0.200 C 70 EF
53
Carding gap mm
0.175
0.150 54
0.125
0.100
0.075
Cylinder 670 770 790 810
rpm 690 710 730 750
Production
kg/h 20 35 50 60 70 80 90 100
Flat speed 0.19 0.21 0.25 0.27 0.29 0.31 0.33 0.33 Low
m/min 0.26 0.28 0.32 0.34 0.36 0.38 0.40 High
0.40CHWIA_00001896_001_02
clothings
1 Scope of application Long staple
2 Scope of application Medium staple
Card flats
5.3.2.5 100% MMF / MMF% > CO%
0.450
0.400
51 50
0.350
52
Carding gap mm
0.300 53
0.250
54
0.200
0.150
0.100
Cylinder 600 660 680 700 720 740
rpm 620 640
Production
kg/h 45 65 85 105 115 135
Flat speed 0.22 0.23 0.24 0.25 0.26 0.27
m/min CHWIA_00001898_001_02
100% MMF = 100% man-made fibres

MMF% > CO% = blend in which the man-made fibre content is greater than the cotton content
clothings
5.3.3 Entering the flat speed
1. Read off the speed of the card flats based on the material and the production from the diagram.
2. In data screen 10.1, in line « Flats speed: » enter the speed.
Card flat speed 0.20 – 0.40 m/min
5.3.4 Measurement for card flats
A card flat must firstly be moved to the measuring point.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 87
Production
5.3.4.1 Drive the card flats for the adjustment
Setting the mode for maintenance

1. In data screen 80.1 the operating mode « Service mode » is selected.
◁ Grinding and pulling on of the clothing can be executed in menu 81.
Activating measurement mode for the positioning of the card flats
1
2 3
52 x.xx
51 x.xx 53 x.xx 80.1
54 x.xx
50 x.xx
8x.x
x.xx A
x.xx A
xxxxxxxx
CHWIA_00001855_001_01

3. In the line « Carry out servicing: » trigger the action.
Action « Flat measurement »
◁ Measurement mode starts.
4. Press and hold the Start button (3), until the card flat is at the first measuring point.
◁ The card flat is at the first measuring point.
◁ The first card flat can be set.
5. Press the “Stop” button (2) and then after a slight delay press the “Start” button (3).
◁ The following status message will be displayed: « Carding gap measurement, position
1»
◁ Measurement mode is active.
6. Tap the Start button (3).
◁ The previously set card flat is moved via the drive to the next measuring point where it
stops automatically.
◁ The following status message will be displayed: « Carding gap measurement, position
2»
7. All card flats can be set in this manner.
8. Press the “Stop” button (2).
◁ Measurement mode is ended.
Card flats
5.3.4.2 Measuring the carding gap
Inserting the load spring for card flats
52 1
51 53
2
54
50
4
3
CHWIA_00001883_001_01
Caution
Clothing damage due to the card flats touching on the cylinder clothing
▶ Only take measurements with the load spring for card flats.
▶ Precisely comply with the instructions for adjusting the card flats.
For a constant and correct measurement result, the load spring must always be inserted before
measuring.
The load spring ensures that the card flats are always pressed onto the cylinder arch with the same
force.
The load spring is indispensable, particularly on the lower measuring points.
▶ Slide the tool (2) into the measuring slot and hook in the spring on the screw (1).
◁ The contact surface of the card flat is now loaded.
Measurement process
The carding gap is measured at measuring points (54) (53) (52) (51) and (50).
The carding gap is felt by introducing the feeler gauge.
The carding gap must be measured on both sides of the machine by the same person.
The card gauge must be in faultless condition, otherwise the measurement will be falsified.
▶ At the measuring point, slide the card gauge between card flat and cylinder.
▶ Hold the card gauge behind the joint and slide it back and forth.
▶ Evaluate the resistance that occurs through the jamming of the carding gauge between the
clothings of the card flats and the cylinder.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 89
Production
5.3.5 Adjustment mechanism of the card flats
Structure
2
2 2
52
51 1a 53
3 1b 3
54
50
3
3
3a
CHWIA_00001874_001_02
The top-most adjustment point (52) fixes the cylinder arch with lock nuts.
The lower four adjustment points (50) (51) (53) and (54) are fitted with an eccentric adjustment
element.
These four eccentric adjustment elements support the cylinder arch (2) from the inside.
Eccentric adjustment
The eccentric adjustment element (3) is used for rough adjustment.
The screw (3a) is used for fine adjustment.
5.3.5.1 Rough adjustment
2 2 2
6
3 3
3a
5
4
3
CHWIA_00001860_003_01
1. Fit on the strap (4).

◁ The lever (6) of the fine adjustment mechanism is positioned.
2. Unscrew the nut (5) 1/4 turn.
◁ The adjustment eccentric (3) can be turned.
3. Execute the rough adjustment on the adjustment eccentric (3).
◁ Direction of rotation + – the carding gap becomes larger
Card flats
◁ Direction of rotation - – the carding gap becomes smaller

4. Tighten the nut (5) with 1/4 turn.
◁ The adjustment is fixed.
Note
The nut (5) is fitted with plate springs. This prevents the adjustment eccentric from be-
coming mis-adjusted through tightening. Through this measure, counter lifting of the ad-
justment eccentric when tightening the nut is not necessary.
5.3.5.2 Fine adjustment
2 2 2
6
3 3
3a
5
4
3
CHWIA_00001860_003_01
1. The nut (5) remains firmly tightened.

◁ The adjustment eccentric can be precisely adjusted indirectly via the lever (6).
2. Swing up the strap (4).
◁ The lever (6) can be adjusted.
3. Use the screw (3a) to execute the fine adjustment.
5.3.6 Procedure for adjusting the card flats
Work material
Card gauge (☞ Part 3, Page285)
For general settings and checks.

Presses the slide shoes of the card
flats onto the cylinder arch.
Ideal quantity 2 units
Caution
Clothing damage due to the card flats touching on the cylinder
▶ Set new card flat 0.05 to 0.10 mm higher than the basic setting.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 91
Production
1. Comply with the measuring instruction. (☞ Part 3, Page89)
Rough setting
Conditions
✓ Card flats are set somewhat too far.
52 1a
1b
51 53
54
50
5 5
CHWIA_00001874_003_01
2. Move the adjusting points (51) and (53), away, turn in the minus (-) direction.
◁ These adjustment eccentrics are now off-loaded.
3. Carefully turn the adjustment eccentrics (50) and (54) in the minus (-) direction.
◁ The carding gap becomes smaller.
4. Set the adjustment point (52) with the nuts (1a) and (1b).
5. Measure the adjustment points (50) (52) (54).
If the three adjustment points are within tolerance:

Tolerance – rough adjustment: ±0.05 mm
▶ First adjust the narrower of the two adjustment points (51) and (53), then adjust the other
one.
6. Measure all five adjustment points.
If all three adjustment points are within tolerance:

Tolerance – rough adjustment: ±0.05 mm
▶ Tighten the nuts (5) firmly.
Connection
Torque – nuts 20 N⋅m
7. Execute the rough setting on the opposite side of the machine.
Card flats
Fine adjustment
52 1a
1b
51 53
54
50
5 5
CHWIA_00001874_003_01
8. Move the reference card flat toward the adjustment point (54). (☞ Part 3, Page88)
9. Finely adjust the adjustment points (54) (53) (52) (51) and (50) in succession, in each case on
both sides of the machine, with the reference card flat.
Note
For the fine adjustment, each individual adjustment point on both sides of the machine is
adjusted.
10. Measure the carding gap. (☞ Part 3, Page89)
If all five adjustment points are within tolerance:

Tolerance fine adjustment: ±0.02
▶ Check. (☞ Part 3, Page93)
Check
11. For the check, proceed as specified for the fine adjustment. (☞ Part 3, Page93)
12. Measuring carding gap (☞ Part 3, Page89).
If individual adjustment points are outside of tolerance:

▶ Readjust these adjustment points with the fine adjustment.
▶ In the next run-through, repeat the check with the reference card flat.
If all five adjustment points on both sides of the machine are within tolerance:
Then the adjustment of the card flats is correct.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 93
Production
5.3.7 Determining the reference card flat
The reference card flat is the card flat that is closest to the cylinder clothing at the measuring point.
The definitive card gap adjustment should be executed with this reference card flat.
This ensures that clothing damage cannot occur.
The narrower the card gap (fine spinning) the more important it is that adjustment is made only with
the closest card flat.
Procedure for fine spinners

The narrowest card flat must be determined by comparing all card flats.
If there is a narrow carding gap this effort is necessary.
Procedure for coarse spinners

The narrowest card flat can be determined by comparing several card flats.
This procedure suffices for a wide card gap.
Time can be saved through this procedure.
Mark the reference card flat with a marker pen.
5.3.8 Adjusting the deflection elements of the card flats
Adjust the distance between the card flat and the cylinder arch
1 1
4
47
3
0
3
1 .3
2 2
1.3
55
0
5
CHWIA_00001872_001_01
1. Position the beginning or end of a card flat (1) precisely on the marking (2) of the cylinder arch
(3). (☞ Part 3, Page88)
3. With the eccentric (5) set the adjustment points (47) and (55).
Drawing in material
5.3.9 Driving card flats in reverse

4. In the line « Carry out servicing: » select the « Flat reversal » option.
Action « Flat reversal »
5. « START key » activate.

◁ Card flats move backwards, as long as the START button is activated.
5.4 Drawing in material
Close all doors.
5.4.1 Setting the mode for production operation
▶ In data screen 80.1 the operating mode « Automatic mode » is selected.

5.4.2 Starting the machine
▶ « START key » activate.

◁ The LED on « START key » flashes
while the cylinder and licker-in are being
brought up to speed.
◁ The cylinder motor starts.
Cylinder ramp-up time
Option: Cylinder drive ≤150 s
with belt pulley CHWIA_00002241_001_01

converter
converter
◁ At a cylinder rotational speed of ≤200
rpm, the licker-in motor starts.
◁ The LED on« START key » is illumin-
ated, work speed has been reached.
▽ The machine does not start.
▶ Notify the supervisor.
▶ Check whether "Automatic mode" is
set in the data screen 80.1.
▽ Power failure during the start phase.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 95
Production
▶ When grid power is restored, the

cylinder can be restarted where it
was before standstill.
CHWIA_00002241_001_01
5.4.3 Starting production (doffer at creep speed)

Conditions
✓ The message « Chute ready for filling » is displayed.
ate once.
duction » flashes, the card chute
is being filled.
CHWIA_00002236_001_01

Conditions
✓ The message « Production ready » is displayed.
ate once.
duction » flashes; Production at
creep speed
◁ Start the clearer roller and the doffer.
CHWIA_00002236_001_01
Guiding the sliver into the coiler

Option: Coiler
▶ Draw in the card sliver and guide it up to the coiler.

◁ Light barrier on the coiler detects the card sliver.
▽ If a fault occurs whilst drawing the sliver into the coiler, the card continues to produce
at creep speed. If the time taken to correct the fault exceeds 3 minutes, the doffer
stops.
3. « START key for production » activate a second time.

high speed
◁ Status LED automatic mode is illuminated
Drawing in material
Option: Coiler
◁ If the machine is producing at creep speed with a drawn-in sliver, it switches off after
the time duration set in the data screen. Production at creep speed has to be restar-
ted.
5.4.4 Starting production (doffer at high speed)
Conditions
✓ The machine is operating at creep speed, the card sliver has been drawn in up to the coiler.

Conditions
✓ Automatic ramp-up in fast speed is configured.
ate.
production
CHWIA_00002236_001_01
Hint
Subsequent pressing of the
START button causes toggle
between fast speed and creep
speed.

Conditions
✓ No automatic ramp-up in fast speed.
ate and hold.
production
◁ The doffer will only continue to run
at the programmed delivery speed,
if the light scanner on the coiler has CHWIA_00002236_001_01
been covered for approx. 3 seconds.


13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 97
Production
Automatic ramp-up:
● « ON »
● « OFF »
5.4.5 Optimising the running behaviour
5.4.5.1 Correct sliver weight
Option: Coiler

2. Place the card in service for 15 minutes.
Hint
Sort 10 meters 5 times.
3. Weigh the produced sliver in the laboratory.
If the actual sliver weight deviates from the

target sliver weight.
▶ In data screen 10.2, in line « Sorted
sliver weight: » enter the actual sliver
weight. C7xCBAData102_D
Sliver weight Numerical [4]

◁ The system calculates the correction
factor.
◁ The sliver weight is corrected by the
« Correction factor, card: ».
If actual sliver weight and target sliver weight

agree.
▶ Note the currently set « Correction
factor, card: ».
Correctional factor 0.5 – 1.5
◁ The « Correction factor, card: » is
correct.
◁ The actual « Correction factor,
card: » is backed up and can be re-
entered after a data loss.
Drawing in material
5.4.5.2 Correct the web weight

2. Place the card in service for 15 minutes.
Hint
Sort 10 meters 5 times.
C7xVKData102_D
3. Weigh the produced web in the laboratory.
If the actual weight deviates from the set weight.

▶ In data screen 10.2, in line « Sorted web weight: » enter the actual web weight.
Web weight Numerical [4]
◁ The system now calculates the draft with regard to the TARGET web weight at the
card. The calculated draft is displayed. The web weight is then adjusted to the TAR-
GET weight based on this calculation. The calculated drafts for any given case remains
saved in the respective production group. They must be determined separately for
each individual production value group (1 - 5).
◁ The card produces for a minimum of 15 minutes. The effective web weight should not
be determined until this period of time has elapsed. Recommendation: Carry out 5
tests. Enter the effective web weight. The draft is now calculated and displayed. The
motor speed of the feed roller is now corrected in such a way that the card produces
the required web weight. The draft can be changed with the PLUS key or the MINUS
key. However, this option should only be used in the event of a program change. The
displayed drafts must be noted down prior to the program change and then re-entered
for each machine and production group following the program change.
Note
Basis of calculation, basic draft:
Rotational speed of delivery rollers divided by the rotational speed of the feed rollers.
(For web weight 8.0 g/m, batt weight 778 g/m).
If actual weight and target weight tally.

▶ Note the currently set « Basic draft, card: ».
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 99
Production
◁ The actual « Basic draft, card: » is backed up and can be re-entered after a data loss.
5.5 Aerofeed (material feed)
5.5.1 Adjusting the air ratios in a card line
▶ The suction unit (8) and the fan (9) must be adjusted in such a manner that the air ratios equal
the specified values to the extent possible.
Default values of the air ratios in a card line.
Pdyn Pstat Pdyn

(m 3/ s) (Pa) 2 3/4 7 (m 3 / s)
1
9
8
5
10
6
6 CHWIA_00001242_001_01
1 Air flow rate at material entry point 0.6 – 1.0 m³/s

2 Vacuum at waste extraction point 1,000 Pa
Exhaust-air flow rate at waste extraction point 50 m³/s
3 Air flow rate at air exit point from the storage unit Air flow rate at material entry point (1) + 0.1 m³/s
4 Vacuum pressure at the measuring point at air Vacuum pressure at the material feed point (informa-
exit from the storage unit tion in old OM unclear) − (0.5 – 150 Pa)
5 Air flow rate at material delivery point (Design 0.6 – 1.0 m³/s
with cone)
6 Vacuum pressure on the measuring point (Design Item 6 (information in old OM un-
with duct) clear) − (0.0 – 0.0 Pa)
7 Air-flow rate at measuring point (Design with 0.9 – 1.1 m³/s
duct)
10 Air-flow rate at measuring point (Production up to 0.4 – 0.6 m³/s
600 kg)
Air-flow rate at measuring point (Production to 0.8 – 1.0 m³/s
1200 kg)
◁ The air ratios setting influences the running behaviour of the entire card line.

Aerofeed (material feed)
5.5.2 Production setting for the feed machine
Note
The optimum production speed of the feed machine is set in the program of the correspond-
ing machine. The adaptation is described in the corresponding instructions.
If all cards of a feed system are in operation, the feed machine of this system should supply
the material to the cards with as few interruptions as possible.
Ideal settings for operation of the feed machine

▶ Runtime should be 90% and the standstill time should be 10% of operating time.
5.5.3 Acceleration sliders and isolation sliders
Acceleration slider
The acceleration sliders (2) are used to accelerate the transport air in the feed system. If the cross
section in the feed channel is reduced, the air speed increases. The material is more effectively
conveyed to the more remote card chutes.
The purpose of the acceleration sliders is to achieve a uniform distribution of the material on all
card chutes.
▶ The first acceleration slider (2) downstream of the feed machine at the lowest position. For the
other acceleration sliders (2), the dimension «X» can be continuously increased.
Forward rolling of the material in the transport channel should be avoided as much as possible.
▶ The dimension «X» for the last acceleration slider (2) is in the range of 150 ... 200 mm.
Option: Single assortment feed
Card line with one feed machine
1 2
2
150...200 mm < 600 kg
5 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 3
150...200 mm > 600 kg
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 3
2 CHWIA_00001284_001_01
A cover (1) seals the feed duct immediately after the last card chute.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 101

Production
Option: Standard cross section
Standard channel cross section

Production capacity to 600 kg/h
Option: Jumbo cross section
Jumbo channel cross section

Production capacity over 600 kg/h
An additional air separator (5) is installed on the last card of a line.
▶ Adjust the air separator. (☞ Part 3, Page103)
Option: Two-assortment feed
Card line with two feed machines
4 2
5 5 5 5
44
6 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 3
150...200 mm 2 2 150...200 mm CHWIA_00001285_001_01
For infeed from two sides the sliders are used for separating (4) as well as for accelerating
(2).
With the separating sliders (4) the cards can be allocated to the respective feed system. The
configuration of the system is specified when the order is placed.
▶ Through the separating sliders (4) the cards are allocated to the respective feed system.
▶ Adjust the acceleration sliders (2).
▶ Adjust the air separator. (☞ Part 3, Page103)

5.5.4 Adjusting the air separator
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
15 16 17 18 14 13 12 11 10
CHWIA_00001286_001_02
Note
Air should only be separator at the last air separator (1).
1. Switch off the fan of the AEROfeed unit.

2. Remove the cover (5).
Adjusting the last air separator of the card line

3. Place the slider (2) in position “3”.
If material transport stops: Slightly increase 3
the opening of the
sliders.
4. Unscrew the knurled nuts (4).

5. Swing up the flap (3) and with the knurled
nuts (4) fasten it on the outside on the chan-
nel. 1
◁ The flap (3) is opened and fixed in place.
2
4
5
4
CHWIA_00004032_002_01
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 103

Production
Adjusting the other air separators of the card line

6. Place the slider (2) in position “0”.
◁ Slider is closed. 3
7. Close the flap (3) and fasten it with the
knurled nuts (4).
◁ The flap (3) is closed and fixed in place.
4
4
5 4
CHWIA_00004032_003_01
8. Install the flat (5).
▶ Adjust the fill height in the feed chute. (☞ Part 3, Page104)
5.5.5 Adjusting the fill height in the feed chute
▶ Start the UNIcontrol feed system. (☞ Part 2, Page12)

◁ Blowroom line is ready for operation.
Initial situation: Switch off the material feed

1. On the operating unit of the UNIcontrol set
the switching point (4) to a higher value.
◁ The blowroom does not feed any mater- 4
ial into the card chutes.
2. On the UNIcontrol operating unit switch the
material feed (5) to the cards.
3. Start production (doffer at creep speed).
5
4. Start production (doffer at high speed).
◁ The first card is in operation.
CHWIA_00001282_001_02

Adjusting the switch point of the material feed

5. Reduce the switch point (4).
◁ The feed switches on. 2
◁ The feed chutes are filling. The pressure
in the feed line slowly increases.
6. Evaluate the fill level in the window (2).
Cotton: The chute is filled to the lower edge

of the window.
Man-made fibres: The chute is filled to the
middle of the window. CHWIA_00001256_001_02
In this case the fill level is set correctly.
The fill level is too high.

▶ Increase the switch point (4).
The fill level is too low.

▶ Reduce the switch point (4).
7. Place all the cards of this system in service.

8. Readjust the fill level if necessary.
5.5.6 Installing and adjusting the deflector plate on the first card shaft
Note
If the first card chute in a feed system is not properly filled, in spite of correct settings, the
provided deflection plate must be installed and adjusted.
Installing the deflection plate

Option: Standard cross section
Conditions
✓ Channel cross-section 500 mm x 120 mm (production to 600 kg)
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 105

Production
▶ Install the provided deflector plate (1) in

the rectangular channel upstream of the 1 300 120
first card sheet.
500
250
10.5
1
CHWIA_00001188_001_01
Installing the deflection plate

Option: Jumbo cross section
Conditions
✓ Channel cross-section 600 mm x 140 mm (production to 1200 kg)
▶ Install the provided deflector plate (1) in

the rectangular channel upstream of the 1 300 140
first card sheet.
600
300
10.5
1
CHWIA_00001241_001_01
Setting procedure
1. Turn the deflector plate (1) until the ideal position for deflecting the material is reached.

Card chute
5.5.7 Adjusting the vacuum for the exhaust air (open transfer)
Conditions
✓ The filter installation must accept as exhaust air the transport air as blown into the feeder sys-
tem from the transport fan. Variations in the suction power in this filter installation are evened
out by the open transfer of the transport air.
▶ A slight vacuum has to be established at the

measuring point (1). This value is achieved
by reducing the suction power through a gate 100mm 1 2
at position (2).
Vacuum at check point (1) 50 – 150 Pa
At the infiltrated air inlet (3) air that contains dust
must never be blown out.3
500mm
3
-
CHWIA_00001187_001_01
5.6 Card chute
5.6.1 Air ratios of card chute and card
1. Check the air volume of the central card exhaust system.

Vacuum pressure of the suction unit
Underpressure 1,000 – 1,300 Pa
Air flow rate of the suction unit
Option: Coiler SB 1.45 m³/s

OR Coiler RSB
Option: Coiler CBA 1.3 m³/s
2. Adjust the vacuum for the waste suction on each card chute.
3. Adjust the vacuum pressure for the card suction. (☞ Part 3, Page108)
4. Check for open transfer of the exhaust air of the card chutes.
5. Adjust the vacuum for the exhaust air (open transfer). (☞ Part 3, Page107)
6. Check the air ratios in a card line and adjust them if necessary.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 107

Production
5.6.2 Adjust the vacuum pressure for the card suction
Conditions
✓ The Aerofeed unit and the filter system must be in operation.
2
+
Pa
1
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
CHWIA_00001183_001_01
1. Adjust the maximum or minimum vacuum pressure at each suction point in the prescribed
range.
First and subsequent cards in the line (example with 8 cards)

2. Using a U-tube, measure the vacuum pressure at the measuring point (1).
3. The vacuum must lie within the prescribed range for the card (3) nearest to the filter system
(17).
Vacuum range at measurement point (1) of the card 1,150 ±150 Pa**)
**) Guide value
4. Set the vacuum accordingly using the slide valves (2) of the cards (10...17).

Card chute
5.6.3 Adjust the batt weight through the position of the card chute wall
C
B
1 A
2
3
7
4
5
CHWIA_00001254_001_02
1. Unscrew screws (1) to (6).

2. Position the card chute (7) on the top.
Volume – card chute
Cotton (CO) AND Batt weight: 600 – 700 g/m Small (A)
Cotton (CO) AND Batt weight: 700 – 800 g/m Medium (B)
OR: Chemical fibres (MMF) AND Batt weight: 600 – 700 g/m
Chemical fibres (MMF) AND Batt weight: 700 – 900 g/m Large (C)
3. Tighten the screws (1) and (2).

4. Position the card chute (7) on the bottom.
5. Tighten the screws (3) (4) (5) (6).
6. Measure batt weight on the feed trough of the card.
Ideal batt weight on the feed trough:
Cotton 600 – 800 g/m
Man-made fibres 700 – 900 g/m
If the batt is too heavy:

▶ Adjust the chute so that it is narrower.
If the batt is too light:
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 109

Production
C
B
1 A
2
3
7
4
5
CHWIA_00001254_001_02
If the batt has holes, particularly on the edge:

▶ Readjust the chute.
5.6.4 Setting the batt weight
Condition
1. The pressure monitoring is functional and adjusted. (☞ Part 4, Page122)

3. In the line « Chute, batt weight: » enter the
desired weight.
Feeder weight
Feeder weight 600 – 900 g/m
4. In the line « Mass density of

material: »select the estimated density.
Density:
● « Very low density, pressure level 4 »
● « Low density, pressure level 3 »
● « Normal density, pressure level 2 »
C7xCBAData414_D
● « High density, pressure level 1 »
5. In the line « Type of raw material: » select
the material type used.
Material type:
● « Cotton/Man-made fibres »
● « Regenerated mat./Bleached cotton »
6. Commission the card with this configuration.

Feed section
7. After one hour, pay attention to the display on the operating unit.
If one of the following messages is displayed.

« Select chute `pressure level 1` 41.4 »
▶ In the line « Mass density of material: »set the specified level.
5.6.5 Checking the batt weight
▶ Check the batt weight on the overview screen of the operating unit.
Batt weight is correct.

▶ In data screen 41.4, in the line « Adjust pressure, chute: » leave the « No function »
selection.
◁ No connection necessary.
Batt weight is not correct, although the density is set as prescribed by the system, and the ma-
terial type has been correctly configured.
▶ Select data screen 41.4.
▶ In the line « Adjust pressure, chute: » select the applicable diagnostics.
Diagnostics:
● « Feed batt too light, increase pressure »
● « Feed batt too heavy, reduce pressure »
5.7 Feed section
5.7.1 Adjusting the feed plate between the card chute and the licker-in
Note
The thickness of the inflowing batt differs depending on the material. For this the feed plate
must be adapted accordingly.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 111

Production
2
3
CHWIA_00001518_001_01
▶ With the holders (2) the position of the feed plate (3) must be adapted to the inflowing material.
The inflowing batt (4) must not back up on the guide plate (1).
5.7.2 Adjusting the load of the feed trough
▶ Only adjust the load if there are problems with the running behaviour due to batt that is too light
or too heavy.
◁ The load is adapted to material, degree of opening, batt weight and type of feed roller
(knurled, clothed).
Checking the limit of the control range of the measuring device

2. In line « Modulation scanner: », read off the actual value.
Level control – measuring device 25 – 40 %
Actual value: 25 – 40 %
Load OK
Actual value: ≥40 %

▶ Increase load (☞ Part 3, Page113)
Actual value: ≤25 %

▶ Reduce load. (☞ Part 3, Page113)

Feed section
Execute the following work steps on both sides:

3. Unscrew the screw (5) until the clamping
lever (2) is completely loosened.
4
4. Then press the clamping lever (2) downward,
until there is no play in the bearing arrange- 3
ment of the torsion rod (1).
5. Screw in the screws (5) until they rest on the 0
clamping lever (2). 5
◁ The indicator (4) now points to the first 1
graduation mark (3) of the clamping lever
(2).
6. Use the screw (5) to adjust the load. 2
Setting range
Minimum load 15°
Greatest load 40°
Greatest load AND Cotton 30°
(CO) bleached
◁ Scale (3) indicates the load.
CHWIA_00001389_001_01
Entering the load of the feed trough

7. In data screen 41.2, in the line « Spring tens. angle feed trough: » enter the angle.
Load of the feed trough (factory setting)
Cotton 3 graduation lines = 30°
Blend 3 graduation lines = 30°
Man-made fibres 2 graduation lines = 20°
◁ Load of the feed trough depending on material.
5.7.3 Adjusting the mote knife, discharge opening (C)
1. Define the discharge outlet (X).

◁ The set discharge opening determines the amount of waste.
◁ The objective is optimal composition of licker-in waste for a specific raw material.
Mote knife adjustment (manual)

Option: Manual licker-in knife adjustment
Caution
Damage of the adjustment device due to exceeding the discharge opening
▶ Do not exceed the minimum or maximum discharge opening.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 113

Production
X max
X min
2
40 70
4
5
min. X max.
- + CHWIA_00000863_001_01
▶ Turn the adjustment screw (5) until the desired distance for the discharge outlet corres-
ponds to the marking (4) on the scale (3).
Mote knife adjustment (motor-driven)

3
1 70
40
4
5 min. max.
CHWIA_00000861_001_01
▶ In data screen 10.3, in line « Ejection dist. licker-in: » enter the distance.
Ejection distance – licker-in 41 – 71 mm
◁ The distance is matched to the material.

Delivery section
5.7.4 Adjusting the suction openings on the licker-in
X X
4
CHWIA_00001515_001_02
1. Pay attention to the position of the screws (1) relative to the markings (4).
3. Do not loosen the screws (2).
4. Slide the screws (1) in the desired direction.
◁ The opening (X) is changed.
◁ The casing (5) adapts to the settings.
5. The opening (X) for extraction of the polluted air has to be adjusted according to the material
and the licker-in speed.
Opening (X)
Setting range 0.0 – 6.0 mm
factory-set 3.0 mm
Note
The marking is in the centre of the screw.
5.8 Delivery section
5.8.1 Adjusting the sliver weight in creep speed
Option: Coiler
1. Draw in the card sliver.
If this is not possible because the card sliver is too light or too heavy:
▶ Check and correct the sliver weight. (☞ Part 3, Page98)
2. The card must be operated at fast speed for at least 15 minutes.
3. Then switch the card to creep speed.
4. Weigh the produced sliver in the laboratory.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 115

Production
Target value: The sliver weight in creep speed is the same as it is in fast speed
The sliver is too light

▶ Increase the value.
The sliver is too heavy

▶ Decrease the value.
5. In data screen 41.1, in the line « Card at

creep speed: » adjust the value.
Adaptation – sliver weight to creep speed
Option: Number of licker-ins 80 %

1

3
C7xCBAData411_D
5.8.2 Adjust the correct web weight in crawl-speed mode
1. Draw in the web.
If this is not possible because the web is too light or too heavy:
▶ Check and correct the web weight. (☞ Part 3, Page99)
2. The card must be operated at fast speed for at least 15 minutes.
3. Then switch the card to creep speed.
4. Weigh the produced web in the laboratory.
Target: Web weight in creep speed is the same as in high speed
The web is too light

▶ Increase the value.
The web is too heavy

▶ Decrease the value.

Delivery section
5. In data screen 41.1, in the line « Card at

creep speed: » adjust the value.
Adaptation – web weight to creep speed
1

3
C7xVKData411_D
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 117

Production
5.8.3 Setting the draft for doffer roller / delivery rollers
Determine draft
Option: Coiler
1
2.10
7
2.00 15
1.90 16
17 5
1.80
1.70 8/8a
1.60
1.50
8a
4 6
1.40
1.30
3
1.20 2 8
1.10
1.00
m/min 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
CHWIA_00002134_001_01
1 Drafting zone between doffer roller and 8 Draft in intersection of set draft at low
delivery rollers (max. 2.40) delivery speed to set draft at high deliv-
2 Minimum adjustable draft at low delivery ery speed. The draft will increase with
speed a higher delivery speed starting at this
3 Set draft at low delivery speed. (Data intersection point.
screen 41.1 Output draft min.) 8a Calculated, effective draft between the
4 Maximum adjustable draft at low deliv- doffer roller and the delivery rollers
ery speed due to the set drafts min. / max. (data
5 Set draft at high delivery speed. (Data screen 41.1 output draft.)
screen 41.1 Output draft min.) 15 Doffer roller
6 Minimum adjustable draft at high deliv- 16 Delivery rollers
ery speed 17 Delivery rollers
7 Maximum adjustable draft at high deliv-
ery speed
▶ Optimise draft ratios depending on the delivery speed and raw material.
◁ The controller computes the draft for the set delivery speed.
Output draft (VA3) Draft at set speed

Delivery section
Determine draft
15
16
17
1
1.40 4
1.30
3
1.20
2
1.10
1.00
m/min 50 100 150 200 250 270
CHWIA_00002134_002_01
1 Drafting zone between take-off roll and 4 Maximum draft that can be set
delivery rolls 15 Doffer roller
2 Minimum draft that can be set 16 Delivery rollers
3 Set draft for all materials 17 Delivery rollers
▶ Optimise draft ratios depending on the delivery speed and raw material.
◁ The controller computes the draft for the set delivery speed.
Output draft (VA3) Draft at set speed
Checking the draft

DANGER
Injury due to moving machine parts
▶ Do not reach into moving parts.
▶ Maintain a distance to moving parts.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 119

Production
1. Open door.
2. Start production (doffer at creep speed).
3. Use a pocket torch to observe the web on the
web bridge, from the side.
Web does not form a wave

Draft OK CHWIA_00004033_001_02
Web forms a small wave or a large wave.

▶ Lower draft.
Draft « min: »
4. Start production (doffer at high speed). (☞ Part 3, Page97)

5. Use a pocket torch to observe the web on the web bridge, from the side.
Web forms small wave

The wave is stable.
Tension is ideal, web is neither torn nor bunched.
Web forms large wave

The wave moves.
▶ Increase draft.
Draft « max: »
Web does not form a wave

Web is over-tensioned.
▶ Reduce draft.
Draft « max: »

Option: Coiler
OR Non-woven fabric
OR Non-woven tape

Output draft (VA3)
Draft: « min: » 1.15 – 1.4
Note
Draft: « max: » 1.4 – 2.4
Note

CBA coiler
5.8.4 Setting the suction force at the delivery
1
1
1
CHWIA_00004154_001_01
▶ Pay attention to the web at the delivery.
Web is complete.
▶ Then, sliders (1) have been correctly set.
The web is drawn in between the take off roller and the delivery roller.
▶ With the sliders (1), set the air-flow conditions in the range of the suction hood (2).
5.9 CBA coiler
For the purpose of setting the coiler, a can must first be half-filled so that the setup of the can table
can be assessed.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 121

Production
5.9.1 Adjusting the light sensors
Option: Coiler CBA
LED
1 3
X
CHWIA_00002334_001_01
1. Set the rollers (3) so that they are aligned as precisely as possible with the sliver funnel.
◁ Card slivers are correctly routed.
2. Set the distance (2) with the holder (X). Pay attention to the position of the light scanner (1)
relative to the card sliver.
Distance ‒ X 15 mm
◁ The LED lights up when the card sliver passes the light sensor.
◁ The LED flashes if the card sliver is stationary.
◁ The LED fails to light up if there is no card sliver available or if the light scanner has not
been set correctly.

CBA coiler
5.9.2 Adjust sliver tension
Option: Coiler CBA
Removing the change gear «H»

2. The belt (3) is slackened with the tensioning «H»
device (2).
3. Exchanging the change gear «H».
2 1 3
CHWIA_00002583_001_01
Installing the change gear «H»

4. Fitting follows the same sequence as removal but in reverse order.
5.9.2.1 Tensioning toothed belt for change «H»
Option: Coiler CBA
2
F
1 4
CHWIA_00002593_001_01
Caution
Material damage due to incorrectly tensioned belts
▶ Tension the belts as specified.
2. With the tensioning device (2) tighten the belt (3).

3. Check deflection (s) at check point (4).
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 123

Production
2
F
1 4
CHWIA_00002593_001_01
Load (F) bending (s)

Load (F), toothed belt 10 N = 1.0 kg
Deflection at (s) 2.7 mm
5.9.3 Tensioning the V-belt of the coiler drive
Option: Coiler CBA
▶ Remove the hood over the changing point.
Caution
1 2
s
3
4
CHWIA_00002533_001_01
1. Loosen the screw (2).

2. With the tensioning device (3) tighten the belt (1). Check the load (F) at the control point (4).

CBA coiler
V-belt load (F) and sag (s)

CBA 1000/800/750/600 revolving plate: Load (F) on V-belt 10 N = 1.0 kg
CBA 1000/800/750/600 revolving plate: Deflection (s) of V-belt 2.0 mm
5.9.4 Setting the time of sliver separation
Option: Coiler CBA
B9 B10
B8 X
1
CHWIA_00002472_001_01
1. Check the basic settings of magnetic switch B8.

Distance (X)
Option: 1000 mm can diameter in the delivery unit 238 mm
Option: 600 mm can diameter in the delivery unit 175 mm
Note
The position of the magnetic switch determines the time when clamping of carded sliver
through the clamp bolt is triggered.

At the time the sliver is cut, the coiler should be opposite of the ejection direction.
Sliver separation is triggered too soon.

▶ Slide the magnetic switch (B8) a few millimetres in the direction of magnetic switch (B10).
Sliver separation is triggered too late.

▶ Slide the magnetic switch (B8) a few millimetres in the other direction.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 125

Production
5.9.5 Adjusting sliver cutting
Option: Coiler CBA
Note
Prior to cutting, the funnel is lifted so that the sliver is not directly torn off on the funnel. The
goal is that a fibre fringe should protrude out of the funnel.
This fibre fringe ensures that after cutting, when the funnel is lowered again, the sliver will be
pulled back in by the calendar rollers.
Adjusting the speed of the sliver funnel lift

Collision: Funnel is not yet lifted, if the clamp bolt extends.

▶ Lift funnel faster. Increase the setting of the throttle in the air supply line.
Sliver tears when lifting.

▶ Lift funnel more slowly. Decrease the setting of the throttle in the air supply line.
Adapting the funnel diameter

2. Observe separating process.
If when lifting the funnel, the sliver is already separated.

▶ Use a larger funnel.
If when lowering the funnel, the sliver is not taken along.

▶ Use a smaller funnel.
◁ The sliver lowers with the funnel and is pulled in by the calendar rollers.
Adjusting the lift sliver funnel monitor

Note
Adjust the delay time so that the sliver funnel has reached its end position before the sliver
clamp extends.
If activation of sliver separation occurs before the sliver funnel has reached its end position,
then sliver separation will only occur afterwards.

CBA coiler

5. In the line « Max. time, funnel to top: » set
the delay time.
Monitoring time until the fun- 2s
nel is lifted Note
Time until bolt feed
is possible.
Objective: Prevent
collision between
bolt and funnel.
◁ Delay time for the sliver funnel is set.
C7xCBAData423_D
Wrong clamping duration

7. In the line « Sliver cutting length: » set the duration of the nipping.
Time bolt extended 0 – 0.5 s
● Guide value 0s
◁ The duration of the nipping is set.
Adjusting the position of the magnetic switch on the sliver weight
-
4 +
3
3 5
5 2 X
X 1
2
1
CHWIA_00002474_001_01
8. Adjust the magnetic switch (5) so that it detects the position of the extended piston rod (1).
Distance (X)
Standard setting 6.0 mm
Tendency: With a heavier sliver Increase dimension (X)
Tendency: With a lighter sliver Reduce dimension (X)
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 127

Production
5.9.6 Adjusting the air injector of the coiler
Option: Coiler CBA

3. In the line « Blow-in time: » set the blow-in
time in seconds.
Blow-in time
Can cover position: Resting 30 – 60 s
on the guide plate
Can cover position: Far away ≥1 min
from glide plate
4. To start with, set the shortest time.

30 s
C7xCBAData423_D
The material filling touches the guide plate during the blow-in time.
This means that the blow-in time is set correctly.
The material filling touches the guide plate only after the blow-in time has elapsed.
▶ Extend the blow-in time.

SB coiler module
5.10 SB coiler module
5.10.1 Adjusting the clamping device
Option: Coiler SB
1. Move the support (1) accordingly, until the

clamping plate (2) is in the correct position.
The clamping plate (2) must be vertical or slightly
tilted towards the pneumatic cylinder (3).
2. After setting, check whether the clamping

plate (2) clamps the belt correctly in the up-
per position.
2 CHWIA_00002535_001_01
5.10.2 Setting machine shutdown due to lap formation
Option: Coiler SB
Conditions
✓ Material is pulled into the drafting system.
✓ Rotary switch – drafting system load, position «II» ‒ The drafting system is loaded.
1. Measure the distance (X) between the contact screws (S25) and the hood cover (10).
Distance (X) too small

This results in faulty shut-down of the machine.
Distance (X) too large

The machine is not stopped at the right time. This could lead to the drafting system being dam-
aged.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 129

Production
Adjusting the contact screws via the drafting system cylinders

2. The settings must be made on both sides.
3. Loosen nuts (11).
4. Adjust the contact screws (S25) on both 10
sides to the required distance to the hood S25
cover (10).
Distance of the contact up to 1 mm
X
screws to the hood cover
11
5. Tighten nut (11) again.
Note
This dimension is merely a recom- 11
mendation, and is based on the ma-
terial to be processed.
S25
CHWIA_00002750_001_01
5.10.3 Tensioning the V-belt of the coiler drive
Option: Coiler SB
▶ Remove the hood over the changing point.
Caution
1
2 3
4 CHWIA_00002617_001_01

2. With the tensioning device (3) tighten the belt (1). Check the load (F) at the control point (4).

Can changer

CBA 1000/800/750/600 revolving plate: Load (F) on V-belt 10 N = 1.0 kg
CBA 1000/800/750/600 revolving plate: Deflection (s) of V-belt 2.0 mm
5.11 Can changer
5.11.1 Adjusting the winding distance
Option: Coiler CBA

OR Coiler SB
Removing the «C» change gear

1. Remove cover (1).
2. Slacken the belt (7). 2
3. Loosen the screws (3) of the coupling (4) and
1
move the coupling (4) upwards.
3
4. Remove drive shaft (2). 4
5
5. Remove the screws (6). 6
6. Install gear box (5) with change gear “C”. C
CHWIA_00002573_001_01
Installing the «C» change gear

7. Install gear box (5) with change gear “C”.
8. Insert screws (6) for securing the supporting 2
plate (8) but do not tighten at this stage.
9. Install drive shaft (2) with coupling (4). 3
10. Move coupling (4) downwards. 8 4
◁ Do not tighten screws (3) yet on both 5
6
sides.
11. Turn the drive shaft (2) by hand. 7
Note
Align the support plate (8) in such a
manner that it exerts no stress on the CHWIA_00002576_001_01
coupling (4)
12. After the support plate (8) has been aligned,

tighten the screws (6) and (3) firmly.
13. Tauten the V-belt (7).
14. Tension the V-belt of the can plate drive.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 131

Production
5.11.1.1 Tensioning the V-belt of the can plate drive
Option: Coiler CBA

OR Coiler SB
Caution
▶ Remove the can plate.
Option: 1000 mm can diameter in the delivery unit

OR 800 mm can diameter in the delivery unit
OR 750 mm can diameter in the delivery unit
Tensioning the belt (can diameter 1000/800/750 mm)
2 3 F
s
1
CHWIA_00002523_001_01
▶ With the tensioning device (1) tension the V-belt (2).

Load (F) at can diameter 1000/800/750 mm 50 N = 5.0 kg
Deflection (s) at can diameter 1000/800/750 mm 20.0 mm
◁ Check deflection (s) at check point (3).

Can changer
Option: 600 mm can diameter in the delivery unit
Tensioning the belt (can diameter 600 mm)
4
3 F
2
1
s
CHWIA_00002521_001_01
▶ Use a suitable tool (4) (screwdriver, spindle) to move the tension pulley (1) and tension
the V-belt(4)
▶ Check deflection (s) at check point (3).
Load (F) at can diameter 600 mm 50 N = 5.0 kg
Deflection (s) at can diameter 600 mm 12.0 mm
5.11.2 Changing the distance of the material filling to the spinning can
Option: Coiler CBA

OR Coiler SB
Note
In order to adjust the diameter of the material filling to the diameter of the can, the can plate
drive for the revolving plate must be displaced.
The material filling should have approx. 8...10 mm lateral clearance compared to the can, if
the can is ¾ full.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 133

Production
Moving the can plate drive
1
8...10mm
O.K
«+»
2 5 A=
4
3
5 6
B= «-»
CHWIA_00002480_001_01
1. Determine the change in distance between the can (3) and the material filling (2).
2. Remove the can plate(1).
3. Loosen tension roller (6).
4. Loosen all bolts (5) needed to secure the can plate drive (4).
5. To increase the material filling (2) diameter, push the can plate drive (4) in the direction of the
arrow («A»).
6. Push the can plate drive (4) in the direction of the arrow («B») to decrease the distance.
7. Firmly tighten all bolts (5) needed to secure the can plate drive (4).
Cover plate position adjustment
4
7
8 9 6
CHWIA_00002478_001_01
8. When the can plate drive (4) is adjusted, loosen all screws (7). Do not remove.
9. Place the can plate (1) on the can plate drive (4). Do not fasten yet.

Can changer
10. Use the adjustment screw (8) to move the cover plate (9) in such a way that the opening in the
cover plate (9) corresponds exactly with the can plate (1).
◁ The gap between the cover plate (9) and the can plate (1) must be as small in all direc-
tions.
11. Use the tension pulley (6) to tighten the drive belt.
12. Tension the V-belt of the can plate drive. (☞ Part 3, Page132)
13. Tighten the screws (7) firmly, apart from at the positioning levers.
14. Tighten the screws for the can plate firmly.
15. Finally, check the gap between the cover plate (9) and the can plate (1) once more.
16. Adjust the positioning levers according to the new can position.
17. Adjust the positioning lever for the can. (☞ Part 3, Page136)
5.11.3 Throttling the speed of the can carriage
Option: Coiler CBA

OR Coiler SB

◁ Valve block and throttles are accessible.
2. Set the speed, on the throttle in the air line to
the valve.
Throttle for can trolley
Ejecting Y5
Go back Y4
Y4
3. Turn throttle screw clockwise.
◁ The speed of the can carriage becomes
slower.
4. Set the speed of the can carriage as slow as
possible.
▽ Movement that is too fast results in Y5 1
higher wear on the drive belt. CHWIA_00002495_001_02
5.11.4 Correcting the can fill quantity
Option: Coiler CBA

OR Coiler SB
1. Evaluate the can filling, weigh can.

The can should be filled in accordance with the settings in data screen 10.1.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 135

Production

Correction value -10% to +10%
Can is overfilled
▶ In the line « Can filling correction: »
decrease the value.
◁ Can filling is corrected through a
lower delivery speed.
Can is insufficiently filled

▶ In the line « Can filling correction: » C7xCBAData423_D
increase the value.

◁ Can filling is corrected through a
higher delivery speed.
5.11.5 Adjusting the positioning lever for the can
Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler CBA
▶ Interrupt the compressed air supply.
Adjusting levers and rollers
2 1
X
m
5m
7 6 4 3
X 8
5
CHWIA_00002559_001_01
1. Remove the support (7) of levers (1) and (2).

2. Extend piston rod (3) completely.
3. Undo nut (4) and remove clamp (5).
4. At fork head (6), set distance (X).

Can changer
Standard setting for distance “X”

Can diameter: 1000 mm 740.0 mm
5. Adjust the roller (8) on the lever (1) and (2) in such a manner that the distance from the roller to
can is maintained.
Distance from roller to the can 5 mm
6. Damp the positioning levers. (☞ Part 3, Page137)
5.11.6 Damping the positioning levers
Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler CBA
2
1
Y1
CHWIA_00002331_001_01

◁ Valve block and throttles are accessible.
2. Determining the right throttle in the air line to the valve (Y1)
Damping for the positioning levers
Closing Connection 4
Open Connection 2
◁ The escaping air is throttled.
3. Turn throttle screw clockwise.
◁ The speed is reduced.
4. Adjust the speed of the positioning levers (2).
Speed – positioning lever
Closing Slow
Open Fast
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 137

Production
5.11.7 Adjusting the magnetic switch for the can trolley drive
Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler CBA
Cylinder can trolley
B9 B16 B10
B8
CHWIA_00002550_001_01
B8 Magnetic switch, trigger for sliver separ- B10 Magnetic switch, monitoring of changer
ation time trolley, front
B9 Magnetic switch, monitoring of changer B16 Magnetic limit switch, trigger for close
trolley, rear positioning lever.
WARNING
Injury through pneumatically driven machine section
▶ Close and vent compressed air system.
1. Interrupt the compressed air supply.

2. Set the magnetic switch B8 (☞ Part 3, Page125)
Set the magnetic switch B9
LED
B9
LED + 3mm CHWIA_00002536_001_01
3. Bring the can carriage into the rear end position.

◁ The piston is retracted into the end position.
4. From the outside, move the magnetic switch (B9) in the arrow direction.
5. As soon as the LED lights up, move the magnetic switch 2 - 3 mm further and fix it in place.

Can changer
Set the magnetic switch B10
LED LED
B10 B10
+ 3mm LED
CHWIA_00002540_001_01
6. Bring the can carriage into the front end position.

◁ The piston is extended into the end position.
7. From the outside, move the magnetic switch (B10) in the arrow direction.
8. As soon as the LED lights up, move the limit switch 2 - 3 mm further and fix it in place.
Magnetic switch B16, set time point, close positioning lever
B9 LED B10
B16
X
1
CHWIA_00002542_001_01
9. Set the magnetic switch (B16) to the appropriate distance (X) depending on the can diameter.
Basic settings – magnetic switch «B16»
Can diameter: 600 / 1000 mm: Distance X 127.0 mm
10. Execute a can change and observe the process. (☞ Part 2, Page27)
The positioning levers are closing too early

▶ Move magnetic switch (B16) in the direction (B9).
The positioning levers are closing too late

▶ Move magnetic switch (B16) in the direction (B10).
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 139

Production
5.12 RSB module
5.12.1 Entering the values on the data screens
Option: Coiler RSB
Note
In the values group (data screen 60.1) a maximum of 5 assortments can be named and the
associated parameters can be programmed in the appropriate data screens. At the time of
the first entry of the data for an assortment the series of the data screens must be observed
for the input of the data.
▶ Enter the values in the following sequence.

RSB module without RQM: 10.1 / 41.1 / 41.2 / 42.1 / 42.2 / 42.3 / 22.1
/ 22.2 / 22.3
RSB module with RQM 10.1 / 41.1 / 41.2 / 42.1 / 42.2 / 42.3 / 22.1
/ 22.2 / 22.3 / 23.1 / 23.2 / 23.4
5.12.2 Determining the sliver length between disk rollers and scanning rollers
Option: Coiler RSB
1 2
RSB
X
GL
CHWIA_00002927_001_01
1. Position the card sliver between the disk rollers (1) and the scanning rollers (2).
2. The position is correct when the predefined value is reached at the slack measurement meas-
uring device.
Value in data screen 82.2 2,150
3. Measure the sliver length (X) and enter it in data screen 42.2.

RSB module
5.12.3 Loading/offloading scanning rollers
Option: Coiler RSB
▶ Determine whether the scanning rollers are

under load.
The scanning rollers are under load.

▶ Press push-button (4). 7
◁ The scanning roller (5) is relieved. 6
5
The scanning rollers are not under load.
▶ Manually press the offloaded scanning
roller (5) against the scanning roller (6).
◁ This prevents the scanning rollers
hitting against each other. 4
◁ The scanning rollers are protected.
WARNING 5
Finger injury Due to jamming
between the scanning rollers
▶ Do not reach into the scanning
rollers.
▶ Press push-button (4).
◁ The scanning roller (5) is under load.
CHWIA_00004088_001_01
5.12.4 Change in the configuration
Option: Coiler RSB
The ramifications of changed settings must be determined by checking the CV values of the card
sliver and the spectrogram. In the event of a material change or a substantial production modifica-
tion the changes to the settings must be made only if the checked CV value of the card sliver and
the spectrogram have clearly changed.
Sequence for performing the changes

1. Check and adjust mechanical settings.
2. Correct sliver weight
3. Execute levelling action point, and levelling intensity and matching of the sliver weight to slow
motion.
4. Then correct the sliver weight and perform the adjustments for the levelling action point, level-
ling intensity and the matching of the sliver weight to slow motion...
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 141

Production
5.12.5 Checking the mechanical settings on the RSB module
Option: Coiler RSB
1. The settings are described in the operating manual for the RSB module.
2. Set the main draft and the break draft distance (HV/VV).
3. Adjust the drafting system and the winding tension.
4. Set the load to pressure of the scanning rollers (normal setting for cotton: 120 kg).
5. Select the web funnel and the sliver funnel according to the drafting system.
6. Select the sliver duct in the can turntable.
7. Adapt the speed of the can turntable (variegator pulley "s").
8. Adapt the diameter of the sliver filing in the spinning can (eccentricity "e")...
9. Adapt the end position of the turnstile pusher (turnstile) of the can changer...
10. Check the stop motion in lap formation in the delivery of the module.
5.12.6 Executing a function test of the RSB module
Option: Coiler RSB
1. Switch on the machine with the main switch. (☞ Part 3, Page71)

2. Check whether the machine is ready for operation. (☞ Part 2, Page15)
3. Enter the password. (☞ Part 2, Page49)
Password Level 2
4. In data screen 80.1 the operating mode « Test mode » is selected.

◁ Test functions in the menus 82 - 85 can be executed.
6. In the line « Run drive tests: » start the test.

RSB module
Checking the belt run (right-hand side of machine)

7. Turn key switch (7) to position I.
◁ The limit switch for the cover (3) has 1/2 3
been bypassed. 9 4
8. Open the cover (3) and activate the drive via
8
the push-button(2).
9. Observe the running of the belt.
5
If the belt is not running correctly 6
▶ Adjust the belt run.
Note
The settings are described in the 0
operating manual for the RSB
I
module. 7
II
CHWIA_00004042_001_01
Check can position

Conditions
✓ 2 persons are required to carry out the check.
10. Turn key switch (7) to position I.

◁ The limit switch (4) for the cover (3) has been bypassed.
11. Open the cover (3) and press and hold the push-button (2).
12. With the module running, a can change can now be executed via the pre-select buttons on the
card operating unit.
If the can change is not executed correctly

▶ Adjust the can changer and the can position.
Note
The settings are described in the operating manual for the RSB module.
Checking the belt run (left-hand side of machine)

14. Turn the key switch (7) to position II.
◁ The limit switches of the covers (5) and (9) have been bypassed.
15. Open the cover (9) and activate the drive via the push-button (1).
16. Observe the running of the belt.
If the belt is not running correctly

▶ Adjusting the belt run.
Note
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 143

Production
Adjust the winding safety device

◁ The limit switches of the covers (5) and (9)have been bypassed.
18. Set the winding safety device.
Note
Testing the air-injection device

20. Open the cover and activate the drive via the push-button(1).
21. The air-injection device is tested.
Note
Testing the locking mechanism of the drafting system

23. Press the push-button for subjecting the drafting system to load.
◁ After 6 minutes, the load on the drafting system is relieved automatically.
Note
5.12.7 Correcting the sliver weight on the RSB
Option: Coiler RSB
Then perform the adjustments for the levelling action point, the levelling intensity and the adapta-
tion of the sliver weight to the slow running speed.
After a material change the entire harmonising process should be carried out. With a change in
sliver weight and for periodic controls the operating steps must not be performed in the "Prepara-
tion" section...
For all changes, pay attention to the production value groups (data screen 60.1).
5.12.7.1 Preparation
Option: Coiler RSB
1. Select the production value group. (☞ Part 3, Page157)

2. Calculate the drafting system draft and based on this draft, use the appropriate change (NW1
and NW2) and enter it in the data screen 10.1.
3. Perform all adjustments in the data screens.

RSB module
Comply with the sequence Data screens 10.1 / 42.1 / 42.2 / and 42.3.
4. Switch off the RSB Autoleveller data screen 42.1.

5. Start the card using normal production mode. Autolevelling of the card is switched on (data
screen 42.1).
5.12.7.2 Correct sliver weight: Calibrate the RSB - module
Option: Coiler RSB
1. Pay attention to the production value groups (data screen 60.1).

2. Wait, until the sliver weight of the card has reached the setpoint.
◁ Display on data screen 11.1 or overview screen
3. In data screen 42.1, execute automatic adjustment of the sliver weight, scanning roller distance
0% error.
Note
4. Switch on the RSB Autoleveller.

Data screen 42.1
5. Determine the sliver weight downstream of the coiler.

6. Enter the determined sliver weight and data screen 42.1. The value of the scanning roller clear-
ance 0% error is updated.
5.12.7.3 Minimal change and periodic control of the sliver weight
Option: Coiler RSB
1. Observe the production value groups.

Data screen 60.1
2. Enter the desired setpoint of the sliver in data screen 10.1.

3. Switch on the Autoleveller of the drafting system in data screen 42.1.
4. Determine the sliver weight according to the coiler.
5. Enter the determined sliver weight in the data screen 42.1.
◁ The value of the scanning roller clearance 0% error is updated.
5.12.7.4 Subsequent adaptations after a calibration
Option: Coiler RSB

Data screen 60.1
2. Optimise the levelling action point.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 145

Production
Data screen 42.1
3. Optimise levelling intensity.

Data screen 42.2
4. Executes the adjustment on the slow speed.

Data screen 42.1
Note
An extensive description can be found in the RSB module operating instructions.
5.12.8 Correcting the sliver weight on the RSB module with RQM
Then perform the adjustments for the levelling action point, the levelling intensity and the adapta-
tion of the sliver weight to the slow running speed.
After a material change the entire harmonising process should be carried out. With a change in
sliver weight and for periodic controls the operating steps must not be performed in the "Prepara-
tion" section...
5.12.8.1 Preparation
Conditions
✓ The standard settings for RQM (Rieter Quality Monitoring) have been made at the module. The
settings are described in the operating manual for the RSB module.

2. Calculate the drafting system draft and based on this draft, use the appropriate change (NW1
and NW2) and enter it in the data screen 10.1.
3. Perform all adjustments in the data screens.
Comply with the sequence Data screens 10.1 / 42.1 / 42.2 / 42.3 /
23.1 / 23.2 / 23.4.
4. In data screens 23.1 / 23.2 and 23.4 switch off the RQM monitors.
5. Switch off the RSB Autoleveller data screen 42.1.
6. Start the card using normal production mode. Autolevelling of the card is switched on (data
screen 42.1).

RSB module
5.12.8.2 Correct sliver weight: Calibrate the RSB - module
1. Pay attention to the production value groups (data screen 60.1).

2. Wait, until the sliver weight of the card has reached the setpoint.
◁ Display on data screen 11.1 or overview screen
3. In data screen 42.1, execute automatic adjustment of the sliver weight, scanning roller distance
0% error.
Note
4. Switch on the RSB Autoleveller.

Data screen 42.1
5. Determine the sliver weight downstream of the coiler.

6. Enter the determined sliver weight and data screen 42.1. The value of the scanning roller clear-
ance 0% error is updated.
7. Execute the automatic adjustment of the sliver in data screen 23.1 if the actual value agrees
with the target value of the sliver.
Note
A detailed description can be found in the RSB module operating manual.
8. In data screens 23.1 / 23.2 and 23.4 switch on the sliver monitors. If required, adapt the shut-
off limit values.
5.12.8.3 Minimal change and periodic control of the sliver weight

Data screen 60.1
3. Enter the desired setpoint of the sliver in data screen 10.1.
4. Switch on the Autoleveller of the drafting system in data screen 42.1.
5. Determine the sliver weight according to the coiler.
6. Enter the determined sliver weight in the data screen 42.1.
◁ The value of the scanning roller clearance 0% error is updated.
7. Execute automatic adjustment of the sliver, data screen 23.1. In data screens 23.1 / 23.2 and
23.4 switch on the sliver monitors.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 147

Production
5.12.8.4 Subsequent adaptations after a calibration
2. Optimise the levelling action point.
Data screen 42.1
3. Optimise levelling intensity.

Data screen 42.2
4. Executes the adjustment on the slow speed.

Data screen 42.1
Note
An extensive description can be found in the RSB module operating instructions.
5. Execute automatic adjustment of the sliver, data screen 23.1. In data screens 23.1 / 23.2 and
23.4 switch on the sliver monitors.
5.12.9 Adjusting the sliver sag monitor
Option: Coiler RSB
Note
The sensor measures the height of the exiting sliver. Depending on its position, the delivery
speed of the RSB module is increased or decreased, in order to maintain the most constant
possible slack in the sliver between the disk rollers and the RSB module.

RSB module
7 5 1 2 4 2 1 3
m/min
m/min +
9 6
14
3 10
13 11
4
14 12
CHWIA_00004061_001_01
1 Sliver or cord 3 Sensor

2 Disk rollers 4 Reflector
1. Check whether the sensor (3) is aligned to the reflector (4).
LED (6) lights up

Sensor (3) is correctly aligned to the reflector (4).
LED (6) does not light up

▶ Align the (3) sensor.
Swing to the outside, direction (12) Unscrew the screw (8), tighten screws
(7).
Swing to the inside, direction (11) Unscrew the screw (7), tighten screw (8).
◁ LED (6) lights up
2. Clamp a piece of cord (1) between the disk rollers (2).
3. Tensioned the cord horizontally and hold.
◁ The cord simulates the sliver between sensor (3) and reflector (4).

Password Level 2
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 149

Production

7. In the line « Sag sensor B30: » read off the
value.
2,750 – 2,850
The sensor is properly positioned in height.
≥2,850
▶ Move the sensor upward.
≤2,750
▶ Move the sensor downward. C7xCBAData822_D
8. Remove the cord.

9. In the line « Sag sensor B30: » read off the value.
700 – 850
Sensor is correctly aligned to the reflector.
10. Move your finger over the reflector from bottom to top.
11. In the line « Sag sensor B30: » read off the value.
The displayed value increases to approximately 4000

The monitoring is functioning correctly.
The value does not increase.

Realign or replace the sensor.

Setting up production mode
5.13 Setting up production mode
5.13.1 Quality monitoring
5.13.1.1 Integrated card sliver monitor
Option: Coiler
The quality of the card sliver is measured on the

disc rollers (1). 1
Without RQM option: The signal of the disc
rollers is analysed by the controller for quality
monitoring.
CHWIA_00002058_001_01
5.13.1.2 Quality monitor RQM
The quality of the running-out sliver is measured

on the delivery discs (6) and (5) in the RSB mod-
ule.
If the RQM quality monitor is configured and act-
ive, the integrated card sliver monitor is automat-
ically inactive.
26
18
RSB-M 233b
Drsm-4-60-1_233b58xx
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 151

Production
5.13.1.3 Setting the shut-down limit A% of the card sliver monitor
Option: Coiler, No RQM Rieter Quality Monitor

C7xCBAData221_D
3. In the line « Measured length: » set the length.

Length
Range 25 – 150 m
● Default ≈ 100 m
4. In the line « Monitoring: » switch on the monitoring.

Status of the monitor:
● « OFF »
● « ON »
5. In the line « Shut-off limit: » switch on the tolerance.
Tolerance (A%)
Range 0.5 – 10 %
● Default ≈5%
Tendency: Relatively high Fewer stops
Tendency: Relatively low More stops
◁ If the set shut-off limit A% is exceeded, the delay « Length up to malfunction: » starts.
6. In the line « Length up to malfunction: » enter the delay.
Delay
Range 0 – 3,000 m
● Default 1,500 m
◁ If an overrun continues longer than the delay, the production switches off.

5.13.1.4 Setting the shut-down limit for CV of the card sliver monitor

C7xCBAData222_D
3. In the line « Reference length: » enter the length.

Length
Range 300 – 10,000 m
● Default 3,000 m
4. In the line « Cutting length monitored: » select the cut length.

Cutting length:
● « CV1 »
● « CV10 »
● « CV100 » (Default)
● « CV3 »
● « CV5 »
● « CV7 »
5. In the line « Shut-off limit: » enter the tolerance.
Tolerance (CV%)
Range 0.5 – 10 %
● Default ≈5%
◁ If the set shut-off limit CV% is exceeded, the delay « Length up to malfunction: » starts.
Delay
Range 0 – 3,000 m
● Default 1,500 m
◁ If an overrun continues longer than the delay, the production switches off.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 153

Production
5.13.1.5 Correction of displayed CV% values based on laboratory values
Option: Coiler
▶ The card is in uninterrupted production operation for at least 60 minutes.
▶ Have two empty cans in ready position.

2. In data screen 41.1, in line « Levelling sliver weight: » switch on the autoleveling system.
3. In data screen 41.2, in line « Autolevelling batt: » switch on the autoleveling system.
4. Start production (doffer at high speed). (☞ Part 3, Page97)
high speed
◁ « Key for emptying the line » is not activated.
◁ « Key for emptying the chute and card » is not activated.
5. In data screen 42.3, in line « Deliv. can change, card: » specify the delivery speed.
Delivery speed during can change Same as in production operation
6. After a can change wait until 1000 meters are filled into the can. Then execute the following
steps.
Switching-off the Autoleveller

Option: Coiler RSB, No RQM Rieter Quality Monitor
▶ In data screen 42.1, in line « Autolevel. draft system: » switch off the Autoleveller.
Starting material withdrawal

Option: Coiler CBA
OR Coiler SB

▶ In the line « CV% correct. start run: »
start the sequence.
Selection « Yes »
◁ Material extraction for the laboratory
measurement has begun.
◁ A can change occurs automatically.
◁ After placing 300 m of sliver in the
empty can, the can is changed
automatically.
▶ Test the produced sliver in the laborat-
ory. C7xCBAData223_D
Starting material withdrawal

▶ Calibration is carried out using data screen 23.1.


▶ In the line « CV% correct. start run: »
start the sequence.
Selection « Yes »
◁ Material extraction for the laboratory
measurement has begun.
◁ A can change occurs automatically.
◁ After placing 300 m of sliver in the
empty can, the can is changed
automatically.
▶ Test the produced sliver in the laborat-
ory. C7xRSBData233_D
7. Select the line « CV% lab. value: ».

8. Enter the value determined in the laboratory and confirm the entry.
◁ The correction factor « CV% correct. factor: » is calculated through the difference of the
two values, « CV%, measured at card: » and « CV% lab. value: ».
◁ All CV% values determined by the card are now corrected using the correction factor.
◁ As a result, all CV% values displayed on the card are identical to the respective laboratory
values.
5.13.1.6 Adjusting the shut-off limit – card sliver monitor, spectrogram

3. In the line « Interval length: » enter the
length.
Length 400 – 10,000 m
4. In the line « Shut-off limit: » switch on the

tolerance.
Tolerance
Range 1.4 – 5 %
Tendency: Relatively low Fewer stops
Tendency: Relatively high More stops C7xCBAData224_D
5. In the line « Length up to malfunction: »

enter the delay.
Delay
Range 0 – 3,000 m
● Default ≈ 1,500 m
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 155

Production
5.13.1.7 Adjusting the shut-off limit – card sliver monitor, slubs

C7xCBAData225_D
3. In the line « Reference length: » enter the length.

Length (Sliver length used for measuring the number of slubs. )
Range 300 – 10,000 m
● Requirement ≈ 1,000 m
4. In the line « Monitoring: » switch on the monitoring.

◁ Monitoring is switched on.
5. In the line « Class monitored: » select the class.
◁ The selected class is monitored.
6. In the line « Shut-off limit: » enter the tolerance.
Tolerance
Range 0.5 – 20
Tendency: Relatively high More stops
Tendency: Relatively low Fewer stops

Delay
Range 0 – 3,000 m

5.13.2 Production value groups
Managing value groups
5.13.2.1 Selecting the production value group

3. In the line « Group: » enter the desired time
base.
Group number 1-5
4. In the line « Function: » select the following

function.
Function « Switch over »
◁ Switch over
◁ In all data screens with production val-
ues, the number of the selected values C7xCBAData601_D
group is displayed in the upper right. Pro-

duction values are in the menus 22, 41,
42 and 60.
5.13.2.2 Naming the value group

4. In the line « Function: » select the following function.
Function « Change name »
◁ Change name
5. Enter a suitable name for the value group.
6. Use the "APPLY" button to confirm the entry.
◁ The new name appears on the data screen.
5.13.2.3 Loading existing production values into a new group

3. Select the production value group.
4. Name a value group. (☞ Part 3, Page157)
function.
C7xCBAData601_D
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 157

Production
Function « Load with de-

fault »
◁ Default values will be loaded into the
selected group.
function.
Function « Load with 1 ...
Load with 5 »
◁ The values from the existing group will
be loaded into the new selected group.
C7xCBAData601_D
5.13.2.4 Comparing values of two groups in the preview
▶ Select the production value group. (☞ Part 3, Page157)

Number of the group – preview 1–5
◁ The values of the selected group are shown in the right column.

3. In the line « Group: » enter the desired time
base.
◁ The values of the selected group are
shown in the left column.
◁ The values of the two groups can be
compared.
C7xCBAData602_D
4. Compare additional values.
Quality
Optional equipment
Extended values 1

Extended values 2
Extended values 3
5.13.2.5 Changing production values in value groups
▶ Select the production value group. (☞ Part 3, Page157)
1. Select one of the data screens with production values.

For example Data screen 10.1
◁ In all data screens with production values, the number of the selected values group is dis-
played in the upper right. Production values are in the menus 22, 41, 42 and 60.
2. Set the production values as desired.
◁ The production values will be saved in the selected value group.
▶ Change additional production values in the value groups.

Menus ● 10
● 22
● 41
● 42
5.13.3 Shift schedule
5.13.3.1 Determining the shift planning properties
Setting the type of shift changeover

3. In the line « Shift switchover: » determine
the type of shift changeover.
Type of shift changeover
Manual switch over in data ● « Key »
screen 50.1.
Automatic switch over accord- ● « Shift sched-
ing to schedule in data screen ule »
50.2
DS-50-01_001
Setting the number of shifts

Conditions
✓ Type of shift changeover:
● « Key »
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 159

Production

6. In the line « Number of shifts: » enter the quantity.
Number of shifts 1–8
◁ The number of shifts is defined.
Determining the procedure for how the shift will be concluded

9. In the line « Partial shift report: » select the procedure.
If the machine is connected to SPIDERweb.

▶ Select the following option:
Shift close « Yes »
◁ The current shift data will be concluded, however the shift is not changed.
If the machine is not connected to SPIDERweb.

▶ Select the following option:
Shift close « No »
◁ Data of the current shift is not concluded.
5.13.3.2 Programming the shift schedule
Conditions
✓ Type of shift changeover:
● « Shift schedule »
Programming the shift day schedule

3. On the left side select the desired weekday.
Weekday (left side) « Monday »
◁ The day shift schedule will be displayed
for the selected weekday (bottom left)
◁ This day shift schedule can be edited.
4. Activate or deactivate the shift in lines 1-8 on
the left side.
Shift active in the daily schedule
Value: « y » Layer is active C7xCBAData502_D
Value: « n » Layer is not

present
5. Enter the start time for the active shifts.
Duplicating a day shift schedule


8. Decide whether the current day shift schedule should be copied into other weekdays.
Should be copied into all days.

▶ In the first line select the following action.
Daily schedule on the left side « copy to: all days »
Should only be copied into the specific weekday.

▶ In the second row, on the right side, select the specific weekday.
Daily schedule on the left side « copy to: »
should not be copied. Each weekday will be individually programmed on the left side.
Daily schedule on the left side « No action »
5.13.3.3 Delete shift

Delete all shifts.

▶ Select the line « Delete shift(s): ».
▶ Make the selection « Yes ».
◁ All shifts will be deleted.
Delete only a specific shift

▶ Select the line with the shift to be de-
leted.
▶ Make the selection « Yes ». C7xCBAData126_D
◁ Only the desired shift will be deleted.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 161

Technology Universal Operating Manual
Production
6 Technology
Here, certain types of behaviour indicative of a fault are listed.
Determination ✓ means: The cause is applicable. The associated measure can be initiated.
Determination ✗ means: The cause is not applicable.You will be referred to the next possible
cause.
If the cause is identified, measures can be initiated to rectify the fault.
6.1 At the feed
6.1.1 Card chutes consistently run empty

1 Switch on/switch off time of the Feed machine switches off too ▶ Increase the differential
feed late. pressure in the feed chan-
nel.
◁ Material will be fed in
earlier.
▶ Adjust the fill height
in the feed chute.
Differential pressure in the feed ▶ Clean hose and pressure
channel has been increased, port.
nevertheless there is no feed
▶ Check jumper for pressure
sensor
▶ Calibrate the pressure
sensor zero point.
✓ Continue with: 2
2 Insufficient capacity of the feed Frequent production interrupts ▶ Rectify faults in the blow-
machine room.
There are still reserves available ▶ Increase the capacity of the
feed machine.
Capacity cannot be increased. ▶ Restrict the production of
the cards.
▶ Enter the production.
6.1.2 Card chute, poor filling

1 Material guide The provided deflector plate is ▶ Install and adjust the de-
not installed upstream of the first flector plate on the first card
card chute. shaft. (☞ Part 3, Page105)
2 Deposited material in the speed ✓ ▶ Remove cover and clean
channel channel.
▶ Remove material deposited
in the card chute.

At the delivery unit

2 Deposited material in the speed ✓ ▶ Remedy the poor transition
channel in the feed channel.
3 Feed channel is blocked ✓ ▶ Clean the feed channel.
✗ ▶ Check the production plan
6.2 At the delivery unit
6.2.1 The sliver cannot be drawn in (too light, too heavy)
Option: Coiler

1 Delay of the Autoleveller Wrong ▶ Reset the delay of the Auto-
leveller (☞ Part 3, Page75)
✗
6.2.2 Sliver breakage on the card occurs too frequently
Option: Coiler

1 Display of thin points and slubs Sliver weight: ≥5 ktex Continue with: 2
Determining the settings in data Sliver weight: <5 ktex ▶ In data screen 20.4 select a
screen 20.4 At low sliver weight higher de- higher class >±20%.
flections will be displayed. These
are caused naturally; they are
not faults.
2 Doffer clothing Clothing contaminated ▶ Clean a doffer.
▶ Examine the doffer clothing
with the clothing magnifying Doffer clothing is dull. ▶ Grind the doffer.
glass. Can still be ground. ▶ Preparing the
doffer for grinding
Doffer clothing is dull. ▶ Re-clothe doffers.
Clothing already worn.
Doffer clothing is sharp. ▶ No measure is necessary!
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 163

Production
6.2.3 Card sliver runs on the floor
Option: Coiler

1 Tension – card sliver Too small ▶ Increase tension.
▶ Adjust the sliver tension.
(Option: Coiler CBA)
✗
6.2.4 Card sliver does not run smoothly
Option: Coiler
The card sliver runs rolling and jerking out of the card to the coiler.

ing interval.
2 Draft in delivery unit Not optimally adapted to the de- ▶ Set draft for doffer
livery speed roller / delivery rolls.
▶ Configure the card delivery.
3 Mechanical cause ✓ ▶ Ensure that the coiler drive
is running easily.
4 Tension – card sliver Too small ▶ Increase tension.
▶ Adjust the sliver tension.
(Option: Coiler CBA)
5 Web Web falls off the doffer ▶ Check doffer status.
Web is extracted ▶ Visual inspection and
evaluation of the clothing.
▶ Grind the doffer.
▽ Possible causes: The grind-
ing roller was too force-
fully advanced against the
toothed tips or the grinding
stones are dull.
✗

At the delivery unit
6.2.5 No web on the delivery unit
During pull-in: Batt is fed into the feed, but nothing comes out on the delivery rollers.

1 No web or incomplete web on Material remains on the clothing Continue with: 2
the delivery unit
Material remains on the cylinder. Continue with: 3
Determining the material flow
▶ Check cylinder, doffer and Material remains on the doffer. Continue with: 4
doffer roller, to determine
whether fibres are accumu- ✗ Continue with: 2
lating in the clothing.
2 Tongue Material accumulates under the ▶ Clean the space under the
tongue. doffer.
The material accumulation ▶ Clean and adjust the
touches the doffer and disturbs tongue.
the web.
▶ Adjust the distance
The material accumulation
from tongue to cylinder.
brakes the doffer.
▶ At re-commissioning,
check the fibre transfer
cylinder/doffer.
3 cylinder clothing Unsuitable for the current applic- ▶ Re-determine the cylinder
ation clothing type.
No transfer to doffers ▶ Pull on suitable cylinder
clothing.
4 Fleece remains on doffer. Rolls Doffer roller has too great a dis- ▶ Adjust doffer roller.
of fibres are formed. tance to the doffer. (☞ Part 4, Page157)
Distance of the doffer roller not ▶ Adapt the position of
adapted to the height of the the lower delivery roller
clothing. to the clothing height.
Web bridge is too close to the ▶ Adjust the web bridge.
doffer. (☞ Part 4, Page159)
5 Doffer roller pulls web up to the Draft VA3: Too small ▶ Increase draft.
clearer roller
▶ Set draft for doffer
roller / delivery rolls.
▶ Configure the card
delivery. (Option: Coiler)
✗
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 165

Production
6.3 At the coiler
6.3.1 Coiler ratio too close / too far
Option: Coiler
1. Adjust coiler speeds.
6.3.2 After change, can is knocked over
Option: Coiler CBA

OR Coiler SB

1 Rollers on cans do not turn freely ✓ ▶ Clean rollers, repair if ne-
cessary.
drive belt.
✗
6.3.3 Diameter of the sliver column too large/too small
Option: Coiler
1. Adjust the can guide.
6.3.4 Card sliver wrapped around can
Option: Coiler CBA

OR Coiler SB
After can change the sliver is pulled off by the tossed-out can and wrapped around the can in the
coiler.

cedure. ation. (Option: Coiler CBA)
✗

Quality of card sliver
6.4 Quality of card sliver
6.4.1 Excessive contamination in the card sliver
Option: Coiler

1 Cleaning effect of the blowroom ✓ ▶ Check blowroom machines
for waste discharge and
cleaning efficiency.
2 Discharge points Clogged ▶ Remove blockage.
▶ Check and clean all suction
points. (☞ Part 4, Page12)
3 Clothings Dull ▶ Grind clothings.
▶ Evaluate the wear on ▶ Remove the licker-in unit.
licker-in and cylinder. (☞ Part 4, Page41)
▶ Prepare the cylinder
▶ Visual inspection and for grinding.
evaluation of the clothing. (☞ Part 4, Page62)
▶ Prepare the machine for
▶ Evaluate the clothing grinding the card flats.
of the card flats. (☞ Part 4, Page72)
(☞ Part 4, Page71) Worn ▶ Replace clothings.
▶ Replace the cylinder cloth-
ing. (☞ Part 4, Page66)
Damaged ▶ Replace clothings.
Unsuitable for the current applic- ▶ Use suitable clothing.
ation
4 Mote knife on the licker-in Discharge opening is too small ▶ Adjust the mote knife,
discharge opening (C).
5 Carding zone – cylinder Strips on the mote knife are too ▶ Use smaller strips. Increase
large separation.
6 Card flat speed Too low ▶ Enter the flat speed.
✗
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 167

Production
6.4.2 Too many neps in the card sliver.
Option: Coiler

1 Insufficient reduction of the neps There are more neps in the card Continue with: 2
through the card sliver than there are in the feed
▶ Determine the number of In the card sliver there are fewer Continue with: 5
neps in the card feed. neps than there are in the feed
▶ Consult user statistics. User statistics: ≥75 %
In the card sliver there are fewer Continue with: 6
neps than there are in the feed
User statistics: ≥50 %
User statistics: ≤5 %
Nep reduction of the card is
good.
2 Settings – card flats Not correct ▶ Precisely adjust card flats.
Measure the carding gap
▶ Drive the card flats
for the adjustment. ✗ Continue with: 3
3 Card flat clothing Unsuitable for the current applic- ▶ Re-determine the type of
ation card flat clothing.
▶ Install suitable card flat
clothing.
clothing.
✗
5 Licker-in clothing is dull ✓ ▶ Grind licker-in clothing.
▶ Visual inspection and ▶ Remove the licker-in unit.
(☞ Part 4, Page39) ✗
6 Cylinder clothing dull ✓ ▶ Prepare the cylinder
for grinding.
▶ Visual inspection and
7 Cylinder clothing is dull ✓ ▶ Prepare the machine for
grinding the card flats.
✗
8 Upstream process, blowroom Rotational speed of fans and ▶ Reduce speeds.
machines clearer rollers is too high
✗

6.4.3 Fibres shortening through the card
Option: Coiler

1 Speed, rpm Speed too high ▶ Reduce speed.
▶ Check settings and speeds. ✗ Continue with: 2
2 Knife damaged. Edge on the knife has brows ▶ Replace knife.
3 Raw material Insufficient fibre strength ▶ Check level of maturity and
fibre strength.
✗
6.4.4 Thin points and slubs in the card sliver
Option: Coiler

1 Display of thin points and slubs Sliver weight: ≥5 ktex Continue with: 2
Determining the settings in data Sliver weight: <5 ktex ▶ In data screen 20.4 select a
not faults.
doffer for grinding
3 Wrong clothing on the doffer Clothings without polish or ▶ The doffer roller must be re-
roller Needle Finish were mounted placed with a clothing from
Graf with polish or Needle
Finish.
the delivery unit
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 169

Production

tongue. doffer.
the web.
brakes the doffer.
cylinder/doffer.
clothing.
doffer for grinding
10 Delivery unit contaminated ✓ ▶ Clean the delivery unit.


11 Delivery rollers Surface or grooved damaged ▶ Replace delivery rollers.
Examine delivery rollers ▶ Remove rollers.
(Option: Coiler OR
Non-woven fabric
OR Non-woven tape)
12 Cross apron Worn ▶ Replace the cross
apron. (Option: Coiler
OR Non-woven tape)
Damaged ▶ Adjust the distance
between the cross aprons.
✗
6.4.5 High dimensional fluctuations (CVm%, U%) in the card sliver
Option: Coiler

2 Spectrogram Periodic fault (chimney) Continue with: 3
Non-periodic fault (mountain) Continue with: 5
3 Mechanical features Drive runs sluggishly ▶ Separate parts of it and
check individually.
▶ Repair or replace compon-
ent that does not move eas-
ily.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 171

Production

ation
ing interval.
6 Delivery rollers set too far ▶ Adjust delivery rollers nar-
rower.
≤0.3 mm
▶ Adjust upper delivery
roll. (Option: Coiler OR
Non-woven fabric OR
Non-woven tape)
7 Electrostatic charge Material flow for MMF faulty ▶ Polish cross apron rollers.
▶ Check air conditioner.
✗
6.5 Quality of web
6.5.1 Excessive contamination in the web

1 Cleaning effect of the blowroom ✓ ▶ Check blowroom machines
for waste discharge and
cleaning efficiency.
2 Discharge points Clogged ▶ Remove blockage.
▶ Check and clean all suction
points. (☞ Part 4, Page12)

Quality of web

2 Discharge points ✗ Continue with: 3
ation
4 Mote knife on the licker-in Discharge opening is too small ▶ Adjust the mote knife,
discharge opening (C).
5 Carding zone – cylinder Strips on the mote knife are too ▶ Use smaller strips. Increase
large separation.
6 Card flat speed Too low ▶ Enter the flat speed.
✗
6.5.2 Too many neps in the web

1 Insufficient reduction of the neps There are more neps in the web Continue with: 2
through the card than there are in the feed
▶ Determine the number of There are more neps in the web Continue with: 4
neps in the card feed. than there are in the feed
▶ Consult user statistics. User statistics: ≥75 %
There are more neps in the web Continue with: 5
than there are in the feed
User statistics: ≤5 %
Nep reduction of the card is
good.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 173

Production

2 Card flat clothing Unsuitable for the current applic- ▶ Re-determine the type of
ation card flat clothing.
▶ Install suitable card flat
clothing.
clothing.
✗
4 Licker-in clothing is dull ✓ ▶ Grind licker-in clothing.
▶ Visual inspection and ▶ Remove the licker-in unit.
5 Cylinder clothing dull ✓ ▶ Prepare the cylinder
for grinding.
6 Cylinder clothing is dull ✓ ▶ Prepare the machine for
✗
7 Upstream process, blowroom Rotational speed of fans and ▶ Reduce speeds.
machines clearer rollers is too high
✗
6.5.3 Fibres shortening through the card

1 Speed, rpm Speed too high ▶ Reduce speed.
▶ Check settings and speeds. ✗ Continue with: 2
2 Knife damaged. Edge on the knife has brows ▶ Replace knife.
3 Raw material Insufficient fibre strength ▶ Check level of maturity and
fibre strength.
✗

Quality of web
6.5.4 Thin points and slubs in the web

1 Display of thin points and slubs Web weight: ≥5 ktex Continue with: 2
Determining the settings in data Web weight: <5 ktex ▶ In data screen 20.4 select a
not faults.
doffer for grinding
3 Wrong clothing on the doffer Clothings without polish or ▶ The doffer roller must be re-
roller Needle Finish were mounted placed with a clothing from
Graf with polish or Needle
Finish.
the delivery unit
tongue. doffer.
the web.
brakes the doffer.
cylinder/doffer.
clothing.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 175

Production

7 Fleece remains on doffer. Rolls Distance of the doffer roller not ▶ Adapt the position of
of fibres are formed. adapted to the height of the the lower delivery roller
doffer for grinding
11 Delivery rollers Surface or grooved damaged ▶ Replace delivery rollers.
Examine delivery rollers ▶ Remove rollers.
(Option: Coiler OR
Non-woven fabric
OR Non-woven tape)
12 Cross apron Worn ▶ Replace the cross
apron. (Option: Coiler
OR Non-woven tape)
Damaged ▶ Adjust the distance
between the cross aprons.
✗

Quality of web
6.5.5 High dimensional fluctuations (CVm%, U%) in the web

2 Spectrogram Periodic fault (chimney) Continue with: 3
Non-periodic fault (mountain) Continue with: 5
check individually.
ily.
ation
ing interval.
6 Delivery rollers set too far ▶ Adjust delivery rollers nar-
rower.
≤0.3 mm
▶ Adjust upper delivery
roll. (Option: Coiler OR
Non-woven fabric OR
Non-woven tape)
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 177

Production

6 Delivery rollers ✗ Continue with: 7
7 Electrostatic charge Material flow for MMF faulty ▶ Polish cross apron rollers.
▶ Check air conditioner.
✗
6.6 Productivity
6.6.1 Insufficient production

doffer for grinding
6.6.2 Excessive waste, good fibres in the waste

1 Separation distances Too large ▶ Determine the discharge
point at which the good
fibres are discharged.
▶ This discharge point, which
is set to wide, must be ad-
justed narrower.
2 Carding zone – cylinder Strips on the mote knife are too ▶ Use larger strips. Reduce
small separation.
3 Card flat speed High ▶ Enter the flat speed.
✗

Non-displayed faults
7 Rectifying faults
A distinction is made between the following types of events:
Non-displayed fault: A person rather than the system determines that something is not correct.
Fault detected by system: The system detects a fault and displays a corresponding fault message.
7.1 Non-displayed faults
7.1.1 At the feed
7.1.1.1 Drive of the opening roller in the card chute is overheated

1 Motor torque exceeded Opening roller without belt does ▶ Adjust the seal and bearing
not turn freely. of the opening roller.
Opening roller turns freely how- ▶ Check and tension toothed
ever the toothed belt is not ten- belts. (☞ Part 4, Page215)
sioned correctly.
Final measure ▶ Check the motor.
7.1.2 In the vicinity of the cylinder
7.1.2.1 IGS grinding stone does not move

1 Pneumatic system No compressed air ▶ Check the compressed air
Compressed-air lines are defect- supply.
ive
2 Undefined position The guide carriage is not in park ▶ Bring the guide carriage into
position on the right side of the park position.
machine
▶ Install the electromagnet.
3 Mechanical features A mechanical cause in the guide ▶ Clean the guide and repair
carriage prevents movement. or replace as necessary.
▶ IGS-Classic – execute
a function test. ▶ Remove the guide carriage.
▶ Install guide carriage.
4 Diode defective No voltage on the electromagnet. ▶ Replace the diodes in the
socket outlet for connec-
tion of the cylinder grinding
device.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 179

Rectifying faults Universal Operating Manual
Production

5 Electromagnet Voltage present. ▶ Replace the electromagnet.
▶ Check the voltage on the Electromagnet is defective ▶ Remove the electromagnet.
electromagnet. (☞ Part 4, Page95)
▶ Adjust grinding stone
after replacement of
the electromagnet.
✗ ▶ Inform the customer service
organisation.
7.1.2.2 Excessive contamination
1. Check extraction system.
7.1.2.3 Doors cannot be opened
1. Adjust the door locking mechanism and the safety switch. (☞ Part 4, Page213)
7.1.3 At the operating unit
7.1.3.1 Master password unknown

1 Operator Forgot password ▶ Perform a cold start.
▶ After the cold start all pass-
words are reset to the fact-
ory setting.
Entered incorrectly ▶ Enter the password.
▽ Message« Password er-
ror »
▶ Enter the correct pass-
word again.
7.1.4 In the control cabinet
7.1.4.1 Frequency converter, no response

1 Electric power supply ✓ ▶ Assure the power supply.
Note
See electric documentation

Fault code list, operating unit.

2 Hardware faulty ▶ Replace the frequency con-
verter.
▶ Test the frequency con-
verter. (☞ Part 4, Page210) ▶ Remove the frequency con-
verter. (☞ Part 4, Page217)
▶ Load the frequency con-
▶ Configure the
frequency converter.
▶ Install the frequency con-
✗
7.2 Fault code list, operating unit.
MSG-TEXT
IDENTIFIER-TEXT DIAGNOSIS-MSG-TEXT Page
200 FatalError(), see logbook 3/
Message type: Fault Page199
201 Control module CX408 fault/defect. A31 3/
208 Control, overheating A10 3/
209 Option: Coiler SB 3/
Page201
OR Coiler RSB
Control module CAN fault/defect. A11

Message type: Fault
210 Data loss maintenance data A10 3/
211 Data loss Shift data A10 3/
212 Data loss remanent data A10 3/
213 Data loss Logbooks A10 3/
214 Data loss statistiks data A10 3/
215 Data loss grafik data A10 3/
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 181

Production

220 Relay fault, card service sticking K23 3/
221 Relay fault, card service switching K23 3/
222 Relay monitoring, card service K23 3/
225 Disp. Chamb. top, clean.roll 2 open S57 3/
226 Option: Web production 3/
Page202
Cover prof., cyl., ACZ, bottom, B31
Message type: Fault
Page203
Cover prof., cyl., ACZ, top, B32
Message type: Fault
228 Web breakage B327 3/
Page203
Unlocking of door, S23
Message type: Fault
232 Option: Prepared for compacting roller 3/
Page204
Cover, delivery end open S81..S84

Message type: Fault
Page204
Key switch, doffer service on S80
Message type: Fault
Page204
Key switch, doffer service off S80
Message type: Fault
Page204
Compression rollers card, lap B342
Message type: Fault
Page205
Card delivery rollers, lap, LH B332
Message type: Fault
237 Card delivery rollers, lap, RH B333 3/
238 Fault relay, ext.EMERG.-OFF,switch. K66 3/


239 Fault relay, ext.EMERG.-OFF,stick. K66 3/
240 Fault relay, card EMERG.-OFF, stick.K21 3/
241 Fault relay, card EMERG.-OFF,switch K21 3/
242 Fault relay, card doors, sticking K22 3/
243 Fault relay, card doors, switching K22 3/
244 Fault relay, coiler covers sticking K66 3/
245 Fault relay, coiler cover switching K66 3/
246 Fault relay, watch-dog, sticking K20 3/
247 Fault relay, watch-dog, switching K20 3/
248 Relay monitoring, ext.EMER.-OFF K66 3/
Page207
Control web system not ready
Message type: Fault
250 EMERG.-OFF button, card S8 3/
251 Option: Coiler RSB 3/
Page208
OR Coiler SB
EMERG.-OFF button, coiler S1

Message type: Fault
252 Door safeguard, driving side, card S18 3/
Page209
Coiler, covers open S18..S20
Message type: Fault
Page209
Coiler, covers open S18..S21
Message type: Fault
253 Option: Coiler CBA 3/
Page208
Coiler, hood open S15
Message type: Fault
254 Lockswitch, flat service, ON S6 3/
255 Lockswitch, flat service, OFF S6 3/
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 183

Production

Page210
OR Coiler RSB
Lockswitch, coiler S17

Message type: Fault
257 Relay monitoring, EMERG.-OFF, card K21 3/
258 Relay monitoring, card doors K22 3/
259 Option: Coiler 3/
Page210
Relay monitor., coiler covers K66
Message type: Fault
260 Blowroom not ready 3/
261 Production, creep speed, stopped 3/
Message type: Warning Page211
262 Option: Coiler 3/
Page211
Ends down B7
Message type: Fault
Page211
Web breakage B330
Message type: Fault
263 Relay monitoring, watch-dog K20 3/
264 MPS on, test programs 3/
Page212
OR Coiler RSB
Lockswitch, coiler S17

Message type: Fault
Page212
Emergency off can changer S40
Message type: Fault
267 Alarm, Sliverguard USG 3/
268 External EMERGENCY STOP 3/
Page214
Fault, downline process
Message type: Fault
270 D95K communication shutdown CAN A20 3/
271 D95K fault, PROM checksum A20 3/


272 D95K data loss CAN 3/
273 D95K fault, PROM checksum A20 3/
274 D95K parameter fault, CAN A20 3/
Page216
RSB communication shutdown CAN D90
Message type: Fault
Page216
D90K fault, software version D90
Message type: Fault
277 RSB data loss CAN 3/
Message type: Low-level information for developers Page216
Page216
RSB fault, EEPROM checksum D90
Message type: Fault
Page216
RSB scanning roller linearity fault D90
Message type: Fault
Page217
RSB scanning roller offset fault D90
Message type: Fault
Page217
RSB scanning roller gain error D90
Message type: Fault
Page217
RSB parameter, general fault D90
Message type: Fault
285 Option (Retrofittable): RQM Rieter Quality Monitor 3/
Page218
RQM communication shutdown CAN D50
Message type: Fault
Page218
RQM fault, software version D50
Message type: Fault
Page218
RQM data loss CAN
Message type: Low-level information for developers
Page218
RQM fault, EEPROM checksum D50
Message type: Fault
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 185

Production

Page219
RQM scanning roller linearity fault D50
Message type: Fault
Page219
RQM scanning roller offset fault D50
Message type: Fault
Page219
RQM scanning roller gain error D50
Message type: Fault
Page219
RQM parameter, general fault D50
Message type: Fault
Page219
RQM 0% error tolerance in range D50
Message type: Fault
294 D95K fault, SRAM error A20 3/
305 Card A% value overshoot B6 3/
306 Card CV value overshoot B6 3/
307 Card spectrogram overshoot B6 3/
Page222
RQM A% value overshoot B50
Message type: Fault
Page223
RQM CV% value overshoot B50
Message type: Fault
Page224
RQM Spectrogram overshoot B50
Message type: Fault
312 Card, slubs exceeded B6 3/
Page225
Slide clamping sheet to end pos. S12
Message type: Fault
Page225
OR Coiler SB
Slide carrier to end position B9

Message type: Fault


Page226
Clamp. sheet malf.sliver cutter S12 B13
Message type: Fault
Page226
OR Coiler SB
Carrier malfunction B9 B10

Message type: Fault
Page227
OR Coiler RSB
Empty can missing S11

Message type: Fault
Page227
Coiler motor overheated M1
Message type: Fault
Page227
Prod. can missing, rod switch fault S11
Message type: Fault
Page228
Rod sw.or carrier drive belt defect S11
Message type: Fault
Page228
Coiler motor overheated S1 M1
Message type: Fault
Page228
OR Coiler RSB
Push clamping sheet to end position S46

Message type: Fault
Page229
Disturbance separation cylinder S47
Message type: Fault
Page229
Turnstile not in end position B41
Message type: Fault
Page229
Can carrier missing B42
Message type: Fault
Page229
Dist. proximity switch coiler wheel B43
Message type: Fault
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 187

Production

Page230
Disturbance clamping sheet S46 B44
Message type: Fault
Page230
OR Coiler SB
Disturbance separation sheet S47

Message type: Fault
Page230
Disturbance turnstile prox. switch B41
Message type: Fault
Page230
Disturbance changer motor B41
Message type: Fault
Page231
OR Coiler SB
Dist. drafting system,fleece nozzle B4

Message type: Fault
Page231
OR Coiler RSB
Sliver congestion, coiler wheel B24

Message type: Fault
Page231
OR Coiler RSB
Malfunction drafting system, lap S25

Message type: Fault
Page232
Malfunction can turntable broken S28
Message type: Fault
Page232
No compressed air coiler B5
Message type: Fault
Page232
OR Coiler RSB
Malfunction drafting system load S22

Message type: Fault
Page233
OR Coiler RSB
Disturbance rod switch S41

Message type: Fault


Page233
OR Coiler RSB
Prod. can missing, rod switch fault S41

Message type: Fault
Page233
MPS changer motor of coiler Q62
Message type: Fault
Page233
MPS changer motor of coiler on Q62
Message type: Fault
Page234
MPS coiler Q61 Q90
Message type: Fault
Page234
MPS coiler on Q61 Q90
Message type: Fault
Page234
Relubricate coiler
Message type: Fault
Page234
Power supply coiler F2 F5
Message type: Fault
Page234
Disturbance servo amplifier RSB G90
Message type: Fault
Page235
RSB feel.rol. sliv.weight too light S16
Message type: Fault
Page235
RSB range of control exceeded B90
Message type: Fault
Page235
RSB delivery speed too low B92
Message type: Fault
Page236
RSB delivery speed too low B2
Message type: Fault
Page236
Sag sensor cable break B30
Message type: Fault
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 189

Production

Page237
RSB feed speed too low B91
Message type: Fault
Page237
Fault, sliver separation B13
Message type: Fault
Page237
Fault, sliver separation B13
Message type: Fault
Page237
OR Coiler RSB
Coiler, drafting system, re-lube

Message type: Fault
Page238
OR Coiler RSB
Coiler, top rollers, re-lube

Message type: Fault
Page238
Fault with slider for suction unit B5
Message type: Fault
Page238
Fault with slider for suction unit B5
Message type: Fault
389 Doffer blocked B4 3/
390 MPS doffer/delivery Q12 3/
391 MPS doffer/delivery on Q12 3/
392 MPS card feed roll/clean.brush Q10 Q14 3/
393 MPS card f.roll/clean.br. on Q10 Q14 3/
396 Delivery motor, max. speed reached M12 3/
397 Delivery motor, min. speed reached M12 3/
398 Card feed roll, max. speed reached M10 3/
399 Delivery speed too high B3 3/
400 Delivery speed too low B3 3/


401 Doffer rotating speed too low B4 3/
402 Feed roll, foreign body B5 3/
403 Scanner batt cable breakage B5 3/
404 Scanner sliver, cable breakage B6 3/
405 Batt feeder lap too light B5 3/
406 Batt feeder lap too heavy B5 3/
407 Sliver weight too light B6 3/
408 Sliver weight too heavy B6 3/
409 Scanner sliver, min. level cntrl. B6 3/
410 Scanner sliver, max. level cntrl. B6 3/
411 Controll. sliv. wght. under-compens. 3/
412 Controll. sliv. wght. over-compens. 3/
Page247
MPS coiler Q60
Message type: Fault
Page247
MPS coiler on Q60
Message type: Fault
Page247
Coiler motor max. r.p.m. reached M1
Message type: Fault
Page248
Coiler motor min. r.p.m. reached M1
Message type: Fault
417 Error, card configuration (43.1) 3/
Page248
Nomin.val., ext. del., brkn. cable D301
Message type: Fault
Page249
MPS compression rollers card Q80
Message type: Fault
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 191

Production

Page249
MPS compression rollers card on Q80
Message type: Fault
Page249
Cmpr. rol. motor reached max. speed M80
Message type: Fault
Page250
Compr. roller motor speed too slow M80
Message type: Fault
423 Doffer motor has reached max. speed M11 3/
424 Doffer motor speed too slow M11 3/
Page251
Compression rollers blocked B87
Message type: Fault
426 Material transport,cylinder/delivery 3/
427 Cylinder: Layer of material too high 3/
438 Chamber wall of chute not mounted B45 3/
439 Chute,pressure meas., broken cable, B23 3/
440 MPS chute drives Q42 Q43 3/
441 MPS chute drives on Q42 Q43 3/
442 Chute is empty B23 3/
443 Aerofeed no material 3/
444 Chute opening roller speed too low B44 3/
445 Chute opening roller blocked B44 3/
446 Chute opening roller start-up speed B44 3/
447 Chute opening roller overheated M42 3/
451 Chut open. roller r.p.m. too high B44 3/
452 Chute door open S40 3/
453 MPS chute feed roll Q41 3/


454 MPS chute feed roll on Q41 3/
455 MPS cylinder/licker-in Q1 Q13 3/
456 MPS cylinder/licker-in on Q1 Q13 3/
457 Cylinder speed above 999 /min B1 3/
458 Cylinder proximity switch defective B1 3/
459 Cylinder speed too high B1 3/
460 Cylinder speed too low B1 3/
461 Cylinder below production speed B1 3/
462 Cylinder does not start up B1 3/
463 Cylinder coasting, prox. sw.fault B1 3/
464 Cylinder fails to remain stationary B1 3/
465 Draft licker-in/cylinder too small 3/
466 Licker-in proximity switch defect. B9 3/
467 Licker-in rot. speed not reached B9 3/
468 Licker-in blocked B9 3/
469 Licker-in rotating speed too low B9 3/
470 Congestion, flat cleaning B11 3/
471 Flat alignment faulty B8 3/
472 Flat standstill B2 3/
473 Low suction B12 3/
474 Cylinder not stopped B1 3/
475 Cylinder speed not reached B1 3/
476 Cylinder speed not reached B1 3/
477 Configuration fixed flats X1.3 A31 3/
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 193

Production

478 Configuration fixed flats X1.3 A32 3/
479 Licker-in lift.cyl.pos.not reached M29 3/
480 Licker-in lift.cylinder.ref.positon M29 3/
481 Option (Retrofittable): Licker-in knife adjustment 3/
Page263
Licker-in lift.cylinder cable break D13
Message type: Fault
482 Cylinder motor overheated M1 3/
483 Licker-in rotating speed too high B9 3/
484 MPS, flats, drives, Q50 Q57 Q58 3/
485 IGS-cl. proximity sw. position left B51 3/
486 IGS-cl. proximity sw.position right B52 3/
487 IGS-classic not in park position B52 3/
488 MPS, flats, drives on, Q50,Q57,Q58 3/
489 IGS-classic grindstone position S53 3/
490 MPS power supply 24 VDC F2 3/
491 MPS power supply 24 VDC on F2 3/
492 MPS IGS-top grinding drive Q55 3/
493 MPS IGS-top grinding drive on Q55 3/
494 IGS-classic motor fails to start M51 3/
495 IGS-top cable breakage, curr. meas. D55 3/
496 IGS-top grinding force too high 3/
497 Malfunction suction licker-in S9 3/
498 Flats clear.roller1,contactor forw. K56 3/
500 Chute f.roll FC parameter incorrect U41 3/
501 Chute f.roll FC,communicat.shutdown U41 3/


502 Chute f.roll FC CAN node stat. inc. U41 3/
503 Chute f.roll FC mot.overcurrent M41 U41 3/
504 Chute f.roll FC converter overload U41 3/
508 Chute f.roll FC conv. earth fault U41 3/
510 Chute f.roll FC phase fail.p.supply U41 3/
511 Chut.f.roll FC interm.circ.overvolt.U41 3/
512 Chu.f.roll FC interm.circ.undervolt.U41 3/
513 Chute f.roll FC loading cont.faulty U41 3/
514 Chute f.roll FC inter. phase output U41 3/
515 Chute f.roll FC overheating, h.sink U41 3/
520 Chute f.roll FC,fault,brake.transis.U41 3/
521 Chute f.roll FC, ext.fault chain U41 3/
522 Chute f.roll FC, ext.fault chain U41 3/
527 Chute f.roll FC,fault,optional card U41 3/
537 Chute f.roll FC conv.hardware fault U41 3/
540 Chute f.roll FC, wrong conv. type U41 3/
541 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised fault U41 3/
542 Chute f.roll FC, safety input U41 K41 3/
542 Crd. FC feed roll, safety input U10 K10 3/
542 FC coiler, safety input U60 K60 3/
542 FC compress. rollers, saf.input U80 K80 3/
542 FC delivery, base block input U12 K26 3/
542 FC delivery, base block input U12 K26 3/
542 FC doffer, base block input U11 K26 3/
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 195

Production

542 FC for cylinder, safety input U1 K1 3/
542 FC licker-in, safety input U13 K13 3/
542 FC RSB, base block input U3 K21 3/
542 Flats FC, safety input U50 K50 3/
542 Op.roller FC, safety input U42 K42 3/
Page272
Relubricate coiler
Message type: Warning
551 Low battery A10 3/
560 EMERG-OFF button card, EMERG-OFF tst 3/
561 Lock doors, test EMERG-OFF circuit 3/
562 R/S EMERG-OFF 2-way sw. EMRG-OFF tst 3/
563 R/S close covers, EMERG-OFF test 3/
564 R/S EMRG-OFF sw.,tst EMERG-OFF crc. 3/
565 Card ready for ramp-up 3/
566 Ext.EMER.-OFF,test EMER.-OFF circuit 3/
Page274
Faulty interlock cover deliv. S81..S84
Message type: Fault
568 S6 key sw., EMERG. SHUTD. circ. test 3/
Page275
RQM monitoring inactive !!!
571 Card quality data loss 3/
573 RQM quality data loss 3/
574 D95K Spectrogram inactive !!! 3/


Page276
OR Coiler SB
Prox. switch, carrier centre defect B16

Page276
OR Coiler RSB
Drafting system open B3

Page276
Feeler rollers relieved Y7
Page276
Can storage full S42
Page277
OR Coiler SB
Prox. switch, carrier centre defect B8

Page277
Sliver cutting delay
596 Standard draft too small 3/
597 Standard draft too large 3/
598 Blowroom production too low 3/
599 Thread sliver through disc rollers 3/
604 Option: IGS-Classic 3/
Page278
IGS-classic solenoid cooling
Page278
IGS-cl. max. grinding cycles reached
Page279
IGS-classic cycle incomplete B51
Page279
IGS-classic inactive (fault)
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 197

Production

609 Option: IGS-Top 3/
Page279
IGS-top max. grinding cycles reached
Page280
IGS-top cycle aborted
611 Licker-in lift. cylinder blocked M29 3/
Page280
IGS-top grinding force too high
Page281
IGS-top grinding force too low
Page281
IGS-top inactive (fault)
615 Wait until flat clean.monitor. act. B11 3/
616 Carding gap measurement, position 1 3/
621 Meas. pos. approach, carding gap 3/
Message type: Maintenance warning Page282
622 Lt. barr., flat clean.unit, soiled, B11 3/
623 Select chute `pressure level 1` 41.4 3/
627 Increase chute `batt weight` 41.4 3/
628 Reduce chute `batt weight` 41.4 3/


629 Reduce distance chamber wall chute 3/
630 Increase distance chamber wall chute 3/
200 FatalError(), see logbook

Message type: Fault

1 Warning is displayed A warning is displayed in data ▶ Eliminate the causes of the
screen 31.30 warnings.
2 Software running error ✓ ▶ Place the main switch on
"0".
▶ Place the main switch on
"1".
Note
If necessary call Rieter cus-
tomer service.
Customer
service: +41 52 208 71 71
✗
201 Control module CX408 fault/defect. A31

Message type: Fault

1 Power supply not connected No LED is illuminated. ▶ Plug in the plug of the
power supply.
2 CAN bus not connected No data transmission ▶ Connect CAN bus.
LED is flashing red (2 pulses) ▶ Execute the function check
on CAN I/O module CX408.
3 Knot switch on 0 LED is flashing red (1 pulse) ▶ Set node switch.
4 Configuration The wrong type is configured ▶ Configure the machine type.
▶ In data screen 43.1 determ-
ine the configuration. Incorrect type of coiler selected ▶ Configure the type of coiler.

Message type: Fault
If an error occurs during the run-up phase, the green LED stops flashing. The error is displayed
through the periodic flashing of the red LED.
Run-up phase means: Initialisation and establishing the connection with the CAN network.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 199

Production

1 Run-up phase Fault-free ▶ None!
LED is flashing green
3 Configuration EEPROM not valid LED is flashing red (1 pulse) ▶ Contact ELO Service.
4 Error at initialization of the CAN LED is flashing red (2 pulses) ▶ Contact ELO Service.
module ✗ ▶ Replace CX408 module.

Message type: Fault

1 Normal operation Data exchange is running ▶ None!
LED is illuminated green
2 Faulty outputs The CAN bus controller is in grid ▶ None!
operation.
LED is illuminated orange
3 Outputs are not supplied or there LED is flashing orange ▶ Execute a hardware reset
is no monitoring of the sensor (switch off/switch on)
supply. ✗ Continue with: 4
4 Warning: The node number was LED flashes red ▶ Reset the node number.
altered during operation. ◁ The new node number
will be ignored and the
function of the node
remains intact.
5 CAN-IO module may have an ✓ ▶ Execute the function check
error on CAN I/O module CX408.
Function check negative ▶ Check feed and wiring.
Final measure ▶ Replace module.

Message type: Fault
The controller visually indicates the tripping of the time monitor for refreshing the digital and analog
outputs.
If a CAN object remains off within the set time (default: 640 ms), the affected outputs will be reset
and the green LED starts flashing with a double pulse.
After the arrival of the first valid object, the current values are immediately applied.
However, the green LED only reverts to normal operation after a time delay of 30 s. The time delay
is used to identify occasional failures or drop-outs of the outputs. Otherwise these faults can only
be detected with much difficulty.


1 Controller shows the tripping of LED flashes green (2 pulses) ▶ Identify the cause for the
the time monitor. tripping of the time monitor.
✗

Main fault: 201 (☞ Part 3, Page199)
208 Control, overheating A10

Message type: Fault

1 Excess temperature in the area Ambient temperature: ≤50 ℃ ▶ Cool operating unit.
of the operating unit Only the operating unit is hot
Ambient temperature: ≥50 ℃ ▶ Lower ambient temperature.
209 Control module CAN fault/defect. A11

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault
1. Press the program button "?".

◁ More extensive causes and their rectification will be displayed.
210 Data loss maintenance data A10

Message type: Fault

1 Software running error ✓ ▶ Acknowledge the error and
restart the machinery.
✗
211 Data loss Shift data A10

212 Data loss remanent data A10

213 Data loss Logbooks A10

214 Data loss statistiks data A10

13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 201

Production
215 Data loss grafik data A10

220 Relay fault, card service sticking K23

Message type: Fault

1 Relay does not de-energise. Contacts fused ▶ Replace relay.
▶ Obtain the services of a
qualified electrician. Relay is OK ▶ Check control signal and
wiring.
▶ Check function of the relay.
221 Relay fault, card service switching K23

Message type: Fault

1 Relay does not switch Relay is defective ▶ Replace relay.
wiring.
222 Relay monitoring, card service K23

Message type: Fault

1 Key switch Grinding the card flats is attemp- ▶ Turn key switch to pos. «II».
ted.
Key switch is on pos. «I» (pro-
duction operation)
In data screen 81.3 «Grind card
flat» is selected.
2 Key switch Production operation is attemp- ▶ Key switch on pos. «I».
ted.
Key switch is on pos. «II» (grind
card flats)
✗
225 Disp. Chamb. top, clean.roll 2 open S57

226 Cover prof., cyl., ACZ, bottom, B31

Message type: Fault


1 Monitoring – cover profile Cylinder clothing should be ▶ In data screen 81.1 select
cleaned. the following function.
Cover profile is not mounted. Function: « Hand carding »
Wrong operating mode "auto- ▶ Scratch out the clothing.
matic mode" selected. (☞ Part 4, Page64)
Production operation is attemp- ▶ In data screen 80.1 the op-
ted. erating mode « Automatic
mode » is selected.
▶ Ensure that the cover pro-
files are detected by the
proximity switch.
227 Cover prof., cyl., ACZ, top, B32

228 Web breakage B327

Message type: Fault

1 Card sliver is broken Delivery unit contaminated ▶ Clean the delivery, pull in
web afresh.
✗


231 Unlocking of door, S23

Message type: Fault

1 Monitoring – door Door is open. ▶ Close the doors on
the right-hand side
of the machine.
Door is closed. ▶ Open secured doors on the
right-hand side of the ma-
chine. (☞ Part 2, Page29)
▽ If the EMERGENCY STOP
button is activated during
the self-test, the doors re-
main locked.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 203

Production

2 Door lock Defective ▶ Adjust the door
locking mechanism
and the safety switch.
▶ Execute function test
of the safety relay.
✗
232 Cover, delivery end open S81..S84

Message type: Fault

1 Cover to the left of delivery sec- ✓ ▶ Close cover to the left and
tion or hood above delivery sec- hood above delivery section.
tion is open ✗
233 Key switch, doffer service on S80

Message type: Fault

1 Key switch Production operation is attemp- ▶ Turn key switch « grind
ted. doffer » to position I.
However key switch is in position
II
✗
234 Key switch, doffer service off S80

235 Compression rollers card, lap B342

Message type: Fault

1 Wound material on second com- ✓ ▶ Remove wound material.
pacting roller
▶ Align light barrier
B334/B334a at the second
compacting roller.
✗

236 Card delivery rollers, lap, LH B332

Message type: Fault

1 Wound material on delivery roller ✓ ▶ Remove wound material.
▶ Check the entire delivery
area for influences that in-
terfere with the material
flow.
▶ See chapter Technology.
2 Monitoring of the delivery rollers Set incorrectly ▶ Set the monitoring of
the delivery rollers.
3 Proximity switch Function impaired ▶ Check the wiring.
Wiring OK ▶ Replace proximity switch.
4 A 20 (D95K) module defective ✓ ▶ Replace D95K module.
✗
237 Card delivery rollers, lap, RH B333

238 Fault relay, ext.EMERG.-OFF,switch. K66

Message type: Fault

wiring.
239 Fault relay, ext.EMERG.-OFF,stick. K66

Message type: Fault

wiring.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 205

Production
240 Fault relay, card EMERG.-OFF, stick.K21

Message type: Fault

wiring.
241 Fault relay, card EMERG.-OFF,switch K21

Message type: Fault

wiring.
242 Fault relay, card doors, sticking K22

Message type: Fault

wiring.
243 Fault relay, card doors, switching K22

Message type: Fault

wiring.
244 Fault relay, coiler covers sticking K66

Message type: Fault

wiring.

245 Fault relay, coiler cover switching K66

Message type: Fault

wiring.
246 Fault relay, watch-dog, sticking K20

Message type: Fault

wiring.
247 Fault relay, watch-dog, switching K20

Message type: Fault

wiring.
248 Relay monitoring, ext.EMER.-OFF K66

Message type: Fault

wiring.
249 Control web system not ready

Message type: Fault

1 Web system is not ready The card should be operated ▶ Set the system so that it is
compositely, remote-controlled ready for operation.
from the system.
The card should be operated ▶ Disable the remote control.
autonomously.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 207

Production
250 EMERG.-OFF button, card S8

Message type: Fault

1 EMERGENCY STOP button Emergency stop switches activ- ▶
ated
▶ Determine and eliminate the
cause of the EMERGENCY
STOP.
CHWIA_00000058_001_01
Turn the emergency stop

button clockwise.
Emergency stop switch is not ▶ Inform the plant electrician.
activated Check the wiring.
251 EMERG.-OFF button, coiler S1

Option: Coiler RSB
OR Coiler SB
252 Door safeguard, driving side, card S18

Message type: Fault

1 Doors and covers Doors are open ▶ Close doors and covers.
Doors are closed ▶ Adjust the door
locking mechanism
253 Coiler, hood open S15

Option: Coiler CBA
Message type: Fault

1 Hood not closed Hood is really open ▶ Close hood.


1 Hood not closed Hood is too ▶ Check, adjust limit switches.
▶ Adjust the hood
securing mechanism.
253 Coiler, covers open S18..S20

Option: Coiler SB
Message type: Fault

Hood is too ▶ Check, adjust limit switches.
253 Coiler, covers open S18..S21

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

Hood is too ▶ Check, adjust limit switches.
254 Lockswitch, flat service, ON S6

Message type: Fault

1 Key switch Grinding the card flats is attemp- ▶ Turn key switch to pos. «II».
ted.
Key switch is on pos. «I» (pro-
duction operation)
In data screen 81.3 «Grind card
flat» is selected.
ted.
card flats)
✗
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 209

Production
255 Lockswitch, flat service, OFF S6

256 Lockswitch, coiler S17

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Switch position Test operation ▶ Turn key switch, SB mod-
ule, to position «0».
◁ Production mode
✗
257 Relay monitoring, EMERG.-OFF, card K21

258 Relay monitoring, card doors K22

259 Relay monitor., coiler covers K66

Option: Coiler
260 Blowroom not ready

Message type: Fault

1 At least one blowroom machine ✓ ▶ Rectify faults on the appro-
is not running. priate machine and start the
blowroom.
2 Fire alarm system has tripped Fire source has been eliminated ▶ Confirm fire alarm and re-
start system.
There is a fire ▶ Strike the fire alarm.
▶ Extinguish fire.
3 Rotary switch – material feed – of ✓ ▶ Switch on the rotary switch
the blowroom not switched on for the material feed of the
line
4 Filter system Not running ▶ Place the filter system in
service again.
✗

261 Production, creep speed, stopped


1 Warning that the machine is pro- Doffer was intentionally switched ▶ No measure is necessary!
ducing in creep speed to creep speed. ◁ This display appears
as a warning 30
seconds prior to
expiration of the time
set in data screen
40.35.
◁ Production stops after
the set time expires.
Doffer was not switched to creep ▶ Start production
speed. (doffer at high speed).
▽ Remains at creep speed,
if a sliver is not detected
between the disk rollers.
▽ Remains at creep speed,
if a sliver is not detected
between the disk rollers.
Doffer is at a standstill. ▶ Start production (doffer
at creep speed).
262 Ends down B7

Option: Coiler
Message type: Fault

1 Card sliver is torn ✓ ▶ Start production (doffer
at creep speed).
2 Light sensor does not detect the Light sensor is incorrectly adjus- ▶ Adjust the light sensors.
card sliver ted (Option: Coiler CBA)
Light sensor defective ▶ Replace light sensor

Message type: Fault

1 Card sliver is broken Delivery unit contaminated ▶ Clean the delivery, pull in
web afresh.
✗
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 211

Production
263 Relay monitoring, watch-dog K20

Message type: Fault

▶ Obtain the services of a Relay is OK ▶ Check control signal and
qualified electrician. wiring.
▶ Check function of the relay. ✗ Continue with: 2
wiring.
264 MPS on, test programs

Message type: Fault

1 There is another motor protec- ✓ ▶ Switch off all motor protec-
tion switch that is on, other than tion switches. Switch on
«Q15». only «Q15».
✗
265 Lockswitch, coiler S17

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Switch position Test operation ▶ Turn key switch, SB mod-
ule, to position «0».
◁ Production mode
✗
266 Emergency off can changer S40

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault


ated
STOP.
CHWIA_00000058_001_01

button clockwise.
267 Alarm, Sliverguard USG

Message type: Fault

1 Incorrect Sliverguard settings ✓ ▶ Make adjustments and
alignments according to the
Sliverguard instructions.
tongue. doffer.
the web.
brakes the doffer.
cylinder/doffer.
4 Poor bat feed Batt feed is not uniform. Continue with: 5
5 Pressure monitor delivers an implausible result ▶ Remove, clean and reinstall
pressure line
▶ Adjust the pressure monitor-
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 213

Production

5 Pressure monitor ✗ Continue with: 6
6 Configuration ✓ ▶ Check the configuration.
▶ Set the batt weight.
✗
7 Infeed draft is too large Lap feed is torn ▶ Reduce the infeed draft.
ation
✗
268 External EMERGENCY STOP

269 Fault, downline process

Message type: Fault

1 Subsequent process faulty ▶ Rectify fault in the
successor process.
The card should be operated ▶ Disable the remote control.
autonomously. (☞ Part 2, Page23)
270 D95K communication shutdown CAN A20

Message type: Fault

1 No response from D95K module ✓ ▶ Check LED A1, B1, C1 and
C2 on the D95K module.
▶ Check the connection of the
CAN bus.


1 No response from D95K module ✗ Continue with: 2
2 The A1 LED on the D95K mod- ✓ ▶ Check voltage supply.
ule does not light up ✗ Continue with: 3
3 The C2 LED on the D95K mod- ✓ ▶ Check CAN connection with
ule lights up or flashes the operating unit.
✗
271 D95K fault, PROM checksum A20

Message type: Fault

1 Wrong software version ✓ ▶ Replace D95K module.
▶ Inform RIETER customer
service.
✗
272 D95K data loss CAN

Message type: Fault

1 CAN bus connection not in order ✓ ▶ Check the connection of the
CAN bus.
2 The C2 LED on the D95K mod- ✓ ▶ Check CAN connection with
ule lights up or flashes the operating unit.
✗
273 D95K fault, PROM checksum A20

Message type: Fault

1 Wrong checksum of the program, ✓ ▶ Replace D95K module.
program destroyed (☞ Part 4, Page205)
service.
✗
274 D95K parameter fault, CAN A20

Message type: Fault

1 Defective SRAM component ✓ ▶ Replace D95K module.
service.
✗
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 215

Production
275 RSB communication shutdown CAN D90

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Communication interrupted ✓ ▶ Switch off the automatic
between D90 and CAN circuit breaker F2 and then
connection in the Power Panel switch it on again.
A10
▶ Check the wiring to the CAN
interface.
2 D90 hardware is defective ✓ ▶ Replace and adjust D90.
✗
276 D90K fault, software version D90

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Software outdated ✓ ▶ Use new software.
2 Scanning rollers ✓ ▶ Calibrate the scanning
rollers.
Data screen 82.2
Note
See operating manual for
the RSB module.
✗
277 RSB data loss CAN

278 RSB fault, EEPROM checksum D90

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

✗
279 RSB scanning roller linearity fault D90

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault


1 Scanning rollers – basic setting ✓ ▶ Check the settings of the
scanning rollers.
▶ Check the scanning gear
both mechanically and
pneumatically.
▶ Replace and adjust the B90
measuring device for the
scanning rollers.
Note
the RSB module.
✗
280 RSB scanning roller offset fault D90

Option: Coiler RSB
281 RSB scanning roller gain error D90

Option: Coiler RSB
282 RSB parameter, general fault D90

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

2 Impermissible configuration, not ✓ ▶ Reconfigure.
correct
▶ Parameter 0% error dis-
tance, fibre type.
▶ Reconfigure Autoleveller
intensity and data screen
42.2.
▶ Reconfigure Autoleveller
action point in data screen
42.1.
▶ Correct the sliver weight:
Calibrate the RSB module.
✗
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 217

Production
285 RQM communication shutdown CAN D50

Message type: Fault

1 Communication interrupted ✓ ▶ Switch off the automatic
between D50 and CAN circuit breaker F2 and then
connection in the Power Panel switch it on again.
A10
▶ Check the wiring to the CAN
interface.
✗
286 RQM fault, software version D50

Message type: Fault

2 Option: Coiler RSB ✓ ▶ Calibrate the scanning
rollers.
Scanning rollers Data screen 82.2
Note
the RSB module.
✗
287 RQM data loss CAN

288 RQM fault, EEPROM checksum D50

Message type: Fault

✗

289 RQM scanning roller linearity fault D50

Message type: Fault

2 Option: Coiler RSB ✓ ▶ Check the settings of the
scanning rollers.
Scanning rollers – basic setting
pneumatically.
scanning rollers.
Note
the RSB module.
✗
290 RQM scanning roller offset fault D50

291 RQM scanning roller gain error D50

292 RQM parameter, general fault D50

Message type: Fault

1 Impermissible configuration, not ✓ ▶ Reconfigure.
correct
▶ 0% error deviation, A% limit,
CV% limit, spectrogram
limit, measurement length
A%, CV% correction
✗
293 RQM 0% error tolerance in range D50

Message type: Fault
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 219

Production

1 0% distance of the scanning 0% distance of the scanning ▶ Check the sliver weight.
rollers rollers at the limit of the control
▶ Let the machine warm-up
range.
and execute 0% scanning
roller distance.
Data screen 23.1
Calibrate the RSB mod-
ule. (Option: Coiler RSB)
✗
294 D95K fault, SRAM error A20

305 Card A% value overshoot B6

Message type: Fault

tongue. doffer.
the web.
brakes the doffer.
cylinder/doffer.
stones are dull.


4 Poor bat feed ✗ Continue with: 5
pressure line
✗
8 A% value incorrectly configured. ✓ ▶ Check shutdown limit values
and data screen 22.1
▶ Set the shut-down limit A%
of the card sliver monitor.
(Option: Coiler, No RQM
Rieter Quality Monitor)
9 Incorrect measurement The card sliver is OK, never- ▶ Calibrate the measuring
theless the limit values are ex- device in the delivery.
ceeded. (Option: Coiler)
▶ In the line « Delivery scan- (☞ Part 4, Page237)
ner card B6: » read off the
value.
Limit value for when delivery ✗
is switched off
Limit value for when delivery is switched off

Sliver too thin (width of the disk roller is 9 mm): Value less than 680
Sliver too thin (width of the disk roller is 15 mm): Value less than 780
Sliver too thick Value greater than 3110
306 Card CV value overshoot B6

307 Card spectrogram overshoot B6

Message type: Fault
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 221

Production

ation
2 Bearing damage mechanical Parts rotating out of round ▶ Replace parts.
damage on parts. Toothed belts do not run quietly ▶ Correctly tension or replace
toothed belts.
3 Damaged technology parts or Uniform material flow is disturbed ▶ Replace parts.
guide elements ✗ Continue with: 4
4 Tension drafts are not optimally Material accumulates between ▶ Increase tension increment-
adjusted two elements and when the ac- ally until material no longer
cumulated mass is large enough accumulates.
is pulled further as slub.
Material is tensioned tightly and ▶ Decrease tension incre-
is irregularly drafted. mentally until material accu-
mulates; thereafter increase
one step.
Objective: Lowest possible
tension, without material
accumulation
5 Wrong correction factor ✓ ▶ Check correction factor in
data screen 22.3.
✗
309 RQM A% value overshoot B50

Message type: Fault

1 RQM Quality of the sliver is outside of ▶ Improve the sliver quality.
the defined tolerance. See chapter "Technology".
▶ Determine the quality of
the sliver in the laboratory. Quality of the sliver is within the Continue with: 2
Compare the quality determ- defined tolerance.
ined with the configured tol- Nevertheless RQM signals a
erance values of the RQM. quality error.


scanning rollers.
pneumatically.
scanning rollers.
Note
the RSB module.
3 Option: Coiler RSB Not adapted ▶ Check all settings in the
area of the drafting system
Settings – drafting system Note
the RSB module.
5 A% value incorrectly configured. ✓ ▶ Check shutdown limit values
and data screen 22.1
▶ Set the shut-down limit A%
of the card sliver monitor.
(Option: Coiler, No RQM
✗
310 RQM CV% value overshoot B50

Message type: Fault

13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 223

Production

scanning rollers.
pneumatically.
scanning rollers.
Note
the RSB module.
the RSB module.
5 Shutdown limit values CV% are ✓ ▶ Check shutdown limit values
wrong in data screen 23.2.
✗
311 RQM Spectrogram overshoot B50

Message type: Fault

scanning rollers.
pneumatically.
scanning rollers.
Note
the RSB module.


the RSB module.
check individually.
ily.
6 Option: Coiler RSB Damaged ▶ Replace scanning rollers
and/or delivery disks.
Scanning rollers or take-off disks Note
the RSB module.
✗
312 Card, slubs exceeded B6

320 Slide clamping sheet to end pos. S12

Option: Coiler SB
Message type: Fault

1 Clamping plate is not in home position ▶ Bring the clamping plate into
home position.
▶ Adjust the clamping device.
▶ Check limit switch.
ive
3 Pneumatic connection interrupted ▶ Check the air line.
✗
321 Slide carrier to end position B9

Option: Coiler CBA
OR Coiler SB
Message type: Fault
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 225

Production

1 Coil or carriage is not in the end ✓ ▶ Push the carriage by hand
position when switching on the into the end position.
master switch ✗ Continue with: 2
2 The function of the magnet ✓ ▶ Check magnetic switch.
switch is not correct
▶ Adjust the magnetic switch
for the can trolley drive.
✗
322 Clamp. sheet malf.sliver cutter S12 B13

Option: Coiler SB
Message type: Fault

home position.
ive
✗
323 Carrier malfunction B9 B10

Option: Coiler CBA
OR Coiler SB
Message type: Fault

1 Drive belt torn Carriage can be pushed back ▶ Replace and tighten
and forth without resistance. the drive belt for the
changer carriage.
2 Carriage jammed ✓ ▶ Check and adjust carriage
guide.
3 Rear magnetic switch incorrectly The rear position is not correct. ▶ Set the magnetic switch B9.
adjusted (☞ Part 3, Page138)
4 Front magnetic switch incorrectly The front position is not correct. ▶ Set the magnetic switch B10
adjusted (☞ Part 3, Page139)


6 Throttles not properly adjusted Movement speed is incorrect ▶ Throttle the speed
drive belt.
✗
324 Empty can missing S11

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 No empty cans available ✓ ▶ Slide in an empty can.
✗
326 Coiler motor overheated M1

Option: Coiler SB
Message type: Fault

is running easily.
✗
327 Prod. can missing, rod switch fault S11

Option: Coiler SB
Message type: Fault

1 No can in the can changer ✓ ▶ Execute a correct can
change
▶ Change the can.
(Option: Coiler)
▽ Frequent faults when chan-
ging cans
▶ Set the speed for
manual can change.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 227

Production

2 Dowsing switch does not function Can is present, but is not detec- ▶ Check the function of the
ted. dowsing switch.
✗
328 Rod sw.or carrier drive belt defect S11

Option: Coiler SB
Message type: Fault

2 The tension belt for the trolley ✓ ▶ Replace and tighten
drive is torn. the drive belt for the
changer carriage.
✗
329 Coiler motor overheated S1 M1

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

check individually.
ily.
2 Sliver uniformity Quality of the sliver is outside of ▶ Improve the sliver quality.
▶ Determine the quality of the
sliver in the laboratory. ✗
330 Push clamping sheet to end position S46

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

home position.
(Option: Coiler SB)
✗

331 Disturbance separation cylinder S47

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Separating cylinder After switching on the main ▶ Check the separating cylin-
switch the proximity switch has der for function.
detected an incorrect position.
▶ Execute separating cylinder
function manually.
▶ Correctly adjust the position
of the proximity switch on
the separating cylinder.
✗
332 Turnstile not in end position B41

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Rotating cross Wrong position after switching on ▶ Check position of the turn-
the main switch stile and proximity switch.
▶ Check function of the drive.
▶ Slide in empty can and ex-
ecute can change manually.
2 Spinning can Jammed ▶ Remove can.
✗
334 Can carrier missing B42

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Can trolley Not available ▶ Slide in can trolley.
◁ Subsequently the can
change will be ex-
ecuted automatically.
available ▶ Configure the type of coiler.
▶ Check limit switches.
336 Dist. proximity switch coiler wheel B43

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Proximity switch No signal ▶ Check proximity switches
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 229

Production

1 Proximity switch ✗
337 Disturbance clamping sheet S46 B44

Option: Coiler RSB
338 Disturbance separation sheet S47

Option: Coiler RSB
OR Coiler SB
Message type: Fault

home position.
(Option: Coiler SB)
ive
✗
339 Disturbance turnstile prox. switch B41

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Can guidance insufficient ▶ Check and adjust can guide
elements.
2 Rotating cross Wrong position after switching on ▶ Check position of the turn-
the main switch stile and proximity switch.
▶ Check function of the drive.
▶ Slide in empty can and ex-
ecute can change manually.
✗
340 Disturbance changer motor B41

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault


1 Brake Not released on the motor ▶ Check brake.
▶ Replace the motor and the
brakes
check individually.
ily.
✗
341 Dist. drafting system,fleece nozzle B4

Option: Coiler RSB
OR Coiler SB
Message type: Fault

1 Fleece nozzle clogged During sliver feed ▶ Clean web nozzle.
Card produces at slow speed ▶ Draw-in sliver again.
During production operation ▶ Clean web nozzle.
Production stopped ▶ Draw-in sliver again.
342 Sliver congestion, coiler wheel B24

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Sliver jam upstream of the coiler During sliver feed ▶ Remove sliver accumula-
Card produces at slow speed tion.
▶ Draw-in sliver again.
During production operation ▶ Remove sliver accumula-
Production stopped tion.
▶ Draw-in sliver again.
343 Malfunction drafting system, lap S25

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Wound material in the drafting During sliver feed ▶ Remove the wound mater-
system Card produces at slow speed ial.
▶ Check the condition of the
rollers.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 231

Production

1 Wound material in the drafting During production operation ▶ Remove the wound mater-
system Production stopped ial.
▶ Check the condition of the
rollers.
▶ Check / adjust winding
safety device (operating
manual RSB module).
2 Winding safety device Set at insufficient sensitivity ▶ Set at higher sensitivity.
✗
344 Malfunction can turntable broken S28

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Target breaking point Broken Continue with: 2
✗
is running easily.
✗
345 No compressed air coiler B5

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

ive
✗
346 Malfunction drafting system load S22

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Locking mechanism – drafting Not engaged ▶ Close the drafting system
system load correctly.
✗

347 Disturbance rod switch S41

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

✗
348 Prod. can missing, rod switch fault S41

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 No empty cans available ✓ ▶ Slide in an empty can.
✗
349 MPS changer motor of coiler Q62

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Motor protection switch has tripped (once) Continue with: 2
Trips recurrently even if the drive ▶ Replace motor protection
is mechanically in order. switch.
check individually.
ily.
✗
350 MPS changer motor of coiler on Q62

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

«Q15». only «Q15».
✗
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 233

Production
351 MPS coiler Q61 Q90

Option: Coiler RSB
352 MPS coiler on Q61 Q90

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

«Q15». only «Q15».
✗
353 Relubricate coiler

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault
354 Power supply coiler F2 F5

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Power supply insufficient ▶ Have power supply repaired
by a qualified electrician.
✗
355 Disturbance servo amplifier RSB G90

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

check individually.
ily.
2 Servo-amplifier defective ✓ ▶ Replace servo-amplifier and
carry out a calibration after-
wards.
✗

356 RSB feel.rol. sliv.weight too light S16

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 0% distance of the scanning 0% distance of the scanning ▶ Check the sliver weight.
rollers rollers at the limit of the control
▶ Let the machine warm-up
range.
and execute 0% scanning
roller distance.
Data screen 23.1
Calibrate the RSB
module. (Option: RQM
2 Scanning rollers Too wide ▶ Use the narrower scanning
rollers.
✗
357 RSB range of control exceeded B90

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Regulating range Exceeded ▶ Clean the card delivery unit.
▶ Check the material feed of
the card.
2 Sliver weight not correct ▶ Correct the sliver weight:
Calibrate the RSB module.
✗
358 RSB delivery speed too low B92

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 235

Production

1 Rotary encoder Pulses are implausible ▶ Check Nw1 and Nw2 adjust-
ment.
Data screen 10.1
Note
the RSB module.
▶ Tighten the coupling on the
rotary encoder.
▶ Check the wiring on the
rotary encoder.
▶ Replace rotary encoder.
✗
359 RSB delivery speed too low B2

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

ment.
Data screen 10.1
Note
the RSB module.
rotary encoder.
rotary encoder.
✗
360 Sag sensor cable break B30

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Sliver slack ✓ ▶ Adjust the sliver sag mon-
itor. (☞ Part 3, Page148)
cannot be adjusted ▶ Check wiring.
does not respond as described ▶ Replace sensor.

361 RSB feed speed too low B91

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

ment.
Data screen 10.1
Note
the RSB module.
rotary encoder.
rotary encoder.
✗
362 Fault, sliver separation B13

Option: Coiler CBA
Message type: Fault

1 Locking rod jammed ✓ ▶ Adjust sliver cutting.
2 Wrong wiring ✓ ▶ Check the wiring.
✗
363 Fault, sliver separation B13

Option: Coiler CBA
364 Coiler, drafting system, re-lube

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Lubrication interval is reached ▶ Lubricate drafting system
(Option: Coiler SB)
✗
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 237

Production
365 Coiler, top rollers, re-lube

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Lubrication interval is reached ▶ Lubricate drafting system
(Option: Coiler SB)
✗
366 Fault with slider for suction unit B5

Option: Coiler RSB
Message type: Fault

1 Mechanism, pneumatic cylinder Defective, jams ▶ Repair mechanism.
▶ Move slider and cylinder.
▶ Check whether the mechan- ✗ Continue with: 2
ism moves easily.
3 Magnetic switch Does not detect the movement ▶ Adjust the magnetic switch.
▶ Execute movement and Detects the movement ▶ Check the signal on the
check whether the magnetic input of the controller.
switch detects the move-
ment. ✗ Continue with: 4
4 Module A34 A35 Module is defective ▶ Replace the module.
qualified electrician.
▶ Check function. ✗
▶ Replace module on a test
basis.
366 Fault with slider for suction unit B5

Option: Coiler SB
Message type: Fault

1 Mechanism, pneumatic cylinder Defective, jams ▶ Repair mechanism.
▶ Move slider and cylinder.
▶ Check whether the mechan- ✗ Continue with: 2
ism moves easily.


3 Magnetic switch Does not detect the movement ▶ Adjust the magnetic switch.
▶ Execute movement and
check whether the magnetic Detects the movement ▶ Check the signal on the
switch detects the move- input of the controller.
ment.
389 Doffer blocked B4

390 MPS doffer/delivery Q12

Message type: Fault

check individually.
ily.
✗
391 MPS doffer/delivery on Q12

Message type: Fault

1 Motor protection switches are still ✓ ▶ Switch off the motor protec-
switched on tion switch.
Note
The test of the digital out-
puts can only be executed
when the motor protection
switch is switched off.
✗
392 MPS card feed roll/clean.brush Q10 Q14

393 MPS card f.roll/clean.br. on Q10 Q14

396 Delivery motor, max. speed reached M12

Message type: Fault

1 Drive belts Drive belt is insufficiently ten- ▶ Tension drive belt.
sioned.
▶ Check and tension toothed
belts. (☞ Part 4, Page215)
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 239

Production

1 Drive belts Drive belt is worn. ▶ Replace drive belt.
2 Delivery speed detection module wrongly set ▶ Adjust the proximity
does not work properly switch for delivery speed.
397 Delivery motor, min. speed reached M12

398 Card feed roll, max. speed reached M10

Message type: Fault
This fault is displayed during production operation. The cylinder is stopped automatically.

1 Batt too light Chute is set too wide. ▶ Adjust the batt weight
through the position of
the card chute wall.
Chute runs empty. ▶ Adjust the pressure monitor-
Target pressure too low, due to ▶ Check the batt weight.
high material separation and low (☞ Part 3, Page111)
material density.
pressure line
✗
5 Measuring device in the feed Value is outside of the target ▶ Adjust the measuring in
range the feed. (Option: Manual
Signal feed without licker-in knife adjustment)
▶ In the line « Feed scan- material: 730 – 770 (☞ Part 4, Page229)
value. ● Standard setting: 750
Measuring device is set correctly. ▶ Replace measuring device
in the feed unit.

399 Delivery speed too high B3

400 Delivery speed too low B3

401 Doffer rotating speed too low B4

Message type: Fault
This fault is displayed when the problem occurs during draw-in. Only the feed and the doffer are
stopped. The cylinder continues to run.

the delivery unit
tongue. doffer.
the web.
brakes the doffer.
cylinder/doffer.
clothing.
clearer roller
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 241

Production

5 Doffer roller pulls web up to the ✗ Continue with: 6
clearer roller
6 Delivery unit does not run with ✓ ▶ Check delivery unit for ease
sufficient ease of movement and jammed
material in the delivery area.
7 Belt drives Drive belt excessive slip ▶ Check belt for contamina-
tion.
▶ Check belt tension.
8 Doffer speed detection does not ✓ ▶ Adjust the proximity
function correctly switch for monitoring
the doffer speed.
Setting is correct. ▶ Replace proximity switch.
Proximity switch is correct. ▶ Check the wiring.
Wiring is correct. Continue with: 9
10 Causes are eliminated Recommissioning ▶ Clean the web bridge.
▶ In data screen 41.30, in the
line « Compensation fibre
tuft: » set the compensa-
tion.
▶ Adjust the sliver
weight in creep speed.
(Option: Coiler)
▶ Adjust the web weight
in creep speed.
(Option: Web production)
✗
402 Feed roll, foreign body B5

Message type: Fault

1 Measuring device in the feed Foreign objects between feed ▶ Remove the foreign object.
trough and feed roller
▶ Reverse the feed roller. ▶ Check feed trough.


2 Measuring device in the feed Value is outside of the target ▶ Adjust the measuring in
range the feed. (Option: Manual
Signal feed without licker-in knife adjustment)
▶ In the line « Feed scan- material: 730 – 770 (☞ Part 4, Page229)
value. ● Standard setting: 750
Measuring device is set correctly. ▶ Replace measuring device
in the feed unit.
✗
403 Scanner batt cable breakage B5

Message type: Fault

1 No signal from the measuring Cable break on the measuring ▶ Repair wiring.
device of the feed trough device
▶ Check the measuring device
for function.
Function is correct. Continue with: 2
2 Measuring device in the feed Measuring device is set poorly. ▶ Adjust the measuring in
the feed. (Option: Manual
licker-in knife adjustment)
3 Option: Coiler wrongly set ▶ Adjust the sliver
Sliver weight in creep speed (☞ Part 3, Page115)
4 Option: Web production wrongly set ▶ Adjust the web weight
in creep speed.
Web weight in crawl-speed mode (☞ Part 3, Page116)
✗
404 Scanner sliver, cable breakage B6

Message type: Fault

1 No signal from the measuring Current loop to the measuring ▶ Repair wiring.
device in the delivery unit. device in the delivery unit is in-
▶ Check the measuring device
terrupted
for function.
Measuring device is set poorly. ▶ Check the measuring
device of the Autoleveller
in the delivery unit.
Measuring device is set correctly. Continue with: 2
✗
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 243

Production
405 Batt feeder lap too light B5

Message type: Fault

material density.
2 Compression fan Fan, channel or mesh wall is ▶ Check, clean.
clogged
4 Mechanism of the feed trough Load is not correct ▶ Adjust the load of
the feed trough.
jams ▶ Adjust feed trough.
(Minimum distance).
406 Batt feeder lap too heavy B5

Message type: Fault

1 Batt too heavy Chute is set too wide. ▶ Adjust the batt weight
Chute is overfilled. ▶ Adjust the pressure monitor-
the feed trough.
(Minimum distance).

407 Sliver weight too light B6

Message type: Fault

1 Draft Sliver weight lighter than ▶ Check and correct the sliver
For disk rollers 9 mm in weight. (Option: Coiler)
width: 3.4 ktex (☞ Part 3, Page98)
For disk rollers 15 mm in
width: 6.0 ktex
Correction factor capacity ▶ Check target sliver weight.
reached
▶ Adjust the sliver weight.
Correctional factor: 0.5 – 1.5 (Option: Coiler CBA)
stones are dull.
4 Suction unit Poor air ratios in the delivery unit ▶ Better adjust the air ratios
in the discharge unit so that
web is not suctioned.
✗
408 Sliver weight too heavy B6

Message type: Fault

1 Draft Sliver weight heavier than ▶ Check and correct the sliver
15 ktex weight. (Option: Coiler)
Correction factor capacity ▶ Check target sliver weight.
reached
▶ Adjust the sliver weight.
Correctional factor: 0.5 – 1.5 (Option: Coiler CBA)
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 245

Production

3 Measuring device in the delivery Measured value remains too long ▶ Calibrate the measuring
unit in the low limit area. device in the delivery.
(Option: Coiler)
✗
409 Scanner sliver, min. level cntrl. B6

Message type: Fault

1 Draft Card sliver is too light ▶ Reset the delay of the Auto-
Card sliver is too heavy leveller (☞ Part 3, Page75)
3 Measuring device in the delivery Measured value remains too long ▶ Calibrate the measuring
unit in the low limit area. device in the delivery.
(Option: Coiler)
✗
410 Scanner sliver, max. level cntrl. B6

411 Controll. sliv. wght. under-compens.

Message type: Fault

stones are dull.


✗
412 Controll. sliv. wght. over-compens.

413 MPS coiler Q60

Option: Coiler SB
Message type: Fault

check individually.
ily.
✗
414 MPS coiler on Q60

Option: Coiler SB
Message type: Fault

Note
✗
415 Coiler motor max. r.p.m. reached M1

Option: Coiler SB
Message type: Fault
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 247

Production

1 Motor – coiler Speed too high ▶ Slightly lower the selec-
ted production, i.e. delivery
speed.
▶ Check/clean/tension slip of
the drive belt – motor M12.
▶ Configure the machine type.
✗
416 Coiler motor min. r.p.m. reached M1

Option: Coiler SB
Message type: Fault

1 Motor – coiler Speed too low ▶ Check the M12 motor.
▶ Configure the machine type.
✗
417 Error, card configuration (43.1)

Message type: Fault

1 Configuration The wrong type is configured ▶ Configure the machine type.
ine the configuration. Incorrect type of coiler selected ▶ Configure the type of coiler.
2 Drives Wrong reduction ratio ▶ Check belt
pulleys M12/M11.
(☞ Part 3, Page7)
tion.
✗
418 Nomin.val., ext. del., brkn. cable D301

Message type: Fault


1 Transducer D301 Connection interrupted ▶ Re-establish connection.
▶ Obtain the services of a ✓ ▶ Configure transducer D301
qualified electrician. in accordance with electrical
▶ Check current loop between documentation.
transducer D301 and mod-
ule A20. ✗ Continue with: 2
2 Configuration ✓ ▶ Configure the card delivery.

✗ ▶ Replace module A20.
419 MPS compression rollers card Q80

Message type: Fault

check individually.
ily.
✗
420 MPS compression rollers card on Q80

Message type: Fault

Note
«Q15». only «Q15».
✗
421 Cmpr. rol. motor reached max. speed M80

Message type: Fault
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 249

Production

1 Draft between second compact- Too low ▶ Enlarge draft (41.1).
ing roller and delivery roller
2 Delivery speed of the card Too high ▶ Reduce the delivery speed
of the card (10.1).
✗
422 Compr. roller motor speed too slow M80

Message type: Fault

1 Draft between second compact- Too high ▶ Lower draft (41.1).
ing roller and delivery roller
2 Creep speed Too low ▶ Increase creep speed
(41.1).
✗
423 Doffer motor has reached max. speed M11

Message type: Fault

1 Draft in delivery unit is too high Target rotational speed of the ▶ Lower draft in delivery unit.
doffer motor too high
2 Delivery speed Too high ▶ Reduce delivery speed.
✗
424 Doffer motor speed too slow M11

Message type: Fault


1 Draft in delivery unit is too low Target rotational speed of the ▶ Increase draft in the delivery
doffer motor too low unit.
2 Velocity in creep speed Too low ▶ In data screen 41.30, in line
increase the speed.
Delivery speed,
slow: 15 m/min**)
✗
425 Compression rollers blocked B87

Message type: Fault

Check whether motor cable is plugged in. Check belts.

check individually.
ily.
2 Creep speed Too low ▶ Increase creep speed
(41.1).
✗
426 Material transport,cylinder/delivery

Message type: Fault

doffer for grinding
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 251

Production

the delivery unit
tongue. doffer.
the web.
brakes the doffer.
cylinder/doffer.
clothing.
clearer roller
7 Delivery unit does not run with ✓ ▶ Check delivery unit for ease
sufficient ease of movement and jammed
material in the delivery area.
tion.


9 Doffer speed detection does not ✓ ▶ Adjust the proximity
function correctly switch for monitoring
the doffer speed.
Setting is correct. ▶ Replace proximity switch.
Proximity switch is correct. ▶ Check the wiring.
Wiring is correct. Continue with: 10
11 Causes are eliminated Recommissioning ▶ Clean the web bridge.
▶ In data screen 41.30, in the
line « Compensation fibre
tuft: » set the compensa-
tion.
▶ Adjust the sliver
(Option: Coiler)
▶ Adjust the web weight
in creep speed.
✗
427 Cylinder: Layer of material too high

438 Chamber wall of chute not mounted B45

Message type: Fault

1 Monitoring of the chute wall Chute wall removed. ▶ Install chute wall.
▶ Adjust the batt weight
Chute wall is installed. ▶ Check proximity switch.
▶ Adjust the proximity
switch of the chute wall.
▶ Check plug connection and
wiring.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 253

Production
439 Chute,pressure meas., broken cable, B23

Message type: Fault

1 Pressure sensor B23 in the chute No signal ▶ Cable break on the pressure
sensor, check wiring.
▶ Check connector in the
pressure sensor.
Wiring OK ▶ Check the pressure sensor
for function.
Function is OK ▶ Calibrate the pressure
sensor zero point.
Calibration executed Continue with: 2
✗
440 MPS chute drives Q42 Q43

Message type: Fault

check individually.
ily.
✗
441 MPS chute drives on Q42 Q43

Message type: Fault

Note
✗

442 Chute is empty B23

Message type: Fault

material density.
2 Switch on/switch off time of the Feed machine switches off too ▶ Increase the differential
feed late. pressure in the feed chan-
nel.
◁ Material will be fed in
earlier.
▶ Adjust the fill height
in the feed chute.
Differential pressure in the feed ▶ Clean hose and pressure
channel has been increased, port.
nevertheless there is no feed
▶ Check jumper for pressure
sensor
▶ Calibrate the pressure
sensor zero point.
3 Insufficient capacity of the feed Frequent production interrupts ▶ Rectify faults in the blow-
machine room.
There are still reserves available ▶ Increase the capacity of the
feed machine.
Capacity cannot be increased. ▶ Restrict the production of
the cards.
443 Aerofeed no material

444 Chute opening roller speed too low B44

Message type: Fault

1 Material A lap has formed. ▶ Removed material.
check individually.
ily.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 255

Production

2 Mechanical features ✗ Continue with: 3
3 Rotational speed – opening roller set too low ▶ Increase speed
in the card chute (☞ Part 3, Page2).
▶ Adjust the speed of
the opening roller.
4 Speed monitor Adjustment is not correct ▶ Set proximity switches.
▶ Check the adjustment
of the proximity switch. The value should be in the target Continue with: 5
(☞ Part 4, Page226) range
445 Chute opening roller blocked B44

446 Chute opening roller start-up speed B44

447 Chute opening roller overheated M42

Message type: Fault

1 Drive belts Drive belt is insufficiently ten- ▶ Tension drive belt.
sioned.
Drive belt is worn. ▶ Replace drive belt.
2 Material A lap has formed. ▶ Removed material.
check individually.
ily.
✗
451 Chut open. roller r.p.m. too high B44

Message type: Fault

1 Change pulleys Wrong combination is used ▶ Use the right combination
(☞ Part 3, Page2).
▶ Adjust the speed of
the opening roller.


2 Proximity switch outputs wrong signal ▶ Adjust the proximity
switch – opening roller
✗
452 Chute door open S40

Message type: Fault

1 Doors and covers Doors are open ▶ Close doors and covers.
Doors are closed ▶ Adjust the door
locking mechanism
453 MPS chute feed roll Q41

454 MPS chute feed roll on Q41

455 MPS cylinder/licker-in Q1 Q13

456 MPS cylinder/licker-in on Q1 Q13

457 Cylinder speed above 999 /min B1

Message type: Fault

1 Change pulleys Wrong combination is used ▶ Use the right combination
(☞ Part 3, Page3) (Op-
tion: Number of licker-ins
1).
▶ Use the right combination
(☞ Part 3, Page5) (Op-
tion: Number of licker-ins
3).
▶ Change the speed
of the cylinder.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 257

Production

verter.
▶ Configure the
✗
458 Cylinder proximity switch defective B1

Message type: Fault

1 Proximity switch Not set correctly ▶ Check the adjustment
of the proximity switch.
Set correctly Continue with: 2
459 Cylinder speed too high B1

460 Cylinder speed too low B1

Message type: Fault

check individually.
ily.
2 Cylinder Is blocked ▶ Remove carding elements
in the cylinder area.
▶ Determine whether the
cylinder can be turned by
hand. ▶ Check the cylinder clothing
for contamination and clean-
Turns freely ▶ Clean belt pulley.
▶ Adjust the cylinder belt ten-
sion. (☞ Part 3, Page39)
3 Setting procedure The tolerance is set too low. ▶ Configure the speed
monitor for the cylinder.


3 Setting procedure ✗
461 Cylinder below production speed B1

462 Cylinder does not start up B1

Message type: Fault

check individually.
ily.
463 Cylinder coasting, prox. sw.fault B1

Message type: Fault

3 Mains failure ✓ ▶ With the main switch
switched on, wait 15
minutes.
✗
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 259

Production
464 Cylinder fails to remain stationary B1

Message type: Fault

✗
465 Draft licker-in/cylinder too small

Message type: Fault

1 Draft – licker-in to cylinder Less than 1.15 ▶ Change the speed
of the cylinder.
✗
466 Licker-in proximity switch defect. B9

Message type: Fault

1 Proximity switch Not set correctly ▶ Adjust the proximity
switch for monitoring
the licker-in speed.
467 Licker-in rot. speed not reached B9

468 Licker-in blocked B9

469 Licker-in rotating speed too low B9

470 Congestion, flat cleaning B11

Message type: Fault
Production and drives, card flats and card flat cleaning are stopped. The cylinder continues to run.

1 Light barrier Is continuously illuminated ▶ Adjust the suction channel
monitor.
▶ Check LED.
Is never illuminated Continue with: 2
This fault occurs often even ▶ Extend the delay time.
though clogging is not really
▶ Set the delay time.
present.


2 Waste area Clogged ▶ Clean the suction channel.
Suction too weak Continue with: 3
3 Clogging – suction unit Insufficient airflow rate at the ▶ Remove clogging in the
suction point, although the suc- channels.
tion unit has enough suction.
✗
471 Flat alignment faulty B8

Message type: Fault

1 Toothed belt – flat drive Card flats run offset ▶ Slacken the belt and lock in
the toothed belt so that it is
▶ Check whether the card
aligned left and right.
flats run offset left and right.
▶ Tension the belt of the card
flats. (☞ Part 4, Page146)
Card flats run mechanically cor- ▶ Adjust the proximity
rect switches for monitoring
the card flats.
472 Flat standstill B2

Message type: Fault

1 Mechanical features Contamination in the area of the ▶ Check the deflection pulleys
card flats of the flat deflection unit.
Determine the cause for the
standstill
▶ If no apparent cause can be ▶ Clean the card flat heads.
identified, carefully drive the (☞ Part 4, Page27)
card flats a short distance in Loose or jammed card flats ▶ Correctly fasten card flats.
reverse.
▶ Install card flats.
▶ Drive the card flats in re- (☞ Part 4, Page85)
verse. (☞ Part 3, Page95)
2 Drive unit Slip clutch slips through, ▶ Increased torque increment-
although the mechanism of the ally and test drive.
card flat is not blocked.
▶ Adjust the torque of the
slip clutch on the card flats
drive. (☞ Part 4, Page147)
▶ Activate the card flats drive.
3 Lubrication Lubrication is used up. ▶ Inspect the lubricating
blocks of the card flats.
▶ Check lubrication of the
running surfaces.
switches for monitoring
the card flats.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 261

Production

4 Proximity switch Set correctly Continue with: 5
473 Low suction B12

Message type: Fault

1 Filter system Not running ▶ Place the filter system in
service again.
2 Vacuum pressure Vacuum correct ▶ Adjust the vacuum monitor-
▶ Adjust the vacuum pres-
sure for the card suction.
Insufficient vacuum pressure Continue with: 3
4 Piping Too small ▶ Enlarge pipe cross-section.
Too long
✗
474 Cylinder not stopped B1

Message type: Fault

1 Braking process Cylinder turns unbraked ▶ Check belt drive.
▶ Determine whether the cyl- ▶ Adjust the cylinder belt ten-
inder turns. sion. (☞ Part 3, Page39)
475 Cylinder speed not reached B1

476 Cylinder speed not reached B1


477 Configuration fixed flats X1.3 A31

Message type: Fault

1 Configuration The wrong card flats are con- ▶ Configure the type of card
figured flat. (☞ Part 4, Page197)
ine the configuration. ✗
478 Configuration fixed flats X1.3 A32

479 Licker-in lift.cyl.pos.not reached M29

Message type: Fault

1 Electric cylinder Adjustment is not correct ▶ Adjust the electric cylinder
for the mote knife on the
▶ Check the adjustment.
licker-in. (Option: Automatic
✗
480 Licker-in lift.cylinder.ref.positon M29

481 Licker-in lift.cylinder cable break D13

Option: Licker-in knife adjustment
Message type: Fault

1 Cable breakage Connection interrupted ▶ Install a cable connection
▶ Check the connection
between lift cylinder and ✗
module A20.
482 Cylinder motor overheated M1

Message type: Fault

check individually.
ily.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 263

Production

3 Motor damaged Motor consumes too much cur- ▶ Replace motor.
rent.
✗
483 Licker-in rotating speed too high B9

Message type: Fault

1 Option: Cylinder drive with belt Wrong ▶ Adjust the licker-in speed
pulley with belt pulley WE4. (Op-
tion: Licker-in drive with belt
Change pulleys pulley, Number of licker-ins
1) (☞ Part 3, Page32)
▶ Adjust the licker-in speed
with belt pulley WE4. (Op-
tion: Licker-in drive with belt
pulley, Number of licker-ins
3) (☞ Part 3, Page34)
switch for monitoring
the licker-in speed.
484 MPS, flats, drives, Q50 Q57 Q58

Message type: Fault

check individually.
ily.
✗

485 IGS-cl. proximity sw. position left B51

Message type: Fault

486 IGS-cl. proximity sw.position right B52

487 IGS-classic not in park position B52

488 MPS, flats, drives on, Q50,Q57,Q58

Message type: Fault

check individually.
ily.
✗
489 IGS-classic grindstone position S53

Message type: Fault

1 Electromagnet Voltage present. ▶ Replace the electromagnet.
▶ Check the voltage on the Electromagnet is defective ▶ Remove the electromagnet.
electromagnet. (☞ Part 4, Page95)
▶ Adjust grinding stone
after replacement of
the electromagnet.
✗
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 265

Production
490 MPS power supply 24 VDC F2

Message type: Fault

1 Motor protection switch Motor protection switch has Continue with: 2
tripped
▶ Check licker-in lifting cylin-
der
▶ Check IGS-Classic motor.
✗
▶ Check circulation fan in the
control cabinet.
check individually.
ily.
✗
491 MPS power supply 24 VDC on F2

Message type: Fault

Note
✗
492 MPS IGS-top grinding drive Q55

Message type: Fault

1 Grinding pressure Too high ▶ Reduce the grinding pres-
sure. (☞ Part 4, Page104)
▶ Check current consumption
(with grinding brush contact ▽ If excessive current draw
on the card flats clothing) continues, the mechanical
(☞ Part 4, Page102) basic setting must be in-
creased to 4.5...5.0.
Too low ▶ Increase the grinding pres-
▽ If the grinding pressure is
still insufficient, the mech-
anical basic setting must be
reduced from 3.5...3.0.


2 Motor protection switch Trips recurrently even if the drive ▶ Replace motor protection
check individually.
ily.
✗
493 MPS IGS-top grinding drive on Q55

Message type: Fault

Note
✗
494 IGS-classic motor fails to start M51

Message type: Fault

check individually.
ily.
rent.
4 Air pressure of the supply line insufficient ▶ Ensure the air pressure.
Air pressure of the supply
line: 7.0 – 8.0 bar
✗
495 IGS-top cable breakage, curr. meas. D55

Message type: Fault

13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 267

Production

1 A 20 (D95K) module defective ✗ ▶ Check current converter D
55, replace if necessary.
496 IGS-top grinding force too high

Message type: Fault

497 Malfunction suction licker-in S9

498 Flats clear.roller1,contactor forw. K56

Message type: Fault

verter.
▶ Configure the
✗
500 Chute f.roll FC parameter incorrect U41

Message type: Fault


verter.
▶ Configure the
✗
501 Chute f.roll FC,communicat.shutdown U41

502 Chute f.roll FC CAN node stat. inc. U41

Main fault: 500
503 Chute f.roll FC mot.overcurrent M41 U41

Message type: Fault

check individually.
ily.
2 Wrong wiring ✓ ▶ Check the wiring.
rent.
✗
504 Chute f.roll FC converter overload U41

508 Chute f.roll FC conv. earth fault U41

510 Chute f.roll FC phase fail.p.supply U41

13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 269

Production
511 Chut.f.roll FC interm.circ.overvolt.U41

512 Chu.f.roll FC interm.circ.undervolt.U41

513 Chute f.roll FC loading cont.faulty U41

514 Chute f.roll FC inter. phase output U41

515 Chute f.roll FC overheating, h.sink U41

520 Chute f.roll FC,fault,brake.transis.U41

521 Chute f.roll FC, ext.fault chain U41

522 Chute f.roll FC, ext.fault chain U41

527 Chute f.roll FC,fault,optional card U41

537 Chute f.roll FC conv.hardware fault U41

540 Chute f.roll FC, wrong conv. type U41

541 Chute f.roll FC, unrecognised fault U41

542 FC RSB, base block input U3 K21

Message type: Fault
Relay contact does not enable safety input of the converter.



verter.
▶ Configure the
✗
542 FC delivery, base block input U12 K26

542 Flats FC, safety input U50 K50

542 FC for cylinder, safety input U1 K1

542 FC licker-in, safety input U13 K13

542 FC coiler, safety input U60 K60

542 FC doffer, base block input U11 K26

542 FC delivery, base block input U12 K26

542 Crd. FC feed roll, safety input U10 K10

542 FC compress. rollers, saf.input U80 K80

542 Op.roller FC, safety input U42 K42

13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 271

Production
542 Chute f.roll FC, safety input U41 K41

550 Relubricate coiler

Option: Coiler RSB

Lubrication interval has been reached.
1. Clean lubricating points.

2. Relubricate RSB module.
Note
See operating manual for the RSB module.
551 Low battery A10


1 Battery discharged ▶ Replace the battery.
✗
560 EMERG-OFF button card, EMERG-OFF tst


ated
STOP.
CHWIA_00000058_001_01

button clockwise.
561 Lock doors, test EMERG-OFF circuit


562 R/S EMERG-OFF 2-way sw. EMRG-OFF tst


ated
STOP.
CHWIA_00000058_001_01

button clockwise.
2 Microswitch Locked ▶ Unlock bracket switch (mod-
ule RSB).
✗
563 R/S close covers, EMERG-OFF test

564 R/S EMRG-OFF sw.,tst EMERG-OFF crc.

565 Card ready for ramp-up


1 The web (sliver) is drawn in ✓ ▶ The machine can be
switched into high-gear
motion.
✗
566 Ext.EMER.-OFF,test EMER.-OFF circuit

Message type: Fault
Safety circuit is not closed at start-up. Check external emergency stop.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 273

Production

ated
STOP.
CHWIA_00000058_001_01

button clockwise.
567 Faulty interlock cover deliv. S81..S84

Message type: Fault

Due to high hazard potential unprotected compacting rollers: Monitoring of personal safety, even in
the event of cable break. Hazardous axis is monitored redundantly.
Relay, standstill monitor D302..4, has a fault.
The following sensor pairs must never supply signal "0" at the same time.
● B81,B4
● B83,B3
● B85,B86

1 Redundant safety circuit Both sensors return signal "0" ▶ Switch the main switch off,
and then switch it back.
qualified electrician. ✓ ▶ Check the wiring.
▶ Check the sensors. ✗ Continue with: 2
2 Cover locking mechanism Defective ▶ Check and repair cover
S81.S84 locking mechanism.
✗
568 S6 key sw., EMERG. SHUTD. circ. test

Message type: Fault
So that the controller can start up the key switch must not be in position II.

ted.
card flats)


1 Key switch ✗
570 RQM monitoring inactive !!!


1 RQM is switched off ▶ In data screen 22.2, in the
line « Monitoring: » switch
on the monitoring.
2 Machine Not yet at operating temperature ▶ Let the machine warm-up
and check sliver weight.
3 Option: Coiler RSB Wrong diameter is used ▶ Use correct sliver funnel.
Sliver funnel the RSB module.
4 Option: Coiler RSB ✓ ▶ Calibrate the scanning
rollers.
Scanning rollers Data screen 82.2
Note
the RSB module.
✗
571 Card quality data loss

573 RQM quality data loss

574 D95K Spectrogram inactive !!!


1 Wrong checksum of the program, ✓ ▶ Replace D95K module.
program destroyed (☞ Part 4, Page205)
service.
✗
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 275

Production
576 Prox. switch, carrier centre defect B16

Option: Coiler CBA
OR Coiler SB

✗
577 Drafting system open B3

Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler RSB

1 Locking mechanism – drafting Not engaged ▶ Close the drafting system
system load correctly.
✗
578 Feeler rollers relieved Y7

Option: Coiler RSB

1 Scanning rollers Unloaded ▶ Load the scanning roll.
▶ Load/offload
scanning rollers.
✗
579 Can storage full S42

Option: Coiler RSB

1 Can trolley Full ▶ Remove full can carriages.
▶ Slide in empty can car-
riages.
✗

580 Prox. switch, carrier centre defect B8

Option: Coiler CBA
OR Coiler SB
581 Sliver cutting delay

Option: Coiler CBA

1 Sequence – sliver cutting Sliver funnel lift at the wrong time ▶ Adjust the lift sliver
funnel monitor.
Wrong clamping duration ▶ Set the clamping duration.
cedure. ation. (☞ Part 3, Page125)
✗
596 Standard draft too small


stones are dull.
the feed trough.
(Minimum distance).
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 277

Production
597 Standard draft too large


the feed trough.
(Minimum distance).
598 Blowroom production too low

599 Thread sliver through disc rollers

604 IGS-classic solenoid cooling

Option: IGS-Classic

1 Lift magnet Too hot for additional cycle ▶ Wait until the lifting magnet
has cooled down.
✗
606 IGS-cl. max. grinding cycles reached

Option: IGS-Classic

1 Service life – cylinder clothing Cylinder clothing is worn out ▶ Replace the cylinder cloth-


1 Service life – cylinder clothing Cylinder clothing is not sharp, but ▶ Check wear of IGS grind
not yet worn out. stone. (☞ Part 4, Page88)
evaluation of the clothing. ▽ More than five time the
(☞ Part 4, Page39) grinding budget was con-
sumed. No more grind-
ing cycles are added. The
grinding stone must get re-
placed.
607 IGS-classic cycle incomplete B51

Option: IGS-Classic

1 Flat belt Insufficiently tensioned ▶ Slacken and tension
the flat belt (system
with tension screws).
✗
608 IGS-classic inactive (fault)

Option: IGS-Classic
609 IGS-top max. grinding cycles reached

Option: IGS-Top

1 Service life – card flat clothing Card flat clothing is worn out ▶ Prepare the machine for
▶ Determine whether the card
flat clothing must be ground.
(☞ Part 4, Page71) Card flat clothing is worn out ▶ Replace card flat clothing.
▶ Remove card flats.
The card flat clothing is not yet ▶ Changing the service life
worn out, merely incorrectly con- of the card flat clothing.
figured (☞ Part 4, Page100)
▶ Information concerning
grinding cycles.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 279

Production
610 IGS-top cycle aborted

Option: IGS-Top

1 Operator The machine has been stopped ▶ The grinding cycle will be
during the grinding cycle continued automatically after
machine start.
check individually.
ily.
✗
611 Licker-in lift. cylinder blocked M29


1 Electric cylinder Adjustment is not correct ▶ Adjust the electric cylinder
for the mote knife on the
▶ Check the adjustment.
licker-in. (Option: Automatic
✗
612 IGS-top grinding force too high

Option: IGS-Top


613 IGS-top grinding force too low

Option: IGS-Top
614 IGS-top inactive (fault)

Option: IGS-Top

1 Adjustment IGS-Top Position of the brush is not ad- ▶ Check the position of
justed. the grinding brush.
615 Wait until flat clean.monitor. act. B11


1 Light barrier Is continuously illuminated ▶ Adjust the suction channel
monitor.
▶ Check LED.
Is never illuminated Continue with: 2
This fault occurs often even ▶ Extend the delay time.
though clogging is not really
▶ Set the delay time.
present.
13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 281

Production

2 Waste area Clogged ▶ Clean the suction channel.
Suction too weak Continue with: 3
✗
616 Carding gap measurement, position 1


1 Measuring mode – card flat Active ▶ Procedure for
Carding gap measurement, posi- adjusting the card flats.
tion 1 (☞ Part 3, Page91)
The following status message
will be displayed: « Carding gap
measurement, position 1 »
✗




621 Meas. pos. approach, carding gap

Message type: Maintenance warning

1 Measuring mode – card flat Active ▶ Procedure for
Carding gap measurement, posi- adjusting the card flats.
tion 1 (☞ Part 3, Page91)
The following status message
will be displayed: « Carding gap
measurement, position 1 »
✗
622 Lt. barr., flat clean.unit, soiled, B11



1 Light barrier contaminated ✓ ▶ Light barrier in the waste
area of the card flats is con-
taminated.
✗
623 Select chute `pressure level 1` 41.4


✗


✗


✗


✗
627 Increase chute `batt weight` 41.4

13.05.2016 ENG 3 / 283

Production

✗
628 Reduce chute `batt weight` 41.4


✗
629 Reduce distance chamber wall chute


630 Increase distance chamber wall chute


material density.

Appendix
Material
Appendix
A Material
A.1 Work material
Card gauge
Properties
CHWIA_00003588_001_01

Properties
● Presses the slide shoes of the card flats onto the cylinder arch.
● Ideal quantity 2 units
CHWIA_00001900_001_01
13.05.2016 - ENG 3 / 285

Index
Index R
A Raw material
Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Autoleveller
Cotton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Switching on/switching off the Autolevel-
ler – sliver weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Man-made fibres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
C
S
Card flats
Carding gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 91 Sliver weight
Deflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Flat speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adjusting in creep speed . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Reference card flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Adjusting the position of the magnetic
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Carding gap Correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 90 Correcting the sliver weight on the
Determining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 RSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Specifying during pull-in . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Switching the Autoleveller on and off . . . 74
D
Suction unit
Determining the reference card Vacuum pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
W
F
Web weight
Feed plate Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Feed trough
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
I
IGS-Classic
Entering experiential values – cylinder
clothing maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
L
Licker-in
Adjusting the mote knife . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Guide plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Suction openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
M
Monitor – card sliver
Shut-off limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Card System C 70 V4
Maintenance Part 4
13.05.2016 ENG
Legal information
Klosterstrasse 20
8406 Winterthur
Switzerland

● Plant engineers
Number of pages 258

Card System Planning and organisation of

maintenance tasks
C 70 V4
Universal Operating
Manual Overview maintenance
Part 4
Maintenance Cleaning tasks by interval
Lubricating tasks by interval
Clothing maintenance
Repair
Commissioning without material
Decommissioning, re-
commissioning
13.05.2016 ENG 10997982

Contents
Contents
1.1 Intended purpose of part 4 "Maintenance" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 1
1.2 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 1
1.2.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 1
1.3 Initial situation for maintenance handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 1
2 Planning and organisation of maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 2

2.1 Objective of maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 2
2.2 Details on maintenance tasks and maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 2
2.3 Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 3
2.3.1 Specification of the grease quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 3
3 Overview maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 4
3.1 Overview of cleaning tasks for operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 4
3.2 Overview – cleaning tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 5
3.3 Overview of lubricating points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/7
3.3.1 Lubrication points of the card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 7
3.3.2 Lubricating points of the coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 8
3.4 Overview of inspection tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 9
4 Cleaning tasks by interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 11

4.2 Cleaning tasks every 165 h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 11
4.2.1 Check and clean the filter box. (Only with separate disposal of the
licker-in waste) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 11
4.2.2 Checking and cleaning all suction points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 12
4.2.3 Cleaning the cross-members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 12
4.2.4 Completely cleaning the machine left and right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 13
4.2.5 Cleaning the area of the calendar rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 13
4.2.6 Cleaning the guide tube in the rotary plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 13
4.2.7 Cleaning the guide tube in the rotary plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 14
4.3.1 Cleaning air separator top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 14
4.3.2 Clean card flat clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 15
4.3.3 Cleaning a doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 16
4.3.4 Cleaning the area of the deflectors of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 17
4.3.5 Cleaning the suction channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 18
4.3.6 Clean clearer roller "PW1" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 18

Contents

4.4.1 Remove honey dew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 20
4.5 Cleaning tasks every 2000 h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 20
4.5.1 Cleaning the feed channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 20
4.5.2 Cleaning and applying care agents to rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 21
4.5.3 Clean the cover trim below the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 21
4.5.3.1 Removing the cover trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 21
4.5.3.2 Installing the cover profile under the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 23
4.5.4 Clean suction channel below the disk rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 25
4.5.5 Cleaning carding profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 26
4.5.6 Clean cylinder interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 26
4.5.7 Cleaning the clearer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 26
4.5.8 Clean card flat heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 27
4.5.9 Clean belts and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 27
4.5.10 Cleaning the rotary plate and can plate drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 28
4.5.11 Cleaning the rotary plate and can plate drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 28
4.5.12 Clean frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 28
4.6 Cleaning tasks every 8000 h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 29
4.6.1 Clean condensation trap of pressure regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 29
5 Lubricating tasks by interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 30

5.2 Lubricating tasks every 2000 h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 30
5.2.1 Lubricate drafting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 30
5.2.2 Lubricate lubrication point 1 (bearings of the top roller and the top
delivery roller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 32
5.2.3 Lubricating points 2 and 3 (main and intermediate shaft, left-hand
side of machine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 33
5.2.4 Lubrication points 4 and 5 (main and intermediate shafts, right-hand
side of machine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 34
5.2.5 Lubrication at lubrication points 6 to 9 (bearings of all drafting
system cylinders and calendar shaft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 34
5.3 Lubricating tasks every 4000 h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 35
5.3.1 Lubricate cylinder bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 35
5.4 Lifetime-lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 35
5.4.1 Cyclo gearbox for drive of revolving coiler plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 35
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / II
Contents
6 Clothing maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 36
6.1 Service life, intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 36
6.1.1 Service life and intervals of the different clothings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 36
6.1.2 Nep stairway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 38
6.1.3 Visual inspection and evaluation of the clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 39
6.2 Licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 41
6.2.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 41
6.2.1.1 Remove licker-in unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 41
6.2.1.2 Remove the licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 43
6.2.1.3 Check feed trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 43
6.2.1.4 Remove the feed trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 44
6.2.1.5 Basic settings of the scale of the feed trough load . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 44
6.2.2 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 45
6.2.2.1 Adjusting the carding element in the area of the doffer . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 45
6.2.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 47
6.2.3.1 Installing the mote knife on the first licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 47
6.2.3.2 Mote knife adjustment (default setting to licker-in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 47
6.2.3.3 Feed trough installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 50
6.2.3.4 Installing the licker-in in the licker-in unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 51
6.2.3.5 Install licker-in unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 51
6.2.3.6 Adjusting the distance between the feed roller and the licker-in . . . . 4 / 52
6.2.4 Adjusting the licker-in to the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 53
6.3 Cylinder casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 54
6.3.1 Pre-carding zone and post-carding zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 54
6.3.1.1 Removing carding profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 54
6.3.1.2 Installing carding profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 56
6.3.1.3 Installing carding elements in the carding profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 58
6.3.1.4 Installing carding element (post-carding zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 58
6.3.1.5 Removing carding elements in the cylinder area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 58
6.3.1.6 Install carding elements in the cylinder area into the supports . . . . . 4 / 59
6.3.2 Installing the mote knife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 60
6.4 Cylinder clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 61
6.4.1 Preparing the cylinder for grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 62
6.4.1.1 Cleaning the cylinder wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 63
6.4.2 Fit on the cylinder again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 65
6.4.2.1 Installing auxiliary material for clothing change – doffer and
cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 65
6.4.2.2 Change cylinder clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 66
6.4.2.3 Checking the driving pins on the cylinder edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 67

Contents
6.5 Doffer clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 67

6.5.1 Changing doffer clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 67
6.5.2 Preparing the doffer for grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 68
6.5.3 Switch to operating status – « Grind doffer » . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 68
6.5.4 Resetting the counter after grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 68
6.5.5 Adapting the position of the lower delivery roller to the clothing
height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 69
6.6 Card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 70
6.6.1 Grinding or levelling card flat clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 71
6.6.2 Prepare the machine for grinding the card flats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 72
6.6.2.1 Activating the card flat for grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 73
6.6.2.2 Converting belt tension to grinding operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 74
6.6.2.3 Install the compensation device for grinding the card flats . . . . . . . . 4 / 75
6.6.3 Levelling card flats on the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 76
6.6.4 Grinding card flats on the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 77
6.6.5 Removing and installing card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 78
6.6.5.1 Adjusting the deflection elements for removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 78
6.6.5.2 Remove the retaining clips of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 78
6.6.5.3 Removing card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 80
6.6.5.4 Remove clothing strip from card flat rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 81
6.6.5.5 Dismantle and mounting clothing strip on card flat rod . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 81
6.6.5.6 Insert clothing strip in to card flat rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 82
6.6.5.7 Preparing deflector and cylinder arch for installation . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 83
6.6.5.8 Installing card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 84
6.6.5.9 Install the retaining clips of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 87
6.6.6 Maintenance of the card flat rods in the workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 87
6.7 IGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 88
6.7.1 IGS-Classic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 88
6.7.1.1 Check wear of IGS grind stone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 88
6.7.1.2 Replace the grind stone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 88
6.7.1.3 Removing the grinding device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 90
6.7.1.4 Installing the grinding device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 90
6.7.1.5 Remove guide carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 91
6.7.1.6 Removing the clamp profiles of the flat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 92
6.7.1.7 Installing the guide carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 93
6.7.1.8 Installing the clamping profile for the flat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 94
6.7.1.9 Slackening and tensioning the flat belt (system with tension
screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 95
6.7.1.10 Removing the electromagnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 95
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / IV
Contents
6.7.1.11 Installing the electromagnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 95

6.7.1.12 Check electromagnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 96
6.7.1.13 Adjust the grinding stone if the electromagnet was replaced. . . . . . . 4 / 96
6.7.1.14 Pressure reducing valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 98
6.7.1.15 IGS-Classic – executing a function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 98
6.7.2 IGS-TOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 99
6.7.2.1 Recommendations for levelling new card flat clothings . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 99
6.7.2.2 Service life and grinding cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 100
6.7.2.3 Changing the service life of the card flat clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 100
6.7.2.4 Adjusting the parallelity of the grinding brush to the card flats .... 4 / 101
6.7.2.5 Check current consumption (with grinding brush contact on the
card flats clothing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 102
6.7.2.6 Adjusting the grinding pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 103
6.7.2.7 Installing the grinding brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 104
6.7.2.8 Check the position of the grinding brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 105
6.8 Card flats cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 105
6.8.1 Removing the cleaning unit of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 105
6.8.2 Dismantle cleaning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 107
6.8.3 Re-clothing the clearer roller «PW1» and «PW2» . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 109
6.8.3.1 Fastening the clothing band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 110
6.8.3.2 Winding up the clothing band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 110
6.8.3.3 Attaching a second clamp piece (execute on both sides) ....... 4 / 112
6.8.3.4 Closure on the edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 113
6.8.4 Installing clearer roller «PW1» and gear motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 113
6.8.5 Adjusting the stripping blade for clearer roller "PW1" . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 114
6.8.6 Installing the clearer roller «PW2» and adjusting the stripping
blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 115
6.8.7 Installing the casing and motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 117
6.8.8 Install cleaning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 117
6.8.9 Adjusting the cleaning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 119
6.8.10 Adjusting the penetration depth «PW1» into the card flat
clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 120
6.8.11 Set the cleaning brush for the sliding surfaces of the card flats . . . . 4 / 120
6.9 Doffing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 121
6.9.1 Re-clothing the doffer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 121
4/V Card System C 70 V4

Contents
7 Repair ............................................... 4 / 122

7.1 Switching off the main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 122
7.2 Chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 122
7.2.1 Pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 122
7.2.1.1 Adjust the pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 122
7.2.2 Feed unit ...................................... 4 / 123
7.2.2.1 Remove the feed trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 123
7.2.2.2 Checking the feed trough before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 124
7.2.2.3 Feed trough installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 125
7.2.2.4 Adjust feed trough. (Minimum distance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 125
7.2.2.5 Adjusting the load of the feed trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 126
7.2.3 Feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 127
7.2.3.1 Removing feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 127
7.2.3.2 Install the feed roller in the card chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 129
7.2.4 Opening unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 131
7.2.4.1 Tightening the chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 131
7.2.4.2 Removing the opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 131
7.2.4.3 Installing the opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 133
7.2.4.4 Installing fallers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 135
7.2.5 Delivery rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 136
7.2.5.1 Removing the delivery rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 136
7.2.5.2 Installing the delivery rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 137
7.3 Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 138
7.3.1 Removing the tensioning band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 138
7.3.2 Installing the tensioning band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 138
7.3.3 Fasten cylinder covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 139
7.3.4 Procedure for installing the cylinder cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 140
7.3.5 Tongue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 141
7.3.5.1 Removing the tongue in the area of the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 141
7.3.5.2 Installing the tongue in the area of the cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 142
7.4 Card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 142
7.4.1 Additional instructions: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 142
7.4.2 Inspecting the lubricating blocks of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 143
7.4.3 Belts and deflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 143
7.4.3.1 Checking the deflection pulleys of the flat deflection unit . . . . . . . . 4 / 143
7.4.3.2 Replacing the belts of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 144
7.4.3.3 Tension belt of the card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 146
7.4.3.4 Removing the card flats deflection pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 146
7.4.4 Slip clutch adjustment on the card flats drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 147
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / VI
Contents
7.4.5 Entire card flats unit ............................... 4 / 147

7.4.5.1 Removing the card flats unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 147
7.4.5.2 Installing the carding flats unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 151
7.5 Doffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 152
7.5.1 Remove doffer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 152
7.5.2 Installing a doffer group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 154
7.6 Take-off unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 154
7.6.1 Replacing the stripping blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 154
7.6.2 Removing the rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 155
7.6.3 Install rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 156
7.6.4 Adjusting the rollers of the doffer device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 156
7.6.4.1 Adjusting the doffer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 157
7.6.4.2 Adjusting the upper delivery roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 157
7.6.4.3 Adjusting the lower delivery roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 158
7.6.4.4 Adjusting the clearer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 158
7.6.5 Adjusting the web bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 159
7.6.6 Adjusting the distance between the delivery rollers and cross
apron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 160
7.6.7 Adjusting the distance between the delivery rollers and cross
apron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 160
7.6.8 Replacing the gas pressure spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 161
7.7 Cross apron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 163
7.7.1 Adjusting the distance between cross apron and disk roller
support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 163
7.7.2 Pulley roll suction adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 164
7.7.3 Replacing the cross apron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 164
7.7.4 Installing and tensioning the cross aprons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 166
7.7.5 Adjusting the distance between the cross aprons . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 168
7.8 Disc rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 168
7.8.1 Adjusting the disk rollers ............................ 4 / 168
7.8.2 Setting the distance between the disk rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 169
7.8.3 Adjusting the pressure between the disk rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 170
7.8.4 Removing the distance measuring device in the delivery unit . . . . . 4 / 172
7.8.5 Installing the measuring device in the delivery unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 173
7.8.6 Adjusting the sliver funnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 173
7.8.7 Adjusting the blow-in device for the sliver ................. 4 / 175
4 / VII Card System C 70 V4

Contents
7.9 CBA coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 176

7.9.1 Lifting and moving the coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 176
7.9.2 Adjust calendar rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 176
7.9.3 Adjusting the distance to the calendar rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 177
7.9.4 Tensioning the belt for the calendar rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 178
7.10 SB coiler module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 178
7.10.1 Removing the clearer lips from the drafting system cylinders . . . . . 4 / 178
7.10.2 Installing clearer lips for drafting-system cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 180
7.10.3 Web bridge and sliver funnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 181
7.10.3.1 Adjust the magnets for the web bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 181
7.10.3.2 Installing the web bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 182
7.10.3.3 Removing the sliver funnel in the web bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 183
7.10.3.4 Installing sliver funnel in the web bridge .................. 4 / 183
7.10.3.5 Remove the web bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 184
7.10.3.6 Automatic material feed – functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 184
7.10.3.7 Adjusting the air flow to the automatic material feed . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 184
7.10.4 Drafting-system top roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 186
7.10.4.1 Checking the top rollers of the drafting system for wear . . . . . . . . 4 / 186
7.10.4.2 Grinding the top roller cots in the drafting system . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 187
7.10.4.3 Changing the top roller cots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 188
7.10.5 Setting the exhaust-air sliders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 190
7.11 Can changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 191
7.11.1 Remove changer trolley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 191
7.11.2 Replace and tighten the drive belt for the changer carriage . . . . . . 4 / 192
7.11.3 Adjusting the distance of the can plate to the cover plate . . . . . . . 4 / 193
8 Commissioning without material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 195

8.1 Operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 195
8.1.1 Setting the operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 195
8.1.2 Testing the operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 196
8.2 Configuring the control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 196
8.2.1 Setting the mode for configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 196
8.2.2 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 196
8.2.2.1 Configuring the machine equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 196
8.2.2.2 Configuring options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 199
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / VIII

Contents
8.2.3 General set-up values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 200

8.2.3.1 Configuring date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 200
8.2.3.2 Units, setting up operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 201
8.2.3.3 Adjusting the efficiency calculation and display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 202
8.2.3.4 Configuring languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 203
8.2.3.5 Configuring direct selection in the data screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 203
8.2.4 Setup values of the extended operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 203
8.2.4.1 Setting the switch off delay for doffer slow speed to maximum . . . . 4 / 203
8.3 Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 204
8.3.1 Perform a cold start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 204
8.3.2 Replace battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 204
8.3.3 Replace D95K module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 205
8.3.4 Setting the node address of the CAN I/O module CX408 ....... 4 / 206
8.3.4.1 LED 2 "Status" on module CX408 is flashing green (2 pulses) . . . . 4 / 206
8.3.4.2 LED 2 on module CX408 is illuminated orange or red . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 207
8.3.4.3 LED 2 "Status" on module CX408 during the run-up phase . . . . . . 4 / 208
8.3.4.4 Setting the node address of the CAN I/O module CX408 ....... 4 / 208
8.4 Safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 209
8.4.1 Function test – safety relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 209
8.4.1.1 Testing emergency stop buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 210
8.4.1.2 Testing safety relay "Watchdog" ....................... 4 / 210
8.4.1.3 Testing the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 210
8.4.1.4 Testing the key switch – flat service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 212
8.4.1.5 Test the door safeguard on the chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 212
8.4.1.6 Testing the door safeguard – drive side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 212
8.4.1.7 Testing the hood safeguard of the coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 212
8.5 Adjusting the door locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 213
8.5.1 Adjusting the door locking mechanism and the safety switch . . . . . 4 / 213
8.5.2 Adjust the hood safeguard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 215
4 / IX Card System C 70 V4
Contents
8.6 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 215

8.6.1 Checking and tightening toothed belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 215
8.6.2 Check motors ................................... 4 / 216
8.6.3 T1000 frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 216
8.6.3.1 Replacing the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 216
8.6.3.2 Regenerating the replacement frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 221
8.6.3.3 Read off the charge indicator and measure the intermediate
circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 221
8.6.3.4 Identifying the frequency converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 222
8.6.3.5 Assigning parameters – frequency converter T1000V . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 222
8.6.4 Pneumatic system ................................ 4 / 224
8.6.4.1 Setting the pressure regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 224
8.7 Adjusting sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 226
8.7.1 Chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 226
8.7.1.1 Adjusting the proximity switch – opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 226
8.7.1.2 Adjusting the proximity switch for the chute wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 227
8.7.1.3 Adjust the pressure monitoring signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 227
8.7.2 Licker-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 228
8.7.2.1 Adjusting the proximity switch for monitoring the licker-in
speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 228
8.7.2.2 Adjusting the measuring device in the feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 229
8.7.3 Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 230
8.7.3.1 Adjusting the proximity switch for cylinder speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 230
8.7.4 Card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 231
8.7.4.1 Adjusting the proximity switches for monitoring the card flats. . . . . 4 / 231
8.7.5 Delivery section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 234
8.7.5.1 Adjusting the proximity switch to monitor the doffer speed . . . . . . . 4 / 234
8.7.5.2 Adjusting the proximity switch – delivery speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 234
8.7.5.3 Set the monitoring for the delivery rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 236
8.7.5.4 Calibrating the measuring device in the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 237
8.7.5.5 Adjusting (positioning) the plunger in the plunger coil . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 239
8.7.5.6 Setting the sliver monitoring at the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 240
8.7.6 Suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 240
8.7.6.1 Adjusting the vacuum monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 240
8.8 Adjusting the electric cylinder for the mote knife on the licker-in .......... 4 / 241
8.9 Coiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 244
8.9.1 Put the coiler into operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 244
8.9.2 Operating the coiler in test mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 244
8.10 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 245
13.05.2016 ENG 4/X

Contents
9 Decommissioning, re-commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 246

9.1 Check list – temporary decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 246
9.2 Check list – commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 246
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 247
A Material .............................................. 4 / 247
A.1 Operating materials and supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 247
A.2 Work material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 248
B Filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 253
C Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 254
C.1 Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 254
C.2 Lifetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 254
C.3 Operating hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 254
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 / 258
4 / XI Card System C 70 V4
Intended purpose of part 4 "Maintenance"

1.1 Intended purpose of part 4 "Maintenance"
The servicing instructions have two intended uses:
● Maintenance
Maintenance is carried out to prevent malfunctions and avoid wear.
● Corrective maintenance
Corrective maintenance is carried out to restore operational readiness after a defect.
1.2 Contents
1.2.1 Maintenance
Contains all information regarding planning and carrying out maintenance.
From the content

● Planning and organisation of maintenance: Information for the work organisation
● Overview of maintenance tasks: All tasks grouped according to the type of work
● Maintenance tasks according to intervals: Detailed instructions for cleaning and lubricating
● Repair: Installation and removal, as well as basic settings
● Starting-up without material
Target group
● Plant engineers
1.3 Initial situation for maintenance handling instructions
The main switch must be switched off and locked.

The emergency stop button must be activated.
All doors and covers must be open.
13.05.2016 ENG 4/1

Planning and organisation of… Universal Operating Manual
Maintenance
2 Planning and organisation of maintenance tasks

2.1 Objective of maintenance
To keep the machine / installation in good condition with as little effort as possible.
To avoid and prevent faults.
2.2 Details on maintenance tasks and maintenance intervals
Necessity of maintenance
Regular maintenance is a requirement for long service life.
Regular maintenance avoids unnecessary downtime.
The advantage of well-organised maintenance

The maintenance tasks can be scheduled, this allows optimum deployment of personnel.
The disadvantage of poor organisation of maintenance

Faults often occur at awkward times, resulting in unnecessary downtimes.
Correct cleaning
▶ Cleaning must be done at the right time and at the right place.
Correct lubrication
▶ Lubrication must be done at the right time, at the right place, and with the right amount of the
right lubricant.
▶ Good equipment and precise work preparation are required to be able to correctly perform lub-
rication tasks.
▶ The machine / installation must be put in the appropriate condition for work preparation.
▶ Personnel must be familiar with all necessary details and possess the required knowledge.
Adapting maintenance measures to the operating conditions

The maintenance intervals must be adapted according to raw materials, contamination content,
ambient conditions, and capacity utilisation of the installation.
The intervals indicated should be regarded as guide values and should be optimised as needed.
Intervals in operation
Interval specification 165 operating hours 1 week
330 operating hours 2 weeks
660 operating hours 4 weeks
2000 operating hours 3 months
4000 operating hours 6 months
8000 operating hours 1 year
Intervals
There is one-time and cyclic interval information The one-time interval information refers to tasks
that are performed only once after commissioning. This can apply to the whole machine or to a
single component. For example, the tension of a newly mounted belt should be readjusted after a
specific runtime.

Lubricant
The cyclical intervals must be consistently repeated.
For example
After a runtime of 660 hours, all maintenance tasks due after 165, 330 and 660 hours must be carried out.
2.3 Lubricant
2.3.1 Specification of the grease quantities
Unit "strokes"
In this maintenance manual the quantity specifications are provided in the unit "strokes".
This refers to the number of strokes that must be executed on the grease gun.
Conversion into volume units

● 1 stroke = 0.3333 cm³
If the manual states that a specific lubricating point must be lubricated with 5 strokes of grease,
then 1.6665 cm³ of grease must be introduced at this point.
▶ Before lubricating, always check whether the grease gun is correctly adjusted.
13.05.2016 ENG 4/3

Overview maintenance Universal Operating Manual
Maintenance
3 Overview maintenance
3.1 Overview of cleaning tasks for operators
5
2
3 4
CHWIA_00004004_001_02
Interval Maintenance work Page

1 Whenever required Removing material deposited in the card chute 2 / Page40
2 Whenever required Removing blockages from around the feed roller 2 / Page39
3 Whenever required Cleaning the web bridge. 2 / Page40
4 every 4 -8 h Cleaning the delivery unit 2 / Page37
every 4 -8 h Cleaning the delivery rollers 2 / Page37
every 4 -8 h Cleaning the stripping blades 2 / Page38
5 Whenever required Option: Coiler SB 2 / Page43
Cleaning the clearer lips of the drafting-system cylinder

Whenever required Option: Coiler SB 2 / Page41
Cleaning the top rollers and the top delivery roller

Overview – cleaning tasks
3.2 Overview – cleaning tasks
21
20
11 12
11, 13, 28
10 14
22 17
13
23
40
CHWIA_00004005_001_01

10 every 165 h Option: Separate waste accumulation – licker-in 4 / Page11
Check and clean the filter box. (Only with separate disposal of
the licker-in waste)
11 every 165 h Checking and cleaning all suction points 4 / Page12
12 every 165 h Cleaning the cross-members 4 / Page12
13 every 165 h Completely cleaning the machine left and right 4 / Page13
14 every 165 h Option: Coiler CBA 4 / Page13
Cleaning the area of the calendar rollers

14 every 165 h Option: Coiler SB 4 / Page14
Cleaning the guide tube in the rotary plate


17 every 330 h Cleaning a doffer 4 / Page16
12 every 330 h Clean card flat clothing 4 / Page15
12 every 330 h Cleaning the area of the deflectors of the card flats 4 / Page17
20 every 330 h Cleaning the suction channel 4 / Page18
20 every 330 h Clean clearer roller "PW1" 4 / Page18
21 every 330 h Cleaning air separator top 4 / Page14
13 every 660 h Remove honey dew 4 / Page20
21 every 2000 h Cleaning the feed channel 4 / Page20
22 every 2000 h Clean the cover trim below the feed roller 4 / Page21
23 every 2000 h Clean suction channel below the disk rollers 4 / Page25
13 every 2000 h Cleaning carding profiles 4 / Page26
13 every 2000 h Clean cylinder interior 4 / Page26
17 every 2000 h Cleaning the clearer roller 4 / Page26
13.05.2016 ENG 4/5

Maintenance
21
20
11 12
11, 13, 28
10 14
22 17
13
23
40
CHWIA_00004005_001_01

12 every 2000 h Clean card flat heads 4 / Page27
28 every 2000 h Clean belts and chains 4 / Page27
Cleaning the rotary plate and can plate drives

every 2000 h Option: Coiler SB 4 / Page28

28 every 2000 h Cleaning and applying care agents to rubber seals 4 / Page21
40 every 8000 h Clean condensation trap of pressure regulator 4 / Page29
Electrician
40 every 2000 h Clean frequency converter 4 / Page28

Overview of lubricating points
3.3 Overview of lubricating points
3.3.1 Lubrication points of the card
CHWIA_00004007_001_02

1 every 4000 h Lubricate cylinder bearings 4 / Page35
NLGI 2/1 (EP2) ‒ Semi-synthetic grease 4 / Page247
13.05.2016 ENG 4/7

Maintenance
3.3.2 Lubricating points of the coiler
Option: Coiler SB
1
2-3
6-9
4-5
10
CHWIA_00002914_002_01

1 every 660 h Lubricate lubrication point 1 (bearings of the top roller and the 4 / Page32
top delivery roller)
NLGI 2/1 (S22) ‒ Mineral grease 4 / Page247
2-3 every 2000 h Lubricating points 2 and 3 (main and intermediate shaft, left- 4 / Page33
hand side of machine)
4-5 every 2000 h Lubrication points 4 and 5 (main and intermediate shafts, right- 4 / Page34
hand side of machine)
6-9 every 2000 h Lubrication at lubrication points 6 to 9 (bearings of all drafting 4 / Page34
system cylinders and calendar shaft)
10 Lifetime-lubricated Cyclo gearbox for drive of revolving coiler plate 4 / Page35

Overview of inspection tasks
3.4 Overview of inspection tasks
5
9 5
13, 17
10
4
11, 18
8,15
7 1
2, 3, 16
6 12, 14
CHWIA_00004006_001_01

8 every 500 h Option: Coiler SB 4 / Page186
Checking the top rollers of the drafting system for wear

1 every 2000 h Checking and tightening toothed belts 4 / Page215
2 every 2000 h Option: Number of licker-ins 1 3 / Page35
Tightening the belt

every 2000 h Option: Number of licker-ins 3 3 / Page35
Tightening the belt

3 every 2000 h Adjusting the cylinder belt tension 3 / Page39
4 every 2000 h Tightening the chain 4 / Page131
5 every 2000 h Inspecting the lubricating blocks of the card flats 4 / Page143
Tensioning toothed belt for change «H»

Tensioning the V-belt of the coiler drive

every 2000 h Option: Coiler SB 3 / Page130
Tensioning the V-belt of the coiler drive

OR Coiler SB
Tensioning the V-belt of the can plate drive

Adjust calendar rolls

9 every 2000 h Checking the deflection pulleys of the flat deflection unit 4 / Page143
10 every 4000 h Regenerating the replacement frequency converter 4 / Page221
13.05.2016 ENG 4/9

Maintenance
5
9 5
13, 17
10
4
11, 18
8,15
7 1
2, 3, 16
6 12, 14
CHWIA_00004006_001_01

11 every 4000 h Testing the operating unit 4 / Page196
12 every 4000 h Adjusting the distance between the cross aprons 4 / Page168
every 4000 h Option: Coiler 4 / Page166
OR Non-woven tape
Installing and tensioning the cross aprons

every 4000 h Option: Coiler 4 / Page164
OR Non-woven tape
Replacing the cross apron

13 every 8000 h Clean condensation trap of pressure regulator 4 / Page29
14 every 8000 h Replacing the stripping blades 4 / Page154
every 8000 h Replacing the gas pressure spring 4 / Page161
Adjust the hood safeguard

every 16000 h Check motors 4 / Page216
16 every 16000 h Check motors 4 / Page216
17 every 32000 h Replacing the frequency converter 4 / Page216
18 Safety circuit repair Function test – safety relay 4 / Page209
Switching off the main switch
4 Cleaning tasks by interval

The following cleaning tasks must only be executed when the machine is standing still and is safe-
guarded.
DANGER
4.2 Cleaning tasks every 165 h
4.2.1 Check and clean the filter box. (Only with separate disposal of the licker-in
waste)
Option: Separate waste accumulation – licker-in
1 2
CHWIA_00001525_001_01
▶ Pull the filter box (1) out of the machine and clean it with the vacuum cleaner.
Note
Remove any accumulated material (3) in the area of the filter cloth (2). For this, the filter
box has to be pulled out of the machine.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 11
Cleaning tasks by interval Universal Operating Manual
Maintenance
4.2.2 Checking and cleaning all suction points
Work material
Brush (☞ Part 4, Page248)
▶ Remove clogging and clean contaminated

suction tube with the brush (1).
CHWIA_00003495_001_01
4.2.3 Cleaning the cross-members
1 1
CHWIA_00001706_001_01
▶ Remove material that may have accumulated on the cross-members (1) beneath the card-flat
deflectors.
Cleaning tasks every 165 h
4.2.4 Completely cleaning the machine left and right
1. General machine cleaning.

2. Clean IGS-Classic
3. Clean the IGS-Top.
4. Clean the licker-in drive.
5. Clean cylinder drive.
6. Clean doffer and delivery drive.
7. Clean cross apron.
8. Clean the space under the doffer.
CHWIA_00003502_001_01
4.2.5 Cleaning the area of the calendar rollers
Option: Coiler CBA
1. Use the vacuum cleaner to remove contamin-

ation.
2. Remove any jammed material using the roller
picker. Do not use sharp auxiliary materials.
CHWIA_00002519_001_01
4.2.6 Cleaning the guide tube in the rotary plate
Option: Coiler CBA
Work material
Cleaning brush
For cleaning the guide tube in the
revolving plate of the coiler.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 13
Maintenance
▶ If there is clogging in the guide tube of the

rotary plate, remove it with the provided
clearer brush (1).
CHWIA_00002490_001_01
4.2.7 Cleaning the guide tube in the rotary plate
Option: Coiler SB
Work material
Cleaning brush
For cleaning the guide tube in the
revolving plate of the coiler.
▶ If there is clogging in the guide tube of the

rotary plate, remove it with the provided
clearer brush (1).
CHWIA_00002668_001_01
4.3.1 Cleaning air separator top
Work material
Brush (☞ Part 4, Page248)
1. Stop the material feed of upstream feed sys-

tem.
2. « Key for emptying the line » activate. 1
3. Open the window (1) .
4. Clean the interior with the brush.
CHWIA_00004397_001_01
4.3.2 Clean card flat clothing
Work material
Hand scraper (☞ Part 4, Page249)
Vacuum cleaner
Not included in the standard scope
of delivery!
3
1
CHWIA_00004396_001_01
1. Open the cover (1) .
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 15
Maintenance
3
1
CHWIA_00004396_001_01
2. Clean the card flat clothings (3) with the vacuum cleaner.
3. Remove the jammed material (2) betwin the card flat rods (3) .
4.3.3 Cleaning a doffer
Work material
CAUTION
Hand injuries due to rotating doffer
▶ Do not reach into the area of the rotating doffer.
▶ Only trained personnel are permitted to clean the doffer.
CHWIA_00003149_001_01
1. Check the doffer for contamination and clean the doffer clothing in accordance with the instruc-
tions, depending on the degree of contamination.
2. Switch off the doffer.
3. Remove the suction tube above the doffer.
4. Remove the cover plate (1).
5. Switch the doffer to slow speed.
6. Clean the doffer clothing in sections by hand with the hand scraper (2) starting on the side.
◁ Carefully push down with hand scraper (2) for a few seconds.
Note
Cleaning is completed during a few turns of the doffer.
4.3.4 Cleaning the area of the deflectors of the card flats
▶ Inspect the entire area of the card flats return

points for soiling and clean, if necessary.
CHWIA_00001850_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 17
Maintenance
4.3.5 Cleaning the suction channel
5
1
2
4
CHWIA_00004129_001_01
1. Remove the screw (1).

2. Pull back the bolt (2) and open the cover (B).
3. Swing the cover (B) upward beyond the bore (3).
4. Introduce a screwdriver into the bore (3).
◁ The cover remains open (B).
5. Clean the interior.
◁ Dust, deposits and material residues are removed.
6. Clean the reflector (5) with a damp cloth.
◁ Honey dew is eliminated.
7. Close the cover (B).
8. Lock the cover (B) with the screw (2) and the screw (1).
4.3.6 Clean clearer roller "PW1"
Work material
Vacuum cleaner
of delivery!
1. Open cover (A)

2. Scrape out or suction out the accessible 1
clothing (1).
WARNING
A
Injury due to moving machine parts.
▶ Special caution is required for tasks
with the main switch switched on. Be
aware of the operating status at all
times.
3. Place the main switch on "1".

CHWIA_00004128_001_01
Turning the clearer roller

7. In the line « Run drive tests: » select the « Yes » value.
8. Activate and hold the START button until the clearer roller has turned 1/3 turn.
◁ The clothing that still must be cleaned becomes accessible.
9. Scrape out (1) or suction out the clothing in the accessible area.
◁ Clothing is clean and free of dust and fibre.
10. Repeat the procedure starting at works 8 until the entire perimeter of the clearer roller is
cleaned.
12. Close cover (A).
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 19
Maintenance
4.4.1 Remove honey dew
CHWIA_00003998_001_02
▶ Use lukewarm water and a cloth to clean all parts that come into contact with cotton.
4.5.1 Cleaning the feed channel
1. Ensure that surfaces and transitions are ab-

solutely free of fibre adhesions.
2. The transitions (2) must not hinder the flow of
material.
O.K
2 1
CHWIA_00003332_001_01
4.5.2 Cleaning and applying care agents to rubber seals
1. Clean all rubber seals with a damp cloth.

2. Brush glycerine onto the rubber seals.
◁ This ensures that they remain ductile and will provide a better seal.
4.5.3 Clean the cover trim below the feed roller
CHWIA_00001331_001_01
1. Remove the cover trim. (☞ Part 4, Page21)

2. Clean the cover profile (1) with a cloth and lukewarm water.
Note
The cover profile cleaning interval can be extended should it remain clean after the pre-
scribed interval has expired.
4.5.3.1 Removing the cover trim
Work material
Handles (☞ Part 4, Page250)
Use for removing and installing the
cover profile below the feed roller of
the licker-in.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 21
Maintenance
Remove the feed plate
2
3
1
CHWIA_00001332_001_01
1. Remove feed plate (3).

2. Mark the position (1) of the holder (2).
3. Remove the holder (2).
Note
When installing the holder (2) realign to the mark.
a)
X max
0
90
2
1
3
5
70 +
40 c)
b)
3 3
CHWIA_00001329_001_01
4. Place the mote knives (5) on the licker-in in the lowest position. (Largest discharge opening).
5. Insert the handles (1) in the recesses on both sides of the cover profile (3) and turn through 90
degrees in an anticlockwise direction.
Note
The handles may sustain damage if they are rotated in the wrong direction.
6. Remove screws (2) from both sides.

7. Slide cover trim (3) in parallel in the direction of the licker-ins until the pins (4) no longer guide
the side plates.
8. Remove the cover trim (3).
4.5.3.2 Installing the cover profile under the feed roller
Work material
Handles (☞ Part 4, Page250)
Use for removing and installing the
cover profile below the feed roller of
the licker-in.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 23
Maintenance
a) b)
4
1
3
3
0
90
c) d)
4
2
3 1
3
CHWIA_00001330_001_01
1. The complete licker-in unit is removed. (☞ Part 4, Page41)

2. Insert the handles (1) in the recesses on both sides of the cover profile (3) and turn through 90
degrees in an anticlockwise direction.
Note
The handles may sustain damage if they are rotated in the wrong direction.
3. a): Slide cover trim (3) in parallel in the direction of the licker-ins.
4. b): Push the cover trim (3) upwards and higher than the pins (4).
5. c): Pull back the cover trim (3) in this position until the pins (4) come to rest on both sides in the
recesses.
6. d): Fit screws (2).
7. Press the ends of the cover profile (3) downward.
8. Carefully tighten the screws (2) firmly. (Max 4 Nm).
Installing the feed plate
2
3
1
CHWIA_00001332_001_01
9. Install bracket (2).

Note
Pay attention to the marking (1) designated during the removal process.
10. Install the feed plate (3).
4.5.4 Clean suction channel below the disk rollers
1. Remove the suction channel cover on the

left-hand side of the machine.
2. Use a torch to check the suction channel for
leftover material.
◁ Clean if necessary.
CHWIA_00002136_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 25
Maintenance
4.5.5 Cleaning carding profiles
1. Remove carding profiles.

2. Remove carding profiles. (☞ Part 4, Page54)
▶ Check and clean the clothing strips (1).

Note
The carding profiles (2) must not be
swapped out. This means that each
carding profile must be re-installed at 1
2
the location where it was removed. In
this case readjustment is not neces-
sary.
CHWIA_00001688_001_01
4.5.6 Clean cylinder interior
▶ Use a vacuum cleaner to the cleaning the

interior space of the cylinder.
CHWIA_00001689_001_01
4.5.7 Cleaning the clearer roller
▶ Remove any possible lap from around the

clearer roller.
Note STOP
Use compressed air.
CHWIA_00002021_001_01
4.5.8 Clean card flat heads
1. Check for contamination and clean if neces-

sary.
STOP
2. Use a vacuum cleaner, dry cloths or similar
items for cleaning.
Note
Do not ever use a cleaning agent or a
lubricant on the contact surfaces of the
card flats heads.
CHWIA_00001849_001_01
4.5.9 Clean belts and chains
3m
m
CHWIA_00003509_001_01
1. Clean the belts and chains.

2. Check the belt tension.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 27
Maintenance
4.5.10 Cleaning the rotary plate and can plate drives
Option: Coiler CBA
1. Remove contamination using a vacuum

cleaner.
picker.
CHWIA_00002527_001_01
4.5.11 Cleaning the rotary plate and can plate drives
Option: Coiler SB
1. Remove contamination using a vacuum

cleaner.
picker.
CHWIA_00002681_001_01
4.5.12 Clean frequency converter
Personnel
Plant electricians
▶ Clean the housing with the vacuum cleaner.
4.6.1 Clean condensation trap of pressure regulator
Removing the condensation trap

WARNING
Eye injury due to explosive escape of compressed air
▶ Wear eye protection.
▶ Ensure that the compressed air flows out in a controlled manner.
1. Close main valve.

◁ Compressed air supply is cut off.
2. Turn the condensation trap (6) in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
Note
Do not lose the sealing ring for the
removed condensation trap.
CHWIA_00004392_004_01
3. Clean the condensation trap (6) with water, soapy water or similar neutral cleansing agents.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 29
Lubricating tasks by interval Universal Operating Manual
Maintenance
5 Lubricating tasks by interval

The following lubricating tasks must only be executed when the machine is standing still and is
safeguarded.
DANGER
5.2 Lubricating tasks every 2000 h
5.2.1 Lubricate drafting system
Option: Coiler SB
Work material
Lubricating pump
2.2
2.3
1
Note
Unauthorized modifications or alterations to the lubricating system can lead to changes con-
cerning the distribution of grease and the bearings. For this reason, do not switch the lubrica-
tion hoses or connection points during maintenance work.
Ensure cleanliness and caution for all tasks performed on the lubricating system. Clean the
lubrication points prior to and following the lubrication process. The lubrication tool has to
function correctly.
The lubrication schedule is displayed in the machine and in the operating manual. If these
diagrams differ, the one inside the machine applies.
1. Open the hood.

Note
The SB module 2 has to be lubricated while standing still.
2. Tilt the weighting arm away from the drafting system.

3. Carefully clean the lubricating nipples before lubricating.
Lubricating tasks every 2000 h
CHWIA_00002628_001_01
▶ Use only the prescribed lubrication tool and the grease gun with the lubrication attachment for
conical nipples.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 31
Maintenance
5.2.2 Lubricate lubrication point 1 (bearings of the top roller and the top delivery
roller)
Option: Coiler SB
Work material
Lubricating pump
2.2 3 4
For lubrication of the drafting sys-
tem.
1 2.2 3 4
WARNING
Bearing damage or gear unit damage due to the wrong quantity of lubricant
▶ Pay attention to the per-stroke delivery of the lubricating pump.
▶ Always use the same lubricating pump.
▶ Use the prescribed quantity.
Note
The lubricants and lubrication intervals (expressed in operating hours (h) are indicated in the
lubrication schedule. Use only the lubricants prescribed for the purpose. The lubrication inter-
vals indicated on the lubrication schedule are minimum requirements / recommendations.
Note
The lubrication schedule is displayed in the machine and in the operating manual. If these
lubrication schedules differ, the one inside the machine applies.
1. Open the hood.

2. Tilt the weighting arm (20) away from the drafting system.
3. Remove the top rollers and the top delivery roller.
4. Remove the top rollers and the top delivery roller. (☞ Part 2, Page41)
1. Remove the respective bearings (3) and (4) 20

from the journals of the top rollers (5) and the
top delivery roller (6).
2. Use an appropriate solvent for cleaning 5
the bearings and the journals prior to
re-lubrication.
Note 3
If these parts are not cleaned prior to
lubrication, a greater amount of dirt
and dust in the drafting system can be 5 4
expected.
6 CHWIA_00002761_001_01
3. At all lubrication points (1), lubricate the bear-
ings of all top rollers (5) and of the top deliv-
ery roller (6) in succession.
4. To lubricate, use only the prescribed lubrication tool, the grease gun (1) with M10x1 lubricating
head (2.2).
Work material
Top roller and delivery roller bearings
NLGI 2/1 (S22) ‒ Mineral grease ≈ 0.8 gr.
5. With the grease gun (4) inject 0.8 g of fresh grease into the bearings (1) and (3).
Note
0.8 g of grease corresponds to one piston stroke of the single-hand grease gun (included
among the accessories supplied).
6. Slide the bearings back onto the journals.
5.2.3 Lubricating points 2 and 3 (main and intermediate shaft, left-hand side of
machine)
Option: Coiler SB
1. Lubricate the main shaft on the left-hand side

of the machine at lubrication point (2).
Lubrication 2 - 9
NLGI 2/1 (S22) ‒ Mineral Lubricate until 26
grease grease escapes
from the ventilation
bores of the
lubrication points.
2. Supply lubricant at lubricating nipple (25)

located behind the toothed-belt pulley (Z53).
3. Lubricate the intermediate shaft on the left-
hand side of the machine at lubrication point
(3). 25
4. Supply lubricant at lubricating nipple (26) SB-M 2 412
CHWIA_00002640_001_01
located behind the toothed-belt pulley (W4).
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 33
Maintenance
5.2.4 Lubrication points 4 and 5 (main and intermediate shafts, right-hand side of
machine)
Option: Coiler SB
1. Lubricate the main shaft on the right-hand

side of the machine at lubrication point (4).
Lubrication 2 - 9
NLGI 2/1 (S22) ‒ Mineral Lubricate until
from the ventilation 28
bores of the
lubrication points.
2. Supply lubricant at lubricating nipple (27) 27

located behind the change gear (Nw1) and
the toothed belt pulley (Z38).
3. Lubricate the intermediate shaft on the right-
hand side of the machine at lubrication point
(5)...
SB-M 2 417
CHWIA_00002642_001_01
4. Supply lubricant at lubricating nipple (27)
located behind the change gear (Nw2) and
the toothed belt pulley (Z34).
5.2.5 Lubrication at lubrication points 6 to 9 (bearings of all drafting system cylin-

ders and calendar shaft)
Option: Coiler SB
1. Lubricate the left- and right-hand cylinder

bearings for the back cylinder at the lubric-
ation points (6).
Lubrication 2 - 9
NLGI 2/1 (S22) ‒ Mineral Lubricate until
from the ventilation
bores of the
lubrication points. 29
2. Supply lubricant at the lubricating nipples 30
(29).
31
bearings for the middle cylinder at lubrication
points (7). 32
SB-M 2 411a
CHWIA_00002638_001_01
4. Supply lubricant at the lubricating nipples
(30).
bearings for the delivery cylinder at lubrica-
tion point (8).
(31).

bearings for the calendar shaft at lubrication
points (9).
(32).
5.3 Lubricating tasks every 4000 h
5.3.1 Lubricate cylinder bearings
▶ Lubricate the bearings on both sides of the

machine.
Lubricating nipple – cylinder
NLGI 2/1 (EP2) ≈ 3 strokes
‒ Semi-synthetic grease
CHWIA_00001674_001_01
5.4 Lifetime-lubrication
5.4.1 Cyclo gearbox for drive of revolving coiler plate
Note
This Cyclo gearbox is lifetime lubricated according to manufacturer specifications.
1. Neither open nor lubricate the Cyclo gearbox.

2. The gearboxes have lifetime lubrication (service life).
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 35
Clothing maintenance Universal Operating Manual
Maintenance
6 Clothing maintenance
6.1 Service life, intervals
6.1.1 Service life and intervals of the different clothings
Service life for the clothings with cotton

Guideline of the clothing manufacturer Graf
Q
Yarn quality (Q)
Time (T)
T
Maintenance cycle 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
0t 130 t 240 t 340 t 430 t 500 t
50 – 180 Ne
0t 210 t 390 t 550 t 700 t 800 t
20 – 50 Ne
Carded ring-spun yarn 0t 250 t 460 t 650 t 820 t 950 t
Carded rotor yarn 0t 280 t 540 t 760 t 950 t 1,100 t
Level after
Card flats run in Grind Grind Grind Grind Check
≤20 t
Level after Automatic sharpening while production – IGS-Top
Card flats
run in At end of service live, check clothing. Service live can be Check
With IGS-Top
≤20 t extended up to five times.
Automatic sharpening while production – IGS-Classic
Cylinder Level At end of service live, check clothing and grindstone. Check
Service live can be extended up to five times.
Doffer Level Grind Grind Grind Grind Replace
Carding element – feed Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace
Carding element – deliv-
Replace
ery
1 Licker-in
Replace Replace
with metal clothing
2. + 3. Licker-in Replace
Carding element
Replace
on the licker-in
1 Licker-in Replace
With spiked roller 2,200 t
Flat cleaning Check Check
Replace
Doffer roller
2,200 t
As a rule, newly pulled-on clothings are not ground.
Service life, intervals
Service life for the clothings with man-made fibres

Guideline of the clothing manufacturer Graf
Q
Yarn quality (Q)
Time (T)
T
Maintenance cycle 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Ring-spun yarn and rotor
0t 280 t 540 t 760 t 950 t 1,100 t
yarn
Fibres with special treat-
0t 130 t 240 t 340 t 430 t 500 t
ment
Level after
Card flats run in Grind Grind Grind Grind Replace
≤20 t
Level after Automatic sharpening while production – IGS-Top
Card flats
run in At end of service live, check clothing. Service live can be Replace
With IGS-Top
≤20 t extended up to five times.
Automatic sharpening while production – IGS-Classic
Cylinder Level At end of service live, check clothing and grindstone. Replace
Service live can be extended up to five times.
Doffer Level Grind Grind Grind Grind Replace
Carding element – feed Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace
Carding element – deliv-
Replace
ery
1 Licker-in
Replace Replace
with metal clothing
2. + 3. Licker-in Replace
Carding element
Replace
on the licker-in
1 Licker-in Replace
With spiked roller 2,200 t
Replace
Flat cleaning
1,100 t
Replace
Doffer roller
2,200 t
The service life of the cylinder clothing cannot be precisely defined. It is highly dependent on the
processed material, the quality requirement and the maintenance.
The service life of the doffer clothing can be extended beyond that of the cylinder clothing.
As a rule, the doffer is only ground when it loses the web or if faults are observed at fibre transfer.
If there are fibres with special treatment, the service life of the carding elements is reduced.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 37
Maintenance
6.1.2 Nep stairway
In addition to the guideline provided by the clothing manufacturer, the nep stairway is an aid for
finding the right grinding interval.
3
2 2 2 2
7
1 8
CHWIA_00003114_001_01
1 Determine interval 5 Maximum admissible number of neps

2 Part-production 6 Neps
3 Minimum number of neps 7 Production
4 Defined number of neps when grinding 8 Replace clothing
must be carried out
The nep count that is authoritative for regrinding should be under the maximum value that is accep-
ted by the spinning mill.
The grinding interval should never be triggered by one counting! The optimal grinding interval must
be determined by multiple countings extending over a longer period of time.
Particularly with small neps, the number of neps found in the card sliver do not always carry
through to the yarn.
It is thus necessary to include the neps in the yarn in an evaluation.
The nep countings in the sliver must always be executed according to the same method.
This is the only way that values from multiple countings can be compared.
Counting by hand, as well as visual measurement on the web are not suitable, because the results
are influenced by the person and the person's condition.
Service life, intervals
6.1.3 Visual inspection and evaluation of the clothing
Note
The clothings of the cylinder and the card flats should be ground as long as the number of
neps remains in the upper tolerance range.
▶ Evaluate the clothing tips with a clothing

magnifying glass (1) .
Used clothing magnifying glass with 30-50x magni-
fication.
CHWIA_00004389_001_01
● Correctly ground tooth

The example shows a correctly ground tooth
with sharp carding edge, good tooth shape
and small visible grinding flutes on the tooth
surface.
▶ The clothing is functioning optimally.
CHWIA_00004388_001_01
● Carding edge is no longer recognizable

Instead of a carding edge a slightly shiny
radius can be detected.
▶ Only grind the cylinder clothing if an IGS-
Classic is not available.
▶ Grind card flats on the machine.
CHWIA_00004388_002_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 39
Maintenance
● Worn tooth tip only partially ground

The radius of the used tooth tip has only
been partially ground off. A carding edge is
not present.
The fine grinding flutes do not extend to the
carding edge, consequently the shiny radius
is still visible.
▶ Continue to grind the cylinder clothing for
a short time.
CHWIA_00004388_003_01
● Tooth tip with brow

▶ Always avoid brows.
▽ Possible causes: The grinding roller
was too forcefully advanced against
the toothed tips or the grinding
stones are dull.
CHWIA_00004388_004_01
● Edge on the side is worn, with a radius

▶ The wire must be replaced.
CHWIA_00004388_005_01
● Notch on the body of tooth

caused by a crash.
▶ Check card flats clothing.
CHWIA_00004388_006_01
Licker-in
● Notch on the top of tooth

cause of wear due to fibers.
CHWIA_00004388_007_01
6.2 Licker-in
6.2.1 Removal
6.2.1.1 Remove licker-in unit
Work material
Guide rails (☞ Part 4, Page249)
Are required for removal and install-
ation of the licker-in group.
Hydraulic pump
Is required for removal and installa-
tion of the licker-in and doffer group.
Transport trolley
For transporting the licker-in and the
doffer group. A work platform can
be produced using the additional
support structures.
Note
The licker-in unit is pushed onto a provided frame as an entire unit and thus transported into
the workshop.
When removing the licker-in unit pay particular attention to the connected motors and
sensors. The cables are fitted with plugs and are easy to disconnect.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 41
Maintenance
Preparing for removal of the licker-in unit
4 2 1
5 6 7 8 4 9 10 11 12 13
CHWIA_00000923_001_01
1. Disconnect all connections to the suction tubes (1) and detach the blow in device.
2. Disconnect the plugs for the licker-in motor, for the measuring device at the feed trough and for
the proximity switch at the licker-in.
3. Set down the cables so that they are not damaged when moving out the licker-in unit.
4. Remove the feed roller / delivery roller toothed belt of the card chute.
5. Unhinge and remove the batt feed channel between the card chute and the card.
6. Install the provided yellow rails (8) on the inside of the chute.
7. Position the transport system (5) behind the card chute (7) align to the rail height (8) on the
inside of the card chute and secure at (6).
8. Position the hydraulic lifter (4) precisely under the support (3).
Remove licker-in unit

9. Extend the hydraulic lifter (4) until it is several millimetres under the support (3).
10. Carefully turn nuts (10) anticlockwise on both sides.
◁ In this way, the licker-in unit (2) swings down until the support (3) lies on the hydraulic lift
(4).
11. Remove the dowel screws (9) and swing away the spindles.
12. Using the hydraulic lift, carefully swing down the licker-in unit until both transport rollers rest on
the machine frame.
13. Remove the lock bolts (13) from the holes.
14. Carefully push the licker-in unit onto the transport system and secure it.
Licker-in
6.2.1.2 Remove the licker-in
Work material
Lifting device, rollers and licker-
in(s) (☞ Part 4, Page250)
1. The complete licker-in unit is removed. 1

2. Lift the licker-in (3) out of the assembly using
a lifting device (1) and the straps (2). 2
3 CHWIA_00001503_001_01
6.2.1.3 Check feed trough
1. The complete licker-in unit is removed.

(☞ Part 4, Page41) 4
5
3. Remove clamping levers (5) and the guide
bushes. 3
4. Open up feed trough (3). 11
5. For the purpose of safety, insert a wooden
wedge (11) between the feed trough and the
feed roller.
6. Visually inspect the clamping edge.
Minor damage
▶ Repair minor damage.
Broken or deformed clamping edge CHWIA_00001390_001_01

▶ Replace the feed trough.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 43
Maintenance
6.2.1.4 Remove the feed trough
▶ Remove the licker-in unit. (☞ Part 4, Page41)
1. To protect the licker-in (1) insert some thin

sheet metal (2) between feed roller (1) and 6
licker-in (11). 10
Hint 4
Carry out all work on both sides
5 11
3
2. Undo screw (4). 1
◁ In this way, the clamping lever (5) is used 2
to relieve the initial tension of torsion
rods (10) in feed trough (3).
3. Remove torsion rods (10).
4. Fixate eye bolts (6) and prepare the feed 7
trough (3) so that it can be removed by
means of the assembly crane. 8
5. Loosen the nuts (7). 9
6. Remove the screws (9).
7. Pull out bearing journals (8). CHWIA_00001392_001_01
Note
Secure feed trough (3) beforehand.
8. Use the assembly crane to lift feed trough

(3).
6.2.1.5 Basic settings of the scale of the feed trough load
Note
A standard adjustment of indicator has to be carried out only if it was moved by error, or if a
new feed trough was installed.
1. The torsion rods are installed.

2. Adjust the pre-tension of the torsion rods. (☞ Part 4, Page50)
Licker-in
1. Remove screws (5).

2. The clamping levers (2) are now relieved 4
through torsion rods (1).
3
3. Slightly push down clamping levers (2) until
the play between clamping lever (2) and tor-
sion spring (1) is counterbalanced. 0
5
4. Check positions of indicators (4) in reference
to markings (3) in the clamping levers (2). 1
5. Set the positions of the pointers as needed.
CHWIA_00001389_001_01
6.2.2 Adjusting
6.2.2.1 Adjusting the carding element in the area of the doffer
Note
The service life of carding elements depends on the production, material and contamination.
Replace carding elements that have rounded tooth tips. The clothing manufacturer recom-
mends that the carding elements be changed at the latest with the cylinder clothing.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 45
Maintenance
4
1 2
1 5
6
3
3 Nm
9 8
CHWIA_00000865_001_01

2. Measure the actual distance between the carding element (5) and the licker-in (1).
3. Determine the right spacing strips (8) depending on the target distance.
There are thinner and thicker spacing strips.
◁ The distance is adjusted with the spacing strip between the element holder (6) and the
carding element (5).
4. Remove the screws (3) and the clamping piece (4).
◁ The element holder (6) can be removed.
5. Remove screws (7) and change the spacing strips (8).
6. Tighten the screws (7) to the correct torque.
Tightening torque for the screws of the carding elements 3.0 N⋅m
7. Re-install the element holder (6).

8. Engage the screw (3) on the clamping piece (4) with a slight pressure then tighten with 1/4 turn.
9. Check the adjustment after tightening screws (3).
Licker-in
6.2.3 Installation
6.2.3.1 Installing the mote knife on the first licker-in
b a b
CHWIA_00001526_001_01
1. Slide in the mote knife (2) and position it in the middle of the carrier.
Hint
Bring the delivery knife (2) into the correct install position.
2. Screw in the screws (1), however do not firmly tighten them yet.
3. Starting in the middle at (a), press the delivery knife (1) against the stop surface and simultan-
eously tighten the screw (2) with the prescribed torque.
Connection
Torque 4 N⋅m
4. Tighten all screws (1) left and right of the middle (a) in the same manner.
6.2.3.2 Mote knife adjustment (default setting to licker-in)
▶ Remove the licker-in unit. (☞ Part 4, Page41)
Mote knife adjustment (manual)

Caution
Damage of the adjustment device due to exceeding the discharge opening
▶ Do not exceed the minimum or maximum discharge opening.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 47
Maintenance
X max
X min
2
40 70
4
5
min. X max.
- + CHWIA_00000863_001_01
▶ Turn the adjustment screw (5) until the desired distance for the discharge outlet corres-
ponds to the marking (4) on the scale (3).
Mote knife adjustment (motor-driven)

3
1 70
40
4
5 min. max.
CHWIA_00000861_001_01
▶ In data screen 10.3, in line « Ejection dist. licker-in: » enter the distance.
Ejection distance – licker-in 41 – 71 mm
◁ The distance is matched to the material.
Licker-in
19 0.70 1
70
17 C» 70mm
40
2
3
4
C» max
»
5
CHWIA_00000864_001_01
1. Set the mote knife to its maximum discharge opening.
▶ Concerning the adjustment of the discharge opening, the mote knife runs eccentrically to
the licker-in.
2. Loosen screws (5) on both sides.

3. Insert an Allen wrench into the opening (3) of the eccentric (4).
4. Use the Allen wrench inserted to adjust the eccentric (4) until the correct dimension is reached
at the adjustment point (19), between mote knife (2) and licker-in (1).
Adjustment point «19» mote knife, licker-in
Set maximum discharge opening (17«C»). Set adjustment point «19»
5. Firmly tighten all screws (5).
6. The specified discharge opening distances

then result in the stated values at the adjust-
ment point «19».
17 «C»
Adjustment point «19» basic setting
40 mm
19 0.50
Adjustment point (17«C») set 70.0 mm
70 mm
to maximum discharge open-

ing
Set distance on the adjust- 0.70 mm
ment point «19».
19 0.70
CHWIA_00001409_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 49
Maintenance
6.2.3.3 Feed trough installation

2. Check the status of the feed trough. (☞ Part 4, Page43)
3. To protect the licker-in (1) insert some thin

sheet metal (2) between feed roller (1) and 6
licker-in (11). 10
4. Install the torsion bars (10). 4
5 11
3
1
2
CHWIA_00001392_001_01
Adjusting the pre-tension of the torsion rods

5. Position the torsion rods (2) in the guides (1).
1 2
CHWIA_00001391_001_01
6. Subsequent installation occurs in the reverse of the procedure described for removal.
Licker-in
6.2.3.4 Installing the licker-in in the licker-in unit
Work material
▶ Use the lifting device to fit the licker-in into the assembly.
6.2.3.5 Install licker-in unit
4 2 1
5 6 7 8 4 9 10 11 12 13
CHWIA_00000923_001_01
1. Installation is executed in the reverse of the procedure described for removal.

2. Align the licker-in unit so that both holes for lock bolts (13) in the licker-in unit and in the ma-
chine frame are lined up.
3. Fit the lock bolts (13) lubricated with assembly paste into the holes by hand.
Note
Do not use a hammer to knock in the safety bolts (13).
4. If necessary, the transport rollers can be adjusted by loosening the mounting screws of the
transport rollers (11) and realigning them using the eccentric. Tighten the screws again.
5. Coat dowel screws (9) with assembly paste and fix.
6. Re-install all removed parts.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 51
Maintenance
4 2 1
5 6 7 8 4 9 10 11 12 13
CHWIA_00000923_001_01
7. Adjust the licker-in to the cylinder. (☞ Part 4, Page53)
6.2.3.6 Adjusting the distance between the feed roller and the licker-in
3 2 1
6 7
8
2 4
CHWIA_00001338_001_01
1. Remove suction tube (8) above licker-in (1).
Licker-in
Reducing the distance (on both sides)

2. Loosen the screws (5) and then slightly tighten them.
4. Loosen the nuts (6) and use the nuts (7) to reduce the distance between feed roller (2) and
licker-in (1).
Increase distance (on both sides)

5. Loosen nuts (7) and use nuts (6) to increase the distance between feed roller (2) and licker-in
(1).
6.2.4 Adjusting the licker-in to the cylinder
▶ Always make the adjustments on both sides.
1 2
25
3
4
CHWIA_00000904_001_01
1. Remove the lower cylinder cover (1).
Reducing the distance (-)

2. Loosen nuts (4) and turn nuts (3) anticlockwise.
◁ The distance between the licker-in (2) and the cylinder is reduced.
Increasing the distance (+)

3. Loosen nuts (4) and turn nuts (3) in the clockwise direction.
◁ The distance between the licker-in (2) and the cylinder is increased.
4. Once nuts (4) have been tightened the setting must be checked again.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 53
Maintenance
6.3 Cylinder casing
6.3.1 Pre-carding zone and post-carding zone
6.3.1.1 Removing carding profiles
Machine version – cotton
4
2
2
3
2
1
4
CHWIA_00001700_001_01
1. Mark the carding elements so that pre-carding zone or pose carding zone are not swapped out.
2. Remove the clamps (2).
3. Remove the carding elements (1).
4. Mark the knife holder (3) prior to removal to exclude the possibility of mistaking the install posi-
tion.
5. Remove the knife holder (3).
Cylinder casing
Machine version – cotton/man-made fibres, blends or swing
1
3
2
1 3
CHWIA_00001699_001_01
7. Remove the clamps (2).
9. Mark the knife holder (3) prior to removal to exclude the possibility of mistaking the install posi-
tion.
10. Remove the knife holder (3).
Machine version – man-made fibres
1
1
CHWIA_00001701_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 55
Maintenance
6.3.1.2 Installing carding profiles
Machine version – cotton
4
8 7 2
6 3
1
2
5 4
CHWIA_00001703_001_01
1. Note the description for assembling the cylinder cover. (☞ Part 4, Page139)
2. Align the carding elements (1) prior to installation. Take the position of the clothing teeth into
account.
Install the carding element at the same location where it was removed.
3. In the post-carding zone first install the knife holder (4).

The underlays (8) must be mounted on the adjustment segments (7) above the doffer. (Post-carding zone)
4. Fasten the carding element (1) and the knife holders (3) and (4) with the screws (6).
5. Fasten the carding elements (1) in the pre-carding zone with the screws (5).
Machine version – cotton/man-made fibres, blends or swing
3
5 6 7
2
2
1
7 4 3
CHWIA_00001702_001_01
Cylinder casing
account.
8. In the post-carding zone first install the knife holder (3).

Install the underlays (6) on the adjustment segments (5) above the doffer. (Post-carding zone)
9. Fasten the carding elements (1) and the knife holders (3) with the screws (4) and (7).
10. Install the underlays (1) for the carding profile (6) on the adjustment segments (5) above the
doffer.
11. Install the lower casing plate.
12. Fasten the carding elements (1) in the pre-carding zone with the screws (7).
Machine version – man-made fibres
1
3 4
2
5
CHWIA_00001704_001_01
account.
15. The underlays (3) must be mounted on the adjustment segments (4) above the doffer.
16. In the post-carding zone, first install the carding element (2). Pay attention to the teeth position.
Conditions
✓ Polyacrylics (PAN)
OR:
✓ Polyester (PES)
Tooth position leading
17. Install the lower casing plate.

18. Fasten the carding elements (1) with the screws (5).
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 57
Maintenance
6.3.1.3 Installing carding elements in the carding profiles
▶ Install carding element (1), position laterally

and tighten screws (2). 2 1
Connection
Torque 3 N⋅m
CHWIA_00001720_001_01
6.3.1.4 Installing carding element (post-carding zone)
1. Insert and laterally distribute the carding ele-

ment (1).
2. Carefully screw in the screws (3) until they 2
are in line on the support. Then turn them 1
back one turn.
3. Tighten the nuts (2) with the correct torque.
Connection
Torque 1 N⋅m
3
CHWIA_00001721_001_01
6.3.1.5 Removing carding elements in the cylinder area
Note
The service life of carding elements depends on the production, material and contamination.
Replace carding elements that have rounded tooth tips. The clothing manufacturer recom-
mends that the carding elements be changed at the latest with the cylinder clothing.
Cylinder casing
Removing carding elements (pre- and post-carding zones)

1. Remove the supports with the carding ele-
ment. 2 1
2. Remove carding profiles. (☞ Part 4, Page54)
3. Loosen all screws (2) of carding element (1)
by 1 to 2 turns and pull the carding element
out to the side.
CHWIA_00001720_001_01
4. Remove the supports with the carding ele-

ment.
5. Loosen the nuts (2) and screws (3) of the 2
carding elements (1) by 1 to 2 turns and re- 1
move the carding element laterally.
CHWIA_00001721_001_01
6.3.1.6 Install carding elements in the cylinder area into the supports
Installing carding elements in the carding profiles

1. Install carding element (1), position laterally
and tighten screws (2). 2 1
Connection
Torque 3 N⋅m
CHWIA_00001720_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 59
Maintenance
Installing carding element (post-carding zone)

2. Insert and laterally distribute the carding ele-
ment (1).
3. Carefully screw in the screws (3) until they 2
are in line on the support. Then turn them 1
back one turn.
4. Tighten the nuts (2) with the correct torque.
Connection
Torque 1 N⋅m
3
CHWIA_00001721_001_01
Installing the carding element in the area of the doffer

5. Install carding element (1), position laterally
and tighten screws (2).
Connection
Torque 3 N⋅m
1 2 CHWIA_00001716_001_01
1. After installing the carding profiles, check their adjustment.

2. Adjust the carding profiles relative to the cylinder clothing (pre-carding zone, cotton).
3. After the carding element has been installed in the post-carding zone, above the doffer, check
the setting.
4. Adjust the carding profile in the vicinity of the doffer (man-made fibres). (☞ Part 3, Page54)
6.3.2 Installing the mote knife
Note
Installation of the mote knife in the pre-carding zone is described. An identical procedure is
used for installation in the post-carding zone.
Cylinder clothing
3
4
2
1
b a b
CHWIA_00001708_001_01
1. Slide in the mote knife (2) to the stop (3).

2. Starting in the middle at (a), press the delivery knife (1) against the stop surface (2) and simul-
taneously tighten the screw (4) with the prescribed torque.
Connection
Torque 4 N⋅m
3. Tighten all screws (1) left and right of the middle (a) in the same manner.
4. After installation of the carrier, adjust the difference of the mote knife to the cylinder.
5. Adjust the mote knife, (pre-carding zone and post-carding zone, cotton). (☞ Part 3, Page57)
6.4 Cylinder clothing
For sharpening of the cylinder clothing the integrated grinding device ‘IGS-Classic’ is recommen-
ded Otherwise Rieter recommends the cylinder grinding device ‘TSG’ from Graf .
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 61
Maintenance
6.4.1 Preparing the cylinder for grinding
Removing parts
1. Remove the card flat unit.
1
2. Remove all parts (2) in the area of the post-
carding zone.
3. Remove the doffer cover and the guide rail
(3).
4. Remove the spacer plates (4). 2
5. Remove the clearer brush (5). 7
3 6
6. Remove the suction channel (6).
7. Remove the cover (7) on the door frame. 5
(Right-hand side of machine).
8. On the right-hand side of the machine, re-
move the connections of the suction unit.
CHWIA_00003134_001_01
Checking the cylinder clothing for contamination and cleaning

9. Turn cylinder backwards by hand.
DANGER 2
Injury Due to rotating cylinder 1
▶ Stop the cylinder.
▶ Do not work when the cylinder is rotat-
ing.
10. Coarse wooden or polymer, etc., parts (1) are

removed from the wire with a fine blade (2).
4 3
CHWIA_00003135_001_01
Further preparatory work before grinding

11. Make ready the crane and all further supplies needed for grinding.
12. Secure the belt tightener of the cylinder belt with a screw.
Cylinder clothing
6.4.1.1 Cleaning the cylinder wire
Work material
Hand scraper with handle and
clearer board (☞ Part 4, Page249)
Note
Equipment of the machine for manual cleaning of the cylinder: In the zone of the
post-carding zone, there is a device present with a proximity switch for monitoring installed or
uninstalled parts, as the case may be.
Only if the machine is equipped for this type of maintenance may the manual cleaning of the
cylinder be carried out.
1. Empty card chute and card. (☞ Part 2, Page24)

2. Stop the machine. (☞ Part 2, Page25)
3. Switch off the main switch and safeguard it with a padlock. (☞ Part 2, Page25)
4. Clean the entire machine.
Preparation
3
2
1
CHWIA_00004160_001_01
1. In the post-carding zone, remove the carding profile(1).

◁ The proximity switches (4) are not activated any more.
2. Fit the guide plate which is marked with a(–) (2).
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 63
Maintenance
3
2
1
CHWIA_00004160_001_01
3. Fit the guide plate which is marked with a (+) (3).

◁ The cylinder is now ready for the cleaning procedure.
Scratching out the clothing

6. In data screen 80.1 the operating mode
« Service mode » is selected.
8. In the line « Functioning of cyl.: » select the
function.
Function « Hand carding »
9. In the line « Carry out servicing: » select

"Yes".
10. « START key » activate. C7xVKData811_D
◁ The cylinder turns backwards.
▶ Wear protective goggles in accordance with EN ISO 166.
Cylinder clothing
7
2
CHWIA_00004159_001_01
11. Note the positions of the needles (7).

12. On one side of the cylinder (5), place the tool (6) on the lower guide plate (2).
13. Carefully and with little pressure, push tool (6) onto the rotating cylinder (5).
◁ Cleaning is performed in this manner for several revolutions of the cylinder.
14. When the cleaning is complete, retract tool (6), displace by one width of the tool and repeat the
process.
◁ Cleaning is carried out sector by sector over the entire width of the cylinder (5).
1. After the cleaning is complete, stop the cylinder and wait till it comes to a standstill.
2. Press the EMERGENCY STOP switch.
◁ Unintentional starting up of the cylinder is not possible any more
3. Remove the guide plates.
4. Install carding profiles. (☞ Part 4, Page56)
5. Assemble the remaining parts back.
6. Set the mode for production operation. (☞ Part 4, Page195)
6.4.2 Fit on the cylinder again
6.4.2.1 Installing auxiliary material for clothing change – doffer and cylinder
Work material

13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 65
Maintenance
1 3
CHWIA_00003157_001_01
1. The doffer unit has to be pushed on the supports (1) for fitting the doffer clothing.
2. When pulling on new clothings, install the clamp hub (2) and the extension pipe (3).
6.4.2.2 Change cylinder clothing

2. Remove the old clothing and pull on the new clothing.
3. Replace the grinding stone from IGS-Classic after each replacement of the cylinder clothing.
Resetting the counter after grinding

6. In the line « Cylinder reclothing: » reset the counter to zero.
Counter status 0t
◁ The counter is reset.
Option: IGS-Classic
◁ IGS recalculate the grinding budget.
Doffer clothing
6.4.2.30.3...0.5 mm Checking the driving pins on the cylinder edge
1 1
CHWIA_00004001_001_01
▶ Check the inserted driving pins in accordance with drawing (1).

0.3 – 0.5 mm
If the pin is too long or too short.

▶ Process the pin.
6.5 Doffer clothing
For sharpening of the doffer clothing Rieter recommends the ‘ASG’ doffer grinding device from
Graf .
6.5.1 Changing doffer clothing
1. After replacing the clothing:

3. In the line « Doffer reclothing: » reset the
counter to zero.
◁ In the line « Doffer clothing: » , the
status switch to « Not activated »
4. Activate the clothing.
5. Confirm the activation status in the line
« Doffer clothing: » .
Activation status « Activated »
◁ The activation is confirmed. C7xCBAData702_D
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 67
Maintenance
6.5.2 Preparing the doffer for grinding
▶ Prepare the machine in the same manner as described for grinding the cylinder clothing.
6.5.3 Switch to operating status – « Grind doffer »
▶ Turn key switch « grind doffer » to position

II.
◁ The covers (1) , (2) and (3) can remain
I II
open.
CHWIA_00003397_001_02
6.5.4 Resetting the counter after grinding

3. In the line « Doffer grinding: » reset the counter.
Counter status 0t
Resetting the counter after activating

6. Confirm the activation status in the line « Doffer clothing: » .
Activation status « Activated »
◁ The activation is confirmed.
Doffer clothing
6.5.5 Adapting the position of the lower delivery roller to the clothing height
Note
The heights of the doffer clothings and the doffer roller employed vary depending on the
manufacturer and the type of clothing. This affects the position of the adjusted upper deliv-
ery roller. The position of the upper delivery roller relative to the lower delivery roller has to
remain within a certain range. This is achieved by the position of the support shafts for the
lower delivery roller.
1. Determine the position of the lower delivery roller (4) due to the clothings.
Define the position of the support shafts

2. Determine the support shaft position based on the doffer height or the height of the doffer roller
clothing respectively.
Position, support
Clothing height: Doffer 5.0 mm / doffer roller 3.5 mm Shaft adjustment to position 1
Adjust the position of the support shafts
7
2
3
1
5
4
3 2
5 9
1
4
6
CHWIA_00001995_001_01

Hint
Carry out on both sides
4. Use and open-jaw spanner to turn the faces (7) of shafts (8) to the required number (9) on the
supports (5).
Note
The faces (7) of the shafts (8) have to be in the same position on both sides.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 69
Maintenance
7
2
3
1
5
4
3 2
5 9
1
4
6
CHWIA_00001995_001_01
5. Screw the previously removed screws (6) into the appropriate tapped bores.
6. Line up faces (7) exactly at a right angle to screws (6) and then tighten screws (6).
7. Adjust lower delivery roll (4).
8. Adjust the rollers of the doffer device. (☞ Part 4, Page156)
6.6 Card flats
For manual sharpening of the card flat clothing, Rieter recommends the ‘DSW’ flat grinding roller
from Graf .
Card flats
6.6.1 Grinding or levelling card flat clothing
Grind
a) b) c) d)
CHWIA_00003162_001_01
a New needle c Insufficient number of ground needles

The needle is sharp. The needle is not yet sharp.
b Worn needle d Correctly ground needle
The needle no longer works correctly. The needle is sharp again.
Through grinding (sharpening) approximately 80% of the worn needles should again get a sharp
edge.
In contrast to the levelling procedure, worn needles of the card-flats clothing are re-sharpened by
the grinding process. The length of time before this becomes necessary varies according to the
material, production rate and quality requirements.
If the card flats are ground, after 1 -2 revolutions the needles must be inspected with the clothing
magnifying glass. A decision can then be taken as to whether the flats have to be ground further.
On no account may this process be accelerated by increasing the infeed.
Objective: Grind the card flat clothings as little as possible, however approximately 80% of the
needles must be ground (sharpened).
▶ Grind card flats on the machine. (☞ Part 4, Page77)
Level
Through levelling, only the projecting clothing tips are shortened. This procedure is used to equal
out deviations in clothing height.
Levelling the card flats on a card flat grinding machine is recommended.
If a card flat grinding machine is not available, the card flats must be levelled on the card.
A newly clothed card flat set must be levelled twice:
1. Before commissioning
2. After 10 to 15 tons of production
▶ Level card flats on the machine. (☞ Part 4, Page76)
Preparation for grinding or levelling.

The preparatory tasks for grinding or levelling are the same.
▶ Prepare the machine for grinding the card flats. (☞ Part 4, Page72)
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 71
Maintenance
Hollow shape of the card flat rods
1
3
C 70
CHWIA_00003161_001_01
The card flat rods (1) without clothing (2) are manufactured in the factory slightly hollow.
Through the compensating device (3) the hollow manufactured bodies (1) of the card flats are dir-
ected straight.
After grinding, i.e. without compensation device, the card flats return to the original position. They
are slightly hollow again.
▶ Install the compensation device for grinding the card flats. (☞ Part 4, Page75)
6.6.2 Prepare the machine for grinding the card flats.
1. Stop the doffers. (☞ Part 2, Page23)

2. Clean the machine thoroughly.
3. Transport the grinding roller in the transport box to the vicinity of the card.
◁ Grinding roller is air conditioned.
4. Make ready the crane and all other supplies needed for the grinding operation.
Card flats
Switch the machine to the special operating mode for grinding the card flats
3
I II
2
4
5
CHWIA_00003142_001_01
1. Turn the key switch (1) to the right.

3. Unhook the gas pressure springs of the cover (2) and swing back the cover.
4. Open the door (4) on the right-hand side of the machine.
◁ The safety switch of the door is no longer active.
5. If the IGS top is available, the corresponding electrical connections should be disconnected
and secured.
6. Swing out the control cabinet (5) as far as possible.
6.6.2.1 Activating the card flat for grinding
Activate the card flats drive for grinding
I II
1
4 3
80.1
2
8x.x
x.xx A
x.xx A
xxxxxxxx
CHWIA_00004002_001_01

13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 73
Maintenance

3. In the line « Carry out servicing: » trigger the action.
Action « Flat grinding »
4. Turn the key-operated switch (1) to the position for grinding the card flats.
◁ The door safeguard (2) unlocks.
5. Press the “Start” button (3).
◁ The drive for the card flats starts.
6. Press the “Stop” button (4).
◁ The drive for the card flats stops.
Setting the lowest speed for grinding

8. In the line « Target speed for flats: » set the speed.
Speed 0.25 m/min
6.6.2.2 Converting belt tension to grinding operation
1. Bring the clamping devices (1) into the lowest

position.
◁ The tension of the belts will decrease.
Note
With the belt slackened, the card flats
(6) can rub on the casing plates (5).
CHWIA_00003159_002_01
Card flats

2
4. With a screwdriver, swing the deflectors (4) 3
upward as far as possible.
4
5. Tighten screws (3) again.

◁ This prevents the card flats from (6) rub-
bing on the casing plate (5).
CHWIA_00003159_003_01
6.6.2.3 Install the compensation device for grinding the card flats
Work material
Compensation device
For grinding the card flats. C 70
C 70
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 75
Maintenance
Installing the compensation device
3
6 C 70
C 70 133
4 mm
5 C 70 EF
100
mm
6
CHWIA_00003143_001_03
1. Remove five card flats (1). (☞ Part 4, Page80)

2. Install the bearing bushings (2) and (4) on the left and right-hand sides of the machine.
3. Push the rod (3) through the bearing bushing (2) and introduce it into bearing bushing (4).
4. Install the lever (5).
Only use the lever with the designation (C 70).
5. Adjust the counterweight (6) depending on the type of card flat used.
Distance – counterweight
TYPE : C 70 133 mm
TYPE: C 70 EF (extra fine) 100 mm
6. Install the counterweight (6).
6.6.3 Levelling card flats on the machine
1. The spot grinding has been carefully executed.

2. After spot grinding, level at least 20 card flats.
3. Press the STOP button to stop the drive.
◁ The card flats are standing still.
4. Evaluate the 20 levelled card flats with the clothing magnifying glass.
Card flats
The grinding roller touches the card flats over the entire width.
But to such a minimal extent that individual card flats are almost not touched.
▶ In this case the grinding roller is correctly adjusted for levelling.
▶ Use the START button to start the drive again, and level all card flats in two rotations.
All card flats are touched over the entire width.

▶ In this case the grinding roller is too close to the card flats.
▶ Adjust the grinding roller so that is not so close.
The card flats are only touched on one side.

▶ In this case the grinding roller is not set properly parallel.
▶ Adjust the parallelity of the grinding roller to the card flats.
The card flats are not touched at all.

▶ In this case the grinding roller is not close enough.
▶ Correct during the spot grinding procedure.
6.6.4 Grinding card flats on the machine
1. The spot grinding has been carefully executed.

2. Grind 1 to 2 rotations with minimal infeed.
3. Evaluate the grinding result with the clothing magnifying glass. Estimate how many needles are
freshly sharpened.
Less than 80% of the needles have a freshly ground edge.

▶ Repeat the grinding process.
▶ Again, grind 1 to 2 rotations with minimal infeed.
80% of the needles have a freshly ground edge.

In this case the desired grinding result has been achieved.
Resetting the counter after grinding

6. In the line « Flats grinding: » reset the counter to zero.
Counter status 0t
Returning the card flat deflectors to the original position

7. Readjust the belt tension via the clamping device.
8. Tension the belt of the card flats. (☞ Part 4, Page146)
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 77
Maintenance
6.6.5 Removing and installing card flats
6.6.5.1 Adjusting the deflection elements for removal
1 1
4
47
0
3
1.3
2 2
1.3
55
0
5
CHWIA_00001872_001_01
1. Adjust the deflection elements for the card flats the same on the feed and delivery sides
2. Adjust the safety distance on the adjustment points (47) and (55).
Safety distance 2.5 mm
◁ The distance is sufficiently large that collision does not occur when removing the card flats.
◁ Now all card flats or individual card flats can be removed.
6.6.5.2 Remove the retaining clips of the card flats
Work material
Nippers (☞ Part 4, Page251)
Special nippers to remove the re-
taining clips.
Card flats
1 2 3
CHWIA_00001851_001_01
1. The retaining clips (2) on the return rail (1) must be levered out of the belt for the card flats
drive (3).
2. Using the pliers (4), clamp the retaining clip (2) and lever it out.
◁ The card flats can now be lifted out.
◁ The machine must not be operated without the retaining clips installed.
3. Store the removed metal plate (5) for the IGS-Top grinding device for the card flats.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 79
Maintenance
6.6.5.3 Removing card flats
1 3
1
2
6
5
4
1
7
2.50
CHWIA_00001880_001_01
1. The deflection rollers (5) are adjusted. (☞ Part 4, Page78)

2. Slide back the lubricating blocks (7) on both sides and arrest them in place.
3. Bring the card flat to be removed (1) into the area between the clamping device (6) and the
deflection roller (5).
4. Remove the holding clip (2). (☞ Part 4, Page78)
5. Remove all card flats except for every sixth card flat (1).
◁ Thus the belt tension remains intact.
Caution
Damage of the slide pieces due to the wrong tool
▶ Do not use a screwdriver for removal.
6. Press the card flats out of the brackets (4) on both sides by hand.
Card flats
6.6.5.4 Remove clothing strip from card flat rod
Option: Flat system ‘EasyTop’
Work material
Pliers to pull of card flats clothing
strip (☞ Part 4, Page251)
Remove the clothing strip form the
card flats rod ‘EasyTop’.
Caution
Damage of flat rod bar due to scratches on the contact surface
▶ Only use the pliers to draw of the clothing from the flat rod.
▶ Do not use a screwdriver for removal.
▶ Remove card flats. (☞ Part 4, Page80)
1. Place the card flat rod (1) in to a holding

device on a table.
2
2. Grip a needle row (2) with the pliers.
3. Pull the clothing stripe (3) away form the flat
rod (1) .
◁ The clothing stripe (3) is removed from 3
the magnetic contact surface in the flat
rod.
CHWIA_00004385_001_01
6.6.5.5 Dismantle and mounting clothing strip on card flat rod
Option: Flat system with Clip
▶ See in the manual of the cloth mounting device manufacturer.
▶ Install card flats. (☞ Part 4, Page84)
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 81
Maintenance
6.6.5.6 Insert clothing strip in to card flat rod
Option: Flat system ‘EasyTop’
1. Clean the magnetic contact surface (4) of the

flat rod . 4
2. Examine the contact surface (4) by hand.
is even and smoth

The clothing stripe can get inserted.
is scratched
▶ Repair the contact surface.
CHWIA_00004386_001_01
3. Clean the bottom plate of the clothing

stripe (3) . 3
CHWIA_00004385_002_01
4. Orientate the clothing stripe (3) to the flat

rod (1) . 3
The plate edge (5) is located onthe side of the
groove (6) .
5. Insert the clothing stripe (3) in to the flat

rod (1) .
◁ The clothing stripe (3) sticks to the mag-
netic contact surface in the flat rod (1) .
6 1
5
CHWIA_00004387_001_01
Card flats
6.6.5.7 Preparing deflector and cylinder arch for installation
7 6
1
2 6
X
3
3 3
. 0 mm
~20.0 4 ~2 0
m m
CHWIA_00001879_001_01
1. At both deflection points (4), the distance between the cylinder and the deflection pulley must
be approx. 20 mm.
2. Move the belt tighteners (2) to the top position.
3. Synchronise the card flats belt. To do this pay attention to the arrows (5).
The card flats belts must be positioned so that the markings (5) are exactly opposite and are not offset.
4. At the measuring slot (3), position and adjust a card flat (1).
Dimension ‒ X 0.3 mm
5. With the depth gauge measure the distance (X) from the cylinder arch (6) to the cylinder.
6. Adjust the cylinder arch (6) at all measuring slots (3) according to the dimension (X).
Increasing the carding gap
52 1a
1b
51 53
54
50
5 5
CHWIA_00001874_003_01
7. Unscrew the lower nut (1b) and with the upper nut (1a) lift the cylinder arch (2).
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 83
Maintenance
52 1a
1b
51 53
54
50
5 5
CHWIA_00001874_003_01
◁ The carding gap becomes larger.

8. At the adjustment points (50) and (54) lift the flex arches through rough adjustment.
◁ The carding gap becomes larger.
6.6.5.8 Installing card flats
Work material
Auxiliary equipment for installing the
card flats.
Identifying different types of card flats

S E
C 60 C 70
C 70 EF
CHWIA_00001868_001_01
S Standard flat rod, with clip EF extra fine wire

E EasyTop flat rod
Caution
Clothing damage through the use of different card flats
▶ Only use card flats of the same kind in a card flats set.
Card flats
Caution
Clothing damage due to different slide shoes
▶ Only use the same slide shoes in a card flats set.
1. Pay attention to the label on the right side of each card flat.
Types of card flats
Card flat name: C 60 not allowed
Card flat name: C 70 O.K.
Card flat name: C 70 EF O.K.
Installing card flats
1
10
1
12
11 13
1
2
CHWIA_00001877_001_01
2. Set the card up for card-flat grinding operation. (☞ Part 4, Page73)

3. Install every sixth card flat (1).
4. The card flats (1) can only be installed in the area behind the return rail (11).
5. Prior to inserting, check the alignment. Each card flat (1) has a recess (10) across its entire
width.
The notch (10) must be aligned in the direction of the card chute.
6. Continually check the belt tension and the markings (5) on the belts.
7. Place the card flat (1) at a slight angle on both sides onto the clamping studs of the belt.
8. Use a hand or the tool (13) to force the card flat (1) to snap into place between the clamping
studs.
9. Force the clamping studs forwards using the tool (13) and allow the card flat (1) to snap into
place.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 85
Maintenance
Installing the last card flat
16
13
1 1
CHWIA_00001878_001_01
10. Position the tool (13) according to the illustration.

11. Force the clamping studs forwards using the tool (13) and allow the card flat (1) to snap into
place.
Note
Do not use a screwdriver (16).
Caution
Severe material damage due to failure to install the retaining clips
▶ All retaining clips must be installed.
12. Install the retaining clips of the card flats. (☞ Part 4, Page87)
▶ Make settings for the deflection of the card flats (☞ Part 3, Page94)
Card flats
6.6.5.9 Install the retaining clips of the card flats
1 2 3
2
3
CHWIA_00001852_001_01
1. The holding clips (2) must be pressed on the return rail (1) into the drive belt of the card flats
(3).
2. Using gripper (4), clamp a holding clip (2) and press it into the drive belt of the card flats (3)
until it is flush with the drive belt of the card flats (3).
3. For a machine version with IGS-Top, the (2) metal platelet (5) must be mounted on a retaining
clip.
6.6.6 Maintenance of the card flat rods in the workshop
Maintenance of the card flat rods, in particular the measuring procedure, is described in both ser-
vice information items in Part 5.
The associated Excel programs are also attached as "Attachment" of the PDF file.
Note
The Excel program authorized by RIETER is integrated in the PDF version of this operating
manual as attachment.
Part 5
➠ Document: Excel program as "attachment"
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 87
Maintenance
6.7 IGS
6.7.1 IGS-Classic
6.7.1.1 Check wear of IGS grind stone
▶ Remove the grinding device. (☞ Part 4, Page90)
▶ Check the grind stone (1) visually.

2 1
the groove (2) is not visible
▶ Replace the grind stone.
the groove (2) is still visible

▶ Set the condition in the line « Inspecti.of
grindstone: ».
Condition grind stone « Stone OK »
◁ 80 grinding cycles are added to the
grinding budget.
▽ 606 IGS-cl. max. grinding cycles
reached (☞ Part 3, Page278)
More than five time the grinding CHWIA_00004394_001_01
budget was consumed. No more

grinding cycles are added. The
grinding stone must get replaced.
▶ Go to line « End of service life: » , set
behavior status.
Behavior after end of live « Contin. grind-
time ing »
◁ Grinding will continue, until the
double of cycles of the origin budget
is reached. But max. 400 cycles.
6.7.1.2 Replace the grind stone
▶ Remove the grinding device. (☞ Part 4, Page90)
IGS
Removing the grinding stone
1 2
4
CHWIA_00001657_001_01
1. Firmly hold the grinding stone (2) .
Caution
Damage of the spring plate due to twisting when removing and installing the grinding stone
▶ Hold firmly when loosening the fastening of the grinding stone.
2. Loosen the screw (1) .
Installing the grinding stone

Note
Replace the grinding stone after each replacement of the cylinder clothing.
1 2
4 CHWIA_00001658_001_01
3. Position the grinding stone (3) .

Note
The grinding stone is positioned with the holes in the carrier plate and the positioning
pins in the spring plate (4) .
The bevel (3) of the grinding stone must be aligned opposite of the running direction of
the cylinder.
4. Firmly hold the grinding stone (2) so that it does not twist when tightened.
5. Tighten the screw (1) as firmly as possible.

7. Set the condition in the line « Inspecti.of grindstone: ».
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 89
Maintenance
Condition grind stone « Stone replaced »
▶ Install the grinding device. (☞ Part 4, Page90)
6.7.1.3 Removing the grinding device
Caution
Clothing damage due to incorrectly installed grinding stone
▶ Pay attention to the position of the grinding stone when installing.
Caution
Damage due to falling or tilting
▶ Two persons are necessary for this task. Remove and install carefully.
Weight IGS-Classic 21 kg
1. Close the compressed air supply on the card.

4 3
2. Loosen the pneumatic hose (3) on the
grinder (2) on the left-hand side of the
machine and disconnect the electric plug.
3. Mark the position of the tongue (4) and move 2
it as far as possible towards the doffer, or
remove it.
4. The person on each side supports the grind-
ing device. 1
5. Remove all 4 screws (1) lower the grinding
device (2), and move it out sideways to the
right. CHWIA_00001549_001_01
6.7.1.4 Installing the grinding device
Caution
Clothing damage due to incorrectly installed grinding stone
▶ Pay attention to the position of the grinding stone when installing.
Caution
Damage due to falling or tilting
▶ Two persons are necessary for this task. Remove and install carefully.
Weight IGS-Classic 21 kg
IGS
1. The drive must be on the right side of the

machine. 4 3
2. Place the grinding device (2) under the ma-
chine. For fastening, lift on both sides simul-
taneously and screw in the screws (1). 2
Note
When installing, do not pinch the seal
on the casing plate.
3. Re-attach the pneumatic hose (3) to the

grinder (2) and connect the electric plug. 1
4. Install the tongue (4) in the original position. CHWIA_00001550_001_01
5. Open the compressed air supply. Operating

pressure 6 bar.
Note
After each installation, the grinding
device must be tested.
6.7.1.5 Remove guide carriage
1. The grinding stone must be in part position (right side of the machine).
2. At the location where the guide carriage is removed, the grinding device must be connected to
the compressed air. The pressure must not exceed 6 bar.
Removing the deflector unit

2 1
◁ The flat belt slackens (1).
2. Remove the cover (5) under the carrier.
3. Hold the deflector unit (4).
5. Remove the cover plate (2) and pull the de-
flector unit (4) to the rear and out of the car-
rier.
3 4 5 6
CHWIA_00001653_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 91
Maintenance
Remove guide carriage

6. Remove the clamp plates (7) on the carrying
1 7
point of the guide carriage (8).
7. Remove the plug (11) in the middle of the
carrier.
8. Direct the cable loop (9) on the opposite side
upward as far as possible. Thus the screws
(10) become accessible.
9. Remove the screws (10) of the chain begin-
ning, with a long 2.5 mm Allen wrench.
10. Carefully move out the guide carriage (8) to 10 9 8
the rear.
11 CHWIA_00001652_001_01
6.7.1.6 Removing the clamp profiles of the flat belt
3 4 5 4
7 6 CHWIA_00001554_001_01
1. Remove the grinding device (1). (☞ Part 4, Page90)

Hint
Place the grinding device on the left side of the machine on the ground, and reconnect
the compressed air.
3. Remove the rear panel (2).

4. Remove the clamp plates (7).
IGS
5. Disconnect the connection of the flat belt (4) in the area of the guide carriage (6).
6. Remove the flat belt (4).
Hint
The clamp profiles (5) are widened through the pressure hoses.
7. Remove the compressed air connection.

8. Pull the deflector (3) out of the profile.
9. Remove the threaded compressed air fittings from the pressure hoses.
10. Pull the clamp profiles (5) with the pressure hoses out of the profile.
6.7.1.7 Installing the guide carriage
Fastening the beginning of the chain

1 2 3 4
5
CHWIA_00001666_001_01
1. Introduced the guide carriage (6) into the profile.

2. Insert a piece of wire (3) or a similar item into the tapped bore.
Hint
Due to the difficult accessibility of the screw holes, the following procedure is recommen-
ded:
3. Use adhesive tape to fasten the screw (5) on the Allen wrench.
4. Bend the cable (4) upward.
5. Screw in the screw (5). In this process the wire indicates the approximate position of the tapped
bore.
Pulling in the flat belt

6. Install the deflector unit and guide the flat belt (2) into the deflector unit. In this process pay
attention to the tabs of the flat belt (2).
7. Switch on the compressed air supply.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 93
Maintenance
Pressure must not exceed 6 bar.

◁ The clamp profiles (1) widen.
8. Then carefully slide the flat belt between the clamping profiles (2) and the profile (1).
Note
Carefully slide in because the pressure hoses inserted in the clamping profiles (1) are
extremely sensitive.
9. Install the remaining parts in the reverse of the sequence described for removal.
6.7.1.8 Installing the clamping profile for the flat belt
Note
The pressure hoses are provided with a sliding covering and must not be oiled or lubricated!
4
3
2 5
6
1 7
8
CHWIA_00001555_001_01
1. In the new pressure hose (1), screw in a screw (2).

M4 cylinder screw
2. Fasten a cord (3) onto the head of the screw and pull the cord into the clamp profile (4).
3. Using the pulled-in cord (3), carefully pull the pressure hose (1) into the clamp profile (4).
Note
The pressure hose must be uniformly distributed in the clamp profile.

5. Slide the clamp profile into the carrier profile.
Note
The connection piece (8) points toward the drive (5). Pay attention to the position of the
clamp profile.
6. With the screw (6) (M5x8 mm and washer), fasten the connection piece (8).
7. Connect the compressed air on the connection (7).
IGS
6.7.1.9 Slackening and tensioning the flat belt (system with tension screws)
1 CHWIA_00001603_001_01
De-tension
1. Remove screws (1).
Tension
2. On the slack flat belt (7) mark two lines at a distance of 1000 mm.
3. With screws (1) pull the deflector unit (2) uniformly to the rear.
Tension for flat belt of the grinding device
Belt tension 0.8 – 1.0 %
Distance between markings 1,008.0 – 1,010.0 mm
6.7.1.10 Removing the electromagnet
▶ Removal is executed in the reverse of the sequence described for installation.
6.7.1.11 Installing the electromagnet
1. Pre-set the nut (5) in accordance with the

drawing and secure with «Loctite» that is not
hardened. 1
Max.4 mm
2. Install the electromagnet (1).
3. Screw the piston rod (3) into the shaft (6) and 2 5
6
fasten the electromagnet (1). 3
Note 4
The fastening screws (2) are differ-
ent lengths. To ensure that the interior
of the electromagnet (1) is not dam- 1
aged, the screws (2) must not penet- Loctite
rate further than 4 mm into its housing. Ca.5 mm
CHWIA_00001661_001_01
Consequently, the screws must not be

replaced.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 95
Maintenance
▶ To check, carefully introduce the guide carriage into the carrier.
6.7.1.12 Check electromagnet
1. In test operation, determine whether the whetstone can be moved up and down. If this is not
the case then various faults can be the cause.
2. Select data screen 85.1.?
1. Check the diode in the socket outlet for connection of the cylinder grinding device.
Note
The diode is designated in the electric circuit diagram.
2. A mechanical cause in the guide carriage prevents movement.

3. The electromagnet is defective.
4. The guide carriage is not in park position on the right side of the machine.
Note
Investigate the possible cause of the fault before electromagnet is replaced.
6.7.1.13 Adjust the grinding stone if the electromagnet was replaced.
Work material
Adjustment gauge –
grinding stone, IGS-Classic
Note
Do not adjust the working position of the grinding stone unless the electromagnet was re-
placed.
1. The electromagnet is installed.

2. Install the electromagnet. (☞ Part 4, Page95)
IGS
Using the gauge «+» check the pre-adjustment of the height of the grinding stone:
«B» «C»
«A»
4 5
CHWIA_00001660_001_01
3. At point «A» slide the piston rod (3) forwards.

4. At the same time, hold the gauge (7) lengthwise in position “B” and crosswise in position “C” on
the guide block, and thus check the end position of the grinding stone (8).
5. An air gap must be visible between the gauge (7) and the grinding stone (8).
Checking the pre-set height of the grinding stone with the «-» gauge
«B» «C»
«A»
4 5
CHWIA_00001662_001_01
6. In positions “B” and “C”, an air gap should no longer be visible between the gauge “-” (9) and
the grinding stone (8).
Correct the height of the grinding stone:

7. If the grinding stone (8) is positioned too high, the piston rod (3) must be turned clockwise. Pro-
ceed in reverse order if grinding stone (8) is positioned too low.
Counter nut
8. If the setting is correct, the nut (5) must be tightened.
9. As a result of the small opening, the nut must be held with pointed pliers or clamped firmly with
a screwdriver. The piston rod (3) is turned with a mandrel inserted in the opening (4).
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 97
Maintenance
6.7.1.14 Pressure reducing valve
▶ The pressure reducing valve is factory set to

4 bar and must not be adjusted.
1
CHWIA_00001667_001_01
6.7.1.15 IGS-Classic – executing a function test

« Test mode » is selected.
◁ Test functions in the menus 82 - 85 can
be executed.
3. In the line « Execute test: » activate the test.
Selection:
● Yes
C7xCBAData851_D
4. In the line « Function: » select the function.

Function:
● « Move to left position »
● « Move to right position »
● « Raise stone »
● « Sealing lips »
● « Cycle »
5. Press the APPLY button, to confirm the selection.
◁ The function will be activated.
◁ On the right, the data screen also shows the states of the corresponding sensors and pos-
sibly whether the function has started (=1) or stopped (=0).
IGS
Testing functions
Note
The electromagnet is not activated during the function test. Consequently the grinding stone
is not located in the grinding position.
An alarm is output if, after a test has been completed, the guide carriage is not in its parking
position on the right side of the machine.
Reset the alarm and then the guide carriage can be brought into its parking position using
the function «to the right».
7. Test the functions and pay attention to the reaction.

Reaction
Function: « Move to left position » The guide carriage is moved out of the
parking position on the left side of the ma-
chine.
Function: « Move to right position » The guide carriage is moved from the left
side of the machine into its parking position
on the right side of the machine.
Function: « Raise stone » The grinding stone is raised and lowers
itself again after 22 seconds. The elec-
tromagnet must first cool down before a
renewed test can be carried out. The test
can only be carried out with the grindstone
in its parking position (on the right side of
the machine). The position of the grind-
stone is monitored by a microswitch.
Function: « Sealing lips » The sealing lips are put under pressure.
Function: « Cycle » As the grinding stone is lowered, the guide
carriage goes from the parking position to
the left and then back to the right side of
the machine.
8. In the line « Grind stone position: » pay attention to the time.

Time 0.1 – 0.3 s
≥0.3 s
▶ Check the grinding stone movement mechanism, if it takes longer than the allotted time.
6.7.2 IGS-TOP
6.7.2.1 Recommendations for levelling new card flat clothings
The positions of the needles, new card flat clothings may change slightly after the production of
several tonnes of material. We recommend levelling the card flats with the grinding roller after this
time has lapsed to meet high technological requirements for quality.
▶ Close the doors on the right-hand side of the machine. (☞ Part 2, Page14)
▶ Adjust grinding pressure. (☞ Part 4, Page103)
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 99
Maintenance
Option: IGS-Top
Adjusting the card flats (with IGS-Top, without IGS-Classic)

Adjust the card flats after the cylinder clothing has been ground with the grinding roller.
If the cylinder clothing is not ground during its service life, the card flats must be adjusted after
half the service life of the cylinder clothing.
Option: IGS-Top, IGS-Classic
Adjusting the card flats (IGS-Top and IGS-Classic are present)

Adjusting the card flats (IGS-Top and IGS-Classic are present)
Adjust the remaining settings in the cylinder range also, if needed.
Adjusting and/or replacing the grinding brush

IGS-Top grinding brush service life
The IGS-Top grinding brush is subject to wear; proper functioning of the brush is no longer guaran-
teed after extended use
Replace a severely worn grinding brush.
6.7.2.2 Service life and grinding cycles
Entering the service life of the card flats clothing

The value for the card flats clothing service life is derived from the values gained from the experi-
ence of the spinning mill.
If the cylinder clothings and the card flats clothings are changed at the same time, the values
entered for both parts have to be identical.
Changing the specified service life.

The service life (production) entered can be increased or reduced at any time in the respective data
mask.
After the changes the newly computed values are displayed in data screen 70.2.
Reset the service life after a card flats clothing change

After a card flats change, the value has to be reset to («0») in the corresponding data screen.
▶ Changing the service life of the card flat clothing. (☞ Part 4, Page100)
6.7.2.3 Changing the service life of the card flat clothing
C7xCBAData413_D

IGS
1. In data screen 41.3, in the group « IGS-top (Flats) » , in the line « Lifetime of clothing: » set
the experiential value.
Service life – card flats clothing 100 – 4,000 t
2. Go to line « End of service life: » , set behavior status.

◁ Grinding will be stopped, after the grinding budget is reached.
3. In data screen 41.3, line « Grinding time/life: » set the experiential value.
Grinding interval matched to service life 2 – 8 min
● Guide value 5 min
6.7.2.4 Adjusting the parallelity of the grinding brush to the card flats
4
3
11 1
14
8 13 9 12
10
8
4
«X»
+/-
3
1
-5
-4 2
-3
-2
-1
0
+1 6
+2
+3 15
+4 7 5
+5
CHWIA_00001931_001_01
1. In order to adjust the parallelity, the belts of the card flats must be correctly tensioned.
Preparation
2. Line up a card flat (2) and a line of bristles (10) of grinding brush (11) exactly with one another.
3. Disconnect the connection (8) to the pneumatic cylinder (9).
5. Adjust the actuator system lever (6) relative to the lever behind it (7) in such a manner that the
tip of the lever (7) points to the «0» position.
6. Firmly tighten all screws (5).
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 101

Maintenance
The slides shoes (15) must not touch the card flats (2).
However the card flats (2) must rest on the return rail.
Configure default setting (adjust on both sides)

8. Loosen the nuts (3).
9. Introduce the gauges (12) from the direction of the material feed.
10. Use screws (4) to adjust the distance («X») between bristles (10) and grinding brush (11).
Standard setting for the grinding brush relative to the card flats
Distance “X” (standard setting) 4.0 mm
11. Re-tighten the screws (1) and nuts (3) firmly.
Setting the fork head

12. The distance (X) is adjusted on both sides. (☞ Part 4, Page102)
13. Introduce the piston rod into the pneumatic cylinder (9).
14. Screw the fork head (13) in or out until the bores (8) are in line.
15. After the connection tighten the nut (14).
6.7.2.5 Check current consumption (with grinding brush contact on the card flats
clothing)
Measuring current
9 I II
1
2
3
80.1 4
85.2
5
x.xx A
x.xx A
6 7
xxxxxxxx
8
CHWIA_00004115_001_01
1. Remove the covers (2).

2. Activate the drive for grinding the card flats. (☞ Part 4, Page73)
4. In the line « Function: » select the function.

IGS
Function « Check grinding pressure »
5. In the line « Actual curr.,grinding drive: » read off the current.

◁ The actual current consumption is displayed.
6. 10 seconds the pneumatically-operated lever moves the first card flat into the grinding position.
7. The measured grinding pressure is indicated via a text message in the status line (8).
◁ Indication via the signal light (9).
◁ The measured actual current consumption is indicated under (7) in the data screen.
8. Execute the measurement over at least 2 card flats.

9. In the line « Grinding force: » read off the status.
« Normal »
The signal light is not illuminated.
The grinding pressure is correct.
« High »
« Too high »
The signal light is illuminated.
▶ Reduce the grinding pressure. (☞ Part 4, Page104)
« Low »
« Too low »
The signal light is flashing.
▶ Increase the grinding pressure. (☞ Part 4, Page104)
▶ Wait 10 card flats at a minimum after the last change in grinding pressure. Only afterwards will
the result of the grinding pressure test be saved.
6.7.2.6 Adjusting the grinding pressure
6
« » -5
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
7
-5
-4
6 -5
-4
-3
-3 -2
-2 -1
0
-1 +1
0
« » +1
+2
+2
+3
+4
+5
+3
+4
+5
7a 6 5 CHWIA_00001920_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 103

Maintenance
1. The grinding brush is set parallel to the card flat clothing. (☞ Part 4, Page101)
2. Check the position of the grinding brush. (☞ Part 4, Page105)
3. Check current consumption (with grinding brush contact on the card flats clothing)
Reducing grinding pressure

If actual status:
« Too high »
« High »
▶ Slightly loosen the screws (5) on both sides.
▶ Push the actuator system levers (6) several notches on the scale (7) in the direction ("-"
minus).
▶ Check the current consumption again and further adjust the grinding pressure with actuator
levers (6).
▽ If excessive current draw continues, the mechanical basic setting must be increased to
4.5...5.0.
▶ Adjust the parallelity of the grinding brush to the card flats. (☞ Part 4, Page101)
Increasing the grinding pressure

If actual status:
« Too low »
« Low »
▶ Move actuator levers (6) by a few notches on scale (7a) in direction (+).
▶ Make the adjustments on both sides.
▽ If the grinding pressure is still insufficient, the mechanical basic setting must be re-
duced from 3.5...3.0.
▶ After each change, check the status of the grinding pressure in data screen 70.3.
6.7.2.7 Installing the grinding brush
Note
Replace the grinding brush only if the bristles are severely worn.

Card flats cleaning
1. Apply thread-lock compound on the thread

(2). 1
2. Lightly screw in all screws (1).
3. Install the two parts of the grinding brush (3)
in pairs. Note the number. 2
3
4. Starting in the middle (4), tighten the screws
(1) with the prescribed torque.
Connection
Torque 10 N⋅m
5. Adjust the grinding pressure after installation. 4 3 1

6. Adjust grinding pressure.
CHWIA_00001913_001_01
6.7.2.8 Check the position of the grinding brush
1. Use a flashlight to check the grinding brush

from the side of the card chute.
In the sharpening process, the bristles of the grind-
ing brush must touch the card flats clothing, but
they must not penetrate it.
2. Use the opening in the side panel to carry out

the visual check.
3. Check whether the grinding brush bristles -5
uniformly touch the right and left card flats.

-4
-3
-2
-1
0
This measure ensures that the basic setting is cor- +1
+2
+3
rect. +4
+5
CHWIA_00001917_001_01
6.8 Card flats cleaning
6.8.1 Removing the cleaning unit of the card flats
Work material
Crane with chain hoist
of delivery!
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 105

Maintenance
1. Swing out the control cabinet (1).

2. Position the card flats in test mode.
◁ A card flat (2) is in the opening (A)
aligned to the marks (3).
◁ Card flat and clearer roller are opposite
of each other. A
◁ In this position the cleaning unit is adjus-
2
ted after re-installation.
1
person.
3. Disconnect all connections, such as motor

connections, pneumatic air lines and suction 3
units. CHWIA_00004116_001_01
5
6
4 A
CHWIA_00004117_001_01
4. Remove the nuts (3) on both sides.

5. Open the cover (4).
◁ Centre of gravity thus better
6. Pull on the tabs (5) in the arrow direction.
◁ The cleaning unit swing out to the stop (6).

Card flats cleaning
Lifting down the cleaning unit

7. Hook the hooks into the straps (5) on both
sides.
8. Lift off the cleaning unit carefully and move it 5
out of the machine.
Weight 150 kg
9. Set down the cleaning unit on a workbench.

10. Firmly screw the cleaning unit onto the sub-
strate.
◁ is secured against falling over.
11. Unhook the hooks from the straps (5).
CHWIA_00004118_001_01
6.8.2 Dismantle cleaning unit
Removing the casing and motors

CAUTION
Injury due to crushing due to the cleaning unit falling over
▶ Fasten cleaning unit (1) on the base.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 107

Maintenance

2. Remove the casing (3).
3. Remove the four screws (4).
3
2 6
5. Move out the gear motor (6).
Weight 10 kg
6. Remove the four screws (7). 2

4
7. Extend the motor (8).
Weight 7 kg
1 5
4 8
7
CHWIA_00004120_001_01
Removing clearer rollers

8. Screw in an eye screw (10) on both side of
the clearer roller. PW1
9. With the chain hoist, lift out the clearer roller
(PW1).
10
Weight 40 kg
◁ If necessary the clearer roller can be re- PW2
clothed. (☞ Part 4, Page109)
10. With the chain hoist, lift out the clearer roller
(PW2).
Weight 20 kg
◁ If necessary the clearer roller can be re-
clothed. (☞ Part 4, Page109)
CHWIA_00004122_001_01

Card flats cleaning
6.8.3 Re-clothing the clearer roller «PW1» and «PW2»
Note
Always re-clothe both clearer rollers.
The winding up of the clothing of the clearer roller «PW1» is described below. The winding
up of clearer roller «PW2» occurs in the same manner.
Preparation
1. The cleaning unit has been dismantled. The clearer rollers are removed. (☞ Part 4, Page107)
CHWIA_00001907_001_01
Preparing the clothing band

2. With needle nose pliers, pull the needles (2) out of the clothing band (1) until sufficient area is
present for the fastening of the clamp piece (3).
3. Mark the position for the hole in accordance with the drawing.
4. With punch pliers (4), or a similar tool punch out the hole.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 109

Maintenance
6.8.3.1 Fastening the clothing band
CHWIA_00001906_001_01
1. Pull in the clothing band (1) as shown in the illustration.

◁ The needles are aligned. as for pos.(2).
◁ The clothing band (1) is twisted once.
2. Fasten the beginning of the clothing band with the clamp piece (3).
Connection
Torque – clamping piece 4 N⋅m
◁ The needles (2) are aimed upward.
◁ The clamp piece (3) rests on all clamp points.
6.8.3.2 Winding up the clothing band
Conditions
✓ Two persons are necessary for the winding.
✓ Speed of the rollers for winding: 5 – 10 rpm

Card flats cleaning
CHWIA_00001905_001_01
1. As soon as the roller turns (3) the clothing band (2) must be lightly guided. (See Fig.). Only
guide, do not press together!
2. Prior to switching on, the weight (5) is still on the floor.
3. Switch on the drive.
4. The second person holds the clothing band (4) back so that the weight (5) lifts off of the floor.
The windings (1) must fit close against each other without overlapping.
◁ By holding the clothing band back, the weight lifts off of the floor and is suspended. This is
the only way for the clothing band to have the desired tension.
Fastening the clothing band on the end.
CHWIA_00001902_001_01
5. Stop the drive on the end of the roller.

6. Keep the clothing band tensioned until it is fastened.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 111

Maintenance
CHWIA_00001902_001_01
7. Use the marking (1), to determine the suitable tapped bore for the fastening of the clamp piece
(4).
8. In the area of the tapped bore, pierce the clothing band with the scriber (2).
9. At the puncture, screw in the thread cutter.
◁ The puncture will be widened.
10. Pull the needles (3) out of the clothing band until sufficient area is present for the fastening of
the clamp piece (4).
11. Use the screw (4) to fasten the clamp piece.
Connection
The clamp piece (4) must rest on all clamp points.
12. Cut off the clothing band behind the clamp piece (4).
6.8.3.3 Attaching a second clamp piece (execute on both sides)
CHWIA_00001903_001_01
1. Use the marking (1), to determine the suitable tapped bore for the fastening of the clamp piece
(4).

Card flats cleaning
2. Turn the roller (6) 180 degrees.

3. In the area of the tapped bore, pierce the clothing band with the scriber (2).
4. At the puncture, screw in the thread cutter.
◁ The puncture will be widened.
5. Pull the needles (3) out of the clothing band until sufficient area is present for the fastening of
the clamp piece (4).
6. Use the screw (4) to fasten the clamp piece.
Connection
The clamp piece (4) must rest on all clamp points.
7. Cut off the clothing band behind the clamp piece (4).
6.8.3.4 Closure on the edge
CHWIA_00001904_001_02
1. Remove the needles, on both sides, on the edge of the roller, on the entire perimeter.
2. Cut off the projecting clothing band (1) with a sharp knife.
Distance X ‒ from the cut to the clamping piece 2 mm
6.8.4 Installing clearer roller «PW1» and gear motor
Conditions
✓ The cleaning unit is removed and dismantled.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 113

Maintenance
1. Lift the clearer roller (PW1) via the eye

screws (10)into the housing.
2. Carefully insert the pin (1) into the bore (2). 10
PW1
3. Knock on the eye screw with the plastic ham-
mer.
◁ The bearing of the clearer roller is seated
full surface in the housing.
1 2
CHWIA_00004125_001_01
4. Carefully guide in the gear motor (6).

5. Screw in screws (4).
6. Screw in and tighten the screw (5).
7. Tighten the screws (4) firmly. 4
CHWIA_00004123_001_01
6.8.5 Adjusting the stripping blade for clearer roller "PW1"
▶ Install the clearer roller «PW1» and gear motor. (☞ Part 4, Page113)

Card flats cleaning

◁ Support (4) with stripping blade can be
moved in the arrow direction.
2. Loosen the screw (2). PW1
◁ The adjustment eccentric (3) can be
turned.
3. Use the card gauge to measure the distance 71
(71) over the entire length of the stripping
blade.
Adjustment point (71) 0.6 mm 4 1
Distance (71) is not correct 2
▶ Set the distance (71) on the variable ec- 3
centric (3).
1
Distance (71) is correct CHWIA_00004124_001_01
▶ Tighten the screws (1) firmly.

◁ Carrier with (4) stripping blade is
fixed in place.
4. Repeat work step 3 and readjust if neces-
sary.
The distance (71) over the entire length of

the stripping blade is correct.
▶ Tighten the screw (2) firmly.
◁ The adjustment eccentric (3) is fixed
in place.
6.8.6 Installing the clearer roller «PW2» and adjusting the stripping blade
1. Remove gear motor and clearer roller (PW1). (☞ Part 4, Page107)

2. Lift the clearer roller (PW2) via the eye screws (10) into the housing.
3. Knock on the eye screw with the plastic hammer.
◁ The bearing of the clearer roller is seated full surface in the housing.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 115

Maintenance
10
4
70
PW2
1
CHWIA_00004126_001_01

◁ The stripping blade (4) can be moved in the arrow direction.
5. Use the card gauge to measure the distance (70) over the entire length of the stripping blade.
Adjustment point (70) 0.80 mm
Distance (70) is not correct

▶ Set the distance (70) on the variable eccentric (2).
Distance (70) is correct

▶ Tighten the screws (1) firmly.
◁ Stripping blade (4) is fixed in place.
6. Repeat work step 5 and readjust if necessary.
7. Install the clearer roller «PW1» and gear motor. (☞ Part 4, Page113)

Card flats cleaning
6.8.7 Installing the casing and motor
1. Carefully place the casing (3) on the housing.

2. Fit screws (2).
3. Install the screw (8). 3
2
5. Fit on the motor (7). Move into the coupling
sleeve.
6. Screw in the four screws (6). 2
7. Check the axial play of the shaft coupling on
the motor (7).
Axial play of the coupling 1.5 ±0.5 mm 8
sleeve
6
Axial play is out of tolerance
▶ Adjust the coupling end piece on the
shaft. 7
6
CHWIA_00004120_002_01
6.8.8 Install cleaning unit
Work material
of delivery!
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 117

Maintenance
1. Hook the hooks into the straps (5) on both

sides. 7
5 8
2. Lift the cleaning unit and move it above the
installation location. 7
5
Weight 150 kg
3. Carefully lower the cleaning unit.

◁ Opening (2) is above the bolt (3).
◁ Bolt (7) is above the guide (8).
4. Completely lower the cleaning unit. 8
5. Unhook the hooks.
2
3
CHWIA_00004118_002_01

6. Remove the nut (3).
7. Hit on the tabs (5) in the arrow direction. 5
8. Extend the adjustment spindle (1) into the
journals (2).
9. Install the nut (3).
3
2
1
CHWIA_00004117_002_01

Card flats cleaning
6.8.9 Adjusting the cleaning unit
Adjusting the cleaning unit parallel

1. Ensure that the card flat (1) for the
measurement is in the right position.
(☞ Part 4, Page105) X
◁ Card flat (1) is positioned opposite of the
clearer roller.
2. Use the card gauge to measure the distance
(X).
Distance ‒ X 1 mm
1
Distance (X) is not correct
▶ Use the counter-nuts to set (3) the dis-
tance.
Distance (X) is correct

▶ Lock the counter (3) nuts. 3
3. Repeat work step 2 and readjust if neces- CHWIA_00004127_001_01
sary.
Checking the scale

4. After parallel adjustment check the display.
Distance ‒ X 1 mm
8
Display agrees with the distance (X).
In this case the scale is set correctly.
The display does not agree with the distance

(X).
▶ On both sides move the scale (7) until
the pointer (8) points to the line (+ 1mm).
7
CHWIA_00001891_001_02
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 119

Maintenance
6.8.10 Adjusting the penetration depth «PW1» into the card flat clothing
1. The cleaning unit is adjusted parallel.

2. Use the nuts (3) to adjust the penetration 72
depth.
Penetration depth (72) ≤−2.50 mm
● Default value −1.50 mm
◁ Pointer (7) shows the penetration depth
on the scales (8). 7 8
◁ The needles of the clearer roller plunge
into the card flat.
CHWIA_00004127_002_01
6.8.11 Set the cleaning brush for the sliding surfaces of the card flats
Adjusting the brush for the sliding surface
5 73
1
CHWIA_00001884_001_02
1. Position a card flat (1) precisely underneath the brush (4). (☞ Part 4, Page105)
3. Slide the gear unit (3) until the brush (4) touches the sliding surface (5) of the card flat (1).
4. From this point, move the gear unit (3) further by the specified distance (73).
Adjustment point (73)
Brush contact 2.00 mm

Doffing device
Checking the horizontal position of the brush.

5. Check the spacing (Y). Y
≥2 mm
If the brush (4) does not have sufficient dis-

tance from the clothing (7). 7
▶ Remove the (3) gearbox.
▶ Loosen the screws (6). 4
▶ Move the brush (4) to the outside in the 3
arrow direction.
▶ Tighten the screws (6) firmly. 6
If the brush (4) does not have sufficient dis-

tance from the clothing (7).
If the bristles are deformed.
▶ Replace brush. CHWIA_00001884_002_01
6.9 Doffing device
6.9.1 Re-clothing the doffer roller
The doffer roller must be replaced with a clothing from Graf with ‘Needle Finish’.
▶ After changing the clothing, the new clothing must not be brushed with a steel brush.
Clothings without ‘Needle Finish’ cause the problem that the doffer roller does not dispense (wind)
the web.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 121

Repair Universal Operating Manual
Maintenance
7 Repair
Restoring the target status
Removing, dismantling, repairing, adjusting, installing
The following repair tasks must only be executed when the machine is standing still and is safe-
guarded.
DANGER
7.2 Chute
7.2.1 Pressure monitor
7.2.1.1 Adjust the pressure monitoring
Configure pressure switch

1. Connect the pressure line (5) on the pressure
switch (4). 10 7
Connections P1+
2. Connect the shorter pressure line (6) on the 4

other connection.
3. Plug in the plug connectors (7) as specified in
the electrode documentation.
◁ Through this measure the switching logic
is correctly configured.
5
6
CHWIA_00004029_001_01

Chute
Positioning the intake filter

4. Use the screws to adjust (11) the compres-
sion (12) of the seal.
Distance ‒ Y 6 mm 13
◁ Through this measure the intake filter
(10) is correctly positioned in the material
flow. The batt (13) rubs on the intake Y
filter in passing, which promotes the self-
cleaning effect.
11 11 12
10
CHWIA_00004030_001_01
7.2.2 Feed unit
7.2.2.1 Remove the feed trough
Work material
Installation lift (☞ Part 4, Page250)
For mounting and dismounting the
feed trough, the feed roller and
opening roller in the card chute.
Lateral supports
Support (☞ Part 4, Page252)

feed trough in the card chute.
1. Remove the opening roller.

2. Remove the opening roller. (☞ Part 4, Page131)
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 123

Maintenance
7 6
6 2 8
2 3
5 2
CHWIA_00001303_001_01
1. Loosen the spring assembly tube (1) and remove the spring assembly, and slide in a thin sheet
metal element (1) on the licker-in (11).
Hint
Carry out all work on both sides
2. Install the lifting device (4).

3. Place the supports (2) on the platform (3) and bring the platform under the feed trough (6), until
the supports (2) are on the feed trough (6).
4. Unscrew the adjusting screws (7) of the screws (1).
5. From the inside knock the bolts (1) out of the feed trough (6).
6. With the lift device, move the platform (3) downward, until the feed trough (6) rests on the sup-
ports (5).
Note
The feed trough must not jam when it is lowered.
7.2.2.2 Checking the feed trough before installation
1. Check the feed trough for its condition prior to installation.

2. The same procedure is used for installation, but carried out in reverse order.

Chute
7.2.2.3 Feed trough installation
Checking the feed trough before installation

1. Check the feed trough for its condition prior to installation.
2. The same procedure is used for installation, but carried out in reverse order.
Feed trough installation
1 6
CHWIA_00001300_001_01
3. Pull the feed trough (6) up to the correct height

4. When the correct height has been reached, slide in the bolts (1).
7.2.2.4 Adjust feed trough. (Minimum distance)
Note
The eccentric was set at the factory for the minimum distance «X» between feed roller and
the feed trough. Accordingly, the adjustment must only be made if the distance X is no longer
the same as the basic setting.
▶ Detach the front covers until the feed roller and the feed trough are freely accessible for the
adjustment.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 125

Maintenance
Adjusting the feed trough (execute on both sides)
4
1
5
2 2
«X»
3
CHWIA_00001302_001_01
1. Place the tube (3) on the fifth visible marking point.

2. Use eccentric (2) to adjust the distance (X) between the feed roller (4) and the feed trough (5).
Distance X 1.00 – 1.20 mm
Note
The eccentrics (2) have to be flush on both sides with the bearing plates (1).
7.2.2.5 Adjusting the load of the feed trough
«5» 4
3
CHWIA_00001307_001_01
▶ For the basic setting of the tubes, (4) set to the fifth visible marking point on both sides.

Chute
1. The operating setting must be determined through trial and error.

2. Increase or decrease the load depending on the material and material density. For initial evalu-
ations, increase or reduce the setting by two marking points, and re-evaluate the material flow.
7.2.3 Feed roller
7.2.3.1 Removing feed roller
Work material
Pull-off aid (☞ Part 4, Page251)

Pull-off aid for the shaft pins of the
opening roller and the feed rollers

feed trough in the card chute.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 127

Maintenance
1
3
2
1
3
1 4
2
5
6
7
9
M16
8
CHWIA_00001297_001_01
1. Prepare the feed roller for removal.
Preparing for removal of the feed roller

2. First remove the opening roller.
3. Remove the opening roller. (☞ Part 4, Page131)
4. Remove the feed trough.
5. Remove the feed trough. (☞ Part 4, Page123)
6. Install the lifting device.
Removing feed roller

7. Place the supports (3) on the platform (4) and bring the platform under the feed roller (2), until
the supports (3) are on the feed roller (2).
8. Unscrew the screw by a maximum of 1...1 1/2 turns (= 2...3 mm) and the tension elements (7)
are released by a sharp tap on the screw head(9).
9. Remove the shaft journals (1).

Chute
Caution
Material damage due to jammed feed roller
▶ Do not damage the felt seals of the feed roller at removal and installation.
▶ To protect the sealing felt, slide thin strips of sheet metal (0.10 to 0.20 mm) between the
facing sides of the feed roller and the card chute wall.
▶ Do not tilt the feed roller when lowering and lifting.
10. With the lift device, move the platform (4) downward, until the feed roller rests on the supports
(6).
Removing seized shaft journals

12. Screw in the complete pull-off device (8) (long M16 screw with displaceable weight), into the
shaft journals (1).
13. By using light blows on the weight against the pulling off device (8), the shaft journal (1) can be
removed.
7.2.3.2 Install the feed roller in the card chute
Work material
Torque spanner
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 129

Maintenance
1
3
2
1
3
1 4
11
2
5
10
6
7
7a
9
M16
8
CHWIA_00001296_001_01
1. Clean the holes for the shaft pins (1) and the tensioning elements (7).
Note
Do not flush with solvents.
2. Lightly oil the tensioning elements (7) and (7a) with spindle oil.
Note
Do not use paste.
3. Coat the area beneath the screw head and the screw thread (9) with grease.
Note
When tightening the screw firmly, the torque generated will thereby be transferred to the
tensioning elements more effectively.
4. The slots (7a) of the tensioning elements (7) are offset by 90 degrees to each other.
5. The screws (10) must be tightened firmly.

Chute
Caution
Material damage due to jammed feed roller
▶ Do not damage the felt seals of the feed roller at removal and installation.
▶ To protect the sealing felt, slide thin strips of sheet metal (0.10 to 0.20 mm) between the
facing sides of the feed roller and the card chute wall.
▶ Do not tilt the feed roller when lowering and lifting.
7. Pull the feed roller (2) up to the correct height

8. When the correct height has been reached, slide in the shaft journals (1).
Connection
Torque – bearing journal, feed roller 130 N⋅m
7.2.4 Opening unit
7.2.4.1 Tightening the chain
1. Move the feed roller motor until the chain

tension is correct.
2. When checking you should be able to push
down on the chain to the degree specified.
Press in chain 3.0 mm 3m
◁ The chain must neither be tightened too m
loosely nor too tightly.
CHWIA_00001299_001_01
7.2.4.2 Removing the opening roller
Work material
Lateral supports
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 131

Maintenance
Pedestal (☞ Part 4, Page251)

For installation and removal tasks
on the card chute.
Plastic foil (☞ Part 4, Page251)

Protection for the surrounding parts
when removing the opening roller.
Pull-off aid (☞ Part 4, Page251)

Pull-off aid for the shaft pins of the
opening roller and the feed rollers
Preparing for removal of the opening roller.

1
10
11
2
3
4
19 12
5
6 13
18
17 9
14
7
7a
15
16
M16
30 CHWIA_00001322_001_01
1. Remove the driving belt (19).

3. Remove guide sheet (2) and front card chute wall (4).

Chute
4. Pull in two plastic foils (18) to protect the needles.

5. Remove the tension elements (6) and the felt seals (5).
7. Install the pedestal (15).
9. Install the carriers (14).
Removing the opening roller

▶ Wear cut-resistant gloves with flexible, puncture-proof latex coating in accordance with
EN 388:2003.
10. Bring the platform (12) of the lifting device (13) under the opening roller (10).
11. Unscrew the screw (16) by a maximum of 1...11/2 turns (= 2...3 mm) and the tension element
(7) is released by a sharp tap on the screw head.
12. Remove the screws of the bearing flanges (17) and pull off the shaft journals (9) and (11) to-
gether with the bearing flanges (17).
Caution
Material damage due to jammed opening roller
▶ The opening roller must not touch or tilt when lowering and lifting.
13. With the lift device, move the platform (12) downward, until the opening roller rests on the sup-
ports (14).
14. Remove the lifting device (13).
15. Roll the opening roller forward.
16. Slide a tube through the holes in the opening roller (10) and move the opening roller away us-
ing the assembly crane.
Shaft journal does not detach

17. Undo screw (16).
18. Screw in the complete pulling off device (30) (long M16 screw with displaceable weight) into the
M16 screw thread at the end of the shaft journal (9).
19. By using light blows on the weight against the pulling off device (30), the shaft journal (9) can
be removed.
7.2.4.3 Installing the opening roller
Work material
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 133

Maintenance
Lateral supports
Plastic foil (☞ Part 4, Page251)

Protection for the surrounding parts
when removing the opening roller.
Torque spanner
10
11
5
6 13
18
17 9
8 14
7
7a
8
16
CHWIA_00001321_001_01
1. Clean the holes for the shaft pins (9) and the tensioning elements (7).
Note
Do not flush with solvents.
2. Lightly oil the tensioning elements (7) and (7a) with spindle oil.
Note
Do not use paste.

Chute
3. Coat the area beneath the screw head and the screw thread (16) with grease.
Note
When tightening the screw firmly, the torque generated will thereby be transferred to the
tensioning elements more effectively.
4. The slots (7a) of the tensioning elements (7) are offset by 90 degrees to each other.
5. The screws (8) must be tightened firmly.
7. Place the opening roller (10) on the supports (14).
Note
Note the direction (tilt) of the needles.
8. Lay the belts (18) on the opening roller (10) to protect the needles.
9. Pull the opening roller (10) up to the correct height.
Note
Be careful not to get the opening roller stopped or jammed anywhere.
10. When the correct height is reach, slide in the shaft journals (9) and (11) with the bearing
flanges (17).
11. Fasten the bearing flanges (17).
12. Move the opening roller (10) until it makes contact with the shaft pins (9) (drive side)...
13. Install the felt seals (5) and the tension elements (6).
Connection
Torque – bearing journal, opening roller 130 N⋅m
7.2.4.4 Installing fallers
1. The fallers (2) are fastened with screws

M6x16 (1) to the roller.
1
Note
Brush the thread of the screws (1) with 2
Loctite 243 (non-hardening).
2. Starting in the middle of the fallers (2) tighten

the screws.
Connection
Torque – screws for fallers 10 N⋅m CHWIA_00001319_001_01
3. Small openings between the screwed profiles

of the fallers and the roller must be sealed
with silicone.
◁ There are no fibres hanging at the open-
ings.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 135

Maintenance
7.2.5 Delivery rollers
7.2.5.1 Removing the delivery rollers
1. Support the delivery roller with wooden blocks, so that it is secured.

2. The lifting device cannot be used for removal.
5b
5a
2 = 4 5 6
3 8
CHWIA_00001328_001_01
1. Remove the toothed-belt pulley (1) and loosen the stud bolts (2).
2. Pull off the flange bearings (3) and (8).
3. Unscrew the screw (1) on the outside.
Note
A screw is not mounted on the opposite (loose bearing).
4. Remove the drive shaft (6) from the delivery roller (5).

Chute
7.2.5.2 Installing the delivery rollers
5b
5a
2 = 4 5 6 7 =
3 8
9 9 CHWIA_00001327_001_01
1. Insert the seals (7) as shown on the drawing.

2. Introduce the delivery roll (5) into the card chute.
Note
In doing so make sure that the delivery roller (5) is not obstructed or blocked anywhere,
and that the laterally fitted seals (7) are not damaged or displaced. If necessary, put thin
metal shims between the front of delivery roller (5) and card chute wall (9).
3. Coat the drive shaft (6) with assembly paste and insert.
4. Install and firmly tighten the flange bearing (8) on the right-hand side of the machine.
Note
Do not use stud screws (2).
5. Align the delivery roller (5) horizontally.

6. Move the drive shaft (6) until it is flush with the ball bearing in the flange bearing (8) on the out-
side.
7. Adjust the delivery roller (5) laterally, so that is evenly aligned, and subsequently tighten the
screw (4) firmly.
8. Install the flange bearing (3) and firmly tighten the stud screws (2).
9. Check the lateral distribution of the delivery roller (5) again.
10. The toothed belt pulley (1) must be aligned with the drive pulley.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 137

Maintenance
7.3 Cylinder
7.3.1 Removing the tensioning band
▶ Unscrew the clamp screw in the lower position of the cylinder and take the seal on the top cyl-
inder shield.
7.3.2 Installing the tensioning band
Installation
3 3
~ 5 mm
2 4 2
CHWIA_00001624_001_01
1. Install the sliver halves (3) as shown in the Fig.

Note
Pay attention to the direction of rotation of the cylinder.
2. The clamp screws (4) must engage in the respective mating piece (2).
Tensioning slivers
3. Tension as tight as possible with the clamp screws (4).
Note
The sliver halves must not lift off of the inside of the cylinder.
4. The gap between the clamp pieces (2) should the same.

Cylinder
Positioning the slivers

5. Pull the seal (3) to the outside as far as possible.
7.3.3 Fasten cylinder covers
Note
All cylinder covers are fastened with special screws.
1
2 4
3
CHWIA_00001648_001_01
1. Carefully position and fasten the cylinder covers.

Hint
The shoulder (3) of the screw (2) must be in the screw hole of the cylinder cover (1). If
this is not the case, the spring assembly (4), which allows a certain elongation of the
covers, is no longer effective.
2. Install the cylinder cover (1) and screw in the screws (2) several turns.
Note
First pull the cylinder cover (1) on the side with the screw hole to the outside, so that the
shoulder (3) of the screw (2) can be centred in the screw hole.
3. First tighten the screw (2) on the side with the screw hole. Only after this has been done,
tighten the screw for the slot.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 139

Maintenance
7.3.4 Procedure for installing the cylinder cover
5
1
4
7
7
3 6
CHWIA_00001687_001_01
1. Before installing the covers, roughly adjust the adjustment segments (7). (☞ Part 3, Page52)
2. Install the cylinder covers (1) and (2), the tongue (6), as well as (4) and (5).
▶ The cylinder covers must not touch the clothing.
3. Fasten cylinder covers. (☞ Part 4, Page139)

4. Adjust these cylinder covers. (☞ Part 3, Page51)
5. Then install and adjust the remaining cylinder covers.
6. Check the adjustment points in the centre of the cylinder. (☞ Part 3, Page52)

Cylinder
7.3.5 Tongue
7.3.5.1 Removing the tongue in the area of the cylinder
4
3
CHWIA_00001677_001_01
1. Loosen the screw (3) with an Allen wrench. Push tongue (1) as far as possible in the direction
of doffer (2) and slightly re-tighten again.
2. Remove the IGS-classic or cylinder cover (4).
Caution
Tongue damage due to the scratches on the surface
▶ Caution when installing and removing.
▶ The surface must be free of fibre adhesion.
3. Hold the tongue (1) firmly and at the same time remove screws (3). Carefully move the tongue
(1) out of the machine.
Note
Make sure the seal strip that is fastened to the tongue does not sustain damage during
the removal process.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 141

Maintenance
7.3.5.2 Installing the tongue in the area of the cylinder
Caution
Tongue damage due to the scratches on the surface
▶ Caution when installing and removing.
▶ The surface must be free of fibre adhesion.
4
3
CHWIA_00001678_001_01
1. Lift the tongue (1) on both sides at the same time, position it and screw in the screws (3). Do
not tighten screws (3)!
Note
Caution, ensure that the seal strip that is fastened to the tongue is not damaged.
2. Push tongue (1) as far as possible in the direction of doffer (2) and slightly re-tighten.
3. Carefully install the IGS-Classic or cylinder cover (4). Then slide the tongue (1) towards the
IGS-Classic or cylinder triangle.
7.4 Card flats
7.4.1 Additional instructions:
▶ Measuring and adjusting card flats for production operation (☞ Part 3, Page89).
▶ Level and grind card flat clothings. (☞ Part 4, Page71)
▶ Remove, dismantle the card flat cleaning unit, replace and adjust clothing
(☞ Part 4, Page107).

Card flats
7.4.2 Inspecting the lubricating blocks of the card flats
3
2
1
~ 15 mm
CHWIA_00001885_001_01
1. Check the wear of the lubricating blocks.
Residual height – lubricating block: ≤15 mm

▶ Replace lubricating block.
Replace lubricating block

2. Prior to removal, slide back the holder (3) of the lubricating block (1) and arrest it in place with
the fixing screw (2)
3. Remove the holder (3) and replace the lubricating block (1).
4. After installing the holder (3), turn back the fixing screw (2) to the stop until it blocks.
7.4.3 Belts and deflection
7.4.3.1 Checking the deflection pulleys of the flat deflection unit
CHWIA_00001853_001_01
1. Swivel out the control cabinet on the left-hand side of the machine to ensure you can see the
deflection pulleys of the card flats.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 143

Maintenance
CHWIA_00001853_001_01
2. Observe the deflection pulleys on the left-hand side. Use a flashlight to watch the deflection
pulleys on the right-hand side. They have to turn together with the card flats.
3. If a deflection pulley stops, or if it turns irregularly or jerkily, the card flats will have to be re-
moved to clean the respective deflection pulley.
Note
Deflection rollers that do not turn can adversely affect the service life of the planetary
gear of the card flats drive unit.
4. Remove a soiled, non-turning deflection pulley.

5. Remove card flats. (☞ Part 4, Page80)
6. Remove card flats deflection pulley. (☞ Part 4, Page146)
7. Clean soiled deflection pulleys until they turn again freely.
▶ Re-install all removed parts.
7.4.3.2 Replacing the belts of the card flats
1. Both card flat belts are removed and installed

on the left-hand side of the machine.
2. Remove all card flats. (☞ Part 4, Page80)
4
3. Loosen the setting collar (1) and the deflec-
tion pulley (3) and move them inwards.
4. Maintain the position of the drive shaft (5)
using belts or ropes (4). 1
5. Remove the bearing cover (2).
2
◁ The card flats belt can be pulled out lat-
erally, through the opening that has been 5
created.
CHWIA_00001870_001_01

Card flats
6 6
1
CHWIA_00001871_002_01
6. Pay attention to the marking (6) on the card flat belt (1).
7. Position the card flat belt (1) before installation.
The arrows of the marking (6) must point in the running direction (arrow).
The card flats belts run synchronously: The markings (6) are aligned to each other.
8. Insert the card flats belt (1) through the open

space and fit it around the deflection pulleys.
9. The same procedure is used for assembly,
but carried out in reverse order.
CHWIA_00001871_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 145

Maintenance
7.4.3.3 Tension belt of the card flats
2 1 4
5
3
CHWIA_00001846_001_01

◁ The clamping device (2) is in the lowest position.
2. Use a screwdriver (3) to lift the clamping device (2).
The marking (5) must be in line with the upper edge of the clamping device (2).
3. Then first tighten the upper screw (1).
7.4.3.4 Removing the card flats deflection pulley
▶ Remove card flats. (☞ Part 4, Page80)
1. Remove the entire deflection pulley (1).

2. Remove covering flange (2). 5 1
3. Remove soiling around ball bearing (4).
2
4. Remove the seals (3) and (5).
3
5. Replace the seals (3) and (5) if they are de-
fective 4
6. Remove ball bearing (4).
7. Replace ball bearing (4) if damaged.
CHWIA_00001899_001_01

Card flats
7.4.4 Slip clutch adjustment on the card flats drive
2
009
010
011
012
013
CHWIA_00004132_001_01
1. Remove the cover (011) .

◁ The groove nut (2) is accessible.
Increase torque
2. Turn the groove nut (2) clockwise.
Measure on the circumference of the nut 6 mm
◁ The torque of the slip clutch increases by approx. 20 Nm.
Reducing torque
3. Turn the groove nut (2) counter-clockwise.
Measure on the circumference of the nut 6 mm
◁ The torque of the slip clutch decreases by approx. 20 Nm.
7.4.5 Entire card flats unit
7.4.5.1 Removing the card flats unit
Work material
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 147

Maintenance
Card flats unit, preparing for removal
CHWIA_00001845_001_01
1. Remove the proximity switches for the card flats and the suction monitoring on the left-hand
side of the machine.
2. Disconnect or remove all connecting parts necessary for suction at the card flats unit plus the
pneumatic lines.
3. On both sides, remove the red connecting pieces, used to secure the card flats unit.
4. Flip up the cover flap (1).
5. Fasten the support (2) onto the sides of the card flats unit (4).

Card flats
Attaching the load so that it is balanced
5 5
Right
Left 2
2
7 4
Left Right
Units
4+6+7 10 6
4+7 12 8
4+6 7 5
4 12 10 /11
CHWIA_00001864_001_02
4 Side shields - card flats unit 7 Set of card flats

6 Card flats cleaning
6. Read off the correct opening using the components in the table in the Fig.
The right opening is above the load's centre of gravity.
7. Hook the hooks (5) in the proper openings in the supports (2).
◁ Attached in this manner the load will be suspended horizontally.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 149

Maintenance
Lifting the card flats unit
10
9 9
8 8
CHWIA_00001881_001_01
8. Remove the locking screws (10) on both sides.

9. Loosen all screws and screws (8).
10. Turn the eccentric (9) 180 degrees.
◁ The card flats unit (4) will lift slightly.
11. Tighten the screws and screws (8) firmly.
12. Carefully lift the card flats unit (4) using the installation crane (3) and remove it from the ma-
chine.

Card flats
7.4.5.2 Installing the carding flats unit
7 8 8 7
6 6
5 5
CHWIA_00001882_001_01

2. Position the card flats unit (4) above the place of installation as accurately as possible and then
carefully lower it.
No parts jam.
3. Lower the card flats unit (4) sufficiently so that the levers (7) on all sides lie in the recesses of
the cross-members (8).
5. Use the eccentric screws (6) to lower the card flats unit (4) further until it is in its final position.
◁ The eccentric screws have to be able to move freely.
7. Re-install the safety screws (9) on both sides.
8. Replace all removed parts in their original positions.
▶ Procedure for adjusting the card flats. (☞ Part 3, Page91)
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 151

Maintenance
7.5 Doffer
7.5.1 Remove doffer assembly
Work material
Transport trolley
For transporting the licker-in and the
doffer group. A work platform can
be produced using the additional
support structures.
Preparatory work
14
16 15 13
160 mm
4 5 6 5 8 9 10 12 11
CHWIA_00001948_001_01
1. Remove the cover over the delivery traverse, the front covers in the sub-construction, as well
as the cover of the delivery shield.
2. On the right-hand side of the machine, remove the connecting pipe (15) for the suction system.
3. Disconnect all cables and product lines, run to the doffer group from the outside.
4. Unplug the cables to the proximity switch, and to the measuring device, and uncouple the com-
pressed air to the blow-in device.
5. Place the cables and plugs in the channel so that they are not damaged when moving out the
doffer group (12).
6. Remove the driving belts for driving the brush roll, the web collection (16) and the doffer.

Doffer
7. Position the hydraulic lifter (14) on a wooden beam (13) with a 160 mm height and position it
precisely under the support (1).
8. Raise the hydraulic lift (14) to within one millimetre under support (1).
Remove doffer assembly
14
16 15 13
160 mm
4 5 6 5 8 9 10 12 11
CHWIA_00001948_001_01
9. Carefully turn nuts (8) anticlockwise on both sides.

◁ In this way the doffer assembly (12) is swung downwards until the support (1) rests on the
hydraulic lift.
10. Remove the dowel screws (9) and swing away the spindles (10).
11. Using hydraulic lift (12), carefully swing the doffer assembly downwards until the transport
rollers (5) rest on the machine frame (6).
12. Place the transport system (11) in front of the machine, line it up at the height of the machine
frame and secure it.
13. Remove shear screws (4) from the holes using a pull-off aid (screw and washer).
14. Carefully push the doffer assembly (12) onto the transport system (11) and secure it with the
screws provided for this.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 153

Maintenance
7.5.2 Installing a doffer group
1. Fitting follows the same sequence as removal but in reverse order.

2. Align the doffer group so that both holes for the shear bolts (4) in the doffer assembly and in
the machine frame are lined up.
3. Slide the shear bolts (4) lubricated with assembly paste into the holes by hand.
Note
Do not use a hammer to knock in the shear bolts (4).
4. If necessary, the transport rollers can be adjusted by loosening the mounting screws of the
transport rollers (5) and realigning them using the eccentric. Tighten the screws again.
5. Coat dowel screws (9) with assembly paste and fix.
6. Re-install all removed parts.
7. Adjust the doffer to the cylinder.
8. Adjust the doffer. (☞ Part 3, Page63)
7.6 Take-off unit
7.6.1 Replacing the stripping blades
1. Determine whether the stripping blades must be replaced.
Stripping blades are worn out halfway.

▶ Replace stripping blade.
Adjusting the contact pressure of the stripping blade

2. Loosen the setting collars (1).
1
3. Let the stripping blade (2) rest on the bottom
or top delivery roller (3).
Note
Make the adjustments left and right.
4. Use a suitable tool(4) to turn the adjustment

rings (1) approx.1/8 of a turn and re-tighten.
Note
Through this measure the stripping
blades (2) are pressed onto the deliv-
ery rollers with light pressure (3).
4
CHWIA_00001967_001_01

Take-off unit
7.6.2 Removing the rollers
Option: Coiler
OR Non-woven fabric
OR Non-woven tape
Work material
Note
Each machine element (roller) can be pivoted. The side part of these machine elements are
fixed in place through bearing journals.
Preparing rollers for removal
5
1
6
2
CHWIA_00002003_001_01
1. Remove parts until the machine element to be removed (3) to (7) is accessible and can be re-
moved.
2. The securing stud bolts (1) Unscrew 2 mm.
Note
Pull out the bearing journals (2) only after the respective roller has been secured with the
lifting device.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 155

Maintenance
Lifting the roller

3. Hook the lifting device (8) with the straps
onto the crane and lift until the straps (9) can 8
be fitted to the roller.
4. Carefully raise the lifting device (8) a little.
Note
Do not raise all the way as the bearing 9
journals have not been removed yet.
5. Remove bearing pins (2) from the holes, and

use the lifting device to remove the roller. CHWIA_00002001_001_01
7.6.3 Install rollers
1. Installation occurs in the reverse of the sequence described for removal.

2. Use the lifting device (8) to position the roll correctly.
3. Fit the bearing journals (2) lubricated with assembly paste into the holes by hand.
Note
Do not use a hammer to fit the bearing journals (2).
4. Reinstall all removed parts.

5. Adjust the rolls.
6. Adjust the rollers of the doffer device. (☞ Part 4, Page156)
7.6.4 Adjusting the rollers of the doffer device
Setting procedure
1. Adjust the doffer roller (1).
2. Adjust upper delivery roller (2).
3. Adjust the lower delivery roller (3). 4
4. Adjust clearer roller (4).
5. Carry out the adjustment on both sides.
2
1
CHWIA_00002022_002_01

Take-off unit
7.6.4.1 Adjusting the doffer roller
1. Doffer roller is adjusted to the clothing height. (☞ Part 4, Page69)
2. Loosen the lock nuts (5).

3. Use the adjustment screw (6) to set the dis-
tance (82), then counter the screw. 1
Measuring point «82»
Distance, doffer / doffer roller 0.225 mm
82
CHWIA_00002022_003_01
7.6.4.2 Adjusting the upper delivery roller
Option: Coiler
OR Non-woven fabric
OR Non-woven tape

2. Use the adjustment screw (11) to set the
distance (85), then counter the screw. 1
Distance, doffer roller / deliv- 0.15 mm 85
ery roller
2
11
12
CHWIA_00002022_004_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 157

Maintenance
7.6.4.3 Adjusting the lower delivery roll
Option: Coiler
OR Non-woven fabric
OR Non-woven tape
1. Unscrew the nut (9) and unscrew the stud

screw (8) far enough that during the adjust-
ment procedure it no longer rests on the
bearing lever.
Note
Do not unscrew the nut (10).
2. With the special nut (7) and the nut (6) set
the distance (87).
Measuring point «87» 6
Distance, lower delivery roller 0.50 mm
/ upper delivery roller 7 87
3. Firmly tighten the special nut (7) and the nut 8 2
(6) against each other.
4. After firmly tightening, check the adjustment 9
over the entire width. 10
CHWIA_00002022_005_01
5. Place the stud screw (8) on the bearing lever

and counter with the nut (9).
7.6.4.4 Adjusting the clearer roller

2. With the adjustment screw (14) set the dis- 4
tance (83). 13
83
Distance, bottom doffer roller / Approx. 0.10 mm
clearer roller (must not touch the
doffer roller)
14
1
CHWIA_00002022_006_01

Take-off unit
7.6.5 Adjusting the web bridge
3
6
X 4
CHWIA_00002016_001_01
1. Doffer roller is adjusted to the clothing height. (☞ Part 4, Page69)

2. Remove the suction connection of the suction channel (7).
3. Swing the suction channel (7) to the back until it rests on the cover.
4. Remove the drive belts of clearer roller (1) and delivery rollers (2).
5. Swing the cleaning brush (1) to the back.
6. Raise the upper delivery roller (2) and support it left and right with two wooden battens (3).
7. Loosen the screws (4) slightly.
8. Set the specified distance between doffer roller (6) and web bridge (5) using a gauge.
Distance “X” between web bridge and doffer roller
Measuring point «84» 2.60 mm
9. Tighten screws (4) and check the set distance («X») over the entire width.
Checks
10. Remove the wooden battens (3) and swing the delivery roller (2) back.
11. Check the distance between the delivery rollers (2).
12. Swing the clearer roller (1) and the suction channel (7) back to their initial positions and check
the settings.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 159

Maintenance
7.6.6 Adjusting the distance between the delivery rollers and cross apron
Note
Screw 3 is used to set the distance between the bands 1 of the cross apron and the delivery
rollers 2. This setting can deviate from the standard setting depending on the material and
the delivery speed.
2
1
«X»
CHWIA_00002114_001_01
1. The bands (1) of the cross apron must be as parallel as possible to the delivery rollers (2).
2. Use the adjusting screw (3) to set the desired dimension.
Basic setting «X» 3.0 mm
7.6.7 Adjusting the distance between the delivery rollers and cross apron
Note
With rubber buffer 3 the distance between the bands 1 of the cross apron and the delivery
rollers 2 is set. This setting can deviate from the standard setting depending on the material
and the delivery speed.

Take-off unit
2 1
«X»
CHWIA_00002069_001_01
1. The bands (1) of the cross apron must be as parallel as possible to the delivery rollers (2).
2. Use the rubber buffer (3) to set the required dimension.
Basic setting «X» 3.0 mm
7.6.8 Replacing the gas pressure spring
Adjusting the gas pressure spring
2
1
4
CHWIA_00002125_001_01
1. Determine whether the gas pressure spring still has sufficient force.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 161

Maintenance
2
1
4
CHWIA_00002125_001_01
If the gas pressure spring is slack.

▶ Replace the gas pressure spring.
2. The two units (1) and (2) must be adjusted and must be in closed position.
Caution
Machine part damage due to incorrectly set gas pressure springs
▶ When closing, the piston must not rest on the lower stop.
4. Use an appropriate tool to push up the support (4) all the way and tighten screws (3).

Cross apron
7.7 Cross apron
7.7.1 Adjusting the distance between cross apron and disk roller support
Option: Coiler
1 3
CHWIA_00002135_001_01
1. The distance between the delivery rollers and the cross-apron (1) is set.
2. Adjust the distance between the delivery rollers and cross apron. (☞ Part 4, Page160)
3. Use the rubber buffer (3) to vertically adjust the disk roller support (2).
Note
The disk roller support (2) must not extend beyond the cross-apron support (1).
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 163

Maintenance
7.7.2 Pulley roll suction adjustment
Option: Coiler
4
2
CHWIA_00002124_001_01
1. Adjust disk roller support (1).

2. Adjust the distance between cross apron and disk roller support. (☞ Part 4, Page163)
3. Loosen the screws of the suction tube (3).
4. Adjust the position of suction tube (3) so that the rubber seal (4) is flush with the suction unit
housing (2) of the disk roller support (1).
Note
The position of disk roller support (1) must not be changed in the process.
7.7.3 Replacing the cross apron
Option: Coiler
OR Non-woven tape
1. Determine whether the cross apron must be replaced.
If there is significant wear

▶ Replace cross apron.

Cross apron
Remove cross apron
1
3 3
CHWIA_00002126_001_01
2. Remove the upper and side covers (4).

3. Remove the belt (1).
CAUTION
Injury through lifting and carrying heavy components > 25 kg
▶ Use auxiliary equipment for lifting and transporting.
4. Remove the screws (3) and lift the entire cross apron unit (2) out of the machine.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 165

Maintenance
Installing the cross apron
5
3 3
1
CHWIA_00002128_001_01
5. Lift the cross-apron unit (2) into the machine and screw in the screws (3).
6. Adjust the cross-apron unit (2) as parallel as possible to the delivery rollers (5) and then tighten
the screws (3).
7. Finally, tighten the screws (3).
8. Install the drive belt (1) as shown in the Fig.
7.7.4 Installing and tensioning the cross aprons
Option: Coiler
OR Non-woven tape
Note
The cross aprons must be correctly tightened after replacement.
Through the different condition of the cross aprons they are tensioned differently.
Cross apron for cotton (colour white)

Caution
Damage – cross apron Due to incorrect voltage
▶ Follow the instructions when installing and tensioning.

Cross apron
1 2
X CHWIA_00002140_001_01
1. With the screws (3) and the screw (4) release the tension of the cross apron.
2. Remove the cross apron.
3. In the prescribed spacing, mark the un-tensioned new cross apron (2) with 2 lines.
Marking – cross apron (white)
Distance between the lines in de-tensioned status 500.0 mm
4. Insert the marked cross apron (2).

5. Use the screw (4) to tension the cross apron until the dimension required between the lines is
reached.
Tension cross apron (white)
Distance between the lines in tensioned status 505.0 mm

◁ The cross apron (2) is tensioned.
Cross apron for chemical fibres (colour green)

7. With the screws (3) and the screw (4) release the tension of the cross apron.
8. Remove the cross apron.
9. In the prescribed spacing, mark the un-tensioned new cross apron (2) with 2 lines.
Marking – cross apron (green)
Distance between the lines in de-tensioned status 500.0 mm
10. Install the new cross apron (2).

11. Use the screw (4) to tension the cross apron until the dimension required between the lines is
reached.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 167

Maintenance
Tension cross apron (green)

Distance between the lines in tensioned status 502.0 mm

◁ The cross apron (2) is tensioned.
7.7.5 Adjusting the distance between the cross aprons
Note
The distance between the cross aprons can be adapted to the outflowing material.
1 2
CHWIA_00002127_001_01
▶ The deflection pulleys (1) and (2) are eccentrically bearing-supported and can be turned 180
degrees. The distance between the aprons varies depending on their install position.
Distance between the cross aprons
Distance X 13.0 mm
Distance X 18.0 mm
Distance X 23.0 mm
7.8 Disc rollers
7.8.1 Adjusting the disk rollers
Option: Coiler
Note
The disk rollers must be aligned exactly so that the disk rollers do not touch the sliver funnel.

Disc rollers
Checking and adjusting
3
1
2 1
CHWIA_00002023_001_01
1. The correction of the difference can be carried out, depending on the situation, on the upper (1)
and lower (2) disk rollers.
2. Check the alignment of the disk rollers (1) and (2) with a ruler.
If differences are detected.

▶ Use shims to compensate differences (4).
▶ Adjust the sliver funnel. (☞ Part 4, Page173)
Disk rollers (1) and (2) are replaced.

▶ Calibrate the measuring device in the delivery. (☞ Part 4, Page237)
7.8.2 Setting the distance between the disk rollers
Option: Coiler
▶ Calibrate the measuring device in the delivery. (☞ Part 4, Page237)
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 169

Maintenance
Standard settings
1
»X
2
»
3
CHWIA_00002123_001_01
1. Loosen nut (1) slightly and set the clearance «X» with screw (2).
Default setting: Distance «X» between the disk rollers 0.15 mm
The contact surfaces of the disk rollers must not come in contact, if the card sliver is missing.
Check setting
2. Move lever (3) up and then let go off it
4. In the line « Delivery scanner card B6: » read off the value.
Calibration value – minimum distance, disk rollers 200 – 400
Value is greater
▶ In this case the distance must be reduced.
Value is less than

▶ In this case the distance must be increased.
5. Repeat this process several times to avoid flawed measurements.
◁ It is clear, whether the disk rollers are set correctly.
7.8.3 Adjusting the pressure between the disk rollers
Option: Coiler
▶ Spring pressure (default setting) depending on the width of the disk rollers used...
Spring pressure at
Width of disk roller: 9.0 mm 600 N
Width of disk roller: 15.0 mm 1,150 N

Disc rollers
3 4
1 600 N / 1150N
CHWIA_00002092_001_01
1. Set the spring pressure.
Spring pressure adjustment

2. Align sheet (1) with the scale on the lower edge of the ring (2), or align it with the end of the
spring (3).
3. Load or unload the spring (3) using screw (6) until the upper edge of the ring (5), or the begin-
ning of the spring (3) comes up to the height of marking (4).
Note
The spring pressure now corresponds to the default value.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 171

Maintenance
7.8.4 Removing the distance measuring device in the delivery unit
Option: Coiler
6
2
3 4
1 2
CHWIA_00002132_001_01
1. Remove the holder (4) with the plunger (5).

3. Pull the plunger coil (2) downward and out.
Note
Do not damage the cable (3).
4. Remove the measurement converter (1) with the connected plunger coil (2).

Disc rollers
7.8.5 Installing the measuring device in the delivery unit
Option: Coiler
6
8 (2 Nm)
2
5
2
1 2 4
CHWIA_00002133_001_01
1. Install the measurement converter (1) with the connected plunger coil (2).
2. Slide the plunger coil into the bore (8) of the holder piece. At the bottom, the plunger coil (2)
must be flush with the holder (8).
Note
Do not damage the cables. In installed status, the cable connection is at the bottom.
3. Tighten the screw (6) firmly with a torque of 2 Nm.

4. Secure holder (4) again with the solenoid plunger (5).
▶ Adjust (position) the plunger in the plunger coil. (☞ Part 4, Page239)
7.8.6 Adjusting the sliver funnel
Option: Coiler
Work material
Card gauge (☞ Part 4, Page248)
For general settings and checks.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 173

Maintenance
1. The alignment of the disk rollers must be adjusted.

2. Adjust the disk rollers. (☞ Part 4, Page168)
3. The distance of the alignment rollers (without card sliver) must be adjusted.
4. Setting the distance between the disk rollers. (☞ Part 4, Page169)
6 7
X» 4
»
8
4
2
1
CHWIA_00002130_001_01
1. Adjust.
Adjusting the lateral play between sliver funnel and feed rollers
2. Loosen the screw (2) slightly.
3. Using the feeler gauge (3), measure the distance to the left and right between the disk rollers
(4) and the sliver funnel (5).
4. Slide the funnel plate (1) until the distances left and right are the same.
Caution
Damage – sliver funnel due to touching on the disk rollers
▶ The sliver funnel must not touch the disk rollers.
5. Firmly tighten the screw (2) and check the adjustment again.
Adjusting the position of the sliver funnel

7. With the screw (8) adjust the distance «X» between the funnel plate (1) and the bearing of the
disk roller.

Disc rollers
Distance «X» between the support and the bearing of the disk 2.10 mm
roller
Note
The sliver funnel (5) must never touch the disk rollers (4). For certain materials, increas-
ing the distance «X» can have a positive effect on fly.
8. The spring (6) has to pull flush the funnel plate (1) to the screw (8).
7.8.7 Adjusting the blow-in device for the sliver
Option: Coiler
Note
Via the deflection of the lower disk roller, the lever activates the pneumatic switch. Starting at
a specific position compressed air is blown into the area of the two disk rollers. For all sliver
weights this blowing in must be not be triggered during normal production.
1. The distance between the disk rollers (without card sliver) is set.
3. The pressure between the disk rollers is set.
4. Adjust the pressure between the disk rollers. (☞ Part 4, Page170)
Basic setting without card sliver between the disk rollers

1. If the lever (5) rests on the screw (6), the distance «X» between the cam (8) and the ring (9)
must equal the basic setting.
Distance «X» between cam and ring 0.20 – 0.40 mm
Note
Correct with the screw (6), if the basic setting is not right.
Check the point in time for the escape of compressed air:

3. Pull the lever (2) upwards slowly.
4. The compressed air must not escape until the display on the data screen shows the required
value.
Displayed value on the data screen 3,500 – 3,700
● Default value 3,600
Correct the setting if the compressed air escapes under the required value:
5. For access to the pneumatic switch (3) remove the cover in the area of the disk rollers (1).
6. Loosen the screws (4) slightly.
7. With a few turns remove screw (7).
8. Move up pneumatic switch (3).
9. Repeat the check.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 175

Maintenance
10. When the adjustment is correct, tighten screws (4) and tighten screw (7) up to pneumatic
switch (3).
7.9 CBA coiler
7.9.1 Lifting and moving the coiler
Option: Coiler CBA
1. Disconnect all parts connected to the card.
WARNING
Injury due to faulty work equipment
▶ Only use safe and tested work equip-
ment.
▶ Only use suitable work equipment.
▶ Do not use damaged work equipment.
2. Fit the supports (1) and the caster jacks to

the coiler as shown in the illustration.
Note
Weights: CBA-5-600/750/800/1000: CHWIA_00002461_001_01
Approx. 400/550/550/800 kg.
7.9.2 Adjust calendar rolls
Option: Coiler CBA
Adjusting the difference between calendar rolls
4
3 3 1
2
X
CHWIA_00002330_001_01
1. Measure the minimum distance between the calendar rollers (3).

CBA coiler
Caution
Damage of the calendar rollers due to failure to comply with the minimum distance
▶ Set the minimum distance.
2. Use the adjusting screw (4) to set the minimum distance (X).
Minimum distance (X) 0.1 mm
3. Use lever (1) to relieve the load on the housing (2) and to put it under load again.
4. Check the minimum distance (X) between the calendar rollers (3).
Adjust guide
5. With the screw (5) adjust the play between
the plate (6) and the housing (2).
5
The housing (2) must not jam when opening and
closing. 6
CHWIA_00002503_002_01
7.9.3 Adjusting the distance to the calendar rollers
Option: Coiler CBA
▶ Use shims (2) to adjust the distance (X)

between the delivery trumpet (1) and the
calendar rollers (3).
Distance "X" between calendar rolls and delivery
funnel
Distance X ≤1.00 mm
1 2
4
CHWIA_00002503_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 177

Maintenance
7.9.4 Tensioning the belt for the calendar rollers
Option: Coiler CBA
1. Prior to installation, mark the belt (4) with 2

marks (1) in slack status.
Dimension X
Distance between markings 200.0 mm 3
2. Loosen the screws (2) and fit on the belt (4)
while slack.
2
Caution
Material damage due to incorrectly ten-
sioned belts
1 1 4
3. Use the tensioning device (3) to tighten the X CHWIA_00002332_001_01

belt (4) to the prescribed tension.
Dimension X with belt taut. 200 mm + 1.6%
(Measured distance between tension = 203.20
markings.) mm
▽ If there is insufficient tension, the belt will
run off the guide rollers.
7.10 SB coiler module
7.10.1 Removing the clearer lips from the drafting system cylinders
Option: Coiler SB
1. Open the hood.

2. Swing up the loading arm.
3. Remove the web bridge.

SB coiler module
1. Remove the complete sliver guide unit. To do

this, loosen the screws (32). 32
33
32
CHWIA_00002911_001_01
2. Raise the clearer lip at the delivery cylinder 4

(3) from the groove and remove by pulling 1
forward (in the direction of the arrow).
2
Note 1
In this process the metal edge (4) of
the clearer lip (3) points in the direction 2
of the arrow, and the level surface
3
must be on top.
3. Lift the clearer lip in the guide groove at the 3 5

CHWIA_00002753_001_01
feed cylinder (1) and remove it from the rear
(in the direction of the arrow).
4. Lift the clearer lip in the guide groove at the
middle cylinder (2) and remove it from the
rear (in the direction of the arrow).
Note
In this process the rubber edge (1) of
the clearer lip (2) or clearer lip (5) must
point in the direction of the arrow, and
the level surface must be on top.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 179

Maintenance
7.10.2 Installing clearer lips for drafting-system cylinders
Option: Coiler SB
1. Push in the clearer lips on the delivery cyl- 4

inder (3), on the middle cylinder (2) and on
the feed cylinder(1) in the direction of the ar- 1
row, and move it downwards into the guide 2
groove.
1
Note
In this process the rubber edge (3)
2 3
of the clearer lip (5) must point in the
direction of the arrow, and the level
surface must be on top.
3
5
CHWIA_00002923_001_01
2. Install the complete sliver guide and then

firmly tighten the screws (32). 32
33
32
CHWIA_00002911_001_01
1. Fit the web bridge.

2. Bring the weight arm into locking position.
3. Close the hood.

SB coiler module
7.10.3 Web bridge and sliver funnel
Option: Coiler SB
The web bridges forms the draw frame sliver

from the web. In addition the web bridge is
equipped with the sliver jam monitoring.
The top and bottom inserts of the web bridge 33
have injector bores, through which compressed 32 33
air is routed for pulling in the material.
The required air volume for material take-in, must
be adapted to the material being processed. 45
The web bridge (31) contains interchangeable
inserts. The upper insert, which in size depends
on the material, and the lower insert (only replace 35
34 31 45
if there is wear. CHWIA_00002702_001_01
If there is a sliver jam (the web plate (32) will be

pressed out of the production position. Sensor 84
monitors the web plate and thus detects the sliver
jam. The machine is switched off.
7.10.3.1 Adjust the magnets for the web bridge
Option: Coiler SB
Note
If the installed web bridge wobbles, it must be adjusted.
This is done by moving the two right magnets on the right bearing for the calendar shaft and
front roller. The two left magnets are not adjustable.
The exact and firm position of the web bridge must be reached automatically, when inserting
into the machine.
1. Open the drafting system hood and fold away the loading arm from the drafting system.
2. Remove the entire web bridge.
3. Remove the web bridge. (☞ Part 4, Page184)
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 181

Maintenance
1. Using an Allen wrench, unscrew the threaded SB-L 395h

pin (44), which fixes the magnet (45) in place. 47
2. Slide the upper magnet (45) with the pos-
terior positioned threaded pin (46) into the
proper position. A
45
3. Loosen the threaded pin (48), which fixes the
lower magnet in place (49).
A
4. Slide the lower magnet (49) with the posterior
positioned threaded pin into the proper posi- 49 44
tion.
5. Fix the newly adjusted magnets (45) and (49) 46
in place with the associated threaded pins 48
(44) and (48). 45
44
Note
The position of the web bridge is right, 48
if it is firmly seated in the machine, 49
without wobbling.
CHWIA_00002773_001_01
7.10.3.2 Installing the web bridge
Option: Coiler SB
▶ Press on the web bridge at the intended po-

sition upstream of the calendar shaft, where
pulled in by four magnets, it automatically
locks in place.
33
32 33
45
35
34 31 45
CHWIA_00002702_001_01
1. Bring the loading arm into the fixing position.

2. Close the hood.

SB coiler module
7.10.3.3 Removing the sliver funnel in the web bridge
Option: Coiler SB
Note
The sliver funnel in the web bridge is determined depending on the material and the weight
of delivered sliver. The values stated in Part 3 are guiding values, i.e. certain deviations are
possible in material-related borderline cases.
1. Remove the entire web bridge.

(☞ Part 4, Page184) 39
2. Remove the web sheet (32).
3. Loosen the threaded pin (42) with the Allen
wrench.
4. Push out the sliver funnel (39) upwards.
32
42
31 CHWIA_00002771_001_01
7.10.3.4 Installing sliver funnel in the web bridge
Option: Coiler SB
Note
The values stated in Part 3 are guide values, i.e. certain deviations are possible in material-
related borderline cases.
1. On the new sliver funnel, (40) prior to install-

ation (39), check the two injector holes and 40 39
clean if necessary.
2. Push the new sliver funnel (39) into the web
bridge (31 ) from above and fix it in place with
the threaded pin (42).
3. Insert the complete web bridge (31) into the 32
machine.
42
4. Install the web bridge. (☞ Part 4, Page182)
31 CHWIA_00002701_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 183

Maintenance
7.10.3.5 Remove the web bridge
Option: Coiler SB
1. Open the hood.

2. Swing up the loading arm.
▶ Detach the web bridge (31) from the magnets

manually and take it out.
33
32 33
45
35
34 31 45
CHWIA_00002702_001_01
7.10.3.6 Automatic material feed – functional description
Option: Coiler SB
The required air volume for material take-in, must

be adapted to the material being processed. 37
To pull in the material, at a location (36) of the
36
web bridge (31) air is introduced, which is then
distributed to the lower insert of the web bridge 39
38
(40) and to the upper insert of the web bridge
(39). The required air volume is set with the lower
threaded pin and the upper threaded pin 38 mm
(37), positioned laterally on the web bridge (31).
31
40 SB-L 395b
CHWIA_00002769_001_01
7.10.3.7 Adjusting the air flow to the automatic material feed
Option: Coiler SB
1. Pay attention to the functional description. (☞ Part 4, Page184)
Preparations
▶ Make the adjustment completely and only in the prescribed sequence.
2. Remove the entire web bridge. (☞ Part 4, Page184)

3. Take the web plate off of the web bridge.

SB coiler module
4. Remove the delivery top roller. (☞ Part 2, Page41)
Step 1: Adjustment on the lower web bridge

5. Adjust the lower threaded pin (38), so the air
supply is as small as possible.
Adjusting the air flow rate for the material feed
Turn in threaded pin clockwise The air quantity 38
decreases
Turn out threaded pin counter- The air quantity
clockwise increases
SB-L 395k
CHWIA_00002774_001_01
6. Insert the web bridge (31).

7. Check the settings of the air volume: Hold
some material onto the lower insert of the
web bridge (40) and monitor the air injection
of the material into the sliver duct (41) with
the activation of the "TURN key" (S4) (on
position II).
Note 31
The material must be sucked into the
sliver duct (41) with the lowest possible
air volume. 40
41
8. If necessary, correct the air volume to the
lower insert of the web bridge (40).
S4 SB-L 395c
CHWIA_00002770_001_01
Step 2:
9. Lift out the web bridge (31).
10. Unscrew the upper threaded pin (37) as far 37
as possible, at the most flush with the web
bridge (31).
39
11. Insert the entire web bridge (31).
12. Pull material into the machine.
13. In the jog mode, monitor the material being
pulled in into the sliver channel.
Air flow rate for the material feed
Excessive air quantity The material tears.
The upper-most SB-L 395g 31
sliver layer in the CHWIA_00002772_001_01
can might get dam-

aged.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 185

Maintenance
Air flow rate for the material feed

Air volume too small Material is not 37
pulled into the
sliver duct.
39
14. If necessary, correct the air volume to the
upper insert of the web bridge (39).
SB-L 395g 31
CHWIA_00002772_001_01
1. Install the delivery top roller.

2. Install the top rollers and the top delivery roller. (☞ Part 2, Page42)
7.10.4 Drafting-system top roller
7.10.4.1 Checking the top rollers of the drafting system for wear
Option: Coiler SB
1. The top roller cots (1), (2), (3) and (7) must
be ground approximately every 500 operating
hours.
2. The top roller cots (1), (2), (3), (7) can be re-
ground all the while the diameter exceeds 36
mm.
7 SB-M 2 379
CHWIA_00002744_001_01
3. Once the top roller cots have been re-ground, it may be necessary to reset the S25 contact
screws. (☞ Part 3, Page129)
▶ Pay attention to the information concerning grinding. (☞ Part 4, Page187)

SB coiler module
7.10.4.2 Grinding the top roller cots in the drafting system
Option: Coiler SB
Grinding Interval
Grinding the top roller cots at regular intervals leads to a reduced occurrence of wound material
and ensures the true running of the top rollers.
Without grinding of the top roller cots there is danger of deterioration of V% deterioration.
The top roller cots have to be re-ground after approximately 500 operating hours.
The cot manufacturer specifications are to be observed for the re-grinding procedure. Softer cots
are more likely to need re-grinding than harder cots.
The grinding intervals depend on the cot surface, roller speed, roller load, type and fineness of the
fibres, mineral dust on the fibres, as well as avivage (man-made fibres).
The re-grinding interval typically is determined based on experience. When grinding, the cot sur-
face is completely processed. Do not keep the grinding intervals too large.
Grinding depth and tolerance
0,03 AB
A Ra 0,8 + 0,2 B
Ø 38 ...36
Ø 15
100 ... 160
258
CHWIA_00002835_001_01
▶ Prior to re-grinding, the actual diameter has to be determined of the cot in a cold state.
the nominal diameter of the top roller cot is 38 mm.
The top roller cots can be re-ground to a diameter of 36 mm.
Top roller cots with a diameter below 36 mm have to be replaced.
▶ The grinding depth is approx. 0.2 mm per re-grinding cycle.

Note
0.3 mm per re-grinding cycle may be necessary for soft cot quantities.
The grinding depth depends on the wear of the cot. Apparent cuts, tears or the like have to be
ground until all visible damage has been removed.
The grinding tolerances for true running of the top roller cot between the two journals (at 15 mm in
diameter) must be < 0.03 mm.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 187

Maintenance
The grinding tolerance for parallel cots must be < 0.08 mm. < 0.08 mm.
Surface condition
Roughness of the cold cot surface: Ra 0.75 ... 0.95 µm (or 0.8 + 0.2 µm) in compliance with DIN
4768.
The depth of surface roughness should only be measured after the cot has cooled to room temper-
ature.
A calibrated instrument should be used to measure the cot at three different places and determine
the mean.
The cot surface roughness depends on various factors, such as the quantity removed from the cot
surface; the grinding time; the condition of the grinder; and the type and hardness of the cot.
Studies have shown that the surface profile directly influences the tendency for wound material to
occur on the top roller. The cot surface profile to be achieved thus depends on the grinder and the
grinding tools used and has to be adjusted accordingly.
● Grinding wheel diameter: 200 ... 500 mm.

● Grinding wheel width: 25 ... 45 mm.
● Grit size: 45 ... 80 µm, ceramic-bound, H level of strength (soft to medium-hard).
● Stone: Porosity 14.
● Clean and hone the grinding wheel with a diamond at regular intervals.
● Circumferential speed of the grinding wheel is 1800 ... 2000 m / min.
● Spindle unit speed: 300 ... 500 rpm.
● Feed: 300 ... 400 mm / min.
Execute the grinding procedure in multiple steps with decreasing feed-rate of the grinding wheel.
The last grinding is to be carried out as the fine-grinding with the lowest feed-rate. The overall con-
tact duration (length of time the cot is in contact with the grinding wheel surface) should be approx.
10 seconds. The contact duration is directly dependent on the grinding wheel material used and
has to be adjusted accordingly. The smoother the cot surface, the shorter the contact period is to
be set.
The roller has been designed so that the roller body can rests in the centre bore holes during grind-
ing, “Grinding between tips”.
UV or chemical treatment of the top roller coating is recommended after grinding. Such a treatment
smoothes the top roller coating.
▶ Adjust machine shutdown due to lap formation. (☞ Part 3, Page129)
7.10.4.3 Changing the top roller cots
Option: Coiler SB
Note
Ground top rollers can be fitted with new cots. If the top roller cots have been ground below a
diameter of 36 mm, they will have to be replaced.
A hydraulic press with the corresponding accessories has to be utilised for the removal and
fitting of press cots (Pressfit, Alupress).

SB coiler module
▶ Remove the top rollers and the top delivery roller.
1. Slide the guide pin (3) onto the take-up (2) of

the hydraulic cylinder.
5 8
◁ The top roller (7) is between the guide 1 1
26 m m
15 m m
pin (3) and the perforated plate (4).
2. Make an auxiliary pin (8) so that the iron core
(1) can be guided through the perforated
plate (4).
3. Turn on the hydraulic cylinder (6).
◁ The hydraulic cylinder pushes the iron
core (1) through the perforated plate (4),
the cot (5) is pulled off via the guide pin
(3).
4. Change over the hydraulic cylinder (6). 6
2
5. Remove the cot (5) from the guide pin (3). 3
7
4
CHWIA_00002765_001_01
6. Slide the iron core (1) on the receptacle (2)

on the hydraulic cylinder.
7. Push the guide pin (3) through the perforated 1
5
plate (4).
8. Slide the cot (5) onto the guide pin (3).
◁ The iron core (1) is between the take-up
(2) of the hydraulic cylinder and the guide
pin (3).
4
9. Turn on the hydraulic cylinder (6).
◁ The hydraulic cylinder (6) slowly presses
the iron core (1) into the cot (5), until the
cot is seated centrally.
6
Note 2
1
The iron core has to be aligned prop- 5
erly! 3
CHWIA_00002763_001_01
10. Change over the hydraulic cylinder (6).

11. Remove the top roller.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 189

Maintenance
7.10.5 Setting the exhaust-air sliders
Option: Coiler SB
▶ Open the hood.
Exhaust air sliders for top drafting system suction

1. The exhaust air slider (1) for top drafting-
system suction is adjustable from above.
2. First the cover (5) must be removed with the 3 6
push-button combinations.
3. Then the screw (3) on the slotted hole of the
exhaust air slider (1) must be loosened so
1
that the adjustment can be executed.
The exhaust air sliders must be set in such a man- 6
ner that accumulated dirt is extracted at the suction
points, without removing fibres from the material.
4. Pay attention to the position of the screw (3)

5
in the slotted hole. CHWIA_00002921_001_01
◁ It indicates the remaining suction unit

cross section.
Exhaust air sliders for bottom drafting system suction

5. The exhaust air slider (2) for bottom drafting-
system suction is adjustable from above.
6. For this the screw (4) on the slotted hole of
the exhaust air slider (2) must be loosened
so that the adjustment can be executed.
Note
The position of the screw (4) in the
slotted hole indicates the remaining
suction unit cross section. 2
4
CHWIA_00002664_001_01

Can changer
7.11 Can changer
7.11.1 Remove changer trolley
Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler CBA
1
2
CHWIA_00002451_001_01

Note
The screws (2) for clamping the driving belt do not have to undone.
2. Remove the changer trolley (3).
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 191

Maintenance
7.11.2 Replace and tighten the drive belt for the changer carriage
Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler CBA
5 6
600 mm
1 2
12
8 7 750/800/1000 mm
5+/-1mm
1 2 2
3 7 8
CHWIA_00002449_001_01
Note
Replace the drive belt for the changer carriage and tighten it depending on the type of coiler.
Replacing the drive belt

1. Pull in the drive belt (2) and slightly tighten and counter the nuts (1).
Tensioning the drive belt

2. Pre-tension the drive belt (2) with the aid of the tensioning device (3). In this process, the cover
(8) must rest on the tube (7).
Hint
The changer trolley (6) must be flush with the baseplate of the coiler at the rear.

Can changer
Hint
Before tightening, the drive belt between the clamping plate (5) and the mating piece (4)
must still be easy to move. (provide max. 1 mm.)
3. Starting from this point, tension the drive belt with the clamping device.
Drive belt tension distance
Tensioning distance, can diameter 750/800/1000 mm 4.0 – 6.0 mm
● Default value 5.0 mm
Tensioning distance, can diameter 600 mm 11.0 – 13.0 mm
● Default value 12.0 mm
4. Align the changer trolley flush with the base plate and the clamp plate (5).
7.11.3 Adjusting the distance of the can plate to the cover plate
Option: Coiler SB
OR Coiler CBA
4 1 2 3 4
5 5
9 8 7 6
CHWIA_00002552_001_01
1. Adjust distance.
Setting the distance «X»
4 1 2 3 4
5 5
9 8 7 6
CHWIA_00002552_001_01
2. Remove the screws in the can plate (1) .

3. Moove can plate (1) by turning drive (3) .
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 193

Maintenance
4 1 2 3 4
5 5
9 8 7 6
CHWIA_00002552_001_01
◁ The opening (2) rests on an adjustment point.

4. Through the opening (2) use the jackscrews (8) to adjust the distance (X) from the can plate (1)
to the cover plate (4) .
Distance from can plate to cover plate
Distance X 2.0 – 3.0 mm
Note
The shims (7) are fixed to the base plate (6) and must be pressed onto the floor by the
jackscrews (8) .
5. Do the setting at all four adjustment points.
Checking the distance

6. Turn the can plate by hand. In this way, distance “X” can be checked at various positions.
Final adjustment
7. Once the distance (X) is set, make sure the jackscrew (9) is also reinforced by the floor.
8. Tension drive belt.
9. Tension the V-belt of the can plate drive. (☞ Part 3, Page132)
Plastic supports
10. If the can plate load is too high, e.g., the can is overfilled, the plastic support fixtures (5) provide
additional support for the can plate.
Note
The plastic supports are not adjustable.

Operating unit
8 Commissioning without material

8.1 Operating unit
8.1.1 Setting the operating mode
1. Depending on the situation, first select the

right operating mode.
Password Level 2
C7xCBAData801_D
Setting the mode for maintenance

Setting the mode for tests

Setting the mode for configuration

5. In data screen 80.1 the operating mode « Change configuration » is selected.
◁ Data screen 43.1 and 43.2 can be changed.
Setting the mode for production operation

13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 195

Commissioning without material Universal Operating Manual
Maintenance
8.1.2 Testing the operating unit

2. In the line « Test mode: » select the « Act-
ive » mode.
If an LED is not illuminated.

▶ Replace operating unit.
3. Press the Stop button to end test mode.
C7xCBAData841_D
8.2 Configuring the control unit
These settings must be configured once, when commissioning.
8.2.1 Setting the mode for configuration
▶ In data screen 80.1 the operating mode « Change configuration » is selected.

8.2.2 Equipment
8.2.2.1 Configuring the machine equipment
Configure machine type

2. In the line « Card type: » select the machine
type.
Machine type:
● C 70 L
L = "low", performance low
● C 70 M
M = "medium", performance medium
● C 70 H
H = "high", performance high
● « C 70 W Web Sliver »
Version with cross apron in the delivery C7xCBAData431_D
● « C 70 W Card Web N »
Version without cross apron in the deliv-
ery
● « C 70 W Card Web S »
Version prepared for compacting rollers
◁ The machine type is set.

Configuring the control unit
Configuring the number of licker-ins

4. In the line « Licker-in » enter the number of licker-ins.
Number of licker-ins:
● 1
● 3
◁ The number of licker-ins is configured.
Configuring the type of cylinder drive

6. In the line « Cylinder drive: » configure the type of drive.
Speed
Drive type of the cylinder: « Converter Co/Sw » 500 – 930 rpm
Drive type of the cylinder: « Converter MMF » 500 – 750 rpm
Drive type of the cylinder: « Change gears » 500 – 880 rpm
◁ The type of drive is configured.
Note
For the model with change pulleys, the cylinder speed is set via the pulleys. Upon reach-
ing the nominal speed, the motor is connected to the mains supply. When starting or
stopping, the cylinder is accelerated or braked via the delivery frequency converter.
Configuring the type of card flat

8. In the line « Flat type: » configure the type of card flats.
Type of card flat:
● « Revolving flats »
● « Fixed flats »
◁ The type of card flats is configured.
Configuring the version of flat drive

10. In the line « Flats drive: » configure the design.
Procedure:
● « Varvel »
● « Tornado »
◁ The design is configured.
Configuring the converter composite

Note
By connecting the frequency converters U11 and U12 to one another and with the appropri-
ate equipment, the doffer delivery motor is supported by a generator in the case of a power
failure. The remaining fibre material on the doffer is conveyed by the delivery rollers.
Switch off this function at low line voltage (≤ 360 V), otherwise the production will be stopped
as would be the case in a power failure.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 197

Maintenance

12. In the line « U11/U12 interc.activ.: » select the option.
Option:
● No
The machine is equipped to receive electrical support in the case of a power failure. The
intermediate circuit connection between frequency converters U11 and U12 must be wired.
Connect the cables according to the current diagram.
● Off
The machine is not equipped for electrical support in the event of a power failure. The com-
posite of the intermediate circuit between frequency converters U11 and U12 is not wired.
If the supply voltage drops below 360 volt, the machine production is stopped as would be
the case in a power failure.
◁ The composite is configured.
Configuring the type of coiler

14. In the line « Coiler: » configure the type of coiler.
Type of coiler:
● « SB-1000 »
● « SB-800 »
● « SB-750 »
● « SB-600 »
● « RSB-420 »
● « RSB-450 »
● « RSB-470 »
● « RSB-500 »
● « RSB-600 »
● « CBA-5-600 »
● « CBA-5-750 »
● « CBA-5-800 »
● « CBA-5-1000 »
◁ The type of coiler is configured.
Configuring the disk roller

16. In the line « Disk rolls: » configure the width of the disk roller.
Option: Coiler
Option: Coiler CBA

◁ The width of the disk roller used is configured.

8.2.2.2 Configuring options
1. In data screen 80.1 the operating mode « Change configuration » is selected.

Option – configure network

3. In the line « Network: » configure the option.
Option – network:
● « No »
● « Yes »
At connection of SPIDERweb, UNIcon-
trol, with Rieter Remote Panel.
4. Enter the network address for each machine
via the numerical keyboard on the operating
unit. The numbers can be found in the elec-
trical system documentation.
C7xCBAData432_D
Option – configure IGS-Classic

5. Configure data screen 43.2.
6. In the line « IGS-classic (cylinder): » configure the option.
Option – IGS-Classic:
● « No »
● « Yes »
◁ The option is configured.
Option – configure IGS-Top

8. In the line « IGS-top (flats): » configure the option.
Option – IGS-Top:
● « No »
● « Yes »
Configure Option Rieter quality monitor

10. In the line « Rieter Quality Monitor (RQM): » configure the option.
Option Rieter quality monitor:
● « No »
● « Yes »
Configure option – knife adjustment

11. Configure data screen 43.2.
12. In the line « Licker-in/Vane transposition: » configure the option.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 199

Maintenance
Option – knife adjustment:

● « Automatic »
● « Manual »
Option – configure drive licker-in

14. In the line « Drive: » configure the option.
Option – knife adjustment:
● « Converter »
● « Change gears »
8.2.3 General set-up values
8.2.3.1 Configuring date and time
C7xCBAData401_D
Setting the date

2. In the line « Date: » set the current date.
Calendar date day DD/MM/YYYY [8]
Setting the time system

3. In the line « Time: » select the desired time system.
Time system
12 h AM/PM HH/MM [8]
24 h HH/MM [5]
Setting the season

4. In the line « Time in: » select the current season.
Season
If normal time is ● « Normal time »
When the time is advanced one hour ● « Summer time »
5. Adjust the efficiency calculation and display. (☞ Part 4, Page202)

8.2.3.2 Units, setting up operation
C7xCBAData402_D
Entering units
Option: Coiler
▶ In the line « Unit of measure: » select the desired unit.

Unit of measure – length and weight:
● « Metric »
● « Imperial »
▶ In the line « Unit sliver weight: » select the desired unit.
Unit for sliver weight:
● « ktex »
● « Ne »
● « Nm »
● « gr/yd »
Entering units
▶ In the line « Unit of measure: » select the desired unit.

Unit of measure – length and weight:
● « Metric »
● « Imperial »
▶ In the line « Web weight, unit: » select the desired unit.
Unit for web:
● « g/m »
● « g/m2 »
● « gr/yd »
Configuring the display

2. In the line « Basic screen: » select the desired overview screen.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 201

Maintenance
Main screen:
● 1
● 2
3. In the line « Data page selection: » select the favourite data screen.
Direct selection - data screen:
● 10.1
● 10.2
● 10.3
4. Adjust the efficiency calculation and display. (☞ Part 4, Page202)
Setting the display mode for electronic support

6. In the line « Operation: » select the desired display mode.
Operation « Extended »
Setting the display mode for production operation

8. In the line « Operation: » select the desired display mode.
Operation « Standard »
8.2.3.3 Adjusting the efficiency calculation and display

2. In the line « Time basis efficiency: » enter the desired time base.
Time base for calculation of machine efficiency:
● 2h
● 4h
● 8h
Example 4 h
In this case the rolling machine efficiency is calculated and displayed in the basic screen according to the last 4
hours.
The shorter the time basis, the faster the efficiency reacts to events, e.g. machine downtimes.

4. In the line « Efficiency selection: » select the desired display format.
theoretically-possible production. The time in which the machine was switched off is in-
cluded in the calculation.
● « Machine »
The machine efficiency reflects the machine availability during these hours. The time in
which the machine was not used without a queued fault is not included in the calculation.

8.2.3.4 Configuring languages
Activating required languages

2. In the line « French: » set whether the lan-
guage is needed.
Language activation:
● « Yes »
● « No »
3. Activate all languages required with « Yes ».
4. Deactivate all of the languages not used with
« No ».
◁ The languages « English: » and « Ger-
man: » cannot be deactivated.
C7xCBAData403_D
8.2.3.5 Configuring direct selection in the data screen
Note
After configuration, a frequently required data screen can be selected in the overview screen
with the first program button.
The data screen shows which data screen has been configured for direct configuration.
▶ Enter the password. (☞ Part 2, Page49)
▶ Use the "PLUS ENTER" key or the "MINUS ENTER" key on the “Direct-selection data screen”
line to select the required screen number.
◁ The old value is changed and the new value is saved.
8.2.4 Setup values of the extended operation
These settings are only necessary in rare situations Without explicit instruction you can ignore
these settings and leave them as they were set in the factory.
8.2.4.1 Setting the switch off delay for doffer slow speed to maximum

2. In the line « Creep speed: » read off the
current switch-off delay.
◁ The current switch-off delay is noted and
can be reset later.
3. In the line « Creep speed: » set the max-
imum switch-off delay.
C7xCBAData4130_D
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 203

Maintenance
Creep speed timeout 1 – 10 min

● Default 3
◁ Maximum switch-off delay is set.
C7xCBAData4130_D
8.3 Control unit
8.3.1 Perform a cold start
▶ Activate the Reset key (1) with a sharp pin.

◁ A cold start will be triggered.
◁ All passwords will be reset to the original
status.
◁ All other adjustment values remain intact.
1
CHWIA_00004383_002_01
8.3.2 Replace battery
Removing the battery

Note
Machine settings, shift data in the data memory are lost if the battery is changed in
de-energised status!
Caution
Destruction of electronic components due to static energy
▶ Before starting work on electronic components, the person undertaking the task must
make sure that static electricity is discharged, by touching the machine earth cable or
other earth connections.

Control unit
1. Use a screwdriver to remove the cover (1) of

the battery.
2. Pull on the pull-out strip (2).
◁ The battery (3) comes easily out of the
holder.
CHWIA_00003603_001_01
Inserting the battery into the control unit

3. Place the pull-out strip (2) correctly in the
battery compartment.
◁ This enables the battery to be pulled out
later.
▶ Do not touch the battery with

non-insulated tools.
4. Grasp the battery with two fingers on the

facing sides.
5. Insert the new lithium battery (3) into the bat-
tery compartment, with the correct polarity.
6. Re-attach the cover. CHWIA_00003604_001_01
8.3.3 Replace D95K module.
Module D95K
1 LED status display
2 Front panel
X1 CAN bus interface
X2 Electric power supply
X3 Digital counter inputs
X4 Digital inputs
X5 digital outputs
X6 Analogue inputs
2 1
X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
CHWIA_00002324_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 205

Maintenance
Removing D95K module

1. Disconnect all plug connections (X1...X6).
2. Loosen both screws.
3. Lift out the module.
Installing D95K module

4. Install the module in the reverse of the sequence described for installation.
5. Connect and firmly tighten the plugs (X1...X6) again.
8.3.4 Setting the node address of the CAN I/O module CX408
▶ Set rotary switches (SW0) and (SW1).

See the electrical system documentation for information on the settings
8.3.4.1 LED 2 "Status" on module CX408 is flashing green (2 pulses)
The controller visually indicates the tripping of the

time monitor for refreshing the digital and analog
outputs.
If a CAN object remains off within the set time
(default: 640 ms), the affected outputs will be
reset and the green LED starts flashing with a
double pulse.
After the arrival of the first valid object, the cur-
rent values are immediately applied.
However, the green LED only reverts to normal
operation after a time delay of 30 s. The time
delay is used to identify occasional failures or
drop-outs of the outputs. Otherwise these faults
can only be detected with much difficulty.
CHWIA_00000009_001_01

1 Controller shows the tripping of LED flashes green (2 pulses) ▶ Identify the cause for the
the time monitor. tripping of the time monitor.
✗ ▶ Execute a hardware reset
(switch off/switch on)

Control unit
8.3.4.2 LED 2 on module CX408 is illuminated orange or red
LED 2 shows the status.
CHWIA_00000009_001_01

1 Normal operation Data exchange is running ▶ None!
LED is illuminated green
2 Faulty outputs The CAN bus controller is in grid ▶ None!
operation.
LED is illuminated orange
3 Outputs are not supplied or there LED is flashing orange ▶ Execute a hardware reset
is no monitoring of the sensor (switch off/switch on)
supply. ✗ Continue with: 4
4 Warning: The node number was LED flashes red ▶ Reset the node number.
altered during operation. ◁ The new node number
will be ignored and the
function of the node
remains intact.
5 CAN-IO module may have an ✓ ▶ Execute the function check
error on CAN I/O module CX408.
Function check negative ▶ Check feed and wiring.
Final measure ▶ Replace module.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 207

Maintenance
8.3.4.3 LED 2 "Status" on module CX408 during the run-up phase
Run-up phase means: Initialisation and establish-

ing the connection with the CAN network.
If an error occurs during the run-up phase, the
green LED stops flashing. The error is displayed
through the periodic flashing of the red LED.
CHWIA_00000009_001_01

1 Run-up phase Fault-free ▶ None!
LED is flashing green
3 Configuration EEPROM not valid LED is flashing red (1 pulse) ▶ Contact ELO Service.
4 Error at initialization of the CAN LED is flashing red (2 pulses) ▶ Contact ELO Service.
module ✗ ▶ Replace CX408 module.
8.3.4.4 Setting the node address of the CAN I/O module CX408
▶ Set rotary switches (SW0) and (SW1).

See the electrical system documentation for information on the settings

Safety circuit
8.4 Safety circuit
8.4.1 Function test – safety relay
1. Bring machine to starting position. (☞ Part 2, Page13)

2. Switch on the machine with the main switch. (☞ Part 3, Page71)
3. Check whether the machine is ready for operation. (☞ Part 2, Page15)
4 7 5
2-3 6
1
CHWIA_00004003_001_01
1 Emergency stop button 5 Door safeguard on the chute

2 Safety relay "Watchdog" 6 Door safeguard – drive side
3 Frequency converter 7 Hood safeguard – coiler
4 Key switch – flat service
▶ Test elements (1) to (7). The tests are described below.
If the function of all elements is OK:

▶ Enter the passed function test in the protocol (PROTOCOL SAFETY-CIRCUIT-LOOP).
If the function of one of the elements is faulty:

▶ The machine is no longer safe. The machine must not be operated any longer.
▶ Replace the faulty element as an entire unit.
▶ Execute the function test of the safety relay again.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 209

Maintenance
8.4.1.1 Testing emergency stop buttons
1. Press the emergency stop button (S8).

◁ Status message 250 « EMERG.-OFF button, card S8 » is displayed.
Result of the function test OK
2. Unlock the emergency stop (S8) button.

8.4.1.2 Testing safety relay "Watchdog"
Conditions

2. In the line « Execute tests: » activate the
test.
◁ Test is activated.
3. With the forward cursor button select
the next line.
◁ The next line is highlighted.
4. With the PLUS-APPLY button switch
the function of the highlighted line.
◁ The following text "Watchdog on K20"
is displayed.
C7xCBAData824_D
◁ Safety relay K20 changes to 0.
◁ Status of the line « Door monitoring
relay card K22 » changes to 1.
◁ Safety relay K20 changes to 1.
◁ Status of the line « Door monitoring
relay card K22 » changes to 0.
8.4.1.3 Testing the frequency converter
Conditions

Safety circuit

2. In the line « Execute tests: » choose the «
Yes » selection.
◁ The test is started. The appropriate fre-
quency converter can be selected.
the inverter to be tested.
◁ The line with the selected inverter is
highlighted.
4. Trigger the test with the PLUS button .
◁ The message « 109 Establish the con-
nection to the converter » is displayed. C7xCBAData842_D
5. Waits for several seconds.

◁ 1 0 0 0 is displayed: The signal "establish
connection" is transmitted.
◁ 1 1 0 0 is displayed: Confirmation from
inverter "connection established"
◁ 1 1 1 0 is displayed: Signal "activate
safety relay" is transmitted.
8. Wait one second.
◁ 1 1 1 1 is displayed.
Result of the function test
Testing frequency converter connection U11-U12

9. With the cursor forward key select the line « Test connection ».
◁ The line « Test connection » is marked.
◁ The message « 109 Establish the connection to the converter » is displayed.
◁ 1 0 0 0 is displayed: The signal "establish connection" is transmitted.
◁ 1 1 0 0 is displayed: Confirmation from converter "connection established"
13. Press the START button.
◁ 1 1 1 0 is displayed: Signal "activate safety relay" is transmitted.
14. Wait one second.
◁ 0 1 1 1 is displayed for U11
◁ 0 1 1 1 is displayed for U12
◁ 1 1 1 1 is displayed for U11-U12
Result of the function test
▽ 0 1 1 0 is displayed for U11 or U12
Relay K26 not OK
▽ 0 1 1 0 is displayed for U11-U12
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 211

Maintenance
▶ Wiring is incorrect The last digit (0) means that S2 on converter U12 not set. Check
wiring U12 / U12.
In accordance with electrical system documentation
8.4.1.4 Testing the key switch – flat service
1. Turn the key switch (S6) to the right.

◁ Status message 254 « Safety relay (maintenance) K23 » is displayed.
2. Turn the key switch (S6) to the left.

8.4.1.5 Test the door safeguard on the chute
1. Open the door.

◁ Status message 452 « Chute door open S40 » is displayed.
2. Close the door.

8.4.1.6 Testing the door safeguard – drive side
1. Open the door.

◁ Status message 252 « Door safeguard, driving side, card S18 » is displayed.
2. Close the door.

3. If the result is not OK; Then set the switch (☞ Part 4, Page213).
8.4.1.7 Testing the hood safeguard of the coiler
Option: Coiler CBA
▶ Open the hood.

◁ Status message 253 « Coiler, hood open S15 » is displayed.
▶ Close the hood.
▶ If the result is not OK; Then set the switch (☞ Part 4, Page215).
Option: Coiler RSB
▶ Open the hood.

◁ Status message 253 « Coiler, covers open S18..S21 » is displayed.
▶ Close the hood.

Adjusting the door locking mechanism
Option: Coiler SB
▶ Open the hood.

◁ Status message 253 « Coiler, covers open S18..S20 » is displayed.
▶ Close the hood.
8.5 Adjusting the door locking mechanism
8.5.1 Adjusting the door locking mechanism and the safety switch
5
3
4
CHWIA_00002176_001_01
1. The switching cam (3) is fastened with captive screws (4).

2. The switching cam (2) must fit precisely into the opening of the safety switch (5).
3. Safety switch can only be moved slightly.
4. The adjustment on the fixed switching cam (3) is executed via the fastening plate (1).
Checking the safety switch electrically

6. In the line « Door safeguard card S18 » read off the status.
7. Close the door.
1
▶ The signal that the limit switch outputs is in order.
0
▶ Adjust the limit switch or switching cam until the switch point is exceeded.
8. Open the door.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 213

Maintenance
0
▶ The signal that the limit switch outputs is in order.
1
▶ Adjust the limit switch or switching cam until the switch point is exceeded.
Testing the door locking mechanism

Conditions

10. In the line « Execute tests: » activate the
test.
◁ Test is activated.
the next line.
◁ The next line is highlighted.
12. With the PLUS-APPLY button switch
the function of the highlighted line.
◁ « Unlock door S18 » is displayed.
C7xCBAData824_D
◁ Status of the line « Unlock door S18 »
changes to 1.
◁ The door can be opened.
◁ Status of the line « Unlock door S18 »
changes to 0.
◁ The door is locked again.

Drives
8.5.2 Adjust the hood safeguard
Option: Coiler CBA
CHWIA_00002509_001_01
▶ The counter piece (1) must pass exactly into the opening in the safety switch (2).
8.6 Drives
8.6.1 Checking and tightening toothed belts
Note
For optimal transmission of force the belt must be properly tensioned. Belts that are over-
tensioned can damage bearing and belt. If the belts are too slack, the teeth of the belt may
skip which could lead to faults and damage.
For a long service life belt drives must be kept clean. In particular, contamination deposits on
the tooth root must be avoided.
1. If a specific belt tension is not specified, use

the following general tensioning guideline. L
d
F
CHWIA_00003420_001_01
2. In the middle of the distance (L) press on the belt with force (F).
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 215

Maintenance
Deflection – toothed belts (d)

Deflection (d) as a % of the distance between axes (L) 1.50 %
Example: Deflection (d) at approx. 1.5% of the distance between Approx. 10 mm
axes (L=640 mm)
Force (F) Must be adapted to the belt thickness
3. Measure the deflection (d).
Deflection (d) corresponds to 1.5% of the length (L).

▶ In this case the belt tension is in order.
Deflection (d) is less than 1.5% of the length (L).

▶ Increase belt tension.
Deflection (d) is greater than 1.5% of the length (L).

▶ Decrease belt tension.
Belt drives
4. Tension belts on the chute and card. (☞ Part 3, Page32)
5. Tension belt on the coiler. (☞ Part 3, Page41)
6. Tension belts on the calender. (☞ Part 4, Page178)
7. Tension belts on the can changer. (☞ Part 3, Page132)
8. Tension the cross-apron. (☞ Part 4, Page166)
8.6.2 Check motors
▶ Check the status of all motors (status of the fans, bearing noises).
8.6.3 T1000 frequency converter
8.6.3.1 Replacing the frequency converter
Personnel
Plant electricians

Drives
Remove frequency converter

DANGER
Life-threatening electric shock due to voltage on the intermediate circuit capacitor, al-
though main switch is switched off
▶ Work must be executed by a qualified electrician.

▶ Wait 10 minutes after disconnecting from the mains supply (discharge time).
▶ During the discharge time do not touch any components that could be energised.
▶ The LED (CHARGE) is illuminated as long as the voltage on the intermediate circuit is >
50 V. After the LED goes out, wait for an additional 5 minutes or use a measuring device
to test whether the voltage on the intermediate circuit is > 30 V.
1. Loosen the screw and remove the cover.
CHWIA_00003762_001_01
2. Press together the latches of the cover.

3. Remove the cover in the direction of the ar-
row.
CHWIA_00003763_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 217

Maintenance
Removing modules
4. Gently press together the latches (6) on the
module (5).
◁ The latches (6) are released from the
holes (7).
5. Remove the module (5).
6
7
6 7
5
CHWIA_00003759_001_01
Installing the frequency converter

Cooling-system adjustment
6. Use a spatula to remove old heat-transfer compound residue from the heat-transfer plates.
Note
Use solvent to remove any remaining traces of residue.
7. Check that the transfer plates are not damaged. Carefully file off or grind off any local uneven-
ness.
8. Coat the transfer plate with heat-transfer compound, evenly and over its entire surface.
Work material
Heat transfer compound
Note
Use a small paint roller instead of a paintbrush.
9. Join the frequency-converter together with the cooling plate.
10. Install the device. Proceed in reverse order as followed for removal.
Note
Use tooth-lock washers to ensure the earth connection for the heat sink.
Loading the frequency converter

11. Identify (☞ Part 4, Page222) the frequency converter.
12. Fit the frequency converter on a machine-specific basis.

Drives
13. Gently press the latches (A) on both sides of

the module (B) together.
14. Press on the module (A) until the catches (B)
engage in the openings.
CHWIA_00003768_001_01
Connecting the earth cable for the CAN mod-

ule
15. Attach the earth cable (C) to the earth ter-
minal (E) of the CAN module.
Note
Keep the earth cable (C) from the CAN
module to the frequency converter as
short as possible.
16. Connect the other end of the earth cable (C)

to the earth terminal (A).
Route the earth cable in such a manner that all cov-
ers can be correctly sealed. CHWIA_00003769_001_01
17. Insert the connector (D) of the CAN bus

cable.
18. Install the cover.
CHWIA_00003770_001_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 219

Maintenance
Configuring the frequency converter

DANGER
Life-threatening electric shock due to voltage on the intermediate circuit capacitor, al-
though main switch is switched off
▶ Work must be executed by a qualified electrician.

▶ Wait 10 minutes after disconnecting from the mains supply (discharge time).
▶ During the discharge time do not touch any components that could be energised.
▶ The LED (CHARGE) is illuminated as long as the voltage on the intermediate circuit is >
50 V. After the LED goes out, wait for an additional 5 minutes or use a measuring device
to test whether the voltage on the intermediate circuit is > 30 V.
19. The frequency converter is configured with

the switches (S1...S4) on the controller card. Off On V I
S2 S1
AI PTC
S4
SINK (NPN)
S3
SOURCE (PNP)CHWIA_00003775_001_01
DIP switch settings

Frequency con-
S1 S2 S3 S4
verter
U10 I On SINK (NPN) AI
20. After a frequency converter is replaced, it is necessary to set the baud rate and the node ad-
dress. (☞ Part 4, Page223)

Drives
8.6.3.2 Regenerating the replacement frequency converter
▶ The replacement frequency converters held in storage must be connected to a mains supply
for at least one hour every six months. This allows the internal components to regenerate them-
selves.
◁ The replacement equipment can be put into service at any time.
8.6.3.3 Read off the charge indicator and measure the intermediate circuit
1. Check whether the LED (CHARGE) is illu-

minated.
If the LED is illuminated than the voltage in

the intermediate circuit is still over 50 V DC.
▶ Wait until the LED (CHARGE) is no
longer lit.
Note CHARGE
Depending on the version, the
LED may be located at a different
place on the frequency converter.
2. Measure the residual voltage between the

terminals with the designations (-) and (+ 1)
(intermediate circuit).
Note
CHWIA_00003764_001_01
Depending on the version, these ter-
minals may appear at different places
among the set of power terminals.
3. After the LED (CHARGE) goes out, wait an

additional 5 minutes.
4. Measure the residual voltage between the
terminals with the designations (-) and (+ 1)
(intermediate circuit).
Maximum value 30 VDC
5. Compare the measured value with the max-

imum value.
◁ Do not continue working until after the
residual voltage has dropped below the
maximum value.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 221

Maintenance
8.6.3.4 Identifying the frequency converter
Sticker
The Rieter part number (1) on the attached ad-
hesive label (E) must agree with the part number
of the corresponding device in the electrical doc-
umentation.
The model designation (2) must agree with the
designation on the manufacturer’s label found on
the side of the frequency converter (3).
2
2 XX0V 3 Phase x.xx kW

Model: xxxxxxxxxxxx
1 Rieter: xxxx xxxx E
Xxxxxxxxxx
CHWIA_00003767_001_01
8.6.3.5 Assigning parameters – frequency converter T1000V
Conditions
Preparing to make the settings

2. In the line « Execute tests: » choose the «
Yes » selection.
◁ The test is started. The appropriate fre-
quency converter can be selected.
the inverter to be tested.
◁ The line with the selected inverter is
highlighted.
◁ The message « 109 Establish the con-
nection to the converter » is displayed. C7xCBAData842_D

◁ The selected frequency converter is now
supplied with power.

Drives
Setting the authorisation
ALM REV
1 DRV FOUT
6
LO
ESC
RE
2 RESET ENTER 5
RUN STOP
3 4 CHWIA_00003937_002_01
6. Activate the buttons or .

◁ "PAr" is shown
7. Confirm with the button.
◁ "A1-01" is flashing
8. Never activate the button .
◁ "XXXX" is displayed
9. Use the button to move from number to number. The number that can be edited is flashing.
10. With the buttons and set the parameter value (0002).
◁ First (End) appears briefly, then the parameter value (0002).
◁ The authorisation to alter any parameter value has now been set up.
Initialisation
12. With the button , set the parameter (A1-03).
◁ "XXXX" is displayed
Setting the baud rate

17. With the button , set the parameter (F6-36).
◁ "XX" is displayed
◁ "F6-36" is flashing
◁ The baud rate is searched automatically.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 223

Maintenance
Setting the node address

22. Determine the node address of the appropriate frequency converter.
Example: 09
Note
The node address isn't data screen 84.2, in column (Nr).
The node address is specified in the documentation for the electrical system.
23. With the button , set the parameter (F6-35).

◁ "XX" is displayed
26. Use buttons and to set the node address, for example (09).
◁ First (End) appears briefly, then the node address, for example (09)
◁ "F6-35" is flashing
◁ The frequency converter is parameterised.
▶ After the settings have been made, select "Automatic mode" in data screen 80.1.
◁ The machine prepares for operation.
8.6.4 Pneumatic system
8.6.4.1 Setting the pressure regulator
Adjust the working pressure for the card

1. Swing out the control cabinet.
◁ The pneumatic main valve is accessible.
CHWIA_00002317_002_01

Drives
2. Move the regulating screw (3) upwards.

◁ The regulating screw can be turned.
3. Check the pressure on the manometer (4) . 3
Operating pressure for the 6.0 bar
card
pressure is to low
▶ turn the regulating screw clockwise.
pressure is to high 4
▶ turn the regulating screw counter-
clockwise.
pressure is correct
▶ Press the regulating screw downward.
◁ The regulating screw is locked. CHWIA_00004392_003_01
Drain condensation water by hand

4. Turn the drain plug (5) clockwise.
◁ Condensation water is draining.
5. Turn the drain plug (5) counter-clockwise.
◁ The drain valve is close again.
5
CHWIA_00004392_002_01
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 225

Maintenance
8.7 Adjusting sensors
8.7.1 Chute
8.7.1.1 Adjusting the proximity switch – opening roller
Setting the proximity switches

1. Set distance between proximity switch (1)
and pulse generator (2) to “X”.
Distance X 2 mm
X
2
CHWIA_00001324_001_01
Checking the adjustment of the proximity switch

be executed.
3. Start the opening roll.
5. In the line « Prox. sw. PPV min: » read off
the values.
Target range 50 – 70
The difference between Min: and Max: is less

C7xCBAData832_D
than 10
The value should be in the target range
▶ The setting is correct.
The difference between Min: and Max: is

greater than 10
▶ The transducer disk is not running con-
centrically and must be replaced.
Minimum value is too low

▶ Place the proximity switch closer.

Adjusting sensors
Maximum value is too high

▶ Place the proximity switch further away.
8.7.1.2 Adjusting the proximity switch for the chute wall
1. Screw in the proximity switch (2) completely.

◁ Proximity switch (2) is on the seal (3).
2. Turn back the proximity switch (2) 1/4 turn. 1
Distance ‒ X 0.2 – 0.5 mm
3
3. Plug in the plug on the proximity switch (2).
2
CHWIA_00004028_001_01
8.7.1.3 Adjust the pressure monitoring signal.
1. Pull both hoses off of the pressure sensor.

5. In the line « Chute,pressure measuring
B23: » read off the value.
6. Without pressure differential, check and cal-
ibrate the AD converter.
AD converter value
C7xCBAData822_D
4 mA ≈ 819+20
+20
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 227

Maintenance
8.7.2 Licker-in
8.7.2.1 Adjusting the proximity switch for monitoring the licker-in speed
Note
The machine will stop producing if the speed of the monitored licker-in drops below a certain
value (blocking protection). Note the text display.

Distance X 2 mm
X
2
1
CHWIA_00001523_001_01
Check setting
3. Start the licker-in.
4. In the line « Prox. sw. PPV min: » read off the values.
The difference between Min: and Max: is less than 5

The difference between Min: and Max: is greater than 5

▶ The transducer disk is not running concentrically and must be replaced.



Adjusting sensors
8.7.2.2 Adjusting the measuring device in the feed
1. Adjust the pre-tension of the torsion rods. (☞ Part 4, Page50)

Conditions
✓ The torsion rods are tensioned.
▶ Tension chain. (☞ Part 4, Page131)
Conditions
✓ The chain is tensioned.
▶ Adjust the feed trough parallel to the feed roller. (☞ Part 3, Page49)
4. The torsion rods are pre-tensioned. (☞ Part 4, Page50)
5. The chain is tensioned. (☞ Part 4, Page131)
6. The feed trough is adjusted parallel to the feed roller. (☞ Part 3, Page49)
7. The nipping gap «B» from the feed trough to the feed roller is set. (☞ Part 3, Page48)
Conditions
✓ There must be no material between the feed roller and the feed trough.
3
5
1 4
2
1
6
X
CHWIA_00001342_001_01
▶ Set the distance «X».

Measuring device position, distance «X» 4.0 mm

13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 229

Maintenance

11. In the line « Feed scanner card B5: » read
off the value.
Standard setting 750
≤730
▶ Place the proximity switch bracket (2)
farther away from the measuring device
(1).
≥770
▶ Place the proximity switch bracket (2) C7xCBAData822_D
closer to the measuring device (1).
8.7.3 Cylinder
8.7.3.1 Adjusting the proximity switch for cylinder speed

and pulse generator (2) to “X”. 1
X
Distance X 2.0 mm
CHWIA_00001675_001_01
Checking the adjustment of the proximity switch

be executed.
3. Start the cylinder.
the values.

C7xCBAData835_D
than 5

Adjusting sensors


greater than 5


8.7.4 Card flats
8.7.4.1 Adjusting the proximity switches for monitoring the card flats.
Note
Both proximity switches detect card flats that are running askew. The machine is switched
off.
Activating the card flats drive


3. In the line « Run drive tests: » activate the
test.
◁ The test is active.
4. In the line « Target speed for flats: » set the
minimum speed.
Speed 0.10 – 0.60 m/min
C7xCBAData836_D
Starting/stopping the drive

5. Start with the START button and stop with the STOP button .
◁ In this manner the drive of the card flats can be switched on and off.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 231

Maintenance
Adjusting proximity switches for the holder
1
CHWIA_00001842_001_01
1. Use the counter-nuts to set (2) the distance (Y).

Distance Y 10 mm
2. Tighten the lock nuts.

Connection
Lock nut – proximity switch 40 N⋅m
Adjusting the switch distance
1 (B2) 2 (B8)
4 4
3 X 6 6 3
X
5 5
CHWIA_00001840_001_01
3. Move the card flat slightly (☞ Part 4, Page231).

◁ The opening (5) of a card flat (3) is positioned exactly below the proximity switches (1) and
(2).
4. Using the holders (4), adjust the switching distance «X» of the proximity switches (1) and (2).

Adjusting sensors
Switch distance (X) 5 mm
Checking the switching distance setting

5. Start the card flats drive (☞ Part 4, Page231).
6. In data screen 83.6, in the line « Monitoring flats speed B2 » and « Monitoring flats posi-
tion B8 » pay attention to the status.
For each card flat that passes the proximity switch, the status changes from "0" to "1".
▶ In this case the switching distance is OK.
The status is always "0"

▶ Reduce the switching distance.
The status is always "1"

▶ Increase the switching distance.
Checking parallel run

7. Start the card flats drive (☞ Part 4, Page231).
8. Ensure that the card flats are running mechanically parallel.
9. In data screen 83.6, in the line « Alignment of flats, B8: » read off the value.
◁ In the line « Alignment of flats, B8: » the system shows whether the left and right card
flats pass by the proximity switches simultaneously.
Displayed value is greater than +1.0 mm

▶ Move the proximity switch (2) towards the card delivery unit.
Displayed value is less than -1.0 mm

▶ Move the proximity switch (2) towards the card chute.
Checking the setting (for IGS-Top)

10. A thin metal plate is fitted to the card flat clip on the right-hand side of the machine with this
model (registration of first card flats). The LEDs must remain lit in the vicinity of this thin metal
plate.
Note
The proximity switches work in the same manner as in the model without the IGS-Top.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 233

Maintenance
8.7.5 Delivery section
8.7.5.1 Adjusting the proximity switch to monitor the doffer speed
Note
The machine will stop producing, if the doffer speed drops below a certain level (blocking
protection). Note the text display.

X
Distance X 2.0 mm
1
CHWIA_00002015_001_01
Check setting
3. Start the doffer.
4. In the line « Prox. sw. PPV min: » check the value.
Value 70 – 80
◁ The difference between Min. and Max. must not be greater than «5».
8.7.5.2 Adjusting the proximity switch – delivery speed
CHWIA_00004033_001_02

Adjusting sensors
Setting the distance to the pulse generator

Option: Coiler
▶ Set distance between proximity switch

(1) and pulse generator (2) to “X”. X
Distance (X) 0.8 mm 2 1
CHWIA_00002019_001_02
Setting the distance to the pulse generator

▶ Set distance between proximity switch

(1) and pulse generator (2) to “X”. X
Distance (X) 0.8 mm
1
Note
At proximity switch (3), the pulse
for a higher-level controller is
picked up.
3
2
CHWIA_00004157_001_01
Check setting
2. Start the doffer.
the two values.
Displayed value on the data 50 – 70
screen

than 10
C7xCBAData8311_D

greater than 10
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 235

Maintenance


C7xCBAData8311_D
8.7.5.3 Set the monitoring for the delivery rollers
5
5
Y
Y
4 4
CHWIA_00004157_002_01
1. The distance between the delivery rollers is set. (☞ Part 4, Page158)

2. Set the switching distance (Y) on both sides.
The proximity switch (4) must get switched off when the upper delivery roll is lifted, with the pulse generator (5)
by 0.25 mm.
3. Pay attention to the LED at the proximity switch (4).
Does not switch off when the upper delivery roll is lifted.
▶ Increase the switching distance (Y).
Does not switch on when the upper delivery roll is lowered.

▶ Reduce switching distance (Y).

Adjusting sensors
8.7.5.4 Calibrating the measuring device in the delivery
Option: Coiler
Work material
Gauge for calibrating the
distance measuring device
1. Adjust the disk rollers. (☞ Part 4, Page168)

Checking the measuring device of the Autoleveller in the delivery unit

1. Run the test. (☞ Part 4, Page237)
Calibration value with 0.8 mm between the disk rollers 1,288 – 1,328
If the calibration value is right:

▶ In this case the measuring device is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration value is not right:
Run the test

3. In the line « Delivery scanner card B6: » read off the value.
1
2
0.8 mm 3
4
1 2
2x0.8 mm 6
3
1 5 7 3
CHWIA_00002027_001_01
4. Pull the lever (7) upwards and slide the gauge (1), between the disk rollers (2) and (3).
◁ 0.8 mm jams between the disk rollers.
5. On the adjustment spindle, set the calibration value with the screwdriver (5).
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 237

Maintenance
1
2
0.8 mm 3
4
1 2
2x0.8 mm 6
3
1 5 7 3
CHWIA_00002027_001_01
6. Slide both gauges (1), between the disk rollers (2) and (3).
◁ 1.6 mm jams between the disk rollers.
7. On the adjustment spindle, set the calibration value with the screwdriver (5).
8. If both calibration dimensions are right. Fix the setting with the screw (6).
Connection
Clamping screw (6) 2 N⋅m
9. Remove the gauges (1).

Calibration value – minimum distance, disk rollers 200 – 400
◁ The disk rollers are at the minimum distance.
1. Check the measuring device of the Autoleveller in the delivery unit. (☞ Part 4, Page237)
2. Adjust (position) the plunger in the plunger coil. (☞ Part 4, Page239)

Adjusting sensors
8.7.5.5 Adjusting (positioning) the plunger in the plunger coil
Option: Coiler
8
2
5
9
O.K 4
7
CHWIA_00002025_001_01
1. Use the screws to loosely fix the holders (4) and (8) in place.
2. By slightly shifting the holders (4) and (8) the plunger (5) must be directed in the middle of the
plunger coil (2).
3. To check the disk rollers (9) push them down using the lever (7).
Note
The plunger (5) must not rest on the plunger coil (2). It must be in the middle of the plun-
ger coil (2). If necessary shift the holders again.
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 239

Maintenance
8.7.5.6 Setting the sliver monitoring at the delivery
2 3 4
CHWIA_00002117_001_01
1. Clean the light barrier (2) and the reflector (4) prior to making the setting.
2. Adjust the position of the light barrier (2), so that the red point of light (3) appears in the middle
of the reflector (4).
3. Activate the key for light intensity of the sliver sensor (1).
◁ The light intensity is set.
Note
Depending on the number of sliver tracks (sliver separation), several light barriers can be
installed.
The setting is made for each light barrier individually as in the description given above.
8.7.6 Suction
8.7.6.1 Adjusting the vacuum monitoring
1. Adjust the pressure sensor (B12) as follows.
B12
CHWIA_00002317_001_02

Adjusting the electric cylinder for the mote knife on the licker-in
Executing factory calibration

2. Check the jumper (2).
Must be inserted as specified in the electrical docu-
mentation.
3. Pull off the pressure hose at (P-). 3

4. Press the key (1) for 10 seconds.
◁ The LED (3) goes out.
◁ The sensor is reset to the factory set-
tings. 2
P-
CHWIA_00004098_001_01
Executing the zero point calibration

5. Press the button (1) for 3 seconds.
◁ LED (3) is illuminated until the button is released.
◁ The sensor is set to zero in depressurised status.
▽ The LED (3) flashes.
The key has been pressed longer than 5 seconds.
▶ Repeat work steps 4 and 5.
6. Reconnect the pressure hose at (P-).
Setting the switch point

Password Level 2

9. In the line « Shut-off thres. f. suc.pres.: » set the switch point.
Switching point −600 Pa
8.8 Adjusting the electric cylinder for the mote knife on the licker-in
1. After replacing the electric cylinder, always check the basic settings of the mote knife.
Do not detach the fork head on the electric cylinder.
Move to reference positions

13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 241

Maintenance
Function « Approach ref. position »

◁ The electric cylinder moves to the reference position.
Moving to target position
1
3
40 70
min . max.
CHWIA_00000862_001_01

Function « Approach setpoint pos. »
◁ The electric cylinder (1) moves to the target position.
5. Check whether the scale (4) is on the target position.
Target position 50 mm
Target position: 50 mm
In this case the target position is correct.
If there is deviation from the target position

▶ Mechanically adjust the position of the mote knife. (☞ Part 4, Page243)

Adjusting the electric cylinder for the mote knife on the licker-in
Mechanically adjust the position of the mote knife
3
1 70
40
4
5 min. max.
CHWIA_00000861_001_01
6. Move holders (5) until the marking (3) on the scale (4) corresponds to the target position on the
data screen.
Hint
The mote knife (2) is at target position.
Checking the adjustment

7. In data screen 85.7 move to the minimum discharge opening (ejection distance).
Function « Approach min. position »
The scale (4) shows 40

The scale (4) does not show 40

8. In data screen 85.7 move to the maximum discharge outlet (ejection distance).
Function « Approach max. position »
The scale (4) shows 70

The scale (4) does not show 70

13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 243

Maintenance
8.9 Coiler
8.9.1 Put the coiler into operation
Option: Coiler CBA

OR Coiler SB

2. Close all doors.
3. Switch on the machine with the main switch.
4. The display must be indicate “Ready to start”.
5. If malfunction “321 Can trolley in final position” is indicated, remedy the fault or adjust the mag-
netic limit switch respectively.
6. Set the magnetic switch B9. (☞ Part 3, Page138)
7. If malfunction “320 Slide clamping plate to final position”, move the clamping plate and the
sliver cutter to initial position.
8. Perform a can change and observe the can change procedure.
Note
A fault is displayed if the can change procedure is not properly completed.
9. Put a can on the changer after checking and initiate a can change with the preselection but-
tons.
◁ Data in the controller are thus reset to the initial point. No malfunction when starting pro-
duction.
8.9.2 Operating the coiler in test mode
Option: Coiler SB

3. In the line « Run drive tests: » activate the
test.
4. Turn key switch, SB module, to position «I».
0
2 I
CHWIA_00002918_001_01

Function check
8.10 Function check
☐ Drive units
☐ Check motors (☞ Part 4, Page216)
☐ IGS
☐ IGS-Classic – executing a function test (☞ Part 4, Page98)
☐ Check electromagnet (☞ Part 4, Page96)
☐ Check current consumption (with grinding brush contact on the card flats clothing)
☐ Check the position of the grinding brush (☞ Part 4, Page105)
☐ Suction
☐ Option: Coiler SB
Setting the exhaust-air sliders (☞ Part 4, Page190)
☐ Adjusting the suction openings on the licker-in (☞ Part 3, Page115)
☐ Option: Coiler
Pulley roll suction adjustment (☞ Part 4, Page164)
☐ Adjust the vacuum pressure for the card suction (☞ Part 3, Page108)
☐ Air ratios of card chute and card (☞ Part 3, Page107)
☐ Safety devices
☐ Function test – safety relay (☞ Part 4, Page209)
☐ Sensors
☐ Adjusting the proximity switch – opening roller (☞ Part 4, Page226)
☐ Adjusting the proximity switch – opening roller (☞ Part 4, Page226)
☐ Option: Manual licker-in knife adjustment
Adjusting the measuring device in the feed (☞ Part 4, Page229)
☐ Adjusting the proximity switch for cylinder speed (☞ Part 4, Page230)
☐ Adjusting the proximity switches for monitoring the card flats. (☞ Part 4, Page231)
☐ Adjusting the proximity switch to monitor the doffer speed (☞ Part 4, Page234)
☐ Adjusting the proximity switch – delivery speed (☞ Part 4, Page234)
☐ Option: Coiler
Calibrating the measuring device in the delivery (☞ Part 4, Page237)
☐ Option: Coiler
Adjusting (positioning) the plunger in the plunger coil (☞ Part 4, Page239)
☐ Checking the measuring device of the Autoleveller in the delivery unit (☞ Part 4, Page237)
☐ Adjusting the vacuum monitoring (☞ Part 4, Page240)
☐ Function check CAN I/O module CX408
☐ Adjusting the suction channel monitor
13.05.2016 ENG 4 / 245

Decommissioning, re-commissioning Universal Operating Manual
Maintenance
9 Decommissioning, re-commissioning
9.1 Check list – temporary decommissioning
☐ The machine is in the starting position

☐ Energy supply is interrupted
☐ Drive belts are de-tensioned
☐ Machine is protected against misuse
☐ The machine is protected against contamination and corrosion
9.2 Check list – commissioning
☐ Bring the machine into safe status

☐ Re-establish the energy supply.
☐ Remove corrosion preventative

Appendix
Material
Appendix
A Material
A.1 Operating materials and supplies
Heat transfer compound

Properties
● Characteristic Silicon-free
● Thermal conductivity 0.9 – 1.0 W/mK
NLGI 2/1 (S22) ‒ Mineral grease

Suppliers (☞ Part 4, Page247)
Properties
● Consistency class (DIN 51818) 2/1
● FZG-Test (A/8.3/90 DIN 51354) damage force level > 14
● Dripping point (DIN ISO 2176) 180 – 190 ℃
● Implementation temperature range −50 – 120 ℃
NLGI 2/1 (EP2) ‒ Semi-synthetic grease

Suppliers (☞ Part 4, Page247)
Properties
● Consistency class (DIN 51818) 2/1
● Dripping point (DIN ISO 2176) 195 – 250 ℃
● Implementation temperature range −25 – 150 ℃
Suppliers
NLGI 2/1 (EP2) ‒ Semi-synthetic grease NLGI 2/1 (S22) ‒ Mineral grease
AGIP GR MU EP 2
AVIA AVIALITH 2 EP
BP ENERGREASE LS-EP 2
CASTROL SPHEEROL EPL 2 LONGTIME HS 1.5
EXXON MOBLE MOBILUX EP 2
FUCHS URETHYN LT 60
KLÜBER MICROLUBE GBU-Y 131 ISOFLEX LDS 18 SPECIAL A
ISOFLEX NBU 15
ISOFLEX NCA 15
LAGERMEISTER LAGERMEISTER TS
OPTIMOL LONGTIME PD 2
PETRO CANADA PRECISION GENERAL PURPOSE EP 2
SHELL Gadus S2 V220 2 AEROSHELL GREASE 33
TEXACO MULTIFAK EP 2
VALVOLINE MULTIPLEX SG-2 CALBASE AR-2
13.05.2016 - ENG 4 / 247

Appendix
Material
A.2 Work material
Adjustment gauge – grinding stone, IGS-Classic
CHWIA_00001668_001_01
Brush
CHWIA_00003524_001_01

Properties
● Auxiliary equipment for installing the card flats.
CHWIA_00001819_001_01
Card gauge
Properties
CHWIA_00003588_001_01
CHWIA_00003030_001_01
Cleaning brush
Properties
● For cleaning the guide tube in the revolving plate of the coiler.
CHWIA_00002486_001_01

Appendix
Material
Compensation device
Properties
● For grinding the card flats. C 70
C 70
CHWIA_00003155_001_01

Properties
● Not included in the standard scope of delivery!
● Lift assemblies out of the machine.
●
CHWIA_0004130_001_01
Lift assemblies move in above the machine.
Gauge for calibrating the distance measuring device
CHWIA_00003288_001_01
Guide rails
Properties
● Are required for removal and installation of the licker-in group.
CHWIA_00003249_001_01
Hand scraper
CHWIA_00003163_001_01
Hand scraper with handle and clearer board
CHWIA_00004391_001_01
13.05.2016 - ENG 4 / 249

Appendix
Material
Handles
Properties
licker-in.
CHWIA_00001334_001_01
Hydraulic pump
Properties
● Is required for removal and installation of the licker-in and doffer group.
CHWIA_00003277_001_01
Installation lift
Properties
● For mounting and dismounting the feed trough, the feed roller and opening
roller in the card chute.
CHWIA_00001202_001_01
Lateral supports
Properties
● For mounting and dismounting the opening roller in the card chute.
CHWIA_00001218_001_01
Lifting device, rollers and licker-in(s)
CHWIA_00001500_001_01
Lubricating pump
Properties 2.2 3 4
● For lubrication of the drafting system.

1 2.2 3 4
CHWIA_00002839_001_01

Appendix
Material
Lubricating pump
2.2
2.3
1
CHWIA_00002627_001_01
Nippers
Properties
● Special nippers to remove the retaining clips.
CHWIA_00001828_001_01
Pedestal
Properties
● For installation and removal tasks on the card chute.
CHWIA_00001213_001_01
Plastic foil
Properties
● Protection for the surrounding parts when removing the opening roller.
CHWIA_00001196_001_01
Pliers to pull of card flats clothing strip

Properties
● Remove the clothing strip form the card flats rod ‘EasyTop’.
CHWIA_00004384_001_01
Pull-off aid
Properties
● Pull-off aid for the shaft pins of the opening roller and the feed rollers
CHWIA_00001190_001_01
13.05.2016 - ENG 4 / 251

Appendix
Material
Support
Properties
● For mounting and dismounting the feed trough in the card chute.
CHWIA_00001220_001_01
Support
● Removing card flats
CHWIA_00003523_001_01
CHWIA_00003118_001_01
Torque spanner
CHWIA_00000142_001_01
Transport trolley
Properties
● For transporting the licker-in and the doffer group. A work platform can be pro-
duced using the additional support structures.
CHWIA_00003349_001_01
Vacuum cleaner
Properties
● Not included in the standard scope of delivery!
CHWIA_00004133_001_01

Appendix
Filling quantities
B Filling quantities
Lubricating nipple – cylinder
NLGI 2/1 (EP2) ‒ Semi-synthetic grease ≈ 3 strokes
Lubrication 2 - 9
NLGI 2/1 (S22) ‒ Mineral grease Lubricate until grease escapes from the ventilation bores
of the lubrication points.
Top roller and delivery roller bearings
NLGI 2/1 (S22) ‒ Mineral grease ≈ 0.8 gr.
13.05.2016 - ENG 4 / 253

Appendix
Maintenance schedule
C Maintenance schedule
C.1 Event

Safety circuit repair Element input
Function test – safety relay 4 / Page209
Check sensors Card flat
Adjusting the proximity switches for monitoring the card flats. 4 / Page231
Cylinder
Adjusting the proximity switch for cylinder speed 4 / Page230
Doffer
Adjusting the proximity switch to monitor the doffer speed 4 / Page234
Licker-in
Option: Manual licker-in knife adjustment 4 / Page229
Adjusting the measuring device in the feed

Opening element
Adjusting the proximity switch – opening roller 4 / Page226
After all mounting of the Licker-in
licking-in clothing Installing the licker-in in the licker-in unit 4 / Page51
After all mounting of the Grinding apparatus
card flat clothing Recommendations for levelling new card flat clothings 4 / Page99
C.2 Lifetime

Lifetime-lubricated Drive
Cyclo gearbox for drive of revolving coiler plate 4 / Page35
C.3 Operating hours

every 32000 h Frequency converter
Replacing the frequency converter 4 / Page216
every 16000 h Panel
Option: Coiler CBA 4 / Page215
Adjust the hood safeguard

Preparation area machine
Check motors 4 / Page216
every 8000 h Material delivery
Replacing the stripping blades 4 / Page154
Replacing the gas pressure spring 4 / Page161
Pneumatic system
Clean condensation trap of pressure regulator 4 / Page29
every 4000 h Card flat
Adjusting the proximity switches for monitoring the card flats. 4 / Page231

Appendix

every 4000 h Cylinder
Lubricate cylinder bearings 4 / Page35
NLGI 2/1 (EP2) ‒ Semi-synthetic grease 4 / Page247
Adjusting the proximity switch for cylinder speed 4 / Page230
Doffer
Adjusting the proximity switch to monitor the doffer speed 4 / Page234
Frequency converter
Regenerating the replacement frequency converter 4 / Page221
Licker-in
Option: Manual licker-in knife adjustment 4 / Page229
Adjusting the measuring device in the feed

Adjusting the carding element in the area of the doffer 4 / Page45
Material delivery
Option: Coiler 4 / Page166
OR Non-woven tape
Installing and tensioning the cross aprons

Adjusting the distance between the cross aprons 4 / Page168
Option: Web production 4 / Page236
Set the monitoring for the delivery rollers

Adjusting the proximity switch – delivery speed 4 / Page234
Option: Coiler 4 / Page164
OR Non-woven tape
Replacing the cross apron

Opening element
Adjusting the proximity switch – opening roller 4 / Page226
Test
Testing the operating unit 4 / Page196
every 2000 h Calendar
Adjust calendar rolls

Tensioning the belt for the calendar rollers

Can plate

Option: Coiler SB 4 / Page28

Card
Cleaning and applying care agents to rubber seals 4 / Page21
Card flat
Tension belt of the card flats 4 / Page146
13.05.2016 - ENG 4 / 255

Appendix

every 2000 h Clean card flat heads 4 / Page27
Checking the deflection pulleys of the flat deflection unit 4 / Page143
Conveying element
Clean the cover trim below the feed roller 4 / Page21
Cylinder
Cleaning carding profiles 4 / Page26
Cleaning the clearer roller 4 / Page26
Clean cylinder interior 4 / Page26
Drafting system
Lubricate drafting system

Drive
Lubricating points 2 and 3 (main and intermediate shaft, left-hand side

of machine)
Lubrication points 4 and 5 (main and intermediate shafts, right-hand

side of machine)
Lubrication at lubrication points 6 to 9 (bearings of all drafting system

cylinders and calendar shaft)
Tightening the chain 4 / Page131
Frequency converter
Clean frequency converter 4 / Page28
Material delivery
Clean suction channel below the disk rollers 4 / Page25
Material feed
Cleaning the feed channel 4 / Page20
Mechanical drive
Checking and tightening toothed belts 4 / Page215
Clean belts and chains 4 / Page27
every 660 h Drive
Lubricate lubrication point 1 (bearings of the top roller and the top de-
livery roller)
every 330 h Card flat
Cleaning the area of the deflectors of the card flats 4 / Page17
Clean card flat clothing 4 / Page15

Appendix

every 330 h Cleaning unit
Cleaning the suction channel 4 / Page18
Clean clearer roller "PW1" 4 / Page18
Doffer
Cleaning a doffer 4 / Page16
Material feed
Cleaning air separator top 4 / Page14
every 165 h Calendar
Cleaning the area of the calendar rollers

Card
Option: Separate waste accumulation – licker-in 4 / Page11
Check and clean the filter box. (Only with separate disposal of the
licker-in waste)
Cylinder
Cleaning the cross-members 4 / Page12
Extraction system
Checking and cleaning all suction points 4 / Page12
Completely cleaning the machine left and right 4 / Page13
Sliver deposit

13.05.2016 - ENG 4 / 257

Index
Index
C
Chute
Opening roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Cold start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
E
EasyTop
Insert clothing strip in to card flat rod . . . 82
F
Feed plate
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Feed trough
Feed trough installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Remove the feed trough . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
I
IGS-Classic
Installing the electromagnet . . . . . . . . . 95
Installing the grinding device . . . . . . . . . 90
Installing the grinding stone . . . . . . . . . 89
Removing the grinding device . . . . . . . . 90
L
Licker-in
Adjusting carding elements . . . . . . . . . . 45
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Installing the entire unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Removing the entire unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
R
Reset password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
S
Suction unit
Differential pressure switch . . . . . . . . . 240

Contents
Contents
1 Documents with reference to the operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 1
1.1 Service Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 1
1.1.1 Measuring card flats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 1
1.1.1.1 Excel program as "attachment" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 1
1.1.1.2 Card-flat rods and slide shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 15
1.1.1.3 Levelling and sharpening the card flats clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 / 29
13.05.2016 ENG 5/I

Contents
5 / II
Service Info
1 Documents with reference to the operating manual

1.1 Service Info
1.1.1 Measuring card flats
1.1.1.1 Excel program as "attachment"
13.05.2016 ENG 5/1

Attachments
How to save attachment on local drive?
1. View this PDF in Adobe Acrobat.
2. Click on symbol “Attachments”.

< Attachment are listed on left side.
3. Click on the attachment.

< The selected attachment is highlighted blue.
4. Click on symbol “Save attachment”.

< The dialog “Extract File” appear.
5. Save the attached file on local drive.
Attachments.docx
Service Info
1.1.1.2 Card-flat rods and slide shoes
13.05.2016 ENG 5 / 15
Service-Info 320
Replaces former no. 306
Card flat rod + Slide shoe V05
Condition of card flat set by RIETER

P-DAC / F. Bernhardsgrütter
January 2015
Valid after January 01.2015

F. Bernhardsgrütter Card flat rod + Slide shoe V05 Done: 01.01.2015
P-DAC Service Info 320 – replaces No 306
Contents
1. Production of card flat rod ............................................................................................................ 3
1.1. Card flat rod ..................................................................................................................................3
1.2. Slide shoe .....................................................................................................................................3
2. Measuring and tolerances ............................................................................................................. 4

2.1. Card flat rod ..................................................................................................................................4
2.1.1. Surface for card flat clothing as aluminium .................................................................................7
2.1.2. Surface for card flat clothing with resin-coating ..........................................................................7
2.1.3. Tolerance for the card flat rod ....................................................................................................7
2.2. Slide shoe .....................................................................................................................................7
2.3. Evaluation of card flat set ..............................................................................................................9
2.3.1. Target geometry of card flat rod for C60 card (79 flats) ............................................................ 10
2.3.2. Target geometry of card flat rod for C70 EF and C70 card (99 flats) ........................................ 11
3. Reference...................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1. Card flat rod ................................................................................................................................ 12
3.2. Slide shoe ................................................................................................................................... 13
Card Flat Rod + Slide Shoe Eng V05 - 18.12.2014.Docx Page 2 of 13 Printed: 09.02.2015
1. Production of card flat rod

1.1. Card flat rod
 Three different card flat rods are in production, two for the card C70 (with a golden etiquette
(C70) and a black etiquette (C70 EF) marked) and one for the card C60. These have a
different geometry and should never be substituted for one another.
 For all card flat rods which have a surface for card flat clothing as aluminium, the reworking of
the surface is prohibited.
 A repair / a new coating is allowed only on a surface with resin-coating.
1.2. Slide shoe

The basis for the machining of the slide shoes is the surface for card flat clothing. The slide shoes
should never be changed without reworking (refers to an entire card flat set).
Torsion of raw profile rod and its head

of card flat rod (inclusive slide shoes).
The basis for the machining of the slide shoes is

the surface for card flat clothing. The machining
has to be made without card flat clothing.
Milled surfaces of slide shoe are due to the

torsion in the raw profile rod of different sizes.
2. Measuring and tolerances

The different card flat rods are delivered ex-works with different hollownesses. The hollowness
helps to compensate the thermal deflection, which occurs during carding. The thermal deflection
leads to a parallel carding gap. The different hollownesses of the card flat rods are subjected to
various tolerances which can be checked.
The hollownesses of the card flat rods were optimized on the respective machine type and
application.
In principle, for measurements, use only a measuring device which is calibrated. The
compensation by GRAF must be used (art. no. 005043261). Company RIETER recommends to
use the measuring device of company GRAF (is included in GRAF DSM 20/1 or DAM 25/1). Slide
shoes and card flat rod have to be cleaned with damp cloth, but should never get really wet
(because of rust).
91°
Contact face
R415mm
005043261
R415 mm
Compensation plate set (L+R)
2.1. Card flat rod

There are different types of card flat rods with different geometry and different surfaces for card
flat clothing.
-
0
+
Collinear Collinear
Resin-coating
Card flat rod C60 type 1
No groove.
0.0 mm (even)
Tolerance Limit +0,05mm
Card flat rod C60 type 2

No groove.
0.0 mm (even)
Card flat rod C 60 type 3

Two grooves
-0.05 mm (concave)
C60
…
+0,04 OK
+0,05
+0,06 Replace
+0,07
…
OK
Card flat rod C70 EF

Three grooves
-0.10 mm (concave)
Tolerance Limit -0,05mm
EF = extra fine yarn
…
C70 EF -0,06 OK
-0,05
-0,04
-0,03
… Replace
Card flat rod C70

One groove
-0.14 mm (concave)
Tolerance Limit -0,09mm
…
C70 -0,10 OK
-0,09
-0,08
-0,07
… Replace
2.1.1. Surface for card flat clothing as aluminium

Card flat rods which have a surface for card flat clothing as aluminium, the reworking of the
surface is prohibited because the tolerances were checked during the manufacturing process.
2.1.2. Surface for card flat clothing with resin-coating

The resin-coating surface must be faultless.
2.1.3. Tolerance for the card flat rod

If the tolerance of a card flat rod is exceeded, that means +0,06 mm and more for C60,
-0,04 mm and more for C70 EF and -0,08 mm and more for C70, the card flat rod must be
replaced.
2.2. Slide shoe

 The lifetime of the slide shoe (material-no. 10463637) is given by the wear. Once the grooves
are no longer continuously visible, the slide shoe must be replaced.
 The tolerance field (scattering) for the complete card flat set can be judged only with the
compensation plates.
Pin
91 °
Detail
R415 mm 005043261
Contact face
R415mm
 The compensation plates must be placed on a clean, precise and smooth surface of the
measuring device and aligned with all pins and then fixed. The card flat rod with the milled
slide shoes should be placed perfectly on the compensation plates, not jerking. The groove
(see detail) must be on the opposite side of the pin.
 If the new milled slide shoes still jerking, the card flat rod has been deformed and needs to be
replaced.
Pin Pin Pin Pin
005043261 Compensation
plate set (L+D)
Contact face
R415mm
 The tolerance field (scattering) for the complete set of card flat rods is for each side 0.04mm.
This has to be measured exactly at measuring point 1 and 2.
 If the tolerance is larger than 0.04 mm, we recommend to mill the slide shoes (GRAF
operating manual DKF10). To reach the tolerance, all slide shoes of the flat set should be
milled.
Measuring
point 1
16
Measuring
point 2
16
10 10
0.04mm 0.04mm
Collinear Collinear
2.3. Evaluation of card flat set

All measurement values (see Section 2.1.Card flat rod and Section 2.2.Slide shoe) should be
entered in a table (millimetre scale).
If a RIETER Excel file is used, a diagram corresponding to the measured values entered will be
created. For each card flat values left, middle and right have to be determined and entered (see
table).
2.3.1. Target geometry of card flat rod for C60 card (79 flats)
C60 type 1 C60 type 2 C60 type 3

with two grooves
 It is recommended by RIETER to use the official Excel file measurement card flat rod
C60 S7.0.xlt for the evaluation.
 The Excel file displays the identifying numbers of those card flats with measured values lying
beyond the tolerance bound in a table. For each of these card flats, the measurement values are
entered for those measurement points where the value lies beyond the tolerance bound.
Replacing or milling is required for these card flats.
2.3.2. Target geometry of card flat rod for C70 EF and C70 card (99 flats)
C70 EF with three grooves C70 with one groove
 It is recommended by RIETER to use the official Excel file measurement card flat
rod C70 EF S2.0.xlt and measurement card flat rod C70 S7.0.xlt for the
evaluation.
 The Excel file displays the identifying numbers of those card flats with measured values lying
entered for those measurement points where the value lies beyond the tolerance bound.
Replacing or milling is required for these card flats.
3. Reference
For the processing of the slide shoes and / or the repair of resin-coated surface for the card flat
clothing we recommend to use the GRAF equipment / utilities. For a replacement, only RIETER
spare parts has to be used. Each processing step must be carried out precisely according to the
GRAF operating manual.
3.1. Card flat rod

 Single card flat rods may be replaced only with the same type. It must be ensured that it
remains within the tolerance field of the complete card flat set (Point 2.2).
The card flat rod for C70 EF is marked with a black etiquette and three grooves (see detail).
 If the resin-coating of the surface for card flat clothing is damaged, it must be recoated
according to the GRAF operating manual DBA or the card flat rod has to be replaced.
 The card flat rods C60 type 1-2 are neither marked with an etiquette nor a groove.
 The card flat rod C60 type 3 is not marked with an etiquette but has two grooves (see detail).
Detail
 The card flat rod for C70 EF is marked with a black etiquette and two groove (see detail).
Detail
 The card flat rod for C70 is marked with a golden etiquette and one groove (see detail).
Detail
3.2. Slide shoe

 Single card slide shoes (material-no. 10463637) may be replaced only with the same type.
The effected card flat rod has to be visibly marked and it should not be used for the adjustment
of the distance of the card flat rod to the card cylinder.
The next time you need to re-cloth the complete card flat set, you need to mill all slide shoes of
the card flats with the recommended GRAF DKF10, so that all tolerances (Point 2.2) are
correctly reached.
 If all slide shoes need to be replaced due to wear, all slide shoes need to be milled with the
GRAF DKF10, so that all tolerances (Point 2.2) are correctly reached.
 For old version of slide shoes (material-no. 0267-0032), the replacement has to be made
according to the RIETER instruction manual
”Mounting instruction for plastic glider on Card C 60”.
Shortcut – Title of documentation of company GRAF:
ASG = Doffer Resharpening Device

ASW = Stripping Roller with Motor drive
DABM = Flat Stripping Machine
DAM = Flat Clipping Machine
DBA = Flat Glazing Equipment
DKF = Flat End Milling Machine
DSM = Flat Grinding Machine
DSW = Flat Grinding Roller
GAV = Metallic Wire Mounting Equipment
GSA = Base Grinder Device
ROD = Roller Mounting and Grinding Appliance
TSA = Traverse Wheel Grinder for the grinding of metallic wire
TSG = Traversing Resharpening Device for grinding of metallic wire
Service Info
1.1.1.3 Levelling and sharpening the card flats clothing
13.05.2016 ENG 5 / 29
Service-Info 321
Replaces former no. 307
Equalizing and grinding (sharpening) card

flat V12
P-DAC / F. Bernhardsgrütter
Valid after January 01.2015
This instruction explains how to use the stationary card flat grinding machine
(e.g. Graf DSM 20/1) and in extracts the Graf flat grinding roller (DSW).
If a Graf flat grinding roller (DSW) is available, the manual from Graf should be
consulted.
Special requirements for C70 card:
 RIETER recommend for equalizing and grinding the Graf flat grinding
roller (DSW).
Do not change the adjustment after grinding, just check the carding gap. If
the carding gap is still the same after 2-3 days of production, then it can
be adjusted according to the Rieter manual.
F. Bernhardsgrütter Card flat grinding V12 Done: 01.12.2014
P-DAC Service Info 321 – replaces no. 307
Contents
1. Re-clothing ..................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1. Measurement for card flat set ........................................................................................................3
1.2. Evaluation of card flat set ..............................................................................................................4
1.2.1. Target geometry of card flat set for C60 card (79 flats) ...............................................................5
1.2.2. Target geometry of card flat set for C70 EF card (99 flats) .........................................................6
1.2.3. Target geometry of card flat set for C70 card (99 flats) ...............................................................7
2. Equalizing of measured card flats at a grinding machine ........................................................... 8

2.1. Equalizing at a grinding machine ...................................................................................................8
2.1.1. Equalizing of individual card flats, C60 card (79 flats).................................................................9
2.1.2. Equalizing of individual card flats, C70 EF card (99 flats) ...........................................................9
2.1.3. Equalizing of individual card flats, C70 card (99 flats) ............................................................... 10
3. Equalizing and grinding of card flats on card with DSW ........................................................... 10
4. Compensation weight position ................................................................................................... 11
A-321en_Content.Pdf.Docx Page 2 of 12 Printed: 09.02.2015

1. Re-clothing
For re-clothing, a 60″ (1.5-m) clipping machine is required. A DAM 25/1 or DAM 15/1 machine from
GRAF is recommended by RIETER.
1.1. Measurement for card flat set

 As a rule, a calibrated measuring device has to be used for taking measurements. The
compensation plate set (article no. 005043261) has to be according the RIETER geometry (as
indicated in drawing). RIETER recommends using the GRAF measuring device (which is part of
the GRAF DSM 20/1, DAM 25/1 and DAM 15/1).
Pin
91 °
detailed view
005043261
R415 mm Compensation plate set (L+R)
 The compensation plates must be placed on a clean, level and smooth surface of the measuring
device, aligned with all five pins and then fixed in place.
005043261
Pin Pin

Contact face
R415mm
 All card flats have to be placed in the same room as the measuring device at constant
temperature for at least 1 hour before the measuring procedure starts. This action will ensure
temperature equilibration for all card flats.
 Appropriate gloves should be worn when handling the card flats. This will prevent heating the
card flats from the hands.
 Each re-clothed card flat has to be numbered and measured.

Set the zero point at the first card flat and measure all card flats with the identical zero point.
Measuring point: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
0 20 143 266 389 512 635 758 881 1004 1127 1250 1375 1496
-
0
+ Joint plate
Collinear Collinear
1.2. Evaluation of card flat set

All measurement values (see Section 1.1. Measurement for card flat set) should be entered in a
table (millimetre scale).
If a RIETER Excel file is used, a diagram corresponding to the measured values entered will be
created. For each card flat, 13 measurement values, with a distance of 123mm between adjacent
measurement points, have to be determined and entered (see table).

Note: Additional variations could be found caused by manufacturing of clothing, clipping machine
effects or not proper clipping.
1.2.1. Target geometry of card flat set for C60 card (79 flats)
C60 type 1 C60 type 2 C60 type 3

with two grooves
 It is recommended by RIETER to use the official Excel file measurement sheet C60
S3.0.xlt for the evaluation.

 All card flats, with measured values lying below the red line in the diagram, have to be equalized.
The Excel file displays the identifying numbers of those card flats with measured values lying
entered for those measurement points where the value lies beyond the tolerance bound;
reworking (levelling) is required for these card flats.
No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
003 0.130 0.020
005 0.010
010 0.010
1.2.2. Target geometry of card flat set for C70 EF card (99 flats)
 It is recommended by RIETER to use the official Excel file measurement sheet C70 EF

No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
053 0.010 0.010
082 0.020 0.02 0.010
1.2.3. Target geometry of card flat set for C70 card (99 flats)
 It is recommended by RIETER to use the official Excel file measurement sheet C70

No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13
003 0.010
014 0.020
018 0.040
023 0.030
062 0.060
064 0.010
2. Equalizing of measured card flats at a grinding machine

Note: If a grinding machine is not available, the re-clothed card flats have to be equalized at the
card with the GRAF flat grinding roller.
2.1. Equalizing at a grinding machine

The supporting surface of the grinding machine has to be according to the RIETER geometry (as
indicated in drawing), in order that the card flat clothing is parallel to the direction of movement of
the slide. Card flats which do not satisfy the tolerance requirement should be equalized as little as
possible. RIETER recommends using DSM 20/1 with grinding stone from GRAF.
Slide movement
Groove
Rieter geometry
(same as for compensation plate set
005031951)
Grinding roller

Contact face
R415mm
2.1.1. Equalizing of individual card flats, C60 card (79 flats)

Only equalize card flats with measurement values lying beyond the tolerance bound. The grinding
roller of the grinding machine should be set according to the card flat with the lowest tolerance
deviation. All other card flats with tolerance deviations are equalized using the same setting.
2.1.2. Equalizing of individual card flats, C70 EF card (99 flats)

In order to be able to level a concave card flat in the middle, the specified compensation weight
has to be used.
Compensation weight 005032036
positioned in the middle
3,0 Kg
Collinear Collinear
Only card flats with measurement values lying beyond the tolerance bound are to be equalized.
The grinding roller of the grinding machine should be set according to the card flat with the lowest
tolerance deviation. All other card flats with tolerance deviations are equalized using the same
setting.

2.1.3. Equalizing of individual card flats, C70 card (99 flats)

In order to be able to level a concave card flat in the middle, the specified compensation weight
has to be used.
Compensation weight 005031950
positioned in the middle
4,7 Kg
Collinear Collinear
Only card flats with measurement values lying beyond the tolerance bound are to be equalized.
The grinding roller of the grinding machine should be set according to the card flat with the lowest
tolerance deviation. All other card flats with tolerance deviations are equalized using the same
setting.
3. Equalizing and grinding of card flats at card with DSW

Details on the installation of the required tools and other relevant information can be found in the
GRAF instruction manual DSW for Rieter.
If no grinding machine is available, the re-clothed card flats have to be equalized at the card.
The card flats should be equalized at the card after 10-15 tons of production.
The cycle recommended in the Rieter operating manual should be used for the grinding of the
card flats.

4. Compensation weight position
59mm 133mm
C60 C70
-0.02 mm -0.11 mm
100mm
C70 EF
-0.07 mm

Shortcut – Title of documentation of company GRAF:
ASG = Doffer Resharpening Device

ASW = Stripping Roller with Motor drive
DABM = Flat Stripping Machine
DAM = Flat Clipping Machine
DBA = Flat Glazing Equipment
DKF = Flat End Milling Machine
DSM = Flat Grinding Machine
DSW = Flat Grinding Roller
GAV = Metallic Wire Mounting Equipment
GSA = Base Grinder Device
ROD = Roller Mounting and Grinding Appliance
TSA = Traverse Wheel Grinder for the grinding of metallic wire
TSG = Traversing Resharpening Device for grinding of metallic wire

Part 1
Publication status: 13.05.2016 / 17:00:11 - RTR-GSS\DOC-Project\P.PRP\p.prp.car.c70.004\ENG\OM-Cardsystem_universal
General
Card System
C 70 V4
Universal Operating
Manual
Part 2
Operation
Operating instructions with adjacent

content received
Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part 3
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Production
Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
back to assembly office
Matrix address: RTR-GSS\DOC-Project\P.PRP\p.prp.car.c70.004\ENG\OM-Cardsystem_universal
Part 4
Maintenance
Part 5
Additional documents
13.05.2016 ENG 10997982

OM Rieter C70 v4

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OM Rieter C70 v4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Universal Operating Manual

Document type: Universal Operating Manual

Document type: Universal Operating Manual

Card System Safety

13.05.2016 ENG 10997982

1/I Card System C 70 V4

4.2 Machine requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 / 41

1 / III Card System C 70 V4

1 Regarding the documentation

The system manual consists of five parts.

The five parts are:

1.2 Presentation convention

1.2.1 Meaning of the symbols

Hazard signs: Warnings are highlighted with this symbol.

Instruction: This is to be carried out as described.

Reaction: Describes the expected reaction of the system.

Unexpected reaction: Subsequent approach

Lubricant description: Type and amount

Tool: Description of required work aid

13.05.2016 ENG 1/1

Tip: This makes it easier.

Note: It must be observed.

1.3 Identification of the operating manual

1/2 Card System C 70 V4

2.2 Availability of the system manual

2.3 Explanation of the warning notices

13.05.2016 ENG 1/3

2.4 Technical status

2.5 Occupational safety

2.5.1 Safe work environment

2.5.1.1 Danger of slipping and stumbling

Slippery surfaces and tripping hazards can lead to serious accidents.

2.5.2 Safe work with the main switch switched off

1/4 Card System C 70 V4

2.5.3 Tasks with the main switch switched on

13.05.2016 ENG 1/5

2.5.4 Personal protective equipment

2.5.4.1 Hearing protection

▶ Use ear protection in accordance with EN 352.

2.5.4.2 Safety shoes

At the machine, there is danger of foot injury due to falling objects.

▶ Wear safety shoes in accordance with EN ISO 20345 (category S3).

2.5.4.3 Cut-resistant gloves

2.5.4.4 Chemical-resistant gloves

▶ Wear chemical-resistant nitrile gloves in accordance with EN 374.

2.5.4.5 Heat-resistant gloves

Surfaces on the machine can become hot.

▶ Wear heat-resistant gloves in accordance with EN ISO 407.

2.5.4.6 Protective goggles

Particles flying about can cause irreparable eye injury.

▶ Wear protective goggles in accordance with EN ISO 166.

1/6 Card System C 70 V4

2.5.4.7 Work clothing

Appropriate work clothing minimises the risk of accident.

2.5.5 Behaviour in an emergency

If an accident has occurred

Trigger alarm, obtain help

13.05.2016 ENG 1/7

2.6 Safety labels

0920 - 8086 10 min <60V

1 Warning sign – danger of accident

Safety labels indicate danger zones.

▶ Replace safety labels that are not discernible.